100% found this document useful (16 votes)

35K views1,884 pages

Aom R18 DHC-8 Q400

Airplane Operating Manual for Bombardier Dash8 Q400

Uploaded by

Rafid Al Islam

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (16 votes)

35K views1,884 pages

Aom R18 DHC-8 Q400

Airplane Operating Manual for Bombardier Dash8 Q400

Uploaded by

Rafid Al Islam

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

B

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

TRANSMITTAL LETTER

REVISION 18

This package contains Revision 18 to the Dash 8 Series 400 Aeroplane Operating Manual (AOM),
PSM 1-84-1, DOT METRIC dated November 21, 2016.

To bring your manual up to date, refer to each Chapter's List of Effective Pages. Remove the old chapters,
pages or Temporary Revisions (TRs) as indicated below.

Please retain this letter for record purposes and insert it in the front of the manual.

No TRs have been issued or incorporated in Revision 18.

REMOVE INSERT
Chapter 00 Chapter 00
Page(s) Page(s)
Section Section
00 LEP 1 00 LEP 1

Chapter 01 Chapter 01
Page(s) Page(s)
Section Section
01 LEP 1 01 LEP 1

Chapter 02 Chapter 02
Page(s) Page(s)
Section Section
02 LEP 1-2 02 LEP 1-2
2.4 1-2 2.4 1-2
2.15 3-16 2.15 3-14
2.17 3-4 2.17 3-4
2.17 23-28 2.17 23-28
2.17 39-40 2.17 39-40
2.17 43-44 2.17 43-44
2.17 47-48 2.17 47-48

PSM 1-84-1 - DOT - METRIC

Effectivity: **ALL Page 1
Transmittal Letter Nov 21/2016
B

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

REMOVE INSERT
Chapter 03 Chapter 03
Page(s) Page(s)
Section Section
03 LEP 1-2 03 LEP 1-2
ToC 3 3-4 ToC 3 3-4
3.1 13-14 3.1 13-14
3.1 21-22 3.1 21-22
3.1 31-36 3.1 31-36
3.1 49-50 3.1 49-50
3.1 65-72 3.1 65-72
3.2 19-20 3.2 19-20
3.3 3-4 3.3 3-4

Chapter 04 Chapter 04
Page(s) Page(s)
Section Section
04 LEP 1-5 04 LEP 1-5
4.7 1-2 4.7 1-2

Chapter 05 Chapter 05
Page(s) Page(s)
Section Section
05 LEP 1-2 05 LEP 1-2

Chapter 06 Chapter 06
Page(s) Page(s)
Section Section
06 LEP 1-12 06 LEP 1-12
6.3 41-44 6.3 41-44
6.6 7-8 6.6 7-8
6.6 11-12 6.6 11-12
6.6 21-22 6.6 21-22
ToC 6.7 1-2 ToC 6.7 1-2
6.7 1-2 6.7 1-2
6.7 23-24 6.7 23-24

PSM 1-84-1 - DOT - METRIC

Effectivity: **ALL Page 2
Transmittal Letter Nov 21/2016
BOMBARDIER

Series 400

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

PSM 1-84-1

BOMBARDIER INC.
BOMBARDIER AEROSPACE COMMERCIAL AIRCRAFT
123 GARRATT BLVD, TORONTO, ONTARIO
CANADA M3K 1Y5

Copyright ©2000 - 2015 by Bombardier Inc.

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or copied

in any form or by any means without written permission by Bombardier Inc.

The Bombardier logo and de Havilland are registered

trademarks of Bombardier Inc.
* The information, technical data and the designs disclosed herein are the exclusive property of
Bombardier, or contain proprietary rights of others and are not to be used or disclosed to others
without the written consent of Bombardier. The recipient of this document, by its retention and use,
agrees to hold in confidence the technical data and designs contained herein. The foregoing shall
not apply to persons having proprietary rights to such information, technical data or such designs to
the extent that such rights exist.*
Technical Publications B

Manual Change Request

TO: MCR FOCAL, TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS Name of Airline:
BOMBARDIER AEROSPACE
123 GARRATT BLVD. Bombardier Reference #:
TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA, M3K 1Y5
MAIL STOP: N42−25 FAX: (416) 375−4538 Date:
E−MAIL ADDRESS: [email protected]
ALL fields marked with an asterisk * are required
Contact Information
*Name: *Corporation Name: *Dept Name/Code:

Address: City: State/Province:

Postal Code / Zip: Country: *Telephone:

Mobile/Cell Phone: Fax Number: *E−Mail:

I would like to receive notification of actions on this request.

NOTE: Responses will only be sent by electronic mail.
Publication Information
*Aircraft Type: *Aircraft Model: *PSM/CSP:

Publication Name/Revision: Media Type: *Chapter/Section/Subject/Task (or) Page Block/Page Number:

Paper DVD
CD−ROM IFLY
Originator’s reference number: Impact on other programs:

*Description of Change Request:

Reason for change:

Reference data provided: Yes No Description:

NOTE: Electronic submissions of MCRs are available on www.iflybombardier.com

Oct 4/2013
AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

!"# !"#

$ %& $ %&

'! '!

( ) )

$ * '+, * '+,

- $ !"# $ !"#

* * *

. &) &)

/ . 0& ( . 0& (

) ( ) (

( '+, ( ( '+, (

&) ( &) (

'! $ '! $

( * $ * $

$ "1 $ "1 $

- * - * -

* '+! - '+! -

. !"# - !"# -

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

! "!#"

$ %% &'
( (% ) ** # +, +-./
TR Chapter/Section/
DATE
NO. Subject/Task

BOMBARDIER

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

!" "

!" #
BOMBARDIER

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

!" "

!" #
INTRO - 1
INTRODUCTION
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL

GENERAL
This Aeroplane Operating Manual (AOM) has been prepared by Bombardier Aerospace Regional Aircraft.
It is provided for the guidance of pilots when operating the DHC 8-Q400 Series airplanes.
It is in the responsibility of pilots who are qualified to operate this airplane to be entirely familiar with the infor-
mation contained in this publication to ensure that the airplane is operated at all times within the approved flight
envelope.
NOTE: It is the operator’s responsibility to keep the manual in a current status.
For clarity and simplicity, this manual is written in the imperative, in order that the information and operating
instructions may be presented in a positive sense and require no interpretation by the user.
Specific items requiring emphasis are expanded upon and ranked in increasing order of importance in the form
of a NOTE, CAUTION or WARNING.
NOTE: Expands on information which has already been provided.
CAUTION: Provides information to prevent misuse of systems which could directly affect their
function or serviceability.
WARNING: Emphasizes information of immediate flight safety importance.
Bombardier Aerospace, Regional Aircraft publications use both metric and imperial systems of measurement.
The system used in the original reference document is given first, followed by the conversion in parentheses.
If the data or procedures written in this manual are different from those given by the regulatory authority (which
controls operation of the airplane), obey the data and procedures of the regulatory authority.
NOTE: The information in this manual applies only to the Dash 8-Q400 airplanes.
The AOM consists of 4 Volumes (6 Chapters) as follows:
Volume 1 – Chapters 0 to 3
Volume 2 – Chapters 4 and 5
Volume 3 – Chapters 6.1 to 6.12
Volume 4 – Chapters 6.13 to 6.29
Each Volume is identified by the title page only.
Each Chapter is identified by the list of effective pages (LEP) and a table of content (ToC).
In the event of a disagreement the AFM is relevant.

CONTENTS
The AOM provides flight crews with necessary information concerning the airplane systems, limitations, proce-
dures and performance data. The system described may differ from the actual customized airplane.
Chapters are divided into Sub-Chapters and Subjects.
Tab dividers showing chapter titles and numbers are provided for prompt identification.
Procedures and checklists reflect Bombardier Aerospace Flight Operations Department philosophy.

PAGE IDENTIFICATION
Each manual page presents airplane series, manual designation and chapter title and number.
Page identification consists of the Chapter, Sub-Chapter, Page number, Revision status and Date of effectivity.
Arrangement of Page identification (sample):
0.0-1 = [Chapter] . [Sub-Chapter] - [Page Number]
[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011= Revision Number and Date of last issue

A normal Blank Page within a page block is identified with the phrase: THIS PAGE
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK

AOM DASH 8-Q400

INTRO - 2
INTRODUCTION
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

TABLES and DRAWINGS

Tables and drawings are identified by their titles and numbers.

Table numbers and titles are displayed at the top.
Figure numbers and titles at the bottom of the respective illustration.

MANUAL UP-DATING

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (LEP)

The LEP enables the user to determine that the manual is up-to-date, with all revisions incorporated and all
deleted pages removed.
The contents of this AOM must at all times comply with the contents as given by the LEP.

REVISION

Revisions will be distributed whenever necessary.

The revision date is shown on the revised page, even if there is only one page affected by the revision.
Revised text (added or deleted material) and / or illustrations are indicated by a vertical black line along the
outside margin of the column or page.
Changes in capitalization, spelling, punctuation or the physical location of material on a page will not be identi-
fied by a symbol.

RECORD OF REVISIONS (RoR)

The record of revisions contains revision date, date inserted and incorporator’s initials.
Revisions are issued on the assumption that previous revisions have been incorporated.

TEMPORARY REVISIONS (TR)

Sometimes it may be necessary to supply the operator with information which has not yet been processed fully.
A Temporary Revision will then be issued on a subscription basis.
It will be printed on yellow paper to distinguish these from normal revisions.
The Temporary Revisions are not incorporated in the LEP.
Every Temporary Revision has a follow-up; either a normal revision or a notice stating that the Temporary Revi-
sion has been cancelled.

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS (RoTR)

The Record of Temporary Revisions enables recording of the successive temporary revision numbers, page
numbers and issue dates, with additional columns for date inserted, date removed and incorporator’s /
remover’s initials.
The replacement page will be issued only after the available entry space has been used.

OBTAINING REVISIONS

The user has to check the pages in the manual for approval date to be the same as shown in the LEP for that
page.
If any page is missing or shows an incorrect approval date, the user has to apply for replacements to:

BOMBARDIER INC.
BOMBARDIER AEROSPACE REGIONAL AIRCRAFT
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
123 GARRATT BLVD., DOWNSVIEW, ONTARIO
CANADA M3K 1Y5

ACRONYMS - 11
ACRONYMS
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

SC/A ............................................................................................................................... Senior Cabin Attendant

SCU .................................................................................................................................... Steering Control Unit
SD .............................................................................................................................................. System Display
SEC .................................................................................................................................................... Secondary
SEL ........................................................................................................................................................... Select
SHP ....................................................................................................................................... Shaft Horse Power
SID .................................................................................................................... Standard Instrument Departure
SL, S/L ................................................................................................................................................ Sea Level
SLS .................................................................................................................................. Screen Line Selection
SM ................................................................................................................................................ Statute Mile(s)
SNOWTAM ...................................................................................... Snow Conditions Notice To Airmen (ICAO)
SOV .............................................................................................................................................. Shut-Off Valve
SPEC .............................................................................................................................................. Specification
SPI ............................................................................................................................. Special Purpose Identifier
SPLR ........................................................................................................................................................ Spoiler
SPM .............................................................................................................................. Stall Protection Module
SPS ................................................................................................................................ Stall Protection System
SPU ..................................................................................................................................... Standby Power Unit
SSCVR ........................................................................................................ Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder
SSEC ........................................................................................................... Static Source Error Compensation
SSFDR ............................................................................................................. Solid State Flight Data Recorder
STAR ........................................................................................................................... Standard Terminal Arrival
STBY, SBY ............................................................................................................................................. Standby
SU ............................................................................................................................................... Service Unit(s)
SYST ....................................................................................................................................................... System

-T-
t .................................................................................................................................................. Metric Tonne(s)
T ..................................................................................................................................... Temperature (°C or °K)
TA .................................................................................................................................. Temporary Amendment
TA .................................................................................................................................. Traffic Advisory (TCAS)
TAD .......................................................................................................................... Terrain Awareness Display
TAS .............................................................................................................................................. True Airspeed
TAT .................................................................................................................................... True Air Temperature
TC .......................................................................................................................................... Transport Canada
TCAS ............................................................................................ Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
TCF ............................................................................................................................... Terrain Clearance Floor
TCS ................................................................................................................................ Tactile Control Steering
TDR ................................................................................................... Time Delay Relay (# 3 STBY HYD Pump)
TEMP .............................................................................................................................................. Temperature
THR ..................................................................................................................................................... Threshold
TMCU .......................................................................................... Timer and Monitor Control Unit (Prop De-ice)
TMR ........................................................................................................................................................... Timer
TO, T/O ................................................................................................................................................. Take-Off
TODA ...................................................................................................................... Take-Off Distance Available
TODR ...................................................................................................................... Take-Off Distance Required
TOP ............................................................................................................................................ Take-Off Power
TORA ....................................................................................................................... Take-Off Runway Available
TORR ....................................................................................................................... Take-Off Runway Required
TPEDS ............................................................................................... Transmitting Portable Electronic Devices

AOM DASH 8-Q400

ACRONYMS - 12
ACRONYMS
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

TRANS .............................................................................................................................................. Transmitter

Accelerate-Stop The Accelerate-Stop Distance is the longer of a) and b) which are defined below:
Distance a) Accelerate-Stop Distance with an engine failure at VEF as defined below:
1. The distance necessary to accelerate the airplane from a standing start to VEF
with all engines operating plus:
2. The distance required to accelerate the airplane from VEF to V1 and continue the
acceleration for a further 1 s, assuming the critical engine fails at VEF plus:
3. The distance required to come to a full stop from the point reached at the end of
the acceleration period prescribed in paragraph a)2. above, assuming that the
pilot does not apply any means of retarding the airplane until that point is reached
and that the critical engine is still inoperative plus:
4. A distance margin equal to 2 s at V1.
b) Accelerate-Stop Distance with all engines operating as defined below:
1. The distance necessary to accelerate the airplane from a standing start to V1 and
continue the acceleration for a further 1.0 s with all engines operating plus:
2. The distance required to come to a full stop from the point reached at the end of
the acceleration period prescribed in paragraph b)1. above, assuming that the
pilot does not apply any means of retarding the airplane until that point is reached
and that all engines are still operating plus:
3. A distance margin equal to 2 s at V1.
Clearway An area beyond the runway, not less than 500 ft (152 m) wide, centrally located about
the extended centerline of the runway and under the control of the airport authorities.
The clearway is expressed in terms of a clearway plane, extending from the end of the
runway with an upward slope not exceeding 1.25%, above which no object nor any ter-
rain protrudes.
However, threshold lights may protrude above the plane if their height above the end of
the runway is 26 in (66 cm) or less and if they are located to each side of the runway.
(the clearway in no instance may be more than one half the runway length as required
by the relevant operating regulation)
Wet Runway A runway is considered as wet when there is sufficient moisture on the runway surface
to cause it to appear reflective, but without significant areas of standing water.
Take-off Field The Take-off Run required is equal to the Take-off Distance required.
Lengths on Wet
Runway
Take-off Path The Take-off Path begins from a standing start and ends at 1500 ft above the take-off
surface or at the point where transition from take-off to enroute configuration is com-
pleted, whichever is higher.
Take-off Flight Path The Take-off Flight Path begins at the end of the take-off distance and at a height of 35
ft above the take-off surface and ends at 1500 ft above the take-off surface, or at the
point where transition from take-off to enroute configuration is completed, whichever is
higher.
Net Take-off Flight The Net Take-off Flight Path is the actual take-off flight path diminished by a gradient of
Path climb (or equivalent reduction in acceleration along that part of the take-off flight path at
which the airport is accelerated in level flight) of 0.8%.
Land Immediately Land at the Nearest Suitable Airport that offers sufficient runway Landing Distance
at the Nearest Available and if required, emergency services to support the emergency or abnormality.
Suitable Airport
Land at the The airplane may continue to the destination airport or the nearest airport where main-
Nearest Suitable tenance services are available.
Airport
Maintenance “Next Flight” is referring to the immediate or imminent Take-Off after discovery
Action Required
Prior to Next Flight

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 0 00 LEP - Page 1

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016

00 - Effective Pages
1 21 Nov 2016

00 - Contents
ToC 0-1 30 Jan 2015

Chapter 0
0.0-1 31 May 2011
0.1-1 31 May 2011
0.1-2 31 May 2011
0.1-3 31 May 2011
0.2-1 31 May 2011
0.3-1 31 May 2011
0.4-1 31 May 2011
0.5-1 31 May 2011
0.5-2 31 May 2011
0.6-1 31 May 2011
0.6-2 31 May 2011
0.7-1 07 Mar 2016

AOM DASH 8-Q400 DOT

T H IS PA G E

INTE NTIONA LLY

L EF T

BLANK
CHAPTER 0 ToC 0-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

- TABLE OF CONTENTS -

0.0 GENERAL INFORMATION and UNITS OF MEASUREMENT .............................................. 0.0-1

0.0.1 General Information of Measurement used in the AOM ......................................................... 0.0-1

0.1 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT – CONVERSION TABLES ...................................................... 0.1-1

0.1.1 General Conversion Tables .................................................................................................... 0.1-1

0.1.2 Temperature - Conversion Tables ........................................................................................... 0.1-2

0.1.3 Calculation of ISA Temperature .............................................................................................. 0.1-3

0.1.4 Conversion of Climb / Descent Gradient ................................................................................ 0.1-3

0.2 DIMENSIONS OF DHC 8-Q400 SERIES ............................................................................... 0.2-1

0.3 PLAN VIEW DHC 8-Q400 SERIES ........................................................................................ 0.3-1

0.4 AIRCRAFT DOORS AND DIMENSIONS ............................................................................... 0.4-1

0.5 FUSELAGE CROSS SECTION ............................................................................................. 0.5-1

0.6 CONVERSION OF REPORTED WIND TO HEAD / TAILWIND AND CROSSWIND ............. 0.6-1

0.7 CERTIFICATED NOISE LEVELS .......................................................................................... 0.7-1

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 0 0.0-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.0 GENERAL INFORMATION AND UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

0.0.1 General Information of Measurement used in the AOM

If not otherwise indicated in this manual the following dimensional units are used:
Masses (metric) kilogram or metric tons
Weights (imperial) lb
Distance - short centimeters or meters (inches or feet - imperial)
- airway NM
Altitude feet
Flight Levels feet/100
Torque %
Fuel flow kg per hour (lb per hour - imperial)
Fuel loads kilogram (lb - imperial)
Brake energy 106 ft lbs
Pressure psi
Speeds knots
Vertical speeds ft/min (fpm)
Temperature degrees Celsius (o C)
Time hours
minutes
seconds

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 0 0.1-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.1 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT – CONVERSION TABLES

0.1.1 General Conversion Table

LB into KG M
lb x 0.4536 = kg A
S
S
KG into LB E
kg x 2.2045855 = lb
S

INCHES into CENTIME-

inches x 2.54 = centimeters
TERS
D
I
FEET into METERS S
feet x 0.3048 = meters
T
A
METERS into FEET N
metersx 3.2808 = feet C
E
S
NM into KM
NM x 1.852 = km

LITERS into KG
liters x 0.796 = kg
(Jet A-1/15°C)

LITERS into LB
liters x 1.7547 = lb
(Jet A-1/15°C)

US Gallons into LITERS V

US Gallons x 3.7853= liters O
L
U
M
KG into LITERS E
kg x 1.2565 = liters S
(Jet A-1/15°C)

LB into LITERS
lb x 0.57 = liters
(Jet A-1/15°C)

CU feet (ft3)
ft3 x 0.0283168 = m3

A
square feet (ft2) R
ft2 x 0.09290304 = m2 E
A

AOM DASH 8-Q400

0.1-2 CHAPTER 0
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

0.1.2 Temperature – Conversion Tables

TEMPERATURE
°C °F °C °F °C °F °F °C °F °C °F °C
-60 -76 -19 -2.2 22 71.6 140 60 59 15.0 -22 -30
-59 -74 -18 -0.4 23 73.4 138 58.8 58 14.4 -24 -31.1
-58 -72 -17 1.4 24 75.2 136 57.7 56 13.3 -26 -32.2
-57 -70 -16 3.2 25 77.0 134 56.7 54 12.2 -28 -33.3
-56 -69 -15 5.0 26 78.8 132 55.6 52 11.1 -30 -34.4
-55 -67 -14 6.8 27 80.6 130 54.4 50 10.0 -32 -35.6
-54 -65 -13 8.6 28 82.4 128 53.3 48 8.9 -34 -36.7
-53 -63 -12 10.4 29 84.2 126 52.2 46 7.8 -36 -37.8
-52 -62 -11 12.2 30 86.0 124 51.1 44 6.7 -38 -38.9
-51 -60 -10 14.0 31 87.8 122 50.0 42 5.6 -40 -40.0
-50 -58 -9 15.8 32 89.6 120 48.8 40 4.4 -42 -41.1
-49 -56 -8 17.6 33 91.4 118 47.8 38 3.3 -44 -42.2
-48 -54 -7 19.4 34 93.2 116 46.7 36 2.2 -46 -43.3
-47 -52 -6 21.2 35 95.0 114 45.6 34 1.1 -48 -44.4
-46 -51 -5 23.0 36 96.8 112 44.4 32 0.0 -50 -45.6
-45 -49 -4 24.8 37 98.6 110 43.3 30 -1.1 -52 -46.7
-44 -47 -3 26.6 38 100.4 108 42.2 28 -2.2 -54 -47.8
-43 -45 -2 28.4 39 102.2 106 41.1 26 -3.3 -56 -48.9
-42 -44 -1 30.2 40 104.0 104 40.0 24 -4.4 -58 -50.0
-41 -42 0 32.0 41 105.8 102 38.9 22 -5.6 -60 -51.1
-40 -40.0 1 33.8 42 107.6 100 37.8 20 -6.7 -62 -52.2
-39 -38.2 2 35.6 43 109.4 98 36.7 18 -7.8 -64 -53.3
-38 -36.4 3 37.4 44 111.2 96 35.6 16 -8.9 -66 -54.4
-37 -34.6 4 39.2 45 113.0 94 34.4 14 -10.0 -68 -55.6
-36 -32.8 5 41.0 46 114.8 92 33.3 12 -11.1 -70 -56.7
-35 -31.0 6 42.8 47 116.6 90 32.2 10 -12.2 -72 -57.8
-34 -29.2 7 44.6 48 1187.4 88 31.1 8 -13.3 -74 -58.9
-33 -27.4 8 46.4 49 120.2 86 30.0 6 -14.4 -76 -60.0
-32 -25.6 9 48.2 50 122.0 84 28.9 4 -15.6
-31 -23.8 10 50.0 51 123.8 82 27.8 2 -16.7
-30 -22.0 11 51.8 52 125.6 80 26.7 0 -17.8
-29 -20.2 12 53.6 53 127.4 78 25.6 -2 -18.9
-28 -18.4 13 55.4 54 129.2 76 24.4 -4 -20.0
-27 -16.6 14 57.2 55 131.0 74 23.3 -6 -21.1
-26 -14.8 15 59.0 56 132.8 72 22.2 -8 -22.2
-25 -13.0 16 60.8 57 134.6 70 21.1 -10 -23.3
-24 -11.2 17 62.6 58 136.4 68 20.0 -12 -24.44
-23 -9.4 18 64.4 59 138.8 66 18.9 -14 -25.6
-22 -7.6 19 66.2 60 140.0 64 17.8 -16 -26.7
-21 -5.8 20 68.0 62 16.7 -18 -27.8
-20 -4.0 21 69.8 60 15.6 -20 -28.9
°C → °F °F → °C

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 0 0.1-3
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.1.3 Calculation of ISA Temperature

Calculation of ISA temperature (rule of thumb):

15 - (feet/1000) x 2 + ISA temp in oC

or:

15 - (flight/10) x 2 + ISA temp in oC

0.1.4 Conversion of Climb/Descent Gradient

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 0 0.2-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.2 DIMENSIONS OF DHC 8-Q400 SERIES

Wing Span = 28.42 m (93 ft 3 in)

Fuselage Length = 31.04 m (101 ft 10 in)
Total Length = 32.83 m (107 ft 9 in)
Approx Total Height = 8.34 m (27 ft 4 in)
Distance main wheels to nose wheel = 13.94 m (45 ft 9 in)
Distance outer main wheel to outer main wheel = 9.52 m (31 ft 9 in)
Propeller clearance from ground = ~ 0.98 m (38.67 in)
Distance propeller tips to fuselage = 1.10 m (43.31 in)
Propeller diameter = 4.11 m (13 ft 6 in)
Height of wing tips above ground = ~ 3.92 m (12 ft 10 in)
Fuselage width = 2.69 m (106 in)
Height of cabin floor above ground = 1.16 m (45.76 in)
Interior fuselage width
• ground = 2.03 m (80.0 in)
• max = 2.51 m (99.0 in)
Cabin height = 1.95 m (77.0 in)
Aisle width (standard) = 0.51 m (20.0 in)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 0 0.3-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.3 PLAN VIEW DHC 8-Q400 SERIES

93ft 3in.
(28.42m)
30ft 5in.
(9.27m)
13ft 6in.
(4.11m)

25ft 8in.*
(7.81m)
12ft 10in.*
(3.92m) 38.67in.* DIHEDRAL 2.5
o
(98.22cm)
43.31in.
(1.10m)
28ft 10in.
(8.80m)

NOTE
8ft 2in.
(2.48m) * Dimensions with respect to ground
reference line are approximate and
will vary with aeroplane configuration
and loading conditions.

12ft 4in.
(3.76m)

36ft 10in.
(11.22m)

10ft 9in.*
(3.28m) 27ft 4in.*
(8.34m)

45.94in.* 48.98in.* GROUND 60.85in.* 60.83in.*

(1.17m) (1.24m) REFERENCE LINE (1.55m) (1.55m)
101ft 10in.
(31.04m)
107ft 9in.
(32.83m)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 0 0.4-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.4 AIRCRAFT DOORS AND DIMENSIONS

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 0 0.5-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.5 FUSELAGE CROSS SECTION

AOM DASH 8-Q400

0.5-2 CHAPTER 0
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

FUSELAGE CROSS SECTION (NEXT GEN INTERIOR)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 0 0.6-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

0.6 CONVERSION OF REPORTED WIND TO HEAD/TAILWIND AND CROSSWIND

AOM DASH 8-Q400

0.6-2 CHAPTER 0
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

CONVERSION OF REPORTED WIND TO HEAD/TAILWIND AND CROSSWIND (cont’d)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 0 0.7-1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

0.7 CERTIFICATED NOISE LEVELS

Certificated noise levels at the following measurement points for the applicable Gross Mass / Weight version:

CERTIFICATED EFFECTIVE PERCEIVED NOISE LEVELS

GROSS MASS / WEIGHT
[EPNdB]
VERSION
FLYOVER LATERAL APPROACH
BASIC:
77.1 84.1 94.9
MTOW: 27987 kg (61700 lb)
(Flap 5°) (Flap 5°) (Flap 15°)
MLW: 27442 kg (60500 lb)
INTERMEDIATE:
78.0 84.0 94.8
MTOW: 28998 kg (63930 lb)
(Flap 5°) (Flap 5°) (Flap 15°)
MLW: 28009 kg (61750 lb)
HIGH:
78.3 84.0 94.8
MTOW: 29257 kg (64500 lb)
(Flap 5°) (Flap 5°) (Flap 15°)
MLW: 28009 kg (61750 lb)
ENHANCED HIGH:
78.6 84.0 94.8
MTOW: 29574 kg (65200 lb)
(Flap 5°) (Flap 5°) (Flap 15°)
MLW: 28123 kg (62000 lb)

For more detailed certificated noise levels information, see Sub-Section 5.1 of the AFM.

[with MS 4-459409 Incorporated] the certified noise levels at the following measurement points for the Basic
Gross Mass / Weight are as follows:

Aircraft MTOW / MLW Noise Limits Measured Levels

Phase of Flight
Configuration [kg] [lb] [EPNdB] [EPNdB]
FLYOVER 25991 57300 89.0 75.6
BASIC LATERAL 25991 57300 94.0 84.0
APPROACH 25991 57300 98.0 95.2

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 01 LEP - Page 1

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016

01 - Effective Pages
1 21 Nov 2016

01 - Contents
ToC 1-1 30 Jun 2016
ToC 1-2 30 Sep 2014

Chapter 1
1.1-1 31 May 2011
1.2-1 31 May 2011
1.3-1 31 May 2011
1.4-1 31 May 2011
1.5-1 07 Mar 2016
1.5-2 07 Mar 2016
1.6-1 31 May 2011
1.7-1 31 May 2011
1.8-1 30 Jun 2016
1.8-2 30 Jun 2016
1.8-3 30 Jun 2016
1.9-1 30 Jun 2016
1.9-2 30 Jun 2016
1.10-1 31 May 2011
1.10-2 31 May 2011
1.10-3 31 May 2011
1.10-4 31 May 2011
1.10-5 31 May 2011
1.10-6 31 May 2011
1.10-7 31 May 2011
1.10-8 31 May 2011
1.11-1 31 May 2011
1.11-2 30 Jan 2015
1.11-3 30 Jan 2015
1.11-4 31 May 2011
1.11-5 05 Dec 2011
1.11-6 13 Sep 2013
1.11-7 13 Sep 2013
1.11-8 30 Jan 2015
1.11-9 30 Sep 2014
1.11-10 30 Jan 2015
1.11-11 30 Sep 2014
1.11-12 07 Mar 2016
1.11-13 30 Sep 2014

AOM DASH 8-Q400 DOT

T H IS PA G E

INTE NTIONA LLY

L EF T

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 ToC 1-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016

- TABLE OF CONTENTS -

1.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................... 1.1-1

1.2 CERTIFICATION STATUS ..................................................................................................... 1.2-1

1.3 PASSENGER SEATING CONFIGURATION ......................................................................... 1.3-1

1.3.1 Maximum number of passenger seats .................................................................................... 1.3-1
1.3.2 Maximum number of passengers on board ............................................................................ 1.3-1
1.3.3 Maximum number of infants ................................................................................................... 1.3-1

1.4 CREW COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................... 1.4-1

1.4.1 Minimum Flight Crew .............................................................................................................. 1.4-1
1.4.2 Crew Seats ............................................................................................................................. 1.4-1

1.5 MASS / WEIGHT and CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS ......................................................... 1.5-1

1.5.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 1.5-1
1.5.2 Maximum Allowable Gross Masses / Weights ........................................................................ 1.5-1
1.5.3 Mean Aerodynamic Chord (MAC) and Balance Limits ........................................................... 1.5-2

1.6 SPEED LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ 1.6-1

1.7 MANEUVERING LIMIT LOAD FACTORS ............................................................................. 1.7-1

1.8 OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS and INFORMATION ............................................................. 1.8-1

1.8.1 Wind Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 1.8-1
1.8.2 Temperature Limitations ......................................................................................................... 1.8-2
1.8.3 Take-off Power Setting Limitation ........................................................................................... 1.8-2
1.8.4 Maximum Operating Altitude .................................................................................................. 1.8-2
1.8.5 Maximum Slope for Take-off and Landing .............................................................................. 1.8-2
1.8.6 Maximum Glide Slope Angle for Cat II Approaches ............................................................... 1.8-2
1.8.7 Eye to Wheel Path and ILS to Wheel Path Distances ............................................................ 1.8-2
1.8.8 Adverse Weather Operation ................................................................................................... 1.8-3
1.8.9 Airframe Contamination .......................................................................................................... 1.8-3
1.8.10 Baggage / Cargo Compartment Limitations ............................................................................ 1.8-3

1.9 GROUND OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS and INFORMATION ............................................ 1.9-1

1.9.1 Minimum Turning Radius ........................................................................................................ 1.9-1
1.9.2 Line-up Losses ....................................................................................................................... 1.9-1
1.9.3 Eye to Ground and ILS to Ground Distances ......................................................................... 1.9-1
1.9.4 Minimum Runway Width ......................................................................................................... 1.9-2
1.9.5 Aircraft Classification Number / Load Classification Number (ACN / LCN Values) ................ 1.9-2

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

ToC 1-2 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 12] 30 SEP 2014 LIMITATIONS

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

1.10 PERFORMANCE LIMITATIONS .......................................................................................... 1.10-1

1.10.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 1.10-1

1.10.2 Flap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 1.10-1
1.10.3 Operation with Landing Gear Extended ................................................................................ 1.10-1
1.10.4 Reduced Power Take-off ....................................................................................................... 1.10-1
1.10.5 Take-off and Landing with Bleed “ON” .................................................................................. 1.10-2
1.10.6 Operation with Inoperative Nosewheel Steering ................................................................... 1.10-2
1.10.7 Take-off with Maximum Take-off Power and Uptrim Disabled ............................................... 1.10-2
1.10.8 Operation with 32 in Tires ...................................................................................................... 1.10-2
1.10.9 Operation with Inoperative Flight Spoilers in Ground Mode .................................................. 1.10-3
1.10.10 Operation with 10 min Maximum Take-off Power .................................................................. 1.10-3
1.10.11 Noise Abatement Procedures - Landing with 850 RPM ........................................................ 1.10-3
1.10.12 Operation in Tailwinds Between 10 and 20 kt ....................................................................... 1.10-4
1.10.13 Operation on Contaminated Runways with Measured Friction Values ................................. 1.10-4
1.10.14 Operation with Inoperative Anti-Skid Brake Control System.................................................. 1.10-5
1.10.15 Steep Approach and Landing ................................................................................................ 1.10-6
1.10.16 Take-off with Bleed ON ......................................................................................................... 1.10-7
1.10.17 Operation from Unpaved / Gravel Runways ......................................................................... 1.10-7
1.10.18 Restricted Operation from Unpaved / Gravel Runways ........................................................ 1.10-8
1.10.19 Take-off into Icing Conditions to 1000 ft AGL with
REF SPEEDS Switch OFF ................................................................................................... 1.10-8

1.11 SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................ 1.11-1

1.11.1 Airspeed Indicators ............................................................................................................... 1.11-1

1.11.2 Altimeters .............................................................................................................................. 1.11-1
1.11.3 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) / Static Air Temperature (SAT) Relationship ....................... 1.11-1
1.11.4 Power Plant Limitations ......................................................................................................... 1.11-2
1.11.5 APU Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 1.11-8
1.11.6 Fuel Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 1.11-9
1.11.7 Air Conditioning and Pressurization .................................................................................... 1.11-11
1.11.8 Electrical Systems ............................................................................................................... 1.11-11
1.11.9 Landing Gear and Flap Systems ......................................................................................... 1.11-11
1.11.10 Wheel Brake Cooling Systems ............................................................................................ 1.11-11
1.11.11 Airframe Ice Protection ........................................................................................................ 1.11-11
1.11.12 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) ............................................................................ 1.11-12
1.11.13 Avionics ............................................................................................................................... 1.11-12
1.11.14 Flight Management System (FMS) ..................................................................................... 1.11-12
1.11.15 Data Link System ................................................................................................................ 1.11-13
1.11.16 Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) ................................................... 1.11-13

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.1-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.1 INTRODUCTION

Chapter 1 contains all relevant type certificate and operational limitations for the operation of the Dash 8-Q400
Series. If any deviation between the information given in this chapter and Section 2 of the AFM should be
observed, the latter manual shall take precedence.

As far as instrument markings are concerned, the following interpretation shall apply:

GREEN = Normal operating range

AMBER = Caution range

RED = Limit of operation

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 1.2-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.2 CERTIFICATION STATUS

The Dash 8-Q400 Series is certified under the airworthiness regulations of JAR 25 (including change 14), JAR-
AWO (change 1 plus orange paper AWO 91/1) and FAR 25 for the following types of operation:

IFR / VFR day and night

Flights in icing conditions

CAT II operation (optional)

Furthermore, the nav-equipment meets the requirements for RNP 5 (B-RNAV).

The airplane also meets the noise limitations of JAR 36/FAR 36 and the exhaust emission requirements of JAR
34/FAR 34.

The airplane is also certified for ditching provided the required safety equipment as specified under the appli-
cable JARs/FARs is installed.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 1.3-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.3 PASSENGER SEATING CONFIGURATION

1.3.1 Maximum number of passenger seats

The maximum approved passenger seating capacity is 80 (with the respective approved interior).
The airplane cabin configuration shown is fitted with 78 seats (see Figure 1.1).

BAGGAGE DOOR
24.00 in. W x 54.00 in. H
FORWARD
BAGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
G6 GALLEY
TYPE II/III EXIT SERVICE DOOR/TYPE I EXIT
20.20 in. W x 56.00 in. H 24.00 in. W x 54.00 in. H
LAVATORY NO.2
ATTENDANT G3 GALLEY
102 (ROW 2R)
SEAT

D
C
ROW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B
A

70 103 133 163 193 223 253 283 313 343 373 403 433 463 493 523 553 583 613 643
WARDROBE
PASSENGER C.G. (in.) OPTIONAL
ENTRY
NO.1 STAIRS
ATTENDANT
PAX DOOR/TYPE I EXIT
SEAT
24.00 in. W x 65.00 in. H
AIRSTAIR/TYPE I EXIT
30.00 in. W x 65.00 in. H

Figure 1.1. Cabin Configuration - 78 Pax at 30 inch Pitch

NOTE: The above cabin configuration is a “typical” layout. Please refer to the Weight and Balance
Manual, PSM 1-84-8 or PSM 1-84-8M, for your airplane’s specific cabin configuration.

1.3.2 Maximum number of passengers on board

The actual number of passengers – excluding infants – shall not exceed the number of serviceable seats pro-
vided with seat belts and the number of life vests – when required under JAR-OPS 1.825/FAR 121.

1.3.3 Maximum number of infants

An infant may be seated on the knee of an adult. The number of infants carried is however limited to the num-
ber of available infant’s life vests – should life vests be required as per JAR-OPS 1.825/FAR 121.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 1.4-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.4 CREW COMPOSITION

1.4.1 Minimum Flight Crew

For commercial operations the minimum flight deck crew shall consist of a pilot qualified as a captain/com-
mander and a second pilot qualified as a first officer.
For passenger carrying operations a minimum of two qualified cabin attendants are required.

1.4.2 Crew Seats

Two pilot seats and one observer seat are provided in the flight compartment.
One forward cabin attendant seat is provided in the forward cabin section and one aft cabin seat is provided in
the rear cabin section. An optional third cabin attendant seat, in the aft cabin section, may be available with the
applicable interior.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 1.5-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

1.5 MASS / WEIGHT and CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS

1.5.1 General

The mass / weight limits for take-off and for landing as shown under Sub-Chapter 1.5.2 are structural limits and
may be further restricted by performance requirements (see individual airport / runway performance charts).

1.5.2 Maximum Allowable Gross Masses / Weights

Basic Intermediate Enhanced

High Gross
Mass / Weight Gross Gross High Gross
[MS 4-201539] [MS 4-459409] [MS 4-308807] [MS 4-308907] [MS 4-309238]
Maximum 28077 kg 26082 kg 29089 kg 29347 kg 29665 kg
Ramp (61900 lb) (57500 lb) (64130 lb) (64700 lb) (65400 lb)
Maximum 27987 kg 25991 kg 28998 kg 29257 kg 29574 kg
Take-off (61700 lb) (57300 lb) (63930 lb) (64500 lb) (65200 lb)
Maximum 27442 kg 25991 kg 28009 kg 28009 kg 28123 kg
Landing (60500 lb) (57300 lb) (61750 lb) (61750 lb) (62000 lb)
Maximum 25174 kg 25174 kg 25855 kg 25855 kg 26308 kg
Zero Fuel (55500 lb) (55500 lb) (57000 lb) (57000 lb) (58000 lb)
Minimum
14403 kg
Structural
(31753 lb)
Design

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.5-2 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 LIMITATIONS

1.5.3 Mean Aerodynamic Chord (MAC) and Balance Limits

The certified limits for the MAC are:

Forward Aft
Mass / Weight
Limit Limit
Up to 24040 kg
13.8% 36%
(53000 lb)
27987 kg
16.6% 36%
(61700 lb)
28998 kg
17.3% 36%
(63930 lb)
29257 kg
17.4% 36%
(64500 lb)
29574 kg
17.7% 36%
(65200 lb)

[with MS 4-459409 Incorporated] the certified limits for the MAC are:

Forward Aft
Mass / Weight
Limit Limit
Up to 24040 kg
13.8% 36%
(53000 lb)
25991 kg
15.2% 36%
(57300 lb)

NOTES: 1. If these Center of Gravity limits are met with the landing gear down, then safe limits in flight
are automatically achieved.
2. The maximum aft limit is 20% MAC for operations with one inoperative stall warning and / or
stick pusher system.

To compensate for index-system associated errors (e.g. using one arm for more seat rows or moment changes
caused by cabin attendants or passengers) an operational envelope is restricting the certified limits.

This operational envelope is printed on the load & trim sheet.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.6-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.6 SPEED LIMITATIONS

NOTE: The airspeed limitations apply to all masses (weights) up to 29,574 kg (65,200 lb) gross
weight, unless otherwise stated.

Type of Speed Limitations Limiting Speed

VMCG - flaps 15° - 89 KCAS
- flaps 10° - 89 KCAS
- flaps 5° - 89 KCAS
- flaps 0° - 101 KCAS
VMCA - flaps 15° - 91 KCAS
- flaps 10° - 95 KCAS
- flaps 5° - 98 KCAS
- flaps 0° - 113 KCAS
VMCL - flaps 35° - 92 KCAS
- flaps 15° - 96 KCAS
- flaps 10° - 99 KCAS
- flaps 5° - 100 KCAS
NOTE: VMO varies linearly between the given altitudes.
VMO - 0 - 8000 ft. - 245 KIAS
- at 10000 ft. - 282 KIAS
- at 18000 ft. - 286 KIAS
- at 20000 ft. - 275 KIAS
- at 25000 ft. - 248 KIAS
VFE - flaps 5° - 200 KIAS
- flaps 10° - 181 KIAS
- flaps 15° - 172 KIAS
- flaps 35° - 158 KIAS
VLO 200 KIAS
VLE 215 KIAS
Alternate Gear Extension Speed 185 KIAS
VRA 210 KIAS
VMAX TIRE 182 knots ground speed
VA 204 KIAS
CAUTION
Rapid and large alternating control inputs, especially in combination with
large changes in pitch, roll or yaw (e.g. large sideslip angles), may result
in structural failure at any airspeed, including below VA.

Aquaplaning Speeds (assumption: main gear tire pressure 141 psi for 34 inch tire)

VAQUAPLANING for T/O = 107 kts GS

VAQUAPLANING for Landing = 92 kts GS

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 1.7-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.7 MANOEUVERING LIMIT LOAD FACTORS

The following maneuvering limit load factors limit the permissible angle of bank in turns and limit the severity of
pull-up and push-over maneuvers.

Flaps retracted: + 2.5 g

- 1.0 g

Flaps extended: + 2.0 g

0.0 g

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 1.8-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016

1.8 OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS and INFORMATION

1.8.1 Wind Limitations

1.8.1.1 Maximum Crosswind

Runway Conditions
Contaminated
Conditions
Dry / Wet WED 3 mm WED greater than Wet Ice
Compacted Snow
(0.125 in) or less 3 mm (0.125 in) Braking Action Poor
Take-off 32 kt 14 kt 14 kt 20 kt 0

Landing 32 kt 14 kt 14 kt 20 kt 0
CAT II Landing
- coupled 18 kt 14 kt 14 kt 18 kt 0
- manual 10 kt 10 kt 10 kt 10 kt 0

1.8.1.2 Maximum Tailwind

Runway Conditions
Conditions Ice and Wet Ice
Dry / Wet Contaminated
Braking Action Poor
Take-off Flap 5° 10 kt 10 kt 0

Take-off Flap 10° / 15° 10 kt * 10 kt 0

Landing Flap 10° / 15° 10 kt 10 kt 0

Landing Flap 35° 10 kt * 10 kt 0

CAT II Landing
10 kt 10 kt 0
(Flap 10° / 15° only)
Steep APPR Landing
5 kt 5 kt 0
(Flap 35° only)

* Limits may be increased, when AFM Supplement 3 (Operation In Tailwinds Between 10 and 20 kt)
is applicable

1.8.1.3 Maximum Headwind (CAT II Landing)

Maximum Headwind
CAT II Landing
- coupled 24 kt
- manual 10 kt

NOTE: Additional operating regulations and / or stricter limits, or as set forth by the operator, may
result in limits lower than those given in Sub-Chapters 1.8.1.1 and 1.8.1.2

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.8-2 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016 LIMITATIONS

1.8.2 Temperature Limitations

MAX ambient temperature = + 50°C or ISA + 35°C, whichever is lower.

MIN ambient temperature = - 54°C

CAUTION: The cold weather operations procedures provided in the Ramp Servicing Manual
PSM 1-84-2S, must be observed prior to starting engines on the ground after the aircraft
is parked in excess of 3 h in temperatures of - 15°C or lower.

1.8.3 Take-off Power Setting Limitation

Setting take-off power prior to brake release, with nose of the airplane more than 45° out of wind, is prohibited
for wind speeds greater than 8 kt (measured at a height of 10 m).

1.8.4 Maximum Operating Altitude

Maximum operating altitude = 25000 ft.

Maximum operating altitude for take-off and landing = 10000 ft.

1.8.5 Maximum Slope for Take-off and Landing

Maximum runway slopes approved for take-off and landing are:

+ 2% (uphill slope)
- 2% (downhill slope)

1.8.6 Maximum Glide Slope Angle for CAT II Approaches

When certified for CAT II operations, the maximum glide slope angle shall not exceed 3.5° during CAT II
approaches.

1.8.7 Eye to Wheel Path and ILS to Wheel Path Distances

Approach Flap Eye to Wheel Path ILS to Wheel Path

[°] [°] [ m (ft) ] [ m (ft) ]
10 4.662 (15.30) 4.446 (14.59)
3 15 4.339 (14.24) 3.927 (12.88)
35 3.928 (12.89) 3.273 (10.74)
4.5 35 3.934 (12.91) 3.278 (10.76)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.8-3

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016

1.8.8 Adverse Weather Operation

1.8.8.1 Operation from Contaminated Runways

1. Take-off with reduced power is prohibited

2. Operation from runways contaminated with standing water, slush or loose snow
a. Maximum operating altitude for take-off and landing is 6000 ft ASL.
b. The maximum permitted WED of contaminant is 15 mm (0.59 in).
c. The maximum permitted depth of contaminant 6 cm (2.4 in).
d. For WED greater than 3 mm (0.125 in); selection of power levers aft of DISC is prohibited.
e. The maximum crosswind component for take-off and landing is 14 kt.
3. Operation from runways contaminated with compacted snow
a. The maximum crosswind component for take-off and landing is 20 kt.

1.8.8.2 Operation in Icing Conditions

Observe performance penalties as given in Chapter 4 (Performance).

1.8.9 Airframe Contamination

Observe the relevant procedures for de-icing and anti-icing and the relevant hold-over times as specified in the
Flight Operation Manual (Operations Manual Part A).
Also observe the instruction for the different de-icing / anti-icing fluids and the performance penalties as given
in Chapter 4 - Performance.

1.8.10 Baggage / Cargo Compartment Limitations

For your airplanes particular baggage compartment loading limits, refer to the Cargo Loading Manual
PSM 1-84-8A.

1.8.10.1 Baggage Compartment Classification

Both the forward and aft baggage compartments are classified as “Class C” compartments (see also Sub-
Chapter 6.6.3). Class C compartments do require:
1) a separate approved smoke detector or fire detector system to give warning at the pilot station;
2) an approved built-in fire extinguishing system controllable from the pilot stations;
3) any means to exclude hazardous quantities of smoke, flames or extinguishing agent, from any com-
partment occupied by the crew or passengers; and
4) any means to control ventilation and draughts within the compartment so that the extinguishing agent
used can control fire that may start within the compartment.

1.8.10.2 Baggage Compartment Fire Extinguishing

Unless the forward and aft baggage compartments are empty, the airplane must not be operated further than
1 h flying time from a suitable airport for landing.

1.8.10.3 Cargo Compartment Fire Extinguishing

[with Option - CR 825 CH 03262 Incorporated]

Unless the cargo compartment is empty, the airplane must not be operated further than 1 h flying time from a
suitable airport for landing.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 1 1.9-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016

1.9 GROUND OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS and INFORMATION

1.9.1 Minimum Turning Radius

Minimum pavement width for a 180° turn = 26 m (85 ft).

This minimum radius assumes a full nose wheel steering angle of 70°.

1.9.2 Line-up Losses

(as per JAR-OPS 1.490(c)(6) IEM and IATA SCAP Specification Annex XIII)

Steering Angle
90° ENTRY 30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60° 65° 70°
TODA / TORA loss [m] 32 28 25 22 20 18 16 15 13
ASDA loss [m] 46 42 38 36 34 32 30 28 27
180° ENTRY (turnaround)
TODA / TORA loss [m] 31 28 25 23 22 21 20 19 18
ASDA loss [m] 45 42 39 37 36 34 33 33 32

1.9.3 Eye to Ground and ILS to Ground Distances

Eye to Ground ILS to Ground

[ m (ft) ] [ m (ft) ]
3.029 (9.94) 1.864 (6.12)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.9-2 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016 LIMITATIONS

1.9.4 Minimum Runway Width

Unless otherwise approved in a Supplement to the AFM (“narrow runway” supplement), the minimum width of
a runway should not be less than 30 m (98 ft).

1.9.5 Aircraft Classisfication Number / Load Classification Number

(ACN / LCN – 34” Tires – Values)

ACN – Values, 34” tires

(for maximum take-off mass (weight))

Rigid Pavement Subgrades

A High B Medium C Low D Ultra Low
17.6 18 19.1 19.9

Flexible Pavement Subgrades

A High B Medium C Low D Ultra Low
15.2 16.0 18.3 20.2

RECOMMENDATION: as most airports have a rigid pavement with a Class B subgrade, use “20” for
planning purposes.

LCN – Values 34” tires

Rigid Pavement Subgrades: - use LCN 39

Flexible Pavement Subgrades: - use LCN 43

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.10-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.10 PERFORMANCE LIMITATIONS

1.10.1 General
In addition to the data presented in chapter 4 - AOM showing the applicable performance data - this sub-chap-
ter presents some performance - related limitations which may also become applicable when using special
AFM - supplements.

1.10.2 Flap Settings

The approved flap-settings are as follows:

Take-off +
- 5° 10° 15° -
Initial Climb
Cruise 0° - - - -
Approach - 5° 10° 15° -
Landing - - 10° 15° 35°

1.10.3 Operation with Landing Gear Extended

1.10.3.1 General
Operation with the landing gear extended (doors closed) are subject to the approval of the local airworthiness
authorities.

1.10.3.2 Operating Limitations

The operating limitations in Chapter 1 of the Aeroplane Operating Manual are applicable with the addition of
the following:
1. Take-off on a contaminated runway is prohibited.
2. Dispatch into known or forecast icing conditions is prohibited.
3. Bleed air must be off for take-off and landing.
4. Landing gear doors must be closed, and landing gear fairings installed.
5. Maximum airspeed with landing gear extended and the landing gear doors closed (VLE) is 215 KIAS.
6. Maximum altitude with the landing gear extended and landing gear doors closed is 20,000 ft.
7. Ditching emergency procedure is not applicable.
8. The operating procedures under Chapter 2 and 3 (Normal and Abnormal Procedures) and the perfor-
mance penalties as per Chapter 4, page 4.8-1 shall be observed.

1.10.4 Reduced Power Take-off

This procedure corresponds to supplement 13 of the AFM.

1.10.4.1 Limitations
The maximum assumed OAT is ISA +35°C.
Once every 24 hours (flying day) a take-off, using Normal Take-off power setting (see chapter 4.10, table 1),
must be accomplished to verify engine performance. The minimum torque for the assumed outside air temper-
ature is 90% of the Normal Take-off power setting (see table on page 4.10-2).
When supplement 61 (Take-off with BLEED “ON”) is incorporated, use data for torque as shown on table 1a
page 4.10-3.
• May not be used with the following AFM supplements: 3, 7, 21, 25, 26, 37, 46, 77 and 94.
• See chapter 4.12 for the applicable performance data.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.10-2 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 LIMITATIONS

1.10.5 Take-off and Landing with Bleed “ON”

This procedure corresponds to supplement 21 of the AFM.
This supplement must not be used with the following AFM supplements:
• Operation in tailwinds in excess of 10 kt (Supplement 3)
• Using reduced power for Take-off (Supplement 13)
• Operation from unpaved/gravel runways (Supplement 25 and 26)
• Take-off with maximum take-off power and uptrim disabled (Supplement 46)
• Take-off with Bleed “ON”
(Supplement 61)
• Operation with Landing Gear Extended (Supplement 94)

1.10.5.1 Limits
− The applicable take-off power torque settings (as for the conditions of pressure altitude and temperature)
will be found in the AOM, chapter 4, pages 4.10-2a, 4.10-3a and 4.10-4a.
− The OAT increased by 11°C must not exceed 50°C (ISA +35°C).
→ See chapter 4.13 for the applicable performance data.

1.10.6 Operation with Inoperative Nosewheel Steering

This procedure corresponds to supplement 8 of the AFM.

1.10.6.1 Limits
An operation with inoperative nosewheel steering is not permitted when operating on contaminated runways or
when operating with an inoperative anti-skid brake system.
Furthermore, operations from unpaved runways are also not permitted. The maximum permitted tailwind shall
not exceed 10 kt.
May not be used with the following AFM supplements: 3, 7, 25, 26, 37 and 77.
→ See chapter 4.14 for applicable performance data.

1.10.7 Take-off with Maximum Take-off Power and Uptrim Disabled

This procedure corresponds to supplement 46 of the AFM.

1.10.7.1 Limits
With the Bypass Doors Open, the maximum ambient temperature is ISA +25°C.
May not be used with the following AFM supplements: 13, 21, 61 and 94.
→ See chapter 4.15 for applicable performance data.

1.10.8 Operation with 32 Inch Tires

This procedure corresponds to supplement 65 of the AFM.

1.10.8.1 Limitations
Operation from unpaved/gravel runways is prohibited.
When operating with 32 inch tires (MS 4-200006 or MS 4-436865) performance data must be corrected.
→ See chapter 4.16 for applicable performance data.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.10-3

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.10.9 Operation with Inoperative Flight Spoilers in Ground Mode

This procedure corresponds to supplement 17 of the AFM.

1.10.9.1 Limitations
An operation with inoperative flight spoilers in ground mode is not permitted when operating from contaminated
runways.
Furthermore, the maximum tailwind component shall not exceed 10 kt, steep approaches (supp. 12), noise
abatement procedures (supp. 39) and ILS row data steep approaches (supp. 45) are not permitted when oper-
ating with inoperative flight spoilers in ground mode.
May not be used with the following AFM supplements: 3, 12, 25, 26, 37, 39, 45 and 77.
→ See chapter 4.17 for applicable performance data.

1.10.10 Operation with 10-Minute Maximum Take-off Power - Following an Engine Failure
This procedure corresponds to supplement 27 of the AFM.

1.10.10.1 Limitations
Standard certification is based upon a 5 minute time limit for maximum take-off power. With the incorporation of
AFM Supplement 27, a maximum of 10 minutes with maximum take-off power is permitted .
May not be used with AFM supplements 3 and 94.
The maximum tailwind shall not exceed 10 kt.
→ See chapter 4.18 for applicable performance data.

1.10.11 Noise Abatement Procedures - Landing with 850 Prop RPM

This procedure corresponds to supplement 39 of the AFM.

1.10.11.1 Limitations
An approach and landing with 850 NP must not be performed with:
• Anti-skid brake control system is inoperative (AFM Supp. 7)
• CAT II operations (AFM Supp. 16)
• Inoperative flight spoilers in ground mode (AFM Supp. 17)
• Operation on contaminated runways (AFM Supp. 37 and Supp. 77)
• Operation in tailwinds in excess of 10 kt (AFM Supp. 3)
• Operation from runways with slopes greater than +2%
• Steep approaches (AFM Supp. 12 and Supp. 45)
• Operation from unpaved/gravel runways (AFM Supps. 25 and 26)
• Operation with landing gear extended (AFM Supp. 94)
→ See chapter 4.19 for applicable performance data.
With MS 4-901204 or MS 4-901304 or MS 4-126306 or MS 4-126293 or MS 4-901326 or MS 4-126337 not
incorporated, or with MS IS4Q7600001 incorporated and MS 4-901204 not fully incorporated, or without a ser-
viceable radio altimeter:
With REF SPEEDS switch selected to INCR, flap 35°, landing with reduced RPM is prohibited.

NOTE: The referenced modification summaries (MS) refer to the incorporation of the radio altitude
information into PSEU/WOW logic for the Propeller Electronic Controller (PEC).

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.10-4 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 LIMITATIONS

1.10.12 Operation in Tailwinds between 10 and 20 Knots

This procedure corresponds to supplement 3 of the AFM.

1.10.12.1 General
When supplement 3 to the AFM is approved by the appropriate airworthiness authority and incorporated in the
respective AFM, the normal tailwind limit of 10 kt may be increased to 20 kt for take-off and landing.

1.10.12.2 Operating Limitations

Unless additional limitations are set forth by the operator (see page 1.8-1), take-off and landing with tailwind
operations in excess of 10 kt are not permitted under the following conditions:
• when the Anti-Skid Brake Control System is inoperative. (AFM Supplement 7),
• when the Nosewheel Steering System is inoperative. (AFM Supplement 8),
• when taking off with reduced power (AFM Supplement 13),
• for CAT II operations (AFM Supplement 16),
• when the Flight Spoilers are inop. in Ground Mode (AFM Supplement 17),
• when taking off and landing with Bleed “ON” (AFM Supplement 21 and 61),
• when using more than 5 minutes maximum take-off power following an engine failure during take-off (AFM
Supplement 27),
• when operating on contaminated runways (AFM Supplement 37)
• when landing with 850 Propeller RPM (AFM Supplement 39).
• when operating from unpaved/gravel runways (AFM Supplement 25 and 26)
• when performing steep approaches and landings (AFM Supplement 12 or AFM Supplement 45)
• when taking-off into icing conditions to 1000 ft AGL (AFM Supplement 76)
→ See chapter 4.20 for applicable performance data.

1.10.13 Operation from Narrow Runways

− Reserved for the possible incorporation of supplement 54 -

1.10.14 Operation with Inoperative Anti-skid Brake Control System

This procedure corresponds to supplement 7 of the AFM.

1.10.14.1 General
The operation with inoperative anti-skid brake control system is permitted under the conditions as specified in
the approved MEL and the operating limitations.

1.10.14.2 Operating Limitations

Unless additional limitations as specified in the MEL do apply, the operation with inoperative Anti-Skid Brake
Control System is not permitted:
• when operating from wet and/or contaminated runways (AFM Supplement 37 or 77),
• when the nose wheel steering system is inoperative (AFM Supplement 8),
• when using reduced take-off power (AFM Supplement 13).
• when performing steep approaches and landings (supp. 12, 45)
• when operating from unpaved runways (supp. 25 or 26)
• when performing noise abatement procedures (supp. 39)
• when operating in tailwind conditions in excess of 10 kt.
→ See chapter 4.22 for applicable performance data.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.10-5

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.10.15 Steep Approach and Landing

1.10.15.1 General
Subject to the operational approval and the incorporation of MS 4-456970 approach angles higher than 4,5°
may be flown when supplement 12 is applicable.

1.10.15.2 Operating Limitations

A steep approach and the subsequent landing shall not be carried out under the following conditions:
• approach angles higher than 5.5°
• at tailwind conditions greater than 5 kt
• on CAT II operations (AFM Supplement 16)
• with inoperative flight spoilers in ground mode (AFM Supplement 17)
• when the anti skid brake system is inoperative (AFM Supplement 7)
• when the runway is contaminated (AFM Supplement 37 or 77)
• when operating from unpaved runways
• when landing with 850 Prop. RPM (AFM Supplement 39)
• on CAT I autopilot (coupled) and Flight Director (Manual) Approaches
• when using a flap setting other than 35° (landing gear down, flap 35° and condition levers to MAX must be
selected prior to commencing a steep approach)
• when no suitable glide path system is available for day/night operations
• when the runway slope exceeds plus/minus 0.5%
• when the landing mass exceeds 26,308 kg (58,000 lbs)
• when the maximum operating altitude for landing is exceeding 5,000 feet ASL
• with one engine out.
May not be used with the following AFM supplements: 2, 3, 7, 16, 17, 25, 26, 37, 39, 75 and 77.
The minimum height for transition to a steep approach is 1,000 ft. The minimum height for go-around following
an engine failure after the steep approach has been started is 300 feet AGL.

NOTE: The height loss during a go-around following an engine failure is 150 ft (46 m)

1.10.15.3 ILS-Raw Data Only Steep Approach (AFM Supplement 45)

When operationally approved in conjunction with the approval for steep approaches, the following additional
limitations will apply:
• landing gear down, flap 35° and condition levers MAX must be selected prior to glide slope intercept and
used during guided approach
• approach must not be commenced or must be discontinued prior to DH in the event of an engine failure
• minimum DH is 300 ft ARTE (above rwy THR)
May not be used with the following AFM supplements: 2, 3, 7, 16, 17, 25, 26, 37, 39, 75 and 77.
→ See chapter 4.23 for applicable performance data.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.10-6 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 LIMITATIONS

1.10.16 Take-Off with Bleed ON

This procedure corresponds to Supplement 61 of the AFM.

1.10.16.1 Limitations
A take-off with BLEED ON is not permitted under the following conditions:
• at tailwinds in excess of 10 kt
• when operating on runways with slopes greater than +2%
• when taking-off with maximum take-off power and uptrim disabled
• operations with landing gear extended
• operations with one bleed system inoperative
→ See chapter 4.24 for applicable performance data.

1.10.17 Operation from Unpaved/Gravel Runway

This procedure corresponds to supplements 26 of the AFM.

1.10.17.1 Operating Limitations

1.10.17.1.1 General Limitations:

An operation on unpaved/gravel runways is not permitted:
• in tailwind condition in excess of 10 kt (AFM Supplement 3),
• with inoperative Anti-Skid Brake System (AFM Supplement 7),
• with inoperative Nosewheel Steering System (AFM Supplement 8),
• when performing steep approaches (AFM Supplement 12),
• when taking off with reduced power (AFM Supplement 13),
• with inoperative flight spoilers in ground mode (AFM Supplement 17),
• when taking off with Bleed “ON” (AFM Supplement 21),
• when the runway is contaminated (AFM Supplement 37 or 77),
• when using Noise Abatement Procedures (landing with 850 Prop RPM) (AFM Supplement 39)
• when performing an ILS Raw Data only Steep Approach (AFM Supplement 45),
• when the aeroplane is equipped with 32 inch tires (AFM Supplement 65)

1.10.17.1.2 Additional Limitations:

1) The runway:
a. Shall have a uniform covering of surface material that is graded smooth and kept free from ruts to avoid
the formation of pools of water during periods of precipitation.
b. Surface bearing material must not be less than 12 inches in depth and well compacted. The surface
bearing material must demonstrate a minimum average California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 30 with the
lowest measured CBR points of not less than 20, as determined by a Boeing High Load Penetrometer.
c. Areas of loose gravel and surface stones greater than 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter shall not be permit-
ted.
d. Vegetation shall not be permitted.
e. Shall be inspected at a frequency dictated by local conditions to assure satisfactory surface condition.
2) Use of reverse thrust is prohibited.
3) Take-off from unpaved/gravel runways is approved with flap 15° only.
4) Landing on unpaved/gravel runways is approved with flap 35° only.
5) Engine inlet nacelle bypass doors must be open for take-off and landing.
6) Maximum temperature for take-off and landing is ISA +25°C.
→ See Chapter 4.25 for the applicable performance data.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.10-7

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.10.18 Restricted Operation from Unpaved/Gravel Runway

This procedure corresponds to supplements 25 of the AFM.

1.10.18.1 Operating Limitations

1.10.18.1.1 General Limitations:

1.10.18.1.2 Additional Limitations:

1) The runway:
a. Shall have a uniform covering of surface material that is graded smooth and kept free from ruts to avoid
the formation of pools of water during periods of precipitation.
b. Surface bearing material must not be less than 12 inches in depth and well compacted. The surface
bearing material must demonstrate a minimum average California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 30 with the
lowest measured CBR points of not less than 20, as determined by a Boeing High Load Penetrometer.
c. Areas of loose gravel and surface stones greater than 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter shall not be permitted.
d. Vegetation shall not be permitted.
e. Shall be inspected at a frequency dictated by local conditions to assure satisfactory surface condition.
2) Use of reverse thrust is prohibited.
3) Take-off from unpaved/gravel runways is approved with flap 15° only.
4) Landing on unpaved/gravel runways is approved with flap 35° only.
5) Maximum operating altitude for take-off and landing is 5000 ft. MSL.
6) Engine inlet nacelle bypass doors must be open for take-off and landing.
7) Maximum temperature for take-off and landing is ISA +25°C.
8) Maximum runway slope is plus/minus 0.5%.
9) Take-off and landing in tailwind conditions is prohibited.
→ See Chapter 4.26 for the applicable performance data.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.10-8 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 LIMITATIONS

1.10.19 Take-off Into Icing Conditions to 1000 ft AGL with REF SPEEDS Switch OFF
This procedure corresponds to supplement 76 of the AFM.

1.10.19.1 Limitations
This procedure must not be used:
• when operating in tailwinds in excess of 10 kt (AFM Supplement 3)
• in operations with landing gear extended

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.11-1

LIMITATIONS [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

1.11 SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

1.11.1 Airspeed Indicators

• During ground operation the position error is negligible.

• Readings in climb, cruise and descent are for practical purposes equal to true values.

Maximum difference between left and right indicators (all weights):

At approach speed ................................................................................................................................. 2 kt
At cruise speed ....................................................................................................................................... 2 kt

Maximum difference between any indicator and standby airspeed indicator (all weights):
At approach speed ............................................................................................................................... 10 kt
At cruise speed ..................................................................................................................................... 10 kt

NOTE: Any mechanical errors are not considered.

1.11.2 Altimeters

• During ground operation the position error is negligible.

• Readings in climb, cruise and descent are for practical purposes equal to true values.

When altitude mismatch appears on PFD, with Integrated Standby Instrument

(MS 4-432835 or MS 4-456883 Not Incorporated), the following standby altitude correction will apply:

Flaps 0° Flaps 5°, 10° and 15°

150 VAPP
PA IAS or VMO or VFE
below VREF
Subtract
SL 0 0 0 100
(ft)
Subtract
15000 0 300 0 100
(ft)
20000
Subtract
and 0 400 - -
(ft)
above

(Compare altimeter reading of # 1 PFD and # 2 PFD.)

1.11.3 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) / Static Air Temperature (SAT) Relationship

In flight indicated SAT is equal to OAT.

On ground indicated SAT may be higher than OAT.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.11-2 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 LIMITATIONS

1.11.4 Power Plant Limitations

1.11.4.1 General
• Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pratt & Whitney Canada
• Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PW 150A
• Ambient Temperature Limitations (Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 54°C
• Ambient Temperature Limitations (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 50°C or ISA + 35°C (whichever is lower)
• With the Engine Intake Bypass Doors Open,
take-off, landing, setting MTOP and MCP are limited to
a maximum Ambient Temperature Limitation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISA + 25°C
• Maximum Altitude for Airstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20000 ft
• Automatic Take-off Power Uptrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10% torque (nominal)

1.11.4.2 Operating Limits (Engines / Propellers)

Table 1

Power Setting MAX Torque MAX ITT MAX NL MAX NH MAX NP Oil PRESS Oil TEMP
(%) (°C) (% RPM) (% RPM) (RPM) (psid) (°C) (4)
MAX Take-Off Power 1020 0 to 107
106 880 100 100 61 to 72
(MTOP) (1) (6b) 115 (4.f.)
Normal Take-Off Power 90.3 1020 0 to 107
(7) (8) (9) 61 to 72
(NTOP) (6a) (6b) 115 (4.f.)
MAX Continuous Power 1020 0 to 107
(MCP) 100 880 100 100 (6b) 61 to 72 115 (4.f.)
920 100 MAX
Starting - 40 MIN
(2) 165 (5)
Transient 44 to 61 125 MAX
135 920 102.3 101.2 1173
(2) 72 to 100 (3)
MAX Reverse 35 880 100 100 1020 61 to 72 0 to 107

NOTE: The above table Must Not be used for setting engine power.

Chart References:
1) The take-off rating is limited to 5 min (unless 10 min are approved in the AFM Supplement 27).
2) 20 s maximum.
3) 5 s maximum for torque values above flight idle and less than 55%.
4) a. Maximum oil temperature is 125°C between discing and flight idle.
b. Minimum oil temperature required for power settings above flight idle is 0°C.
c. Minimum oil temperature required to ensure engine air inlet ice protection, prior to take-off in icing con-
ditions, is 55°C.
d. Minimum oil temperature required to ensure engine air inlet ice protection in icing conditions, in flight
and within 3 min of setting take-off power is 65°C.
NOTE: To maintain the minimum engine oil temperature of 65°C during descent, holding and
approach, in icing conditions, it may be necessary to increase engine power.
The increase in engine power will be limited by the allowable maximum airspeed appropriate
to VMO, VLO, VFE, aircraft system malfunctions, turbulence and ATC instructions.
e. Minimum oil temperature to unfeather propeller is - 18°C.
f. Maximum oil temperature permissible for completion of flight with a 20% reduction in power is 115°C.
Maintenance action required prior to next flight

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.11-3

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

Operating Limits (Engine / Propellers) (cont’d)

5) Maximum oil pressure at discing with OAT below 0°C.

6) a. NTOP torque indication will be 90% or 91%.

b. Maximum allowable continuous NP overspeed is 1071 RPM.

7) The Normal Take-off ITT limit for a given ambient air temperature is given in the following table:

Table 2 - Variation of ITT with Ambient Air Temperature for NTOP

OAT ITT NTOP
(°C) (°C)
- 40 823
- 16 824
- 10 828
0 832
+ 10 838
+ 20 840
+ 30 844
+ 33 845
and above

8) The Normal Take-off NL limit for a given ambient air temperature is given in the following table:

Table 3 - Variation of NH and NL with Ambient Air Temperature for NTOP

OAT NL NH
(°C) % NTOP % NTOP
- 50 95.40 97.60
- 40 95.60 97.63
- 30 95.80 97.66
- 20 95.95 97.70
- 10 96.45 97.80
0 97.05 98.00
+ 10 97.50 98.18
+ 20 97.80 98.32
+ 30 98.20 98.50
+ 40 98.25 98.70
+ 50 98.28 98.85

9) The Normal Take-off NH limit for a given air temperature is given in the following table:

Table 4 - Starter Cranking Limits

Start MAX Time ON ... Followed by Time OFF
1 70 s 2 min
2 70 s 2 min
3 70 s 30 min

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.11-4 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 LIMITATIONS

1.11.4.3 Engine and Propeller Ground Operating Limitations

1) Maximum torque is 100%.

2) Minimum NH is 64.2%.

3) Maximum wind speed for ground operation, with the nose of the airplane more than 30° out of wind is 50 kt

4) For wind speeds greater than 8 kt, with the nose of the airplane more than 30° out of wind, the maximum
power for ground maneuvering is as follows:

Maximum Power for Ground Maneuvering

Wind Speed Maximum Power Setting

(kt) (Ground Maneuvering)
FLIGHT IDLE
9 to 20 (POWER levers may be momentarily increased above
FLIGHT IDLE for acceleration)
21 to 35 FLIGHT IDLE
36 to 50 FLIGHT IDLE
(gusts to 55) (POWER levers must be at DISC with airplane static)

NOTE: Ground operations in winds greater than 50 kt must be recorded and the maximum wind
speed provided to maintenance within 24 h (flying day).

5) For wind speeds greater than 8 kt, with the nose of the airplane more than 30° out of wind, the maximum
power for ground static operation is as follows:

Maximum Power for Ground Static Running

Wind Speed Maximum Power Setting

(kt) (Ground Static Running)
POWER levers angle at 60°
9 to 20 (Approximately midway between
FLIGHT IDLE and Take-off Power detent)
21 to 35 FLIGHT IDLE
36 to 50
(gusts to 55) DISC

1.11.4.4 Engine Airborne Operating Limitations

During flight operation movement of the POWER levers aft of the FLT IDLE gate is prohibited.

Minimum SAT for engine relight is - 40°C.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.11-5

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 2] 2 DEC 2011

1.11.4.5 Oil Limitations

PRESSURE
Oil Pressure minimum .......................................................................................................................... 44 psi
Normal operating range ............................................................................................................... 61 to 72 psi
Transient minimum ...................................................................................................................... 44 to 61 psi
TEMPERATURE
Oil Temperature for start up ..................................................................................................................- 40°C

GND IDLE
Minimum ...............................................................................................................................................- 40°C
Maximum ......................................................................... 107°C (125°C PLA between FLT IDLE and DISC)

Above GND IDLE

Minimum ........................................................................................ 0°C (55°C for take-off in icing conditions)
Maximum ..............................................................................................................................................107°C
Maximum Continuous ...........................................................................................................................107°C

APPROVED OILS
→ refer to the Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM)

1.11.4.6 Engine Rating Limitations

The pilot should set the torque to the target bug to obtain the required rating.
• This target-bug rating should not be exceeded deliberately except in an emergency situation.
• Setting can be found in the normal checklist and in the AOM, Chapter 4.
Maximum Take-Off (MTOP) (5071 SHP) 106% TRQ
• This is the maximum power on the operating engine certified and is time limited to 5 min (or 10 min when
approved in an AFM Supplement).
Normal Take-Off (NTOP) (4580 SHP) 90.3% TRQ
• This is the take-off power developed under normal take-off conditions.
Maximum Continuous (MCP) ................................................................................................................100%
• The maximum continuous power rating is the maximum power certified for continuous use.
This rating should only be used when required to ensure safe flight (i.e. engine failure).

1.11.4.7 Engine Ice Protection

Engine intake by-pass doors must be open for engine operation in icing conditions.

NOTES:
1. Icing conditions exist when the SAT on the ground and for take-off is 10°C or below, or SAT in flight
is 5°C or below and visible moisture in any form is present (such as clouds, fog with visibility of one
mile or less, rain, snow, sleet or ice crystals).
Ice accretion on aerodynamic surfaces is not considered to exist at temperatures of - 40°C or
below.
2. Icing conditions also exist when the SAT on the ground and for take-off is 10°C or below when oper-
ating on ramps, taxiways or runways where surface snow, ice, standing water or slush may be
ingested by the engines or freeze on engines, nacelles or engine sensor probes.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.11-6 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 8] 13 SEP 2013 LIMITATIONS

1.11.4.8 Instrument Limitation Markings

Colour-coded markings representing operating limits and ranges are presented on the Engine Display (ED) to
facilitate observance.

Torque Indicators (%)

Over-Limit
above 106
(red pointer / digits)
Maximum
106
(red radial)
Caution
100 to 106
(yellow arc)
Normal Operating
0 to 100
(green arc)

Turbine Temperature Indicators (ITT) (°C)

Over-Limit above MAX (red radial),
(red pointer / digits) above 920 transient (start only)
Maximum – starting
920
(red radial)
Maximum Limit shown in Table 2 (Sub-Chapter 1.11.4.2) for NTOP rating,
(red radial) 880 for MTOP and MCP rating
Normal Operating 250 to Limit shown in Table 2 (Sub-Chapter 1.11.4.2) for NTOP rating,
(green arc) 250 to 880 for MTOP and MCP rating

Propeller RPM Indicators (NP)

Over-Limit above 1071
(red pointer / digits)
Maximum
1071
(red radial)
Caution
1020 to 1071
(yellow arc)
Normal Operating
660 to 1020
(green arc)

Gas Generator (High Pressure) Rotor Speed Indicator (NH)

Over-Limit
above MAX (red radial)
(red pointer / digits)
Maximum Limit shown in Table 3 (Sub-Chapter 1.11.4.2) for NTOP rating,
(red radial) 100% for MTOP and MCP rating
Normal Operating
64.2% to NH maximum limits shown above
(green arc)

Gas Generator (Low Pressure) Rotor Speed Indicator (NL)

Over-Limit Limit shown in Table 3 (Sub-Chapter 1.11.4.2) for NTOP rating,
(red digits) above 100% for MTOP and MCP rating
Normal Operating
0% to NL maximum limits shown above
(white digits)

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.11-7

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 8] 13 SEP 2013

Instrument Limitation Markings (cont’d)

Oil Temperature Indicator (°C)

Over-Limit above MAX (red radial),
(red pointer / digits) below - 40
107, - 40
Maximum except as specified below
(red radial) 125, - 40
with POWER levers between DISC and FLIGHT IDLE
107 to 125
for conditions where red radial is at 125
- 40 to 0
Caution with PROP selector OFF
(yellow range)
- 40 to 55
(changing to 65, 3 min after take-off)
with PROP selector TEST or ON
0 to 107
Normal Operating with PROP selector OFF
(green arc) 55 (changing to 65, 3 min after take-off) to 107
with PROP selector TEST or ON

Oil Pressure Indicator (psi)

Under-Limit
below 44
(red pointer / digits)
Minimum
44
(red radial)
Caution
(yellow arc) 44 to 61 and 72 to 100

Low Pressure
44 to 50
(warning light)
Normal Operating
(green arc) 61 to 72

Fuel Temperature Indicator (°C)

Over-Limit
above 71
(red digits)
Caution
below 0
(yellow digits)
Normal Operating
(white digits) 0 to 71

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.11-8 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 LIMITATIONS

1.11.5 APU Limitations

NOTE: This Sub-Chapter corresponds to Supplement 6 of the AFM

1) APU is approved for GROUND OPERATIONS ONLY.

2) APU must be shutdown prior to take-off.

3) APU must not be operated unattended with passengers onboard.

4) APU must not be operated during gravity refuelling.

5) APU ambient temperature limitation (Lower) - 54oC

NOTE: When the APU has been shut-down in outside air temperatures below - 35oC for greater than
1 h, it must be preheated prior to start in accordance with applicable maintenance procedures.

6) APU ambient temperature limitation (Upper):

a) + 30°C or ISA + 25°C, whichever is lower,
b) + 50°C or ISA + 35°C, whichever is lower (with MS 4-900136 or MS 4-900137 Incorporated)

7) With APU Inlet Louvres (MS 4-428900) installed, APU operation is limited to + 21°C maximum ambient
temperature.

8) Fuel: Approved Fuel Specifications are listed in Sub-Chapter 1.11.6.1.

9) Oil: MIL-L-7808, MIL-L-23699C, Castrol 98UK or Mobile Jet II.

Do Not mix oils.

10) APU Starter Cranking Limits:

START MAX Time ON ... Followed by Time OFF

1 60 s 5 min
2 60 s Maintenance Action Required

NOTE: Including the time taken for the maintenance action following the second start attempt, a
minimum of 30 min off must elapse prior to the next start attempt.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.11-9

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 12] 30 SEP 2014

1.11.6 Fuel Limitations

1.11.6.1 Fuel Grades

Fuels conforming to any of the following specifications are approved for use. Mixing of fuels is permitted.

SPECIFICATION
TYPE
CANADIAN USA CIS CHINESE
KEROSENE
JET A, JET A1 CGSB 3.23 ASTM D 1655 - JET FUEL # 3 (RP-3)
JP-5 CGSB 3-GP-24 MIL-DTL-5624 - -
JP-8 - MIL-DTL-83133 - -
JP-8 + 100 - MIL-DTL-83133 - -
RT - - GOST 10227 -
TS-1 - - GOST 10227 -
WIDE CUT (PWC SB 35189 Incorporated)
JET B CGSB 3.22 ASTM-D1655 - -
JP-4 CGSB 3.22 MIL-DTL-5624 - -

WARNING: With PWC SB 35189 Not Incorporated, the use of Wide Cut Type fuels is prohibited.

Dispatch with Wide Cut type fuels is prohibited with an Outside Air Temperature (OAT) or Static Air Tempera-
ture (SAT) warmer than - 20°C.

NOTE: When using JET B or JP-4, if fuel tank temperature on the FUEL page of the MFD exceeds
35°C, the maximum operating altitude is 20000 ft.

NOTE: When using JP-8 + 100 fuel, the refuel distribution system must meet the requirements as
published in the industry standards.

REFERENCE: (a) API / IP-1581: Specifications and Qualification Procedures for

Aviation Jet Fuel Filter / Separators, 5th Edition. Category ‘M100’.
(b) CSA-B836: Storage, Handling and Dispensing of Aviation Fuels at Aerodromes.

NOTE: Maintenance must be notified when using TS-1 fuel.

1.11.6.2 Minimum Fuel Tank Temperature

The minimum operating fuel tank temperature must not be less than 5°C above the freezing temperature of the
fuel being used.

ALLOWED BULK
FREEZING TEMPERATURE
FUEL TYPE FUEL TEMPERATURE
(°C)
(°C)
KEROSENE
JET A - 40 - 35
JET A1, JP-8, JP-8 + 100, JET FUEL # 3 (RP-3) - 47 - 42
JP-5 - 46 - 41
RT - 55 - 50
TS-1 - 60 - 55
WIDE CUT (PWC SB 35189 Incorporated)
JET B - 50 - 45
JP-4 - 58 - 53

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.11-10 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 LIMITATIONS

NOTE: If the fuel tank contains different fuel grades, the highest fuel freezing temperature of the fuel
grades in the tank must be used.
To ensure that the freezing point of the fuel is maintained, the refueled tank should contain a
minimum of 90% of the fuel grade with the lowest fuel freezing temperature.

1.11.6.3 Fuel Additives

The following fuel system ice inhibitors are approved for use with approved fuels:

FUEL SYSTEM ICE INHIBITOR

CANADIAN and USA CIS
Fluid I (GOST 8313)
MIL-DTL-85470 Fluid I - M (TU 6-10-1458)
Fluid TGF (GOST 17477)
Fluid TGF - M (TU 6-10-1457)
Maximum concentration of 0.15% by volume. Maximum concentration of 0.3% by volume.

1.11.6.4 Usable Fuel

Fuel remaining in fuel tanks when quantity indicators show zero fuel is not usable in flight.

Usable fuel tank capacities are 2659 kg (5862 lb) per tank.

1.11.6.5 Auxiliary Fuel Pumps

Tank 1 and Tank 2 auxiliary fuel pumps must be on for take-off and landing.

1.11.6.6 Fuel Heater

Take-of and continuous in-flight operation with fuel heater outlet temperature indication below 0°C or above
71°C is PROHIBITED.

1.11.6.7 Maximum Fuel Imbalance

Maximum fuel imbalance between contents of main fuel tanks is 272 kg (600 lb).

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.11-11

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 12] 30 SEP 2014

1.11.7 Air Conditioning and Pressurization

Normal cabin pressure differential limit 5.46 ± 0.1 psid

Maximum cabin pressure differential limit 5.95 psid
Maximum cabin pressure differential limit during taxiing, take-off and landing 0.5 psid
Maximum cabin altitude (pressurized flight) 8000 ft
Bleed air must be off for take-off and landing.

1.11.8 Electrical Systems

STANDBY BATTERY, AUX BATTERY and MAIN BATTERY

Maximum loadmeter reading for take-off .............................................................................................. = 0.1

Minimum battery temperature for take-off ........................................................................................... - 20°C

MAIN & ESSENTIAL BUSES

Integrated Flight Cabinet

Power-up requires a minimum 23 V DC respective main and essential busses.

1.11.9 Landing Gear and Flap Systems

Maximum altitude with the landing gear and / or flap extended is 15000 ft.

1.11.10 Wheel Brake Cooling Limits

Brake cooling times must be observed between a landing or a low-energy rejected take-off and a subsequent
take-off, to ensure that sufficient brake energy is available to bring the airplane to a complete stop if the subse-
quent take-off is rejected.

REFERENCE: AFM Sub-Section 5.12 and AOM Chapter 4.

1.11.11 Airframe Ice Protection

When ice is detected, the AIRFRAME MODE SELECT selector must be positioned at FAST or SLOW.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

1.11-12 CHAPTER 1

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 LIMITATIONS

1.11.12 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)

1) AFCS is approved for autopilot (AP) approaches to CAT I limits only.

2) In APPR mode, AP engaged approaches are approved for:
a. Flap 0° (minimum altitude: 1000 ft AGL),
b. Flap 5°, 10° and 15° [MS 4-126091 Incorporated]
c. Flap 15° [MS 4-126091 Not Incorporated]
3) The use of Flap 35° in APPR mode with AP engaged is prohibited.
4) With [MS 4-126091 Not Incorporated], Flight Director (FD) only approaches are prohibited.
5) AP must be disengaged in severe icing.
6) During AP operation, the pilot must be seated at the controls with harness secured.
7) Use of VOR without associated DME is prohibited in APPR mode.
8) After take-off or go-around, the minimum height for AP engagement is 1000 ft AGL.
9) For non-precision approaches the AP must be disengaged at or above 200 ft AGL.
10) Flight in conditions of severe atmospheric turbulence with AP engaged is prohibited.
11) An AP approach must not be commenced or continued with an inoperative engine.
NOTE: The AP must be disengaged at or above 1000 ft AGL
12) AP and FD only approaches are approved for glideslope (G/S) angles of 2.5° to a maximum of 4°.
13) AP approaches have been demonstrated in crosswind components up to 18 kt
15 kt [with MS 4-126091 Not Incorporated].
This is not considered limiting.

14) On precision approaches, the AP must be disengaged at or above a minimum altitude of 200 ft AGL.

1.11.13 Avionics

1) HOT MIC select switches on the pilot and the co-pilot ARCDU must be OFF and the INT / RAD switch on
the observers Audio Control Panel must be centred, when using the flight compartment speakers.

2) With HF Comm installed, use of the HF transmitter is prohibited when the ADF is used as the prime means
of navigation or for position confirmation.

3) With Integrated Standby Instrument [MS 4-432835 or MS 4-456883] installed, the airplane must not be
operated further than 1 h flying time from a suitable airport for landing.

4) To ensure uninterrupted operation of the pilot’s and co-pilot’s PFD, MFD and the ED, electrical power must
be cycled on all displays once every 24 h (flying day).

5) With [MS 4-459347 Incorporated] or subsequent Bombardier IFE modsums, the In-Flight Entertainment
(IFE) system has been approved for use with Transmitting Portable Electronic Devices (TPEDS) operating
in ‘Airplane Mode’ with only ‘Wi-Fi Mode’ active in all phases of flight.
The IFE power is controlled by the Flight Attendant through a switch located on the IFE crew terminal

1.11.14 Flight Management System (FMS)

For specific FMS limitations, please refer to the respective AFM Supplement and the FMS Operator’s Manual.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 1 1.11-13

LIMITATIONS [Rev. 12] 30 SEP 2014

1.11.15 Data Link System

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to:

- AFM Supplement 81: UniLink UL-701 Data Link System
- AFM Supplement 109: UniLink UL-801 Data Link System

The limitations in Section 2 (AFM) and the Supplement Compatibility Table in Sub-Section 1.5 (AFM) are appli-
cable with the addition of the following:

1. The Data Link System is approved for the transmission and receipt of messages that will not create an
unsafe condition, if the message is improperly received.
An unsafe condition may exist if:
a. The message or part of a message is delayed or not received;
b. The message is delivered to the wrong recipient;
c. The message content is corrupted.

2. Pilot action, based on messages such as pre-departure clearance, digital automatic terminal information
service, weight and balance, take-off data (speeds, trim settings, runway distances), is prohibited unless
approved operational procedures are used to verify that the message is received by the intended recipient,
the message is valid and the content is not corrupted.

1.11.16 Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) - HONEYWELL MK V

(Option - CR 831 CH 00064 or CR 831 SO 90180)

NOTE: This Sub-Chapter corresponds to Supplement 64 of the AFM

The limitations in Section 2 (AFM) and the Supplement Compatibility Table in Sub-Section 1.5 (AFM) are appli-
cable with the addition of the following:

1. Pilots are authorized to deviate from their current air traffic control clearance (ATC) to the extent necessary
to comply with an EGPWS warning.

2. Navigation must not be predicated upon the use of Terrain / Obstacle Awareness Display on the MFD.

NOTE: The Terrain / Obstacle Awareness Display is intended to serve as a situational awareness tool
only and may not provide the accuracy and / or fidelity on which to solely base terrain
avoidance maneuvering.

3. To avoid giving unwanted alerts, the Terrain Awareness Alerting and Display function must be inhibited by
selecting the TERRAIN Inhibit switch on the glareshield panel, when within 15 NM of take-off, approach or
landing of an airport not contained in the EGPWS Airport Database.

Refer to Honeywell Worldwide Airport Database PN: 060-4267-000 for airports contained in the installed
EGPWS terrain database.

4. The following ModSums must be incorporated concurrently:

- Display Unit - MS 4-126103
- Flight Guidance Module - MS 4-126128
- Flight Data Processing System - MS 4-126127
and are required pre-requisites for this installation.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 2 02 LEP - Page 1

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016

02 - Effective Pages 2.10-9 28 Feb 2014

1 21 Nov 2016 2.10-10 28 Feb 2014
2 21 Nov 2016 2.10-11 28 Feb 2014
2.10-12 28 Feb 2014
02 - Contents
2.10-13 28 Feb 2014
ToC 2-1 30 Jan 2015
ToC 2-2 30 Jan 2015 2.11-1 28 Feb 2014
ToC 2-3 30 Jan 2015 2.11-2 28 Feb 2014
ToC 2-4 07 Mar 2016 2.11-3 31 May 2011
2.11-4 31 May 2011
Chapter 2
2.12-1 30 Jun 2016
2.0-1 31 May 2011
2.12-2 30 Jun 2016
2.0-2 31 May 2011
2.13-1 07 Mar 2013
2.0-3 31 May 2011
2.13-2 28 Feb 2014
2.0-4 31 May 2011
2.13-3 28 Feb 2014
2.0-5 21 Nov 2011
2.14-1 28 Feb 2014
2.1-1 31 May 2011
2.14-2 28 Feb 2014
2.1-2 31 May 2011
2.14-3 28 Feb 2014
2.2-1 31 May 2011
2.14-4 28 Feb 2014
2.3-1 31 May 2011
2.15-1 30 Jan 2015
2.4-1 21 Nov 2016
2.15-2 30 Jan 2015
2-4-2 28 Feb 2014
2.15-3 21 Nov 2016
2.4-3 28 Feb 2014
2.15-4 30 Oct 2015
2.4-4 28 Feb 2014
2.15-5 21 Nov 2016
2.4-5 28 Feb 2014
2.15-6 21 Nov 2016
2.5-1 28 Feb 2014
2.15-7 21 Nov 2016
2.5-2 28 Feb 2014
2.15-8 21 Nov 2016
2.6-1 31 May 2011
2.15-9 21 Nov 2016
2.6-2 31 May 2011
2.15-10 21 Nov 2016
2.7-1 28 Feb 2014
2.15-11 21 Nov 2016
2.7-2 28 Feb 2014
2.15-12 21 Nov 2016
2.7-3 28 Feb 2014
2.15-13 21 Nov 2016
2.8-1 27 May 2015
2.15-14 21 Nov 2016
2.9-1 31 May 2011
2.16-1 30 Jan 2015
2.9-2 31 May 2011
2.16-2 30 Jan 2015
2.9-3 31 May 2011
2.16-3 30 Jan 2015
2.10-1 28 Feb 2014
2.16-4 30 Jan 2015
2.10-2 27 May 2015
2.17-1 30 Jan 2015
2.10-3 28 Feb 2014
2.17-2 30 Jan 2015
2.10-4 28 Feb 2014
2.17-3 30 Jan 2015
2.10-5 28 Feb 2014
2.17-4 21 Nov 2016
2.10-6 28 Feb 2014
2.17-5 30 Jan 2015
2.10-7 28 Feb 2014
2.17-6 30 Jan 2015
2.10-8 28 Feb 2014
2.17-7 07 Mar 2016

AOM DASH 8-Q400 DOT

02 LEP - Page 2 CHAPTER 2

(Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

2.17-8 07 Mar 2016 2.17-51 07 Mar 2016

2.17-9 07 Mar 2016 2.17-52 07 Mar 2016
2.17-10 07 Mar 2016 2.17-53 07 Mar 2016
2.17-11 07 Mar 2016
2.17-12 07 Mar 2016
2.17.13 07 Mar 2016
2.17-14 07 Mar 2016
2.17-15 07 Mar 2016
2.17-16 07 Mar 2016
2.17-17 07 Mar 2016
2.17-18 07 Mar 2016
2.17-19 07 Mar 2016
2.17-20 07 Mar 2016
2.17-21 07 Mar 2016
2.17-22 07 Mar 2016
2.17-23 21 Nov 2016
2.17-24 07 Mar 2016
2.17-25 21 Nov 2016
2.17-26 21 Nov 2016
2.17-27 21 Nov 2016
2.17-28 21 Nov 2016
2.17-29 07 Mar 2016
2.17-30 07 Mar 2016
2.17-31 07 Mar 2016
2.17-32 07 Mar 2016
2.17-33 07 Mar 2016
2.17-34 07 Mar 2016
2.17-35 07 Mar 2016
2.17-36 07 Mar 2016
2.17-37 07 Mar 2016
2.17-38 07 Mar 2016
2.17-39 07 Mar 2016
2.17-40 21 Nov 2016
2.17-41 07 Mar 2016
2.17-42 07 Mar 2016
2.17-43 07 Mar 2016
2.17-44 21 Nov 2016
2.17-45 07 Mar 2016
2.17-46 07 Mar 2016
2.17-47 07 Mar 2016
2.17-48 21 Nov 2016
2.17-49 07 Mar 2016
2.17-50 07 Mar 2016

DOT
AOM DASH 8-Q400
CHAPTER 2 ToC 2-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

- TABLE OF CONTENTS -

2.0 NORMAL PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................... 2.0-1

2.0.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 2.0-1

2.0.2 General ................................................................................................................................... 2.0-1
2.0.3 Normal Checklists ................................................................................................................... 2.0-3
2.0.4 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) ............................................................................... 2.0-4
2.0.5 Navigation Systems ................................................................................................................ 2.0-4
2.0.6 Standard Callouts ................................................................................................................... 2.0-5

2.1 PRE-FLIGHT .......................................................................................................................... 2.1-1

2.1.1 Exterior and Interior Inspection ............................................................................................... 2.1-1

2.1.2 Exterior Inspection - Walkaround Sequence (TBD) ................................................................ 2.1-2

2.2 PRE-DEPARTURE ................................................................................................................. 2.2-1

2.2.1 Take-off Briefing ...................................................................................................................... 2.2-1

2.2.2 Rejected Take-off Briefing ....................................................................................................... 2.2-1
2.2.3 Flight Director Setup (TBD) .................................................................................................... 2.2-1
2.2.4 Engine Start ............................................................................................................................ 2.2-2

2.3 ALTIMETER SETTING and CHECKING ............................................................................... 2.3-1

2.3.1 Altitude Tolerances ................................................................................................................. 2.3-1

2.4 TAXI and TAKE-OFF .............................................................................................................. 2.4-1

2.4.1 Push Back - Towbar ................................................................................................................ 2.4-1

2.4.2 Push Back - Towbarless ......................................................................................................... 2.4-1
2.4.3 Power Back - Taxi in Reverse ................................................................................................. 2.4-1
2.4.4 Taxiing .................................................................................................................................... 2.4-1
2.4.5 Normal Take-off ...................................................................................................................... 2.4-2
2.4.6 Take-off with Reduced Power ................................................................................................. 2.4-4
2.4-7 Take-off with Maximum Take-off Power and Uptrim Disabled ................................................ 2.4-4
2.4.8 Take-off with Bleeds “ON” ...................................................................................................... 2.4-5
2.4.9 Crosswind Take-off ................................................................................................................. 2.4-5
2.4-10 Operation in Tailwinds between 10 and 20 kt ......................................................................... 2.4-5
2.4.11 Noise Abatement Procedures ................................................................................................. 2.4-5

2.5 CLIMB, CRUISE and DESCENT ............................................................................................ 2.5-1

2.5.1 Normal Climb .......................................................................................................................... 2.5-1

2.5.2 Cruise ..................................................................................................................................... 2.5-1
2.5.3 Descent .................................................................................................................................. 2.5-1
2.5.4 Holding ................................................................................................................................... 2.5-1
2.5.5 Fuel Management ................................................................................................................... 2.5-2

AOM DASH 8-Q400

ToC 2-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

2.6 APPROACH, LANDING PREPARATION and BRIEFING ..................................................... 2.6-1

2.6.1 Approach Briefing .................................................................................................................... 2.6-1
2.6.2 Use of Flaps ............................................................................................................................ 2.6-1
2.6.3 Flight Director Setup (TBD) ..................................................................................................... 2.6-1
2.6.4 Approach with Bleeds “ON” ..................................................................................................... 2.6-1
2.6.5 VFR Approach ......................................................................................................................... 2.6-1
2.6.6 Steep Approach and ILS Raw Data Only Steep Approach ..................................................... 2.6-2
2.6.7 Go-Around from Final Approach ............................................................................................. 2.6-2
2.6.8 Engine Torque Split Between Engines .................................................................................... 2.6-2

2.7 NORMAL LANDING ............................................................................................................... 2.7-1

2.7.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 2.7-1
2.7.2 Landing ................................................................................................................................... 2.7-1
2.7.3 Crosswind Landing Technique ................................................................................................ 2.7-3
2.7.4 Normal Landing in Tailwinds Between 10 and 20 kt ................................................................ 2.7-3
2.7.5 Noise Abatement Procedures (Landing with 850 RPM Propeller) .......................................... 2.7-3
2.7.6 Operation from Unpaved / Gravel Runways ........................................................................... 2.7-3

2.8 POST LANDING ..................................................................................................................... 2.8-1

2.8.1 After Landing ........................................................................................................................... 2.8-1
2.8.2 Shutdown ................................................................................................................................ 2.8-1

2.9 OPERATION ON CONTAMINATED RUNWAYS ................................................................... 2.9-1

2.9.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 2.9-1
2.9.2 Limitations ............................................................................................................................... 2.9-2
2.9.3 Normal Procedures ................................................................................................................. 2.9.2
2.9.4 Performance Data ................................................................................................................... 2.9-3

2.10 FLIGHT PROFILES .............................................................................................................. 2.10-1

Figure 2.10-1 Normal Take-off .............................................................................................. 2.10-1
Figure 2.10-2 Visual Approach and Landing ......................................................................... 2.10-2
Figure 2.10-3 Circling Approach ........................................................................................... 2.10-3
Figure 2.10-4 Precision Approach ......................................................................................... 2.10-4
Table 2.10-1 Precision Approach and Landing Procedures .................................................. 2.10-5
Figure 2.10-5 CAT II Precision Approach .............................................................................. 2.10-6
Table 2.10-2 CAT II Precision Approach and Landing Procedures ....................................... 2.10-7
Figure 2.10-6 Non Precision Approach ................................................................................. 2.10-8
Table 2.10-3 Non Precision Approach and Landing Procedure ............................................ 2.10-9
Figure 2.10-7 Missed Approach .......................................................................................... 2.10-10
Table 2.10-4 Missed Approach Procedure .......................................................................... 2.10-11
Figure 2.10-8 Balked Landing ............................................................................................. 2.10-12
Table 2.10-5 Balked Landing Procedure ............................................................................. 2.10-13

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 ToC 2-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

2.11 AIRWORK and BASIC FLIGHT TECHNIQUES .................................................................... 2.11-1

2.11.1 Steep Turns ........................................................................................................................... 2.11-1

2.12 LOW VISIBILITY OPERATION ............................................................................................ 2.12-1

2.12.1 Category II Operation ........................................................................................................... 2.12-1

2.12.2 Low Visibility Take-off ........................................................................................................... 2.12-2

2.13 GPWS OPERATION ............................................................................................................ 2.13-1

2.13.1 EGPWS (Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System Honeywell MK V) ......................... 2.13-1
2.13.1.1 Flight Compartment Check - Power ON ............................................................................... 2.13-1
2.13.1.2 In-Flight Response to Warnings ........................................................................................... 2.13-1
2.13.1.3 Normal Approach .................................................................................................................. 2.13-3

2.14 TCAS OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 2.14-1

2.14.1 ACAS II / TCAS II ................................................................................................................. 2.14-1

2.14.1.1 ACAS II / TCAS II Operating Characteristics ........................................................................ 2.14-1
2.14.1.2 Traffic Advisory (TA) Announcements .................................................................................. 2.14-1
2.14.1.3 Resolution Advisory (RA) Announcements ........................................................................... 2.14-2
2.14.1.4 In-Flight Use of TCAS ........................................................................................................... 2.14-3

2.14.2 Mode S Transponder System for Elementary and Enhanced Surveillance .......................... 2.14-4
2.14.2.1 Normal Procedures ............................................................................................................... 2.14-4
2.14.2.1.1 Pre-Taxi Checks ................................................................................................................... 2.14-4

2.15 COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS ........................................................................................ 2.15-1

2.15.1 Airplane Contamination on the Ground - Frost, Ice or Snow ................................................ 2.15-1
2.15.2 Ground De-Icing / Anti-Icing ................................................................................................. 2.15-1
2.15.3 De-Icing Procedures ............................................................................................................. 2.15-3
2.15.4 De-Icing and Anti-Icing Fluids ............................................................................................... 2.15-4

2.16 OPERATING IN ICING CONDITIONS ................................................................................. 2.16-1

2.16.1 Taxi ....................................................................................................................................... 2.16-2

2.16.2 Take-Off ................................................................................................................................ 2.16-2
2.16.3 Enroute, Climb, Cruise and Descent .................................................................................... 2.16-3
2.16.4 Holding and Approach .......................................................................................................... 2.16-3
2.16.5 Landing ................................................................................................................................. 2.16-4
2.16.6 Parking ................................................................................................................................. 2.16-4

AOM DASH 8-Q400

ToC 2-4 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

2.17 NORMAL EXPANDED PROCEDURES and CHECKLISTS ............................................. 2.17-1

2.17.1 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION ...................................................................... 2.17-1

2.17.1.1 PREFLIGHT ....................................................................................................................... 2.17-1

2.17.2 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER OFF ............................................. 2.17-1

2.17.2.1 For DC External Power ...................................................................................................... 2.17-2

2.17.2.2 For APU Power .................................................................................................................. 2.17-3
2.17.2.3 For Battery Power Only ..................................................................................................... 2.17-4
2.17.2.4 Start Approved (Battery Power Only) ................................................................................. 2.17-5

2.17.3 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON .............................................. 2.17-7

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

2.0.3 Normal Checklists

2.0.3.1 Use of Checklists
The normal checklists are organized by phase of flight and assume completion of the previous checklist.
An un-shaded box separating procedural steps (i.e. START APPROVED), defines a logical break that allows
partial completion of the checklist until further action is appropriate.
When the required checklist has been completed, the PNF will announce the appropriate checklist complete,
e.g.: "AFTER TAKE-OFF CHECKLIST COMPLETE".
When the response to a particular checklist item is "as req’d" the actual response will be positive and the action
required will be stated, such as: "ON", "OFF", "CLOSED", etc.
Table 2.0-2 Checklist Conduct
Item Action
FLIGHT DECK PREPARATION Read and Do (Flow)
ORIGINATING BEFORE START Challenge and Response
BEFORE START Challenge and Response
AFTER START Challenge and Response
TAXI Read and Do
Challenge and Response (configuration items: flaps,
trims, and condition levers)
LINE UP Read and Do
AFTER TAKE-OFF Read and Do
CRUISE Read and Do
DESCENT Read and Do
APPROACH Read and Do
LANDING Challenge and Response (Landing Gear, Flaps, and
Condition Levers)
Read and Do (remaining items)
AFTER LANDING Read and Do
SHUTDOWN Challenge and Response
LAST FLIGHT Challenge and Response

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.0-4 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.0.4 Auto Flight Control System (AFCS)

2.0.4.1 Flight Director
To reduce crew work load and improve safety, use of the Flight Director / Autopilot is recommended from initial
climb out to final approach. During normal operations the PF should select the Flight Guidance Controller
(FGC) to his or her side. Selected AFCS modes must be confirmed on the PFD’s.
When the PF controls the aeroplane manually, the PNF normally selects the AFCS modes as directed by the
PF.
2.0.4.2 Use of Flight Director
The Flight Director should be used for most phases of flight. When the Flight Director is being used, care must
be taken to ensure it is providing correct commands.
2.0.4.3 Autopilot
When the PF engages or disengages the Autopilot (AP) he or she should announce: "AP ENGAGED" or "AP
DISENGAGED".
When the Autopilot is engaged the PF should control all AFCS modes.
Minimum height for Autopilot engagement after take-off or go-around is 1000 ft AGL.
Select flight guidance modes as required.
AP pushbutton...........................................................................................................................................Press
Check AP advisory pointers illuminate and AP is displayed on PFD’s.

NOTES:
1. In the event of an engine failure disengage the autopilot.
Except for approach, the autopilot may be re-engaged following re-trimming.
2. If HSI transfer is selected, all flight guidance modes will disengage and the autopilot will
revert to basic lateral and pitch modes.
Re-select flight guidance modes as required following HSI transfer.
3. With the autopilot engaged, POWER and SPEED changes may require the pilot to manu-
ally re-trim the rudder. Trimming should be accomplished with TCS button pressed or auto-
pilot disengaged.
4. If FD XXX (NAV or ADC) DATA INVLD message appears on PFD, select an alternative
flight guidance mode or press STBY on FGCP to clear the message.
5. With MS 4-126360 incorporated: To de-select altitude select mode, press and hold the ALT
SEL pushbutton for greater than 1 second.
2.0.4.4 Autopilot Operation in Turbulence
Disengage Autopilot in severe turbulence. The Autopilot is approved for normal operations in light or moderate
turbulence only.
2.0.4.5 Autopilot Approach
Flap should be extended to approach setting 5°, 10° or 15° before glide slope capture on a precision approach
or before commencing final descent to minimum descent altitude (MDA).
2.0.4.6 Altitude Select
Changes of selected altitude should be followed by selection of Altitude Select (ALT SEL) on the FGC (unless
the ALT SEL has already been selected). ALT SEL shall be visually confirmed by both pilots on the PFD’s.

2.0.5 Navigation Systems

NOTE: VOR symbol may not always be visible on the navigation page of the MFD. With FMS off or
not installed, two pushes on the EFCP DATA button are required to return the VOR Navaid
symbol to the NAV page.
2.0.5.1 Flight Management System
For specific FMS operational information, please refer to the respective AFM Supplement and the FMS Opera-
tor’s Manual.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.0-5

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 1] 21 NOV 2011

2.0.6 Standard Callouts

Safety demands that crew members remain aware of airplane position, altitude, and instrument indications
during flight.
One method of achieving this is to adopt a system of standard calls to reduce ambiguity and to minimize con-
versation during critical phases of flight, i.e. take-off, approach and landing.
It is recommended that crews refrain from all non-essential and distracting conversation below 10000 ft ASL.
Tables 2.0-4 to 2.0-7, outline a series of standard calls, which shall be used to enhance safety during VFR and
IFR operations.
The PNF shall make the appropriate call, based on instrument indications or observations for the condition out-
lined in the table and the PF shall verify and acknowledge the call.
If the PNF does not make the required callout, then the PF shall make it.

Table 2.0-4 Standard Call Procedures All Phases Of Flight

2.2.2 Rejected Take-off Briefing

The minimum contents of the RTO Briefing consists of:
- margin to runway limited weight and stop margin available,
- special aspects (i.e. runway contamination, MEL dispatch items concerning RTO, etc.).

2.2.3 Flight Director Setup

- TBD -

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.2-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.2.4 Engine Start

Before Start:
When ready for start, the Commander (PIC) will call for the "BEFORE START CHECKLIST" (Challenge and
Response).
Engine Start
The engines are started by the Commander (PIC) who will communicate with the ground engineer.
The normal start sequence is right engine (#2) then left engine (#1).

Table 2.2-1 Start Procedure

COMMANDER (PIC) FIRST OFFICER (2IC)
Engine START select switch - Pull out then set to 2.
Observes SELECT light illuminates.

Calls "CLEAR #2". Makes sure the area is clear. Calls "#2 CLEAR".
Engine START switch - Press. Make sure START light illu-
minates. Starts stopwatch running to time the start.
NOTE: When conducting an engine start using external
power or the APU, No. 2 engine oil pressure may
momentarily indicate full scale deflection upon
selection of the START switch for No. 1 or No. 2
engine. No. 2 engine oil pressure should immedi-
ately return to normal values.
At first indication of NH:
Sets condition lever to START FEATHER.
NOTE: Fuel flow indication on ED is not accurate until the engine is stable at idle NH.
Check that engine accelerates to above 64.2% NH and ITT does not exceed 920×C.
Check engine START and ENGINE START SELECT switches OFF – observe SELECT and START lights off.
For the appropriate engine, make sure oil pressure is greater than 44 psi, ENG OIL PRESS warning light,
ENG FUEL PRESS and ENG HYD PUMP caution lights off.

NOTES:
1. Engine START light will remain illuminated for approximately 15 seconds after engine
START and SELECT switches off.
2. At low fuel levels, the TANK FUEL LOW caution lights may take up to four minutes to go
out following engine start.
Repeat start procedure for other engine.

NOTE: Silent flight deck procedures require only that non-normal situations be announced during the
Start Procedure.
AFTER START:
Once the engines have started the Commander (PIC) will call for the "AFTER START CHECKLIST" (Chal-
lenge and Response).

NOTE: The "Systems Checks" must be accomplished once every 24 hours by the flight crew.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.3-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

2.3 ALTIMETER SETTING AND CHECKING

The Altimeter Setting for Flights at or below ‘Transition Altitude’ will be the Regional QNH.
Flights conducted above the Transition Altitude shall use the ‘Standard’ Altimeter Setting of 1013 hPa/29.92 in.
After each setting of the altimeters, the readings on the flight deck shall be compared including standby and
metric (if installed) altimeters when these are used.

2.3.1 Altitude Tolerances

The altitude indications on pilot’s and co-pilot’s PFD have to be compared in several phases of flight.
The primary altimeter readouts have to be within 60 ft, below 5000 ft, varying linearly to 170 ft at 25000 ft.
Cross-check with standby altimeter in case of mismatch. With Integrated Standby Instrument (MS 4-432835 or
MS 4-456883) NOT incorporated, the standby altimeter readings have to be within the following tolerances:

IAS (kt)
ALT (ft)
150 or lower VMO

1000 940 - 1060 1050 - 1170

5000 4940 - 5060 5100 - 5220
10000 9900 - 10100 10090 - 10290
15000 14850 - 15150 15240 - 15540
20000 19800 - 20200 20260 - 20660
25000 24750 - 25250 25185 - 25685

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 2 2.4-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.4 TAXI and TAKE-OFF

2.4.1 Push Back – Towbar

The Push Back Manoeuvre is to be performed with Nosewheel Steering switched to off and all 3 green gear
locked down advisory lights illuminated.

2.4.2 Push Back – Towbarless

The Push Back Manoeuvre is to be performed with Nosewheel Steering switched to off.
Operators may continue using the Lektro models 8750 and 8850 towbarless vehicles pending final approval of
the landing gear and airplane structure for the use of towbarless Lektro vehicles.
The use of these towbarless towing vehicles shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s operating
procedures (refer to Ramp Servicing Manual RSM 1-84-2S).
Maximum towing loads / limits must not be exceeded.

2.4.3 Power Back – Taxi in Reverse

For taxiing in reverse use the following procedure:

STEERING Switch .......................................................................................................................... STEERING
Check NOSE STEERING caution light out.

Nosewheel ......................................................................................................................................... Centered

Steering Tiller and Rudder Pedals ................................................................................................... Centered

Do Not use steering tiller or rudder pedals during reverse taxiing.

CAUTION: Exercise extreme care when taxiing in reverse due to the length of the fuselage.

NOTE: Taxiing in reverse should only be conducted on paved surfaces and in crosswinds less than 10
kt

2.4.4 Taxiing

Once the airplane is clear of congested areas, the PIC will call for the “TAXI CHECKLIST” (Read and Do) .
Taxi checks should be completed early enough so as to allow both pilots to monitor their surroundings while
taxiing to the active runway.
The configuration items on the Taxi Checklist will be Challenge and Response, i.e. Flaps, Trims and Condition
Levers.
If carrying passengers, the senior cabin crew member will come to the flight compartment and report “CABIN
SECURE” for departure.
Take-off clearance will not be accepted until a “CABIN SECURE” has been received.
During the line-up check, notify the cabin crew that take-off is imminent.

2.4.4.1 Operation from Unpaved / Gravel Runways

At the option of the operator, the aircraft may be operated on unpaved / gravel airfields in accordance with the
limitations and procedures contained in this volume and AFM Supplements 25 and 26.

Ground running and taxiing:

POWER Levers ................................................................... Not forward of mid way between FLIGHT IDLE
and DISC when the aircraft is stationary

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.4-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.4.5 Normal Take-off

2.4.5.1 General

2.4.5.2 Line-Up Check

Once the airplane has been cleared onto the active runway, the PIC calls for the “LINE-UP CHECK” (Read and
Do).
Line-up checks should be done as early as possible, after being cleared to line up on the active runway, to
allow flight attendants to be seated and both pilots to monitor runway surroundings before and while entering
the active runway.
When aligned, the PF will move his or her hand to the control wheel.

2.4.11.1 Initial Climb-out for Noise Abatement

Unless national or local regulations prescribe other noise abatement procedures the following shall apply:
• Climb to 1,500 ft above airfield elevation at normal take-off power (take-off flaps/V2 + 10 kt),
• at 1,500 ft reduce to max. climb power and increase to V2 + 20 kt,
• at 3000 ft initiate flap retraction and accelerate to en-route climb speed.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 2 2.5-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.5 CLIMB, CRUISE AND DESCENT

2.5.1 Normal Climb

During the climb, both pilots will monitor the power.
The normal climb speed profile is Type II - 185 kt to FL 200 then reduced by approximately 5 kt for every 1,000
ft thereafter.
• Refer to Sub-Chapter 5.4, Climb (Time, Distance, Fuel), for appropriate climb profile.

2.5.2 Cruise
.
Table 2.5-1 Climb And Cruise Procedures
PF PNF
At Transition Altitude
"TRANSITION, Altimeter Set 1013/29.92"
“1013/29.92 SET AND CROSS CHECKED”
After reaching cruise altitude and speed
"CRUISE CHECKLIST"
Sets cruise power and completes the “CRUISE
CHECKLIST” (Read and Do)
“CRUISE CHECKLIST COMPLETE”

2.5.3 Descent
Prior to commencing the descent it is recommended that landing information be obtained through ATC (ATIS if
available), and the Approach Briefing completed.
The Descent Checklist is normally called for when initiating the descent for landing.
Normal Descent Profile is flown at VMO.
Select the SEAT BELT sign ON through 10,000 feet. This will advise the cabin crew the aeroplane is descend-
ing for landing. Once the cabin is secure, the senior cabin crew member will come to the flight deck and advise
“CABIN SECURE”. Once the aeroplane is on final approach, two chimes (fasten belts switch) will be sounded
to advise the cabin crew that landing is imminent.
Table 2.5-2 Descent Procedures
PF PNF
"DESCENT CHECKLIST"
Completes “DESCENT CHECKLIST” (Read and
Do)
“DESCENT CHECKLIST COMPLETE”
At transition level
“TRANSITION, <Current Altimeter Setting>”
“<Current Altimeter Setting> SET AND CROSS
CHECKED”

2.5.4 Holding
Refer to Sub-Chapter 5.10, Holding.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.5-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.5.5 Fuel Management

2.5.5.1 Normal Fuel Operation
1. Fuel TRANSFER switch.......................................................................................................................... OFF
Check both VALVE CLOSED appear on the FUEL page of MFD.
2. TANK 1 AUX PUMP and TANK 2 AUX PUMP switches ......................OFF (except for take-off and landing)
Check TANK 1 AUX PUMP ON and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory lights out and TANK 1 AUX PUMP
and TANK 2 AUX PUMP indication OFF, on FUEL page of MFD.
2.5.5.2 Fuel Transfer
TRANSFER FROM TANK 1 TO TANK 2:
1. Fuel TRANSFER switch............................................................................................................... TO TANK 2
Check both VALVE OPEN, TO TANK 2 TRANSFER SW arrow and TANK 1 AUX PUMP indication appears
on the FUEL page of MFD, and TANK 1 AUX PUMP ON advisory light illuminates.
At completion of transfer:

2. Fuel TRANSFER switch.......................................................................................................................... OFF

Check both VALVE CLOSED indicators appear, TO TANK 2 TRANSFER SW arrow and TANK 1 AUX
PUMP indication OFF on the FUEL page of MFD, and TANK 1 AUX PUMP ON advisory light out.
TRANSFER FROM TANK 2 TO TANK 1:
1. Fuel TRANSFER switch............................................................................................................... TO TANK 1
Check both VALVE OPEN, TO TANK 1 TRANSFER SW arrow and TANK 2 AUX PUMP indication appears
on the FUEL page of MFD, and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory light illuminates.
At completion of transfer:
2. Fuel TRANSFER switch.......................................................................................................................... OFF
Check both VALVE CLOSED indicators appear, TO TANK 1 TRANSFER SW arrow and TANK 2 AUX
PUMP indication OFF on the FUEL page of MFD, and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory light out.

NOTES:
1. For monitoring of the fuel state, the FUEL page of MFD is to remain displayed until the fuel
TRANSFER switch is selected off.
2. Maximum fuel imbalance is indicated by the FUEL quantity readout on ED and fuel gauge
pointers on FUEL page of MFD changing from white to amber and [BALANCE] appears,
flashing on ED.
3. If TANK 1 QTY or TANK 2 QTY is inoperative, the [BALANCE] advisory is also inoperative.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.6-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

2.6 APPROACH, LANDING PREPARATION AND BRIEFING

2.6.1 Approach Briefing

The Approach Briefing is a plan of action for the approach, landing and possible missed approach. Proper
planning will normally permit the Approach Briefing to be accomplished prior to entering busy terminal air-
space.

NOTE: Approaching destination, the crew shall re-evaluate the weather situation and recalculate the
required landing distance.
The Approach Briefing will be given by the PF and should consist of at least the following:
1. Terrain situation (MEA, MGA)
2. Type of approach/RWY in use
3. Radio/Nav set up
4. Minimum Sector Altitude
5. Initial Approach Altitude/Descent point
6. Runway condition/landing distance
7. Special aspects (e.g. taxi procedure, system malfunctions,...).
Following items shall be briefed “by heart”:
1. Final Altitude
2. MDA/Descent Altitude/Decision Height
3. Missed Approach Procedure including Missed Approach Point.
The approach speed is based on the minimum speed which can be flown with approach flap configuration
(VAPP = 1.23 VSR with approach flap). Landing speeds are based on the minimum speed which can be flown
with the landing flap configuration (VREF = 1.23 VSR with landing flap).

NOTE: The solid bug is set to VREF and the outline bug is set to VGA.
The Approach Check should be initiated not less than 25 nautical miles prior to commencing the approach, or
through 10000 ft.

2.6.2 Use of Flaps

The flap setting for landing may either be 10°, 15° or 35°. The flap setting is confirmed by checking the flap
indication on the #2 MFD.

2.6.3 Flight Director Setup (TBD)

2.6.4 Approach with Bleeds “ON”

This procedure corresponds to Supplement 21 of the AFM.
BLEED selector ............................................................................................................................................ MIN
BLEED 1 and BLEED 2 switches ................................................................................ BLEED 1 and BLEED 2

2.6.5 VFR Approach

For a normal visual approach under VFR conditions refer to figure 2-2 on page 2.10-2.
Table 2.6-1 Approach Procedure
PF PNF
“APPROACH CHECKLIST”
Completes “APPROACH CHECKLIST” (Read and
Do)
“APPROACH CHECKLIST COMPLETE”

NOTE: For the different approach procedures refer to chapter 2.10.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.6-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.6.6 Steep Approach and ILS Raw Data Only Steep Approach
(MS 4-456970 or MS 4-309206)
These procedures correspond to Supplement 12 and 45 of the AFM
2.6.6.1 General
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (Supplement 64) must be incorporated.

NOTE: This procedure does not constitute approval to conduct steep approach and landing.
IN RANGE
GPWS LDG FLAP switch .................................................................................................................. Select 35°
Check 35° advisory light illuminates.
APPROACH
Prior to glide path intercept:
LANDING GEAR Lever .................................................................................................................................. DN
Check 3 green gear locked down advisory lights illuminate, all amber doors open, red gear unlocked and
LANDING GEAR lever advisory lights out.
FLAPS lever ................................................................................................................................................... 35°
FLAP 35° APPROACH switch .................................................................................................................STEEP
Check STEEP advisory light illuminates.
Condition levers ................................................................................................................................ MAX/1020

2.6.7 Go-Around from Final Approach

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. MAX / 1020
POWER Levers ......................................................................................................Advance to RATING detent
Check normal take-off setting. Observe torque matches the torque bug.
Pitch attitude........................................................................................................ Rotate to approximately 10°
FLAPS Lever ................................................................................................................................. 5°, 10° or 15°
Check FLAP indication on #2MFD.
Minimum airspeed ................................................................................. Go-around speed Flap 5°, 10° or 15°
Positive rate of Climb:
LANDING GEAR Lever .................................................................................................................................. UP
Check all gear, door and LANDING GEAR Lever advisory lights out.
When clear of obstacle:
Minimum airspeed .................................................................................................. Final take-off climb speed
FLAPS Lever .......................................................................................................0° at flap retraction initiation
Speed flap ..................................................................................................................................... 5°, 10° or 15°
Check FLAP indication on #2MFD.

2.6.8 Engine Torque Split Between Engines

At low engine power settings, normally associated with descent and approach, an indicated torque difference
between the two engines is not considered abnormal.
The degree of torque difference will depend on the engine gas generator matching, accuracy of POWER lever
matching and the ambient operating conditions.
The torque difference will be more pronounced if one engine is operating with its Handling Bleed-off Valve
(HBOV) open while the other engine is operating with its HBOV closed.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.7-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.7 NORMAL LANDING

2.7.1 General
At or prior to reaching the point where the aircraft will be maneuvered for final approach and landing, the air-
craft will normally be configured at Flap 5.
On final approach, the PF is to, at their discretion, command the landing gear, flaps and condition levers to the
required position for the subsequent landing. Once the aircraft is configured for landing, the PF is to call for the
"LANDING CHECKLIST" (Challenge and Response).

2.7.2 Landing
When established on final approach:
Landing Gear ................................................................................................................................. DN / 3 Green
Check 3 green gear locked down advisory lights are illuminated, all amber doors open, red gear unlocked and
selector lever advisory lights out.
Flap Selector...................................................................................................................................___ Set / ind
Move the flap selector to the detent for the desired approach flap (Flap 15° or 10° or 5° depending on approach
climb WAT requirements). Check flap indication on #2 MFD.
Condition Levers.........................................................................................................................................MAX
Move Condition Levers to the MAX detent (if using Reduced NP for landing, first press the RDC NP button on
the Engine Control panel then move the Condition Levers to MAX within 15 sec).
Minimum Airspeed ................................................................................................................. Approach Speed
Reduce to approach speed.
Bleed Air 1 and 2 .........................................................................................................................MIN / As req’d
Set Bleed selector to MIN and Bleed 1 and 2 switches Off (Bleed 1 and 2 switches remain On if conducting a
"Bleed On" landing).
Flap Selector...................................................................................................................................___ Set / ind
Move the flap selector to the detent for the desired landing flap (Flap 35° or 15° or 10° depending on landing
WAT requirements). Check flap indication on #2 MFD.
Minimum Airspeed ......................................................................................................................................VREF
Reduce airspeed to VREF then fly a stable approach with small corrections regarding control inputs and power
to maintain runway centerline and glidepath.
NOTE: The landing performance given in Sub-Chapter 4.4, assumes that the appropriate VREF is
achieved by 50 ft AGL.
Commence flare and adjust power to achieve positive ground contact with minimum descent rate at the
desired point on the runway.
POWER Levers ............................................................................................FLIGHT IDLE prior to touchdown
then DISC after touchdown
• Check PROPELLER GROUND RANGE advisory lights illuminate.
• Check ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD SPOILER advisory lights on at mainwheel contact.

CAUTION: Pitch attitudes greater than 6° in the landing flare may cause the fuselage to contact the
runway.

NOTES: 1. To decrease the landing descent rate and not exceed a pitch attitude of 6° when the landing
descent rate is higher than desired, power will be required in the landing flare through to
touchdown.

2. To decrease the landing descent rate at airport altitudes greater than 5000 ft, it may be
necessary to maintain power in the landing flare through to touchdown.
The nosewheel should be promptly brought into contact with the ground following mainwheel contact.
Anti-Skid Brakes .................................................................................................................................. As req’d
Apply Anti-Skid braking as required to decelerate the aircraft within the available runway.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.7-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

Table 2.7-1 Approach and Landing Procedure

PF PNF
“FLAP 5” Confirms at or below VFE
Selects Flap 5°
Established on Final Approach
“GEAR DOWN” Confirms at or below VLO
Selects Landing Gear DOWN
Observes gear down lights illuminate
“FLAP 15” (or 5° or 10° if WAT limited) Confirms at or below VFE
Selects Flap 15° (5° or 10°)
“CONDITION LEVERS MAX” or
“REDUCED NP, CONDITION LEVERS MAX”
Sets Condition Levers to MAX detent
"SET" or
Selects RDC NP switch
Sets Condition Levers to MAX detent
Observes RDC NP LANDING on ED
Calls "REDUCED NP, CONDITION LEVERS SET"
“LANDING CHECKLIST” Completes Landing Checklist.
(Challenge and Response)
“LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE” (see note below)
If Landing Flap is Not Selected:
“FLAP 35” (or 15° or 10° if WAT limited) Selects flap 35° (or 15° or 10°)
Observes flap travel to required setting
“FLAP 10, 15 or 35 INDICATING”
NOTE: When a different flap setting is used for landing from that used for approach, the PF will call for
the “LANDING CHECKLIST” prior to landing flap selection.
At completion of the checklist the PNF will call:
“LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE – FLAP 10, 15 or 35 TO GO”.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.7-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.7.3 Crosswind Landing Technique

Crosswind landing is based on the steady state wing down / zero crab technique, i.e. approach and touch
down with upwind wing lowered, using rudder to align airplane with runway.
Following touch down hold nosewheel on runway with elevators and use lateral control to inhibit any upwind
wing lifting.

2.7.4 Normal Landing in Tailwinds between 10 and 20 kt

2.7.4.1 General
At the option of the operator, landings in tailwinds between 10 and 20 kts may be conducted in accordance with
the limitations, procedures and performance data contained in the respective chapters of this AOM and AFM
Supplement 3.

NOTE: Maintain the appropriate VREF airspeed throughout the approach and the landing.
The landing flare angle will be less than that required for a normal, into wind landing.

2.7.5 Noise Abatement Procedures

(Landing with 850 RPM Propeller)
2.7.5.1 General
At the option of the operator, approach and landing with 850 NP may be conducted in accordance with the lim-
itations, procedures and performance data contained in the respective Chapters of this AOM and AFM Supple-
ment 39.

2.7.5.2 Reduced NP Landing

Condition Levers................................................................................................................................. MIN / 850
RDC NP LDG Switch ................................................................................................................................. Press
Check REDUCED NP LANDING message appears on ED.
Condition Levers.........................................................................................................................................MAX
Check PROP RPM on ED remain at 850 RPM.

NOTE: Reduced NP Landing mode will be cancelled if condition levers are not set to MAX / 1020
within 15 s of selecting RDC NP LDG switch.
Required power lever movements will be larger with condition levers set to 850 RPM than experienced at
MAX/1020 during the final approach and landing phase, to achieve the same result.

2.7.6 Operation from Unpaved / Gravel Runways

2.7.6.1 General
At the option of the operator, landings on unpaved/gravel runways may be conducted in accordance with the
limitations, procedures and performance data contained in the respective chapters of this AOM and AFM Sup-
plement 26.
2.7.6.2 Landing
Below 30 KIAS and on detection of mainwheel skidding:
Reduce maximum braking effort to an intermittent brake application with the duration of each application
approximately 1 s and intervals of reduced braking as brief as possible.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 2 2.8-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015

2.8 POST LANDING

2.8.1 After Landing

On roll-out, the Left Seat (LS) pilot will call for control at approximately 60 kt.

Once clear of the runway, the Right Seat (RS) pilot completes the after landing checklist.

Table 2.8-1 After Landing Procedure

Captain (PIC - LS) First Officer (F/O - RS)

At approximately 60 kt
“I HAVE CONTROL”
“YOU HAVE CONTROL”
Once clear of runway
“AFTER LANDING CHECKLIST”
Completes “AFTER LANDING CHECKLIST”
(Read and Do)
Responds
“AFTER LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE”

2.8.2 Shutdown

As the airplane approaches the gate / parking spot, the PIC will select the TAXI light OFF.

Once the airplane is stopped, the PIC will:

EMERG BRAKE ....................................................................................................................................... PARK

Call for “SHUTDOWN CHECKLIST” (Challenge and Response).

NOTE: If using ground power or APU, ensure that it is on line prior to shutting down both engines.
For all shutdowns allow the engines to run for 30 s at START / FEATHER before selecting
FUEL OFF.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 2 2.9-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.10 FLIGHT PROFILES

Figure 2.10-1 Normal Take-off

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.10-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

Table 2.10-1 Precision Approach and Landing Procedure

PF PNF
Approaching the initial approach fix or on radar vectors to intercept the final approach course:
“FLAP 5”
Confirms VFE
Selects Flap 5°
Observes flap travels to 5°
At approximately one and a half (1.5) dots below
glideslope
“GEAR DOWN” Confirms VLO
Selects gear down
Observes gear down lights
At approximately one (1) dot below glideslope
“FLAP 15” (or 10° or 5° if WAT limited) Confirms VFE
Selects requested flap angle
Observes flap travels to required setting
“CONDITION LEVERS MAX” or
“REDUCED NP CONDITION LEVERS MAX” Sets Condition Levers to MAX detent
or
Selects RDC NP switch
Sets Condition Levers to MAX detent
Observes RDC NP LANDING on ED
“LANDING CHECKLIST”
Conducts landing checklist (Challenge and
Response)
“LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE”
(see note below)
Outer Marker (or FAF) inbound
“<FAF NAME>” (i.e. “JULIET”)
“<GLIDESLOPE CHECK ALTITUDE>” (i.e. “1830”)
“CROSSCHECK”
“FLAP 35” (or 10° or 15° if WAT limited) Confirms VFE
Selects requested flap angle
Observes flap travels to required setting
“FLAP ___ INDICATING”
“100 ABOVE” (minimums)
“CONTINUING”
At decision height
“MINIMUMS VISUAL”
“LANDING”
or
“MINIMUMS NO CONTACT”
“GO AROUND, CHECK POWER”
(see “Missed Approach Procedure” on page 2.10-10)

NOTE: When a different flap setting is used for landing from that used for approach, the PF will call for
the “LANDING CHECKLIST” prior to landing flap selection.
At completion of the checklist the PNF will call “LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE – FLAP
15 or 35 TO GO”.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.10-6 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

Figure 2.10-5 CAT II Precision Approach

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.10-7

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

Table 2.10-2 CAT II Precision Approach and Landing Procedure

PF PNF
Approaching the initial approach fix or on radar vectors to intercept the final approach course:
“FLAP 5”
Confirms VFE
Selects Flap 5°
Observes flap travels to 5°
At approximately one and a half (1.5) dots below
glideslope
“GEAR DOWN” Confirms at or below VLO
Selects gear down
Observes gear down lights
At approximately one (1) dot below glideslope
“FLAP 15” (or 10° if WAT limited) Confirms VFE
Selects requested flap angle
Observes flap travels to required setting
“CONDITION LEVERS MAX”
Sets Condition Levers to MAX detent
“LANDING CHECKLIST”
Conducts landing checklist (Challenge and
Response)
“LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE”
(see note below)
Outer marker (or FAF) inbound:
“<FAF NAME>” (i.e. “JULIET”)
“<GLIDESLOPE CHECK ALTITUDE>” (i.e. “1830”)
“CROSSCHECK”
At 1200 ft RA
“DUAL”
“CHECK”
“100 ABOVE” (minimums)
“CONTINUING”
At decision height “MINIMUMS VISUAL”
“LANDING” or
“MINIMUMS NO CONTACT”
“GO-AROUND, CHECK POWER”
(see “Missed Approach Procedure” on page 2.10-10)

NOTE: CAT II Approach and Landing are approved using flap 10° or 15° only.
Autopilot must be disengaged at or above 100 ft.
Airplane must be in landing configuration prior to final approach fix.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.10-8 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

Figure 2.10-6 Non-Precision Approach

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.10-9

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

Table 2.10-3 Non-Precision Approach And Landing Procedure

PF PNF
Approaching the initial approach fix or on radar vectors to intercept the final approach course:
“FLAP 5” Confirms VFE
Selects Flap 5°
Observes flap travels to 5°
Prior to Final Approach Fix inbound:
“GEAR DOWN” Confirms at or below VLO
Selects Landing Gear DOWN
Observes gear down lights
“FLAP 15” (or 10° or 5° if WAT limited) Confirms VFE
Selects requested flap angle
Observes flap travels to required setting
“CONDITION LEVERS MAX” or
“REDUCED NP CONDITION LEVERS MAX” Sets Condition Levers to MAX detent
or
Selects RDC NP switch
Sets Condition Levers to MAX detent
Observes RDC NP LANDING on ED
“LANDING CHECKLIST” Conducts landing checklist (Challenge and
Response)
“LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE” (see note
below)
Final Approach Fix (Inbound):
Starts timing (if required)
“<FAF NAME>” (i.e. “JULIET”)
“CROSSCHECK”
“100 ABOVE” (minimums)
“CONTINUING”
At MDA
“MINIMUMS __ SECONDS TO GO”
If runway environment is in sight
“VISUAL __ O’CLOCK”
“LANDING”
“FLAP 35” (or 15° or 10° if WAT limited) Confirms VFE
Selects requested flap angle
Observes flap travels to required setting
“FLAP ___ INDICATING”
At the missed approach point
“MISSED APPROACH POINT”
“GO-AROUND, CHECK POWER” (see “Missed
Approach Procedure” on page 2.10-10)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.10-10 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

Figure 2.10-7 Missed Approach

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.10-11

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

Table 2.10-4 Missed Approach Procedure

PF PNF
Simultaneously:
Advances power levers to detent, presses GA button
(as required) and rotates the nose of the aircraft to
approximately 10°
“GO-AROUND, CHECK POWER” Sets Condition Levers to MAX
Sets POWER Levers, checks NTOP power setting on ED
and observes torque matches the torque bugs
“POWER SET”
If landing flap selected:
“FLAP 15” (or 10° or 5° depending upon landing flap
setting) Selects flap as requested
Maintains a minimum airspeed of not less than VGA Observes positive rate
“POSITIVE RATE”
“GEAR UP” Selects Landing Gear Lever UP
“HDG/ALT SELECT” (see Note 1) Selects HDG, ALT SEL and confirms correct altitude
selected
“HDG AND ALT SEL SELECTED”
At a minimum of 400 feet AGL (or obstacle clearance
height)
“___ FEET” (or obstacle clearance height)
“FLAP 0, BLEEDS ON”
Confirms speed VFRI or above
Selects Flap to 0°
Selects Bleeds - ON / NORM
“CLIMB POWER, 900 (or 850 MCL)” Sets Condition Levers to 900 RPM detent (or 850
RPM detent then the MCL button).
Checks MCL power setting on ED
“CLIMB POWER SET”
Climbs to at least 1000 feet AGL and accelerates to
climb speed
“SET IAS ___” (as required) Sets Flight Director (as requested)
“IAS SET ___”

NOTES:
1. Heading and Altitude Select should only be used after GA-MODE has been selected.
2. The PNF will advise ATC of the missed approach once the airplane is established in the
climb.
3. If carrying passengers the PIC will make a P.A. or request that the Senior Cabin Crew
Member do it on his or her behalf.
4. The PF will call for the “AFTER TAKE-OFF CHECKLIST” (Read and Do) at his / her
discretion once the airplane is established in the climb and clear of busy terminal airspace
(minimum 1,000 ft AGL.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.10-12 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

Figure 2.10-8 Balked Landing

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.10-13

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

Table 2.10-5 Balked Landing Procedure

PF PNF
Simultaneously:
Advances power levers to detent, presses GA button (as
required) and rotates the nose of the aircraft to
approximately 10°
“GO-AROUND, CHECK POWER” Sets Condition Levers to MAX
Sets POWER Levers, checks NTOP power setting
on ED and observes torque matches the torque
bugs
“POWER SET”
If landing flap selected:
“FLAP 15” (or 10° or 5° depending upon landing flap set-
ting) Selects flap as requested
Maintains a minimum airspeed of not less than VGA Observes positive rate
“POSITIVE RATE”
“GEAR UP” Selects Landing Gear Lever UP
“HDG/ALT SELECT” (see Note 1) Selects HDG, ALT SEL and confirms correct
altitude selected
“HDG AND ALT SEL SELECTED”
At a minimum of 400 feet AGL (or obstacle
clearance height)
“___ FEET” (or obstacle clearance height)
“FLAP 0, BLEEDS ON”
Confirms speed VFRI or above
Selects Flap to 0°
Selects Bleeds - ON / NORM
“CLIMB POWER, 900 (or 850 MCL)” Sets Condition Levers to 900 RPM detent (or
850 RPM detent then the MCL button).
Checks MCL power setting on ED
“CLIMB POWER SET”
Climbs to at least 1,000 feet AGL and accelerates to climb
speed
“SET IAS ___” (as required) Sets Flight Director (as requested)
“IAS SET ___”

NOTES:
1. Heading and Altitude Select should only be used after GA-MODE has been selected.
2. The PNF will advise ATC of the Balked approach once the aeroplane is established in the
climb.
3. If carrying passengers the PIC will make a PA or request that the Senior Cabin Crew
Member do it on his or her behalf.
4. The PF will call for the “AFTER TAKE-OFF CHECKLIST” (Read and Do) at his / her dis-
cretion once the airplane is established in the climb and clear of busy terminal airspace
(minimum 1,000 ft AGL.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 2 2.11-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.11 AIRWORK and BASIC FLIGHT TECHNIQUES

2.11.1 Steep Turns

2.11.1.1 Objective

This maneuver familiarizes the pilot with airplane handling characteristics and helps to improve the instrument
cross check.

2.11.1.2 Description

Steep Turns (45° of bank) will be practiced in both directions at 180 kt.

Apply back pressure, as required, to maintain altitude and increase torque, as required, to maintain airspeed.

Power settings during Steep Turns are the responsibility of the PF.

The PF has the option to use the PNF to set power.

However, it is essential that very precise calls be made, e.g. “increase power 10%”.

2.11.1.3 Entry

Stabilize the airplane in trim at the desired speed, heading and altitude.

Enter the Steep Turn with the same roll rate as a normal turn.

As bank angle is increased apply back pressure as required to maintain altitude and increase power as
required to maintain airspeed.

2.11.1.4 During Turn

Maintain a rapid scan so that deviations will be detected early enough to require only small corrections.

2.11.1.5 Rollout

Rollout should be initiated 10° to 15° prior to target heading.

Roll out of the turn at the same rate as a normal turn.

As bank angle is decreased reduce back pressure as required to maintain altitude and decrease power as
required to maintain airspeed.

2.11.1.6 Completion Standard

For the purposes of determining proficiency, two 360° Steep Turns (one in each direction) will be conducted to
the following standard:

Airspeed (180 kt)  10 kt

Bank Angle (45°)  5°
Altitude  100 ft
Heading  10°

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.11-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

Figure 2.11-1 Steep Turns

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.11-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

2.11.2 Steep Turns

2.11.2.1 Objective
This maneuver familiarizes the pilot with aeroplane handling characteristics and helps to improve the instru-
ment cross check.
2.11.2.2 Description
Steep turns (45° of bank) will be practiced in both directions at various airspeeds with Condition Levers set at
1020 RPM. Apply back pressure, as required, to maintain altitude and increase torque, as required, to maintain
airspeed.
Power settings during steep turns are the responsibility of the PF. The PF has the option to use the PNF to set
power. However, it is essential that very precise calls be made, e.g.: “increase power 10%”.
2.11.2.3 Entry
Stabilize the aeroplane in trim at the desired speed, heading and altitude. Enter the steep turn with the same
roll rate as a normal turn. As bank angle is increased apply back pressure as required to maintain altitude and
increase power as required to maintain airspeed.
2.11.2.4 During Turn
Maintain a rapid scan so that deviations will be detected early enough to require only small corrections.
2.11.2.5 Rollout
Rollout should be initiated 10° to 15° prior to target heading. Roll out of the turn at the same rate as a normal
turn. As bank angle is decreased reduce back pressure as required to maintain altitude, and decrease power
as required to maintain airspeed.
2.11.2.6 Completion Standard
For the purposes of determining proficiency, two 360° steep turns (one in each direction) will be conducted to
the following standard:
Airspeed (170 knots) ±10 knots
Angle of bank (45°) ±5°
Altitude ±100 ft
Heading ±10°

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.11-4 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 NORMAL PROCEDURES

DURING TURN
1. MAINTAIN RAPID SCAN FOR EARLY
DETECTION OF DEVIATION
2. APPLY CORRECTIONS AS REQUIRED
3. MAINTAIN 45 DEGREES OF BANK
ENTRY

1. THROUGH 30 DEGREES,
INCREASE BACK PRESSURE
TO MAINTAIN ALTITUDE
2. INCREASE POWER AS
REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN ROLL OUT
AIRSPEED
1. ANTICIPATE ROLL OUT BY 15 DEGREES
OF HEADING
2. ROLL OUT RATE SHOULD BE AT A
NORMAL ROLL RATE
3. THROUGH 30 DEGREES OF BANK,
PRIOR TO ENTRY DECREASE BACK PRESSURE TO MAINTAIN
1. SET CONDITION LEVERS ALTITUDE AND DECREASE POWER TO
TO 1,020/MAX MAINTAIN AIRSPEED
2. STABILIZE AIRPLANE IN
TRIM AT DESIRED
AIRSPEED, HEADING AND
ALTITUDE

Figure 2.11-2 Steep Turns

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.12-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016

2.12 LOW VISIBILITY OPERATION

2.12.1 Category II Operation

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to Supplement 16 of the AFM.

2.12.1.1 General

The general information in Chapter 0 is applicable with the addition of the following:

The Q400 has been shown to meet the performance criteria of JAR-AWO Subpart 2 for Category II Flight Direc-
tor and Autopilot approaches with the following equipment or later standards:

Description Part Number Model Number Quantity

066-01101-0060 or VN-411B
VHF NAV Receiver 2
400-048500-0105 CVN-251
C12429AA05 or
Flight Guidance Module C12429AA06 or
IMS-100 2
(FGM) C12429AA07 or
C12429AA08
066-01153-0101 or
Radio Altimeter 822-0615-102 or KRA-405B
1
(RA) 822-0615-312 or ALT-4000
822-0615-316
C17053AB02 or
Air Data Unit
C17053AC03 or ADU-3008 2
(ADU)
C17053AD04
420-00332-501 or
Attitude and Heading Reference Unit APIRS-207
261500123-0501 or 2
(AHRU) APIRS-F207
261500123-2501
C19190AB03 or
C19190AB04 or
C19190AB05 or
C19190AB06 or
C19190AB07 or
C19190AB08 or
Electronic Indication System
C19190AC07 or SMD68 5
(EIS)
C19190AC08 or
C19190BB08 or
C19190BC08 or
C19190BD08 or
C19190BE08 or
C19190BE09
C12432AA03 or
C12432AA04 or
C12432AA05 or
Input / Output Processor IMS-100 2
C12432AA06 or
C12432AB07 or
C12432AB09
Windshield Wipers 2

NOTE: This Sub-Shapter does not constitute operational approval to conduct Category II Approaches

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.12-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 17] 30 JUN 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.12.1.2 Limitations

The limitations in Chapter 1 are applicable with the addition of the following:
1. An ILS approach to Category II minimums must not be commenced or an approach continued unless the
above airborne equipment, associated control panels and ground installations are operating satisfactorily.
2. An ILS approach to Category II minimums must not be continued if the DUAL FD message does not
appear on both PFDs by 1100 ft radio altitude.
3. Category II approaches are limited to using flap 10° and 15° only for landing.
4. Airplane must be in the landing configuration prior to the final approach fix.
5. Autopilot Category II approaches in a crosswind component exceeding 18 kt or tailwind component
exceeding 10 kt or headwind component exceeding 24 kt are prohibited.
6. Flight Director only Category II approaches in a crosswind component exceeding 10 kt or tailwind compo-
nent exceeding 10 kt or headwind component exceeding 10 kt are prohibited.
7. Category II approaches must be discontinued in the event of engine failure before or during landing
approach.
8. Category II approaches are limited to glideslope angles of 2.5° to a maximum of 3.5°.
9. The autopilot must be disengaged at or above a minimum altitude of 100 ft AGL.

2.12.1.3 CAT II Approach and Landing

The normal procedures in this chapter are applicable with the addition of the following:
1. Ensure Decision Height (DH) is set on both PFDs prior to commencement of final approach.
2. Observe that the DUAL FD message appears on both PFDs by 1100 ft radio altitude.
3. Disengage autopilot at or above 100 ft AGL.

2.12.1.4 Procedures after Failures / Warnings in CAT II Approach

CAT II FAIL ANNUNCIATION OR NO DUAL FD ANNUNCIATION

1. Discontinue CATEGORY II approach.

2.12.2 Low Visibility Take-Off

PIC - T/O Scanning is primarily head up with brief instrument reference until VR, then head down
2IC - Scanning is primarily head down with brief outside looking until V1.

These procedures are additional to the normal duties of PIC and 2IC during take-off.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.13-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 7] 7 MAR 2013

2.13 GPWS OPERATION

2.13.1 EGPWS - Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System Honeywell MK V

(Option - CR 831 CH 00064 or CR 831 SO 90180)

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to Supplement 64 of the AFM.

2.13.1.1 Flight Compartment Check - Power ON

# 1 NAV Receiver.......................................................................... Operative and Tuned to a VOR Frequency
FMS 1...................................................................................................................................... On and Initialized
FLAP Selector Lever ....................................................................................................................................... 0°
EFCP................................................................................................................................Select NAV and TERR
GPWS FLAP OVERRIDE Switch .................................................................................... Normal and Guarded
GPWS Caution Light .....................................................................................................................................Out
PULL UP - GPWS TEST Switch.......................................................................................... Press Momentarily
Check that the GPWS caution light, BELOW G/S and PULL UP advisory lights illuminate and
the “GLIDESLOPE”, “PULL UP” and “TERRAIN PULL UP” voice warnings are audible and
a “TERRAIN TEST” and the terrain test pattern is displayed on the MFDs.

NOTE: Pressing PULL UP - GPWS TEST switch for longer than 3 s result in a long self test which
annunciates all configured and activated alert voices, including warning voices, caution voices
and altitude voices.

2.13.1.2 In-Flight Response to Warnings

1. Whenever the:
- “SINK RATE”
- “TERRAIN TERRAIN"
- “DON’T SINK”
- “TOO LOW - FLAPS”
- “TOO LOW - GEAR”
- “CAUTION TERRAIN”
- “CAUTION OBSTACLE”
- “BANK ANGLE”
- “GLIDESLOPE”
aural warnings are heard, take appropriate action to correct the unsafe condition.

2. Whenever the:
- “TOO LOW - TERRAIN”
- “TERRAIN PULL UP”
- “OBSTACLE PULL UP”
- urgent “PULL UP”
aural warnings are heard, immediately establish the power setting and attitude which will produce the max-
imum climb gradient consistent with the airplane configuration.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.13-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

Table 2.13-1 - Windshear Recovery / Terrain Avoidance Procedure

PF PNF
Commands
“WIDSHEAR (TERRAIN) MAX POWER”
Sets Condition Levers to MAX
Simultaneously selects GA, advances Power Follows up on Power Levers to set NTOP
Levers towards NTOP, rolls wings level then Calls “POWER SET”
smoothly rotates aircraft to GA altitude Monitors radar altimetre and IVSI
Calls “<radar altitude> FEET CLIMBING” or
“<radar altitude> FEET DESCENDING”
Aircraft Still Descending or GPWS Warning Continues
Advances POWER Levers to maximum available
Power (firewall)
Increases Pitch attitude suficient to stop descent
Do Not allow airspeed to decrease below V2 / VGA
If Stick Shaker Occurs (and / or Airspeed tape Turns red)
Immediately reduces Pitch attitude to silence
Shaker (achieves an airspeed above low speed-
cue) then adjust Pitch to return to V2 / VGA
Aircraft Climbing
Continues climb as required to Safe Altitude
Determines Safe Altitude
Calls “<obstacle clearance alt ASL> FEET”
Once Clear of Terrain
Reduces Power and Pitch attitude appropriate to
the phase of flight
Reconfigures aircraft as necessary
Advises ATC of any Deviation to clearance

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.13-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.13.1.3 Normal Approach

GPWS LDG FLAP Selector Switch ...........................................................................10°, 15° or 35°, As Req’d

NOTE: The GPWS LDG FLAP selector switch must be selected to the intended landing flap to ensure
correct GPWS flap advisory logic.

The following aural altitude callouts are heard as airplane descends through the respective radio altitudes:

Table 2.13-2

Aural Altitude Callouts

(3) Radio
Altitude
BASIC Menu 85 Menu 34 (ft)
Menu 28 (2) (2) Menu 42

- “TWENTY FIVE HUNDRED” “TWENTY FIVE HUNDRED” - 2500

- “ONE THOUSAND” - - 1000
- - “FIVE HUNDRED” - 500
- “PLUS HUNDRED” - “PLUS HUNDRED” 100 above DH
“MINIMUMS, DH
“MINIMUMS” “MINIMUMS” “MINIMUMS”
MINIMUMS” (1)
- - “ONE HUNDRED” - 100
- “FIFTY” “FIFTY” “FIFTY” 50
- “FORTY” “FORTY” “FORTY” 40
- “THIRTY” “THIRTY” “THIRTY” 30
- “TWENTY” “TWENTY” “TWENTY” 20
- “TEN” “TEN” “TEN” 10

NOTES: 1. “MINIMUMS” is triggered from the PFD having the higher Decision Height (DH) setting.

2. When descending through 2500 ft (Radio Altitude) a “TWENTY FIVE HUNDRED” aural alti-
tude callout may not be heard with MS 4-901021 not incorporated.

3. Depending on aircraft configuration, Configured Altitude Callouts may be verified by per-

forming a “long self test”.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 2 2.14-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.14 TCAS OPERATION

2.14.1 Airborne Collision Avoidance System (ACAS II) and

Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS II)

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to:

- AFM Supplement 33 (ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)
- AFM Supplement 106 (ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

2.14.1.1 ACAS II / TCAS II Operating Characteristics

1. ACAS II / TCAS II self test is inhibited in flight.

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)

2. “INCREASE DESCENT” RA announcements are inhibited below 1450 ft AGL.

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

2. “INCREASE DESCENT” RA announcements are inhibited below 1650 ft AGL when climbing and below
1450 ft AGL when descending..

3. “DESCEND” RA announcements are inhibited below 1200 ft AGL when climbing and below 1000 ft AGL
when descending.

4. All RAs are inhibited below 1100 ft AGL when climbing, below 900 ft AGL when descending.

5. All ACAS II / TCAS II announcements are inhibited below 600 ft AGL when climbing and below 400 ft AGL
when descending.

6. RA increase climb announcements and advisories are inhibited during the following conditions:
a. Landing gear down and flaps extended 15° or greater; or
b. Propeller Autofeather switch selected and the white ‘ARM’ annunciation on the ED.

7. During an engine-out condition, climb announcements and advisories are inhibited.

8. The ACAS II / TCAS II mode of operation automatically changes as follows:

a. TA ONLY mode to TA / RA mode at 1100 ft AGL when climbing.
b. TA / RA mode to TA ONLY mode at 900 ft AGL when descending.

2.14.1.2 Traffic Advisory (TA) Announcements

1. “TRAFFIC TRAFFIC” Conduct visual search for the intruder.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.14-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.14.1.3 Resolution Advisory (RA) Announcements

1. “CLIMB CLIMB” Climb at rate shown on the green arc of the IVSI / PFD.
2. “DESCEND DESCEND” Descend at rate shown on the green arc of the IVSI / PFD.

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)

3. “ADJUST VERTICAL SPEED ADJUST” Adjust rate of descent or climb to that shown on IVSI / PFD.
(V7.0) or
“LEVEL OFF LEVEL OFF”
(V7.1)

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

3. “LEVEL OFF LEVEL OFF” Promptly and smoothly reduce vertical speed to that shown on
IVSI / PFD

4. “MONITOR VERTICAL SPEED” Monitor present vertical speed to prevent entering restricted red
arc speed.
5. “CLEAR OF CONFLICT” Range is increasing and separation is adequate;
return to previous ATC assigned altitude.
6. “CLIMB CROSSING CLIMB Safe separation will be best achieved by climbing through the
CLIMB CROSSING CLIMB” intruder's flight path.
7. “DESCEND CROSSING DESCEND Safe separation will be best achieved by descending through the
DESCEND CROSSING DESCEND” intruder's flight path.
8. “MAINTAIN VERTICAL SPEED Maintain present vertical speed to prevent entering restricted red
MAINTAIN” arc speed.
9. “MAINTAIN VERTICAL SPEED Maintain present vertical speed to prevent entering restricted red
CROSSING MAINTAIN” arc speed.
Indicates that own flight path will cross that of intruder.

The following voice messages are announced when the initial RA does not provide sufficient vertical separa-
tion from an intruder:

10. “INCREASE CLIMB Additional climb rate is required.

INCREASE CLIMB”
(received after CLIMB” advisory)
11. “INCREASE DESCENT Additional descent rate is required.
INCREASE DESCENT”
(received after “DESCEND” advisory)
“CLIMB - CLIMB NOW A reversal from a descent to a climb condition is required to pro-
CLIMB - CLIMB NOW” vide adequate vertical separation.
(received after “DESCEND” advisory)
12. “DESCEND - DESCEND NOW A reversal from a descent to a climb condition is required to pro-
DESCEND - DESCEND NOW” vide adequate vertical separation.
(received after “CLIMB” advisory)

NOTE: ACAS II / TCAS II RA announcements are based on the pilot immediately adjusting the flight
profile as directed.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.14-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014

2.14.1.4 In-Flight Use of TCAS

NOTE: The following procedures correspond to:

- AFM Supplement 33 (ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)
- AFM Supplement 106 (ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)

NOTE: GPWS alert takes priority over an ACAS RA.

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

NOTE: GPWS alert takes priority over an TCAS TA / RA.

NOTE: With MS 4-126388 Not Incorporated and with transponder P/N 066-01143-2101 installed, a
FAIL message may be displayed on the TCAS / ATC page of the ARCDU.
This FAIL message can be ignored unless accompanied by a TCAS FAIL message presented
on the PFD and MFD.

After Take-off, Climb, Cruise, Descent and Landing:

EFCP Range Knob .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d
Observe annunciation on ND / MFD.

TCAS / ATC page on ARCDU.............................................................................................................. As Req’d

Select ABOVE, BELOW or NORM as required, observe annunciation on ND / MFD.

Resolution Advisory
Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disconnect
Immediately Adjust the Flight Profile............................................................................................As Directed

CAUTION: If stall warning (stickshaker) occurs during an RA maneuver, take immediate stall
recovery action.

CAUTION: If a threat aircraft track or altitude information is lost during an RA, the RA will
terminate without a “CLEAR OF CONFLICT” announcement.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.14-4 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 9] 28 FEB 2014 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.14.2 Mode S Transponder System for Elementary and Enhanced Surveillance

(Option - MS 4-309226 or MS 4-901280 or MS 4-457297 or MS 4-457530 or

MS 4-457576 or MS 4-457703 or MS 4-457719)

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to AFM Supplement 82.

2.14.2.1 Normal Procedures

The normal procedures in this chapter are applicable with the addition of the following:

2.14.2.1.1 Pre-Taxi Checks

Aircraft Identification:

1. FMS FPL MENU 2/2, LSK [3R]............................................................................................................Press

Check FLT NBR field is highlighted.

2. Input the Aircraft Identification

3. ENTER Key ..........................................................................................................................................Press

NOTES: 1. The FMS is capable of entering up to 10 alpha / numeric characters in the FLT NBR field
(e.g. ABC1234567) for Aircraft ID, however,
only the first 8 characters will be transmitted by the Mode S transponder (e.g. ABC12345).
2. In a dual FMS configuration, the Aircraft ID must be entered into FMS 1 for broadcast by
Transponder 1 or FMS 2 for broadcast by Transponder 2.
In a single FMS configuration, both transponders are connected to the FMS.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.15-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

2.15 Cold Weather Operations

2.15.1 Airplane Contamination on the Ground - Frost, Ice or Snow

Air regulation stipulate that take-off is prohibited when frost, ice or snow is adhering to any critical surface of
the airplane.
This principle is referred to as “the clean airplane concept” and is essential to the maintenance of flight
safety.
Regardless of the de-icing and anti-icing procedures used, the only method of ensuring flight safety in icing
conditions is by inspecting critical airplane surfaces and ensuring that they are clean before take-off.
The PIC has the ultimate responsibility to determine whether or not the airplane is safe to fly.
Frost less than 3 mm in depth is permitted on the underside of the fuel tank area of the wing.
This poses no concern.
The frost accumulation will dissipate as of post engine start, due to heat transfer from the fuel tanks.
A thin layer of hoar frost on the upper surface of the fuselage is not considered to be critical and can remain on the
fuselage for take-off.
Provided all vents and ports are clear of the frost and it is possible to distinguish fuselage surface features (markings
and lines).
References:
• Holdover Time (HOT) Guidelines - Transport Canada
• Guidelines for Aircraft Ground-Icing Operations (TP 14052E)
NOTE: The above mentioned documents complement each other and should be used together.
It is the responsibility of the end user to periodically check the Transport Canada website for
updates on HOT Guidelines.

2.15.2 Ground De-Icing / Anti-Icing

DE-ICING is a procedure by which frost, ice or snow is removed from the airplane by applying hot water or a
hot mixture of water and de-icing / anti-icing fluid.
De-icing using infrared energy is an alternative procedure for removing frozen precipitation.
It is accomplished through heat that breaks the bond of adhering frozen contamination.
De-icing with forced air (alone or with injected fluid) is used to remove most of the contamination from aircraft
surfaces.
It will reduce de-icing times and fluid quantities, but it will not provide a clean wing for take-off.

ANTI-ICING consists of the application of a mixture of an anti-icing fluid or a mixture of anti-icing fluid and
water to the airplane to protect against the accumulation and adherence of frost, ice or snow to airplane sur-
faces before the condition exists.

TYPE I FLUIDS are used for de-icing and anti-icing, but provide very limited anti-icing protection.

TYPE II FLUIDS are “thickened” and are designed to be deposited in a thicker film and to remain on the air-
plane surfaces until the time of take-off.
TYPE II fluids are used for de-icing (when heated) and anti-icing and provide greater protection than do TYPE I
fluids against frost, ice or snow formation in conditions conducive to airplane on the ground.
Because of its flow-off characteristics it is not considered suitable for airplane with rotation speeds < 100 kt.
TYPE III FLUIDS are a “thickened” fluid that has properties that lie between TYPES I and II.
Because of its flow-off characteristics it is considered acceptable for airplane with rotation speeds below 100 kt

TYPE IV FLUIDS are similar to TYPE II fluids with a marked increase in holdover time capabilities.

ONE-STEP DE-ICING / ANTI-ICING consists of the application full strength or water diluted de-icing / anti-
icing fluid, heated as necessary considering the ambient temperature and weather condition, to both remove
and protect the surfaces from frost, ice or snow adherence and accumulation.

TWO-STEP DE-ICING / ANTI-ICING consists of de-icing with hot water only or a hot mixture of water diluted
de-icing / anti-icing fluid, followed immediately by anti-icing with an overspray of anti-icing fluid.
Care must be taken not to allow the airplane surfaces to re-freeze between the de-icing and anti-icing pro-
cesses.
To prevent re-freezing, the first mixture (de-icing) fluid concentration may have to be increased appropriate to
local conditions.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.15-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

NOTE: When anti-icing with SAE Type II, III and IV anti-icing fluids, it is strongly recommended that
the operator use the two-step de-icing / anti-icing procedure, the first step with heated water,
and / or heated SAE Type I de-icing fluid.

HOLDOVER TIME is the estimated time which anti-icing fluid will prevent ice, snow and / or frost from forming
or accumulating on the treated surfaces of an airplane.
The protection time is dependent upon the weather conditions and fluid mixture selected and cannot be pre-
cisely determined for each application.
Guidelines have been published for HOT under varying atmospheric conditions, however, it must be empha-
sized that the best method to ensure a clean airplane is to inspect after treatment and just prior to take-off.
If any frost, ice or snow is adhering to a critical surface, re-treatment must be requested.

While in most operations de-icing / anti-icing of the airplane is supervised by the maintenance organization, the
following precautions are presented to familiarize flight crews with potential problem areas:
a. De-icing / anti-icing fluid concentration must be adjusted for OAT before application to the airplane.
To determine the mixture percentage of de-icing / anti-icing fluid to water that should be used at a
given temperature, refer to the manufacturer’s specifications for the particular fluid;
b. It is strongly recommended Not to operate the Engines and APU during the de-icing / anti-icing proce-
dure.
If it is necessary to have the engines running for operational reasons, select bleed air off to avoid send-
ing fumes into the cabin.
c. Do Not spray de-icing / anti-icing fluid directly into Engine or APU Inlets, Exhausts, Probe Inlets,
Scoops, Vents, Drains or other areas where the fluids may pool.
d. Do Not direct a solid stream of fluid perpendicular to airplane surfaces as a high pressure stream of
fluid can damage airplane surfaces.
Also, Do Not spray fluid directly on flight compartment windows and Do Not spray hot fluid directly on
cold windows;
e. Do Not force ice and snow into openings around flight control surfaces where it may re-freeze later;
f. Both right and left sides of the wing and horizontal stabilizer must receive the same thorough de-icing /
anti-icing treatment.
g. When using infrared energy to de-ice, wet surfaces require an application of heated de-icing fluids to
preclude refreezing after removal of infrared energy source.
h. When using infrared energy other than to remove frost or leading edge ice and when OAT is at or
below 0°C (32°F), an additional treatment with hot de-icing fluid shall be preformed within the infrared
de-icing facility to prevent re-freezing of water, which may remain in hidden areas.
i. If the aircraft requires re-de-icing and the de-icing / anti-icing fluids had been applied before flight, con-
ventional de-icing / anti-icing with fluids shall be preformed before entering the infrared de-icing facility.
j. The use of forced air alone to remove wet snow, especially during snowfall and cold outside air, is not
a feasible alternative for either a two-step de-icing or a one-step de-icing procedure.
k. The forced air and fluid combination to remove wet snow will produce a clean wing but the time to re-
freeze is very short.
Following de-icing / anti-icing, it is the PIC who is ultimately responsible to see that the airplane is free of snow,
ice and frost; that pitot heads, static ports, fuel tank vents, air conditioning inlets / exits and landing gear doors
are clear of snow, ice and slush.
“Clear Ice”, which is difficult to detect, can be present below the layer of water and fluid remaining on the sur-
face of the airplane and may require inspection by touch.
If any doubt remains as to the aerodynamic readiness of airplane, request re-treatment.
Residual fluid on the airplane following de-icing / anti-icing treatment may result in detrimental effects on han-
dling and performance.
The magnitude of these effects, with the original de-icing fluid formulations (TYPE I fluids), was generally not
an operational problem.
With the advent of TYPE II, TYPE III and TYPE IV fluids, this is no longer true.
In general, the cruise, descent, approach and landing phases of flight are not affected by the use of de-icing or
anti-icing fluids.
When the airplane has been sprayed with de-icing and / or anti-icing fluids, the take-off procedures, distances
and reference speeds shall be adjusted as per Sub-Chapter 4.7.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.15-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.15.3 De-Icing Procedures

2.15.3.1 Pre-Fluid Application

Engines ........................................................................................................................ Shut Down (if possible)

If engines running:
BLEED Air ................................................................................................................................................... OFF
De-Icing Operator ................................................................................................................................ Advised
• Engine must Not ingest de-icing fluid.
• Avoid direct spray on the following:
- Intakes and exhausts, vents and drains
- Air data probes and sensors / ports and AOA vanes
- Windshields and all windows
- Antennas
• Do Not spray hot fluid directly on cold windows.
• Do Not spray high-pressure fluid perpendicular to airplane surfaces.
• Avoid forcing snow / ice into parings around flight control surfaces.

2.15.3.2 Flap Configuration During Anti-Icing / De-Icing Procedures

Two possible options are: delaying flap deployment until just prior to take-off or deploying the flaps prior to de-
icing / anti-icing so that the surfaces under these flaps are treated.
With the second option, the holdover time and allowance time will be reduced due to the steeper angles of the
flap in the deployed configuration.
In this situation, it is acceptable to use the 90% adjusted holdover / allowance times.
Delaying the flap deployment may be the preferred option for optimum protection from ice buildup.
If it is necessary to remove contamination from the flaps, it may be best to deploy the flaps for de-icing and
anti-icing and then retract them prior to taxi.

2.15.3.3 Post-Fluid Application

Critical Areas ........................................................................................................................................ Inspect

• Ensure the following:
- Airplane free of snow, ice and frost
- Control surfaces clean
- Protective covers removed
- Engine inlets, pitot static ports, fuel tank vents, air conditioning inlets / exits, landing gear doors clear of
snow / ice.
NOTE: Following the application of de-icing or anti-icing fluids, it is strongly recommended that the
pilot conduct a slow control throw of the elevator and aileron / spoiler control circuits.
Move the control column and control wheel in both directions to the control stops.
Should a restriction of the controls or an unusual control force be noted, a take-off must not be
conducted until the affected control is inspected for ice contamination and if required, another
application of de-icing or anti-icing fluid is applied.

2.15.3.4 Taxi Precautions

Bypass Door ............................................................................................................................................. Open

• Increase distance between airplane while taxiing.
• Avoid the following:
- Reverse thrust;
- Excessive power to prevent displacement of applied fluids;
- Hot gases from preceding airplane.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.15-4 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 15] 30 OCT 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.15.4 De-Icing and Anti-Icing Fluids

A. Fluids which meet the SAE Low Speed Aerodynamic Acceptance Test for the following specification:
- SAE Low Speed Type III
may be used full strength (or diluted per the fluid manufacturer’s instructions) over the fluid manufacturer’s
recommended temperature range, under the following conditions:
(1) All approved take-off flap settings
(2) Rotation should be smooth and at a normal rate, “Avoid Rapid Rotation”.
(3) No correction to the take-off distances and speeds is needed.

NOTE: For SAE High Speed Type III apply the performance corrections of Paragraph B below.

B. Fluids which meet the SAE High Speed Aerodynamic Acceptance Test for the following specifications:
- SAE Type I
- SAE Type II
- SAE Type IV
may be used full strength (or diluted per the fluid manufacturer’s instructions) over the fluid manufacturer’s
recommended temperature range, under the following conditions:
(1) All approved take-off flap settings.
(2) Rotation should be smooth and at a normal rate. “Avoid Rapid Rotation”.
(3) Take-off distances available and corresponding speeds must be corrected by the margins as shown in
Table 1 in Sub-Chapter 4.7.3.
(4) Where close-in obstacle(s) impact the second climb segment, the increased V2 is to be maintained to a
gross height of 400 ft AGL.
Thereafter the uncorrected V2 must be flown to the end of the second climb segment.
For all other cases, the increased V2 may be continued to the end of the second climb segment.

C. SAE Type I fluids containing ethylene glycol at full strength or diluted and di-ethylene glycol or propylene
glycol when diluted 50 / 50 or more with water may be used with any flap setting over the fluid manufac-
turer’s recommended temperature ranges for these mixtures.

No correction to the take-off distances and speeds is needed.

In all cases de-icing / anti-icing fluids do not affect the following phases of flight:
• Cruise
• Descent
• Approach
• Landing

2.15.4.1 Holdover Times (HOT)

Holdover Time is the estimated time which anti-icing fluid will prevent ice, snow and / or frost from forming or
collecting on the treated surfaces of the airplane.

Factors that reduce HOT:

• Where conditions are worse than those given in the tables times may be reduced to the point of suspen-
sion of operations,
• High wind velocity
• Jet blast
• Aircraft skin temperature significantly lower than OAT
• Moisture content of snow, i.e. large snowflakes may produce higher than expected precipitation rates

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.15-5

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

The definition of Lowest Operational Use Temperature (LOUT) for a given fluid is the higher (warmer) of:
- the lowest temperature at which the fluid meets the aerodynamic acceptance test (according to AS 5900)
for a given type of aircraft (high or low speed), or
- the actual freezing point of the fluid plus its freezing point buffer of:
→ 10°C (18°F) - for a Type I fluid, or
→ 7°C (13°F) - for a Type II, III or IV fluid.

For applicable values refer to the fluid manufacturer’s documentation.

NOTE: Fluid manufacturers state that a fluid must not be used when the Outside Air Temperature
(OAT) or skin temperature is below the LOUT of the fluid

See the following Tables for specific HOT.

2.15.4.2 Active Frost HOLDOVER Guidelines for Winter 2016 - 2017

THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF THESE DATA REMAINS WITH THE USER

Approximate HOLDOVER Times

Outside Air Temperature [h:min]
(OAT) 1, 2, 3
Active Frost
[°C] [°F] Type I
-1 and above 30 and above
below -1 to -3 below 30 to 27
below -3 to -10 below 27 to 14
0:45
below -10 to -14 below 14 to 7
below -4 to -21 below 7 to -6
below -21 to LOUT below -6 to LOUT

Approximate HOLDOVER Times

Outside Air Temperature Concentration Neat [h:min]
(OAT) 2, 3 Fluid / Water
Active Frost
[Vol % / Vol %]
[°C] [°F] Type II Type III 4 Type IV
100 / 0 8:00 2:00 12:00
-1 and above 30 and above 75 / 25 5:00 1:00 5:00
50 / 50 3:00 0:30 3:00
100 / 0 8:00 2:00 12:00
below -1 to -3 below 30 to 27 75 / 25 5:00 1:00 5:00
50 / 50 1:30 0:30 3:00
100 / 0 8:00 2:00 10:00
below -3 to -10 below 27 to 14
75 / 25 5:00 1:00 5:00
100 / 0 6:00 2:00 6:00
below -10 to -14 below 14 to 7
75 / 25 1:00 1:00 1:00
below -14 to -21 below 7 to -6 100 / 0 6:00 2:00 6:00
below -21 to -25 below -6 to -13 100 / 0 2:00 2:00 4:00
below -25 below -13 100 / 0 No HOT Guidelines exist

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.15-6 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

NOTES:
1
Type I Fluid / Water Mixture must be selected so that the freezing point of the mixture is at least 10°C
(18°F) below OAT.
2 Ensure that the LOUT is respected
3
Changes in OAT over the course of longer frost events can be significant; the appropriate HOT to use is the one pro-
vided for the coldest OAT that has occurred in the time between the de / anti-icing fluid application and take-off.
4 To use Type III Fluid frost holdover times, the fluid brand being used must be known.
AllClear AeroClear MAX must be applied unheated.

CAUTION: Fluids used during ground de-icing / anti-icing do not provide in-flight icing protection.

2.15.4.3 Generic SAE TYPE I Fluid HOLDOVER Guidelines on Aluminum Wing Surfaces
for Winter 2016 - 2017 1

Guideline for Holdover Times (HOT) anticipated for SAE TYPE I Fluid Mixture as a Function of Weather Condi-
tions and Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
Table 1-C (SAE TYPE I Fluid Holdover Guidelines on Composite Wing Surfaces) from Holdover Time (HOT)
Guidelines - Transport Canada, is not applicable.

THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF THESE DATA REMAINS WITH THE USER

OAT 2 Approximate HOLDOVER Times under Various Weather Conditions

[min]
Freezing Snow, Snow Grains or Rain on
Fog Snow Pellets 3 Freezing Light Cold
[°C] [°F] or 5 Freezing Soaked Other 7
Ice Very 4 Drizzle Rain
Light Moderate Wing 6
Crystals Light 4
-3 and 27 and
11 - 17 18 11 - 18 6 - 11 9 - 13 4-6 2-5
above above
below below
-3 to -6 27 to 21 8 - 13 14 8 - 14 5-8 5-9 4-6
CAUTION:
below below
-6 to -10 21 to 14 6 - 10 11 6 - 11 4-6 4-7 2-5

below -10 below 14 5-9 7 4-7 2-4 No HOT Guidelines exist

NOTES:
1 Type I Fluid / Water Mixture must be selected so that the freezing point of the mixture is at least 10°C
(18°F) below OAT
2
Ensure that the LOUT is respected
3 To determine snowfall intensity, the ‘Snowfall Intensities as a Function of Prevailing Visibility’ table (Sub-
Chapter 2.15.4.10) is required.
4
Use light freezing rain HOT in conditions of very light or light snow mixed with light rain.
5 Use light freezing rain HOT if positive identification of freezing drizzle is not possible.
6
No HOT Guidelines exist for this condition for 0°C (32°F) and below
7
Heavy snow, ice pellets, moderate and heavy freezing rain, small hail and hail.

CAUTIONS:
• The only acceptable decision-making criterion, for take-off without a pre-take-off contamination
inspection, is the shorter time within the applicable HOT table cell.
• The time of protection will be shortened in heavy weather conditions, heavy precipitation rates or
high moisture content.
• High wind velocity or jet blast may reduce HOT.
• HOT may be reduced when aircraft skin temperature is lower than OAT.
• Fluids used during ground de-icing / anti-icing do not provide in-flight icing protection.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.15-7

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.15.4.4 SAE TYPE I De-Icing / Anti-Icing Fluid Application PROCEDURES

Guidelines for the application of SAE TYPE I Fluid Mixtures at minimum concentrations for the prevailing Out-
side Air Temperature (OAT)

One-Step PROCEDURE Two-Step PROCEDURE

OAT 1
De-Icing / Anti-Icing First Step: De-Icing Second Step: Anti-Icing 2
0°C (32°F) Heated water or a heated
and above Heated mix of fluid and water fluid / water mixture Heated mix of fluid and water
with a freezing point of at Heated fluid / water mixture with a freezing point of at
below least 10°C (18°F) below OAT with a freezing point at OAT least 10°C (18°F) below OAT
0°C (32°F) to LOUT
or below

1
Fluids must not be used at temperatures below their Lowest Operational Use Temperature (LOUT).
2
To be applied before first step fluid freezes, typically within 3 min.
(This time may be higher than 3 min in some conditions, but potentially lower in heavy precipitation or
colder temperatures.
If necessary, the second step shall be applied area by area.)

NOTES:

• This table is applicable for the use of Type I HOT Guidelines in all conditions including active frost.
If HOT are not required, a temperature of 60°C (140°F) at the nozzle is desirable.

• If HOT are required, the temperature of water or fluid / water mixtures shall be at least 60°C (140°F) at the
nozzle.
Upper temperature limit shall not exceed fluid and aircraft manufacturers’ recommendations.

• To use Type I HOT Guidelines in all conditions including active frost, an additional minimum of
1 L/m2 (~ 2 gal/100 ft2) of heated Type I fluid mixture must be applied to the surfaces after all frozen con-
tamination is removed.
This application is necessary to heat the surfaces, as heat contributes significantly to the Type I fluid HOT.
The required protection can be provided using a 1-step method by applying more fluid than is strictly
needed to just remove all of the frozen contamination (the same additional amount stated above is
required).

• The LOUT for a given Type I fluid is the higher (warmer) of:
a) The lowest temperature at which the fluid meets the aerodynamic acceptance test for a given
aircraft type, or
b) The actual freezing point of the fluid plus its freezing point buffer of 10°C (18°F)

CAUTION: Wing skin temperatures may differ and in some cases may be lower than OAT;
a stronger mix (more glycol) may be needed under these conditions.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.15-8 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.15.4.5 Generic SAE TYPE II Fluid HOLDOVER Guidelines for Winter 2016 - 2017

Guideline for Holdover Times (HOT) anticipated for SAE TYPE II Fluid Mixture as a Function of Weather Con-
ditions and Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF THESE DATA REMAINS WITH THE USER

Approximate HOLDOVER TIMES under Various Weather Conditions

OAT 1 Type II [h:min]
Fluid Con-
centration Freezing Snow, Rain on
Neat Fluid / Fog Snow Grains Freezing Light Cold 6
[°C] [°F] Water or or Freezing Soaked Other
Ice Snow Drizzle 4 Rain
[Vol % / Vol %]
Crystals Pellets 2, 3 Wing 5
100 / 0 0:35 - 1:30 0:20 - 0:45 0:30 - 1:00 0:15 - 0:30 0:07 - 0:40
-3 and 27 and
75 / 25 0:25 - 0:55 0:15 - 0:25 0:15 - 0:40 0:10 - 0:20 0:04 - 0:25
above above
50 / 50 0:15 - 0:25 0:05 - 0:10 0:08 - 0:15 0:05 - 0:09
100 / 0 0:20 - 1:05 0:15 - 0:30 0:20 - 0:45 7 0:10 - 0:20 7 CAUTION:
below below
-3 to -14 27 to 7 75 / 25 0:25 - 0:50 0:08 - 0:20 0:15 - 0:25 7 0:08 - 0:15 7
below below
-14 to LOUT 7 to LOUT 100 / 0 0:20 - 0:35 8 0:08 - 0:10 8 No HOT Guidelines exist

NOTES:
1
Ensure that the LOUT is respected.
Consider use of Type I when Type II fluid cannot be used.
2
To determine snowfall intensity, the ‘Snowfall Intensities as a Function of Prevailing Visibility’ table (Sub-
Chapter 2.15.4.10) is required.
3
Use light freezing rain HOT in conditions of very light or light snow mixed with light rain.
4
Use light freezing rain HOT if positive identification of freezing drizzle is not possible.
5
No HOT Guidelines exist for this condition for 0°C (32°F) and below.
6 Heavy snow, snow pellets, ice pellets, moderate and heavy freezing rain, small hail and hail.
7
No HOT Guidelines exist for this condition below - 10°C (14°F).
8
If the LOUT is unknown, no holdover time guidelines exist below - 22.5°C (- 8.5°F).

CAUTIONS:

• The only acceptable decision-making criterion, for take-off without a pre-take-off contamination
inspection, is the shorter time within the applicable HOT table cell.

• The time of protection will be shortened in heavy weather conditions, heavy precipitation rates or
high moisture content.

• High wind velocity or jet blast may reduce HOT.

• HOT may be reduced when aircraft skin temperature is lower than OAT.

• Fluids used during ground de-icing / anti-icing do not provide in-flight icing protection.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.15-9

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.15.4.6 SAE TYPE III Fluid HOLDOVER Guidelines for Winter 2016 - 2017

2.15.4.6.1 LOW SPEED TYPE III Fluid 1

ALLCLEAR AEROCLEAR MAX FOR AIRCRAFT CONFORMING TO THE SAE AS 5900
LOW SPEED AERODYNAMIC TEST CRITERION

Guideline for Holdover Times (HOT) anticipated for SAE TYPE III Fluid Mixture as a Function of Weather Con-
ditions and Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF THESE DATA REMAINS WITH THE USER

Approximate HOLDOVER TIMES under Various Weather Conditions

OAT 2 Type III [h:min]
Fluid Con-
centration Freezing Snow, Snow Grains or Rain on
Neat Fluid / Fog Snow Pellets 3 Freezing Light Cold 7
[°C] [°F] Water or 5 Freezing Soaked Other
Ice Very 4 Drizzle Rain
[Vol% / Vol%] 4 Light Moderate Wing 6
Crystals Light
100 / 0 0:45-1:10 1:00 0:30-1:00 0:14-0:30 0:20-0:45 0:14-0:20 0:06-0:40
-3 and 27 and 75 / 25
above above
50 / 50
below below 100 / 0 0:45-1:25 1:00 0:30-1:00 0:14-0:30 0:20-0:40 0:15-0:25 CAUTION:
-3 to -10 27 to 14 75 / 25
below below
-10 to -16 14 to 3.2
100 / 0 0:30-1:05 1:00 0:30-1:00 0:14-0:30 No HOT Guidelines exist

NOTES:
1
Fluid must be applied unheated to use these holdover times.
No HOT exist for Type III fluid applied heated
2
Ensure that the LOUT is respected.
Consider use of Type I when Type III fluid cannot be used.
3 To determine snowfall intensity, the ‘Snowfall Intensities as a Function of Prevailing Visibility’ table (Sub-
Chapter 2.15.4.10) is required.
4 Use light freezing rain HOT in conditions of very light or light snow mixed with light rain.
5 Use light freezing rain HOT if positive identification of freezing drizzle is not possible.
6 No HOT Guidelines exist for this condition for 0°C (32°F) and below.
7 Heavy snow, ice pellets, moderate and heavy freezing rain, small hail and hail.

For other SAE TYPE III fluids, check Transport Canada Guidelines for Holdover Times.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.15-10 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.15.4.6.2 HIGH SPEED TYPE III Fluid 1

ALLCLEAR AEROCLEAR MAX FOR AIRCRAFT CONFORMING TO THE SAE AS 5900
HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMIC TEST CRITERION

Guideline for Holdover Times (HOT) anticipated for SAE TYPE III Fluid Mixture as a Function of Weather Con-
ditions and Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF THESE DATA REMAINS WITH THE USER

Approximate HOLDOVER TIMES under Various Weather Conditions

OAT 2 Type III [h:min]
Fluid Con-
centration Freezing Snow, Snow Grains or Rain on
Neat Fluid / Fog Snow Pellets 3 Freezing Light Cold 7
[°C] [°F] Water or 5 Freezing Soaked Other
Ice Very 4 Drizzle Rain
[Vol% / Vol%] 4 Light Moderate Wing 6
Crystals Light
100 / 0 0:45-1:10 1:00 0:30-1:00 0:14-0:30 0:20-0:45 0:14-0:20 0:06-0:40
-3 and 27 and 75 / 25
above above
50 / 50
below below 100 / 0 0:45-1:25 1:00 0:30-1:00 0:14-0:30 0:20-0:40 0:15-0:25 CAUTION:
-3 to -10 27 to 14 75 / 25
below below
-10 to -25 14 to -13
100 / 0 0:30-1:05 1:00 0:30-1:00 0:14-0:30
No HOT Guidelines exist
below below 100 / 0 0:15-0:40 0:40 0:19-0:40 0:09-0:19
-25 to -35 -13 to -31

NOTES:
1 Fluid must be applied unheated to use these holdover times.
No HOT exist for Type III fluid applied heated
2
Ensure that the LOUT is respected.
Consider use of Type I when Type III fluid cannot be used.
3
To determine snowfall intensity, the ‘Snowfall Intensities as a Function of Prevailing Visibility’ table (Sub-
Chapter 2.15.4.10) is required.
4
Use light freezing rain HOT in conditions of very light or light snow mixed with light rain.
5
Use light freezing rain HOT if positive identification of freezing drizzle is not possible.
6
No HOT Guidelines exist for this condition for 0°C (32°F) and below.
7
Heavy snow, ice pellets, moderate and heavy freezing rain, small hail and hail.

For other SAE TYPE III fluids, check Transport Canada Guidelines for Holdover Times.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.15-11

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.15.4.7 UNHEATED SAE TYPE III Fluid APPLICATION Procedures

Guidelines for the application of unheated SAE TYPE III fluid (minimum concentrations in % by volume) as a
function of Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

One-Step PROCEDURE Two-Step PROCEDURE

OAT 1
Anti-Icing (only) 4 First Step: De-Icing Second Step: Anti-Icing
100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50 Heated 3 water or 100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50
0°C (32°F)
Unheated Type III a Heated 3 Type I, II, III, or IV Unheated Type III
and above
fluid / water mixture fluid / water mixture fluid / water mixture

below 100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50 Heated 3 Type I, II, III, or IV 100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50

0°C (32°F) Unheated Type III fluid / water mixture with a Unheated Type III
to -3°C (27°F) fluid / water mixture freezing point at OAT or below fluid / water mixture
below 100 / 0 or 75 / 25 Heated 3 Type I, II, III, or IV 100 / 0 or 75 / 25
-3°C (27°F) Unheated Type III fluid / water mixture with a Unheated Type III
to -10°C (14°F) fluid / water mixture freezing point at OAT or below fluid / water mixture
below 100 / 0 Heated 3 Type I, II, III, or IV 100 / 0
-10°C (14°F) Unheated Type III fluid / water mixture with a Unheated Type III
to LOUT fluid / water mixture freezing point at OAT or below fluid / water mixture

1
Fluids must not be used at temperatures below their LOUT.
Consider the use of Type I when Type III fluid cannot be used (see Sub-Chapter 2.15.4.4).
The LOUT for a given Type III fluid is the higher (warmer) of:
a) The lowest temperature at which the fluid meets the aerodynamic acceptance test for a given aircraft
type;
b) The actual freezing point of the fluid plus its freezing point buffer of 7°C (13°F); or
c) For diluted Type III fluid, the coldest temperature for which holdover times are published.
2
To be applied before first step fluid freezes, typically within 3 min.
(This time may be longer than 3 min in some conditions, but potentially shorter in heavy precipitation, in
colder temperatures or for critical surfaces constructed of composite materials.
If necessary, the second step shall be applied area by area.)
3 For heated fluids, a fluid temperature not less than 60°C (140°F) at the nozzle is desirable.
4
One-step procedure with unheated Type III fluid is only possible on a clean aircraft.
If de-icing is required, a two-step procedure must be used.

NOTES:
• Upper temperature limit shall not exceed fluid and aircraft manufactures’ recommendations.

CAUTIONS:

• Wing skin temperatures may differ and in some cases may be lower than OAT;
a stronger mix (more glycol) may be needed under these conditions.
• Whenever frost or ice occurs on the lower surface of the wing in the area of the fuel tank, indicating
a cold soaked wing, the 50 / 50 dilutions of Type III should not be used for the anti-icing step
because fluid freezing may occur.
• An insufficient amount of anti-icing fluid may cause a substantial loss of HOT.
This is particularly true when using a Type I fluid mixture for the first step in a two-step procedure.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.15-12 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.15.4.8 Generic SAE TYPE IV Fluid HOLDOVER Guidelines for Winter 2016 - 2017

Guideline for Holdover Times (HOT) anticipated for SAE TYPE IV Fluid Mixture as a Function of Weather Con-
ditions and Outside Air Temperature (OAT).

THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF THESE DATA REMAINS WITH THE USER

Approximate HOLDOVER TIMES under Various Weather Conditions

OAT 1 Type IV [h:min]
Fluid Con-
centration Freezing Snow, Snow Grains or Rain on
Neat Fluid / Fog Snow Pellets 2 Freezing Light Cold 6
[°C] [°F] Water or 4 Freezing Soaked Other
Ice Very 3 Drizzle Rain
[Vol% / Vol%] 3 Light Moderate Wing 5
Crystals Light
100 / 0 1:15-2:40 2:00 1:10-2:00 0:35-1:10 0:40-1:30 0:35-0:40 0:08-1:25
-3 and 27 and 75 / 25 1:25-2:40 2:00 1:15-2:00 0:45-1:15 0:50-1:20 0:30-0:45 0:09-1:15
above above
50 / 50 0:25-0:50 0:40 0:25-0:40 0:15-0:25 0:15-0:30 0:09-0:15
below below 100 / 0 0:20-1:35 1:20 0:45-1:20 0:25-0:45 0:25-1:20 70:20-0:25 7 CAUTION:
-3 to -14 27 to 7 75 / 25 0:30-1:10 1:40 0:45-1:40 0:20-0:45 0:15-1:05 70:15-0:25 7

below -14 below 7

0:20-0:40 8 0:20 8 0:10-0:20 80:08-0:10 8
to LOUT to LOUT 100 / 0 No HOT Guidelines exist

NOTES:
1
Ensure that the LOUT is respected.
Consider use of Type I when Type IV fluid cannot be used.
2
To determine snowfall intensity, the ‘Snowfall Intensities as a Function of Prevailing Visibility’ table (Sub-
Chapter 2.15.4.10) is required.
3
Use light freezing rain HOT in conditions of very light or light snow mixed with light rain.
4
Use light freezing rain HOT if positive identification of freezing drizzle is not possible.
5
No HOT Guidelines exist for this condition for 0°C (32°F) and below.
6
Heavy snow, ice pellets, moderate and heavy freezing rain, small hail and hail.
7 No HOT Guidelines exist for this condition below - 10°C (14°F)
8
If the LOUT is unknown, no HOT Guidlines exist below - 22.5°C (- 8.5°F).

CAUTIONS:

• The only acceptable decision-making criterion, for take-off without a pre-take-off contamination
inspection, is the shorter time within the applicable HOT table cell.

• The time of protection will be shortened in heavy weather conditions, heavy precipitation rates or
high moisture content.
High wind velocity or jet blast may reduce HOT.
HOT may be reduced when aircraft skin temperature is lower than OAT.

• Fluids used during ground de-icing / anti-icing do not provide in-flight icing protection.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.15-13

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.15.4.9 SAE TYPE II and TYPE IV Fluid APPLICATION Procedures

Guidelines for the application of SAE TYPE II and IV fluid mixtures (minimum concentrations in % by volume)
as a function of Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

One-Step PROCEDURE Two-Step PROCEDURE

OAT 1
De-Icing / Anti-Icing First Step: De-Icing Second Step: Anti-Icing 2
100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50 Heated water or 100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50
0°C (32°F)
and above Heated 3 Type II or IV a Heated Type I, II, III, or IV Type II or IV
fluid / water mixture fluid / water mixture fluid / water mixture
below 100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50 Heated Type I, II, III, or IV 100 / 0, 75 / 25 or 50 / 50
0°C (32°F) Heated 3 Type II or IV fluid / water mixture with a Type II or IV
to -3°C (27°F) fluid / water mixture freezing point at OAT or below fluid / water mixture
below 100 / 0 or 75 / 25 Heated Type I, II, III, or IV 100 / 0 or 75 / 25
-3°C (27°F) Heated 3 Type II or IV fluid / water mixture with a Type II or IV
to -14°C (7°F) fluid / water mixture freezing point at OAT or below fluid / water mixture
below 100 / 0 Heated Type I, II, III, or IV 100 / 0
-14°C (7°F) Heated 3 Type II or IV fluid / water mixture with a Type II or IV
to LOUT fluid / water mixture freezing point at OAT or below fluid / water mixture

1 Fluids must not be used at temperatures below their LOUT.

Consideration to be given to the use of Type I / III when Type II / IV fluid cannot be used due to LOUT limi-
tations.
The LOUT for a given Type II / IV fluid is the higher (warmer) of:
a) The lowest temperature at which the fluid meets the aerodynamic acceptance test for a given aircraft
type;
b) The actual freezing point of the fluid plus its freezing point buffer of 7°C (13°F); or
c) For diluted Type II / IV fluid, the coldest temperature for which holdover times are published.
2 To be applied before first step fluid freezes, typically within 3 min.
(This time may be higher than 3 min in some conditions, but potentially lower in heavy precipitation or
colder temperatures.
If necessary, the second step shall be applied area by area.)
3
Clean aircraft may be anti-iced with unheated fluid.

NOTES:

• For heated fluids, a fluid temperature not less than 60°C (140°F) at the nozzle is desirable.
• Upper temperature limit shall not exceed fluid and aircraft manufactures’ recommendations.

CAUTIONS:

• Wing skin temperatures may differ and in some cases may be lower than OAT;
a stronger mix (more glycol) may be needed under these conditions.
• Whenever frost or ice occurs on the lower surface of the wing in the area of the fuel tank, indicating
a cold soaked wing, the 50 / 50 dilutions of Type II or IV shall not be used for the anti-icing step
because fluid freezing may occur.
• An insufficient amount of anti-icing fluid may cause a substantial loss of HOT.
This is particularly true when using a Type I fluid mixture for the first step in a two-step procedure.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.15-14 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.15.4.10 SNOWFALL INTENSITIES as a FUNCTION of PREVAILING VISIBILITY 1

VISIBILITY in Snow
Temperature Range [km (SM)]
Lighting
[°C] [°F] Heavy Moderate Light Very Light
-1 30 ≤ 1.6 > 1.6 to 4.0 > 4.0 to 6.4 > 6.4
and above and above (≤ 1) (> 1 to 21/2) (> 21/2 to 4) (> 4)
Darkness
below below ≤ 1.2 > 1.2 to 2.4 > 2.4 to 4.8 > 4.8
-1 30 (≤ 3/4) (> 3/4 to 11/2) (> 11/2 to 3) (> 3)
-1 30 ≤ 0.8 > 0.8 to 2.4 > 2.4 to 4.8 > 4.8
and above and above (≤ 1/2) (> 1/2 to 11/2) (> 11/2 to 3) (> 3)
Daylight
below below ≤ 0.6 > 0.6 to 1.4 > 1.4 to 3.2 > 3.2
-1 30 (≤ 3/8) (> 3/8 to 7/8) (> 7/8 to 2) (> 2)

1
Based on:
- Relationship between Visibility and Snowfall Intensity (TP 14151E), TC, Nov 2003 and
- Theoretical Considerations in the Estimation of Snowfall Rate Using Visibility (TP 12893E), TC, Nov 1998.

HOW TO READ THE TABLE

This visibility table applies to all fluid Types I, II, III and IV.

Assume that the daytime visibility in snowfall is 1.6 km (1 SM) and the temperature is - 7°C (19°F).

Based on these conditions, the snowfall intensity is light.

This snowfall intensity is used to determine which HOT Guideline value is appropriate for the fluid in use.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.16-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

2.16 Operating in Icing Conditions

ICING CONDITIONS exist when:

• the Static Air Temperature (SAT) on the ground and for take-off is 10°C (50°F) or below, or

• the SAT in flight is 5°C (41°F) or below, and

• visible moisture in any form is present (such as clouds, fog with visibility of one statute mile or less, rain,
snow, sleet or ice crystals).

• ice accretion on aerodynamic surfaces is not considered to exist at temperatures of - 40°C or below.

Icing Conditions also exist when:

• the SAT on the ground and for take-off is 10°C or below when operating on ramps, taxiways or runways
where surface snow, ice, standing water or slush may be ingested by the engines or freeze on engines,
nacelles or engine sensor probes.

As with any meteorological hazard, the most effective procedure is to stay away from the known areas
involved.

WARNING:

SEVERE ICING CONDITIONS:

Flight into freezing rain, freezing drizzle or mixed icing conditions (super-cooled liquid water and ice
crystals) may result in ice build-up on protected surfaces, exceeding the capability of the ice protec-
tion system or may result in ice forming aft of the protected surfaces.
This ice may not be shed using the ice protection systems and may seriously degrade the performance
and controllability of the airplane.
Severe icing conditions may be encountered during flight in visible rain with the SAT below 0°C ambi-
ent temperature and specifically with droplets that are large enough to splash or splatter on impact.
Severe icing may be identified by unusually extensive ice accreted on the airframe in areas not nor-
mally observed to collect ice or ice is accreted on the side windows of the flight compartment aft of the
leading edge.

An Accumulation of ice on lifting surfaces of the airplane may change the stall characteristics, stall
speed or warning margin provided by the stall warning system.
The presence of ice on the airframe increases airplane drag and mass.
Ice on the propellers decreases their efficiency and thus the thrust available from the engines.
Ice build-up on engine probes can result in erroneous engine FADEC operation or flight compartment
indications.
Finally, ice ingestion by the engine or inlet flow distortions due to ice build-up on the intakes, can
cause engine surging or flameouts.
To provide the largest safety margin possible for the airplane encountering icing conditions, it is nec-
essary to operate the de-icing / anti-icing systems and fly the airplane as per the procedures of Chap-
ter 2 of this AOM.
Details of performance penalties in icing condition are provided in Chapter 4.
Elaboration on the AOM procedures is provided below.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.16-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.16.1 Taxi

Ensure the following anti-ice systems are selected

PITOT STATIC STBY, 1 & 2 ...................................................................................................................... ON

ENG INTAKE BYPASS DOORS ................................................................................................ OPEN / HTR

During taxi on slush covered surfaces, where possible, minimize taxi speeds to below 10 kt.
Faster taxi speeds increase the chance of slush / contaminate entering the nose wheel bay.
Where possible, avoid taxiing through deep slush.
Avoid using excessive power to taxi airplane as this may tend to displace any anti-icing fluid applied.
Also, avoid using reverse power on snow or slush covered runways, taxiways or ramps unless absolutely nec-
essary, as snow, slush or water can become airborne and adhere to wing surfaces.
Allow a greater than normal distance between airplane to account for poor braking and turning performance on
slippery surfaces.
This will also reduce the possibility of snow or slush being blown back into the airplane or hot exhaust gases
melting snow on your airplane from which re-freezing may occur.

2.16.2 Take-Off

Before take-off into icing conditions, select all anti-ice systems, except airframe de-ice, as follows:

ENG INTAKE BYPASS DOORS ................................................................................................ OPEN / HTR

PROP TMR ............................................................................................................................................... ON
DEICE PRESS ................................................................................................................... Check 18 ± 3 psi
WINDSHIELD HEAT ........................................................................................................................... NORM

Selection of the REF SPEEDS switch raises the stall warning threshold, therefore, airspeed must be
INCREASED to maintain adequate margin over stall warning following take-off and prior to selection of the
switch to ON at 400 ft AGL.
Refer to Sub-Chapter 4.7 of the AOM for the appropriate values.
Failure to increase speed may result in stall warning.
Before moving into position, re-check that the airplane is free of ice, snow or frost.
Before brake release, check for stable engine operation.
After setting take-off power, check to see that flight compartment indicators are normal.

NOTE: The following performance implications must be considered for take-offs into icing conditions:

- The AC generator electrical demand by the anti-icing systems takes power away from the propeller gear
box, reducing net engine power available to the airplane.
This results in increased take-off field lengths and reduced climb gradients and MAT limits.
- In addition to the reduction in net engine power due to electrical loads, the increased take-off speeds
above 400 ft due to stall warning margins also degrade airplane performance.
The combination of these factors results in decreased Final Take-off Climb gradients and increased 3rd
segment distances.

For take-off on slush covered surfaces, accelerate through 40 kt IAS as rapidly as possible

NOTE: Following ground manoeuvering on taxiways and runways contaminated with slush, where the
taxi and take-off precautions, as described in Sub-Chapters 3.3.6.1 and 3.3.6.2, were not
followed and Nose Wheel Bay contamination is suspected, consider cycling the landing gear a
minimum of 2 times after take-off.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.16-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

2.16.3 Enroute, Climb, Cruise and Descent

Before entering icing conditions or when “ICE DETECTED” message appears on the ED select all anti-ice sys-
tems and REF SPEEDS to INCR.
In Icing Conditions monitor accumulation of ice on the airframe.
Operate the airframe de-ice system in FAST or SLOW depending on the rate of accumulation.
Do not wait for ice to build up before selecting airframe de-ice.
Climb no slower than Enroute Climb Speed (VCLIMB) + 20 KIAS and, cruise and descend no slower than Flap
1.23 VS + 25 KIAS to account for the increase in stall speed of the airplane with ice accumulated on the boot
surfaces between cycles and on unprotected surfaces.
These speed increments must be added whenever the REF SPEEDS switch is selected, regardless of whether
or not ice has actually accumulated on the airplane.
Monitor airplane climb rate and airspeed closely.
Be prepared to increase propeller RPM and engine power if a significant loss of performance is noted.
By acting early in a significant icing encounter, the ultimate performance loss may be minimized and if condi-
tions are sufficiently severe to require a change in flight plan, the decision can be made before sustaining an
unacceptable decrease in airplane performance.
Note that a small weight and drag penalty on the airplane, due to accumulated ice on the airframe, combined
with decreased net engine power due to electrical loads and the increased climb speed result in a reduction in
Enroute Climb Gradient and One Engine Inoperative Climb Ceiling.
After flight in icing conditions leave the airframe de-ice system operating.
Monitor the left and right wing leading edges and wing tips.
The airplane is not considered to be aerodynamically clean until all ice is removed from the visible leading
edges and wing tips.
Once ice is no longer visible deselect de-icing and anti-icing systems and select the REF SPEEDS switch OFF

2.16.4 Holding and Approach

Before entering the hold or commencing approach, re-confirm all anti-icing systems are selected.
The AIRFRAME selector must be selected to FAST for the entire hold, approach and landing.
When holding in icing conditions, the landing gear must be retracted and flaps at Flap 0° setting.
Hold at an airspeed no slower than 190 KIAS.
The increased airspeed ensures an adequate airspeed margin above stall speed and the increased airspeed
and Flap 0° configuration decrease the angle of attack on the wing, maximizing the efficiency of the boot de-
icing system.
Prior to commencing approach, revised approach, landing and go-around speeds must be calculated.
Refer to Chapter 4 of the AOM for the appropriate values.
Again, all increases account for actual stalling speeds with ice on protected surfaces of the airplane and raised
stall warning thresholds.
Accumulated ice on the airframe extracts a small mass penalty on the airplane and combined with the
increased approach and landing speeds, result in an increase in Landing Field Lengths and Brake Energies.
The mass penalty on the airplane, as well as decreased net engine power due to electrical loads, combined
with the increased go-around speed result in a reduction in Landing MAT limits and Approach and Balked
Landing Climb gradients.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.16-4 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.16.5 Landing

The airplane should be flown to a firm touchdown at the aiming point.

Immediately after main wheel touchdown, retard the Power Levers to DISC and lower the nose wheel to the
runway to enhance directional control. Apply anti-skid brakes as required.
On landing on slush covered surfaces, decelerate through 40 kt IAS to taxi speed 10 kt, as rapidly as possible.
Let the anti-skid system do its work. Do Not pump the brake pedals.
The anti-skid system will monitor the onset of tire skidding and modulate brake pressures to achieve maximum
braking.
Avoid the use of reverse thrust on icy or slippery runways.
If reverse thrust is used in a crosswind, be prepared for a possible down-wind drift on slippery runways.
To correct back to the runway centerline, advance the Power Levers toward Flight Idle and reduce braking.
After regaining directional control, increase braking and select DISC.
Do Not select reverse thrust unless required.
If the Water Equivalent Depth (WED) of contaminant on the runway surface is greater than 3 mm (0.125 in),
selection of Power Levers aft of DISC is prohibited to avoid ingesting contaminant into the engines and suffer-
ing a possible flame-out.
Do Not attempt to turn off the runway until speed has been reduced to a manageable level.

2.16.6 Parking

2.16.6.1 Cold Weather Parking

1. Remove the snow, slush, or ice from the area where you will park the airplane.

NOTE: If this is not possible, remove the contamination around the tires of the main and the nose
landing gear only.
If you do not do this, the tires can freeze to the ground

2. Park the airplane.

3. Remove all snow, slush, or ice from the engine intakes and exhausts.
4. Install all plugs and covers supplied for the airplane.

NOTE: In very cold weather, apply a thin brush layer of anti-icing fluid to the covers or they can freeze
to the airplane.

5. If you will park the airplane in the cold for a long time, do the steps that follow:
a. Drain the fluid from the lavatory tank and the warm water wash system.
b. Drain the galley liquid containers.
c. Close all airplane doors.
6. If you park the airplane in ambient temperatures lower than - 20°C (- 4°F), the battery temperatures shown
on the electrical page of the multi-function display (written as the “MFD” in this procedure) must be equal to
or greater than - 20°C (- 4°F) prior to dispatch.

NOTE: There is no battery temperature limitation to start the engines or the auxiliary power unit.

7. If you park the airplane in temperatures lower than - 15°C (5°F) for longer than 3 h, you must permit a
warm-up period for the displays that follow before they become functional:
i) PFD
ii) MFD
iii) ED
iv) ARCDU
v) Standby VHF # 1 Control Panel
vi) FMS (if installed)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

2.17 NORMAL EXPANDED PROCEDURES and CHECKLISTS

This section presents the abbreviated flight compartment checklist (QRH - Quick Reference Handbook), pro-
vided with each Q400, in expanded form.
Should any conflict exist between this information and the checklist in the Airplane Flight Manual, the Flight
Manual shall take priority.
Any implied techniques presented assume that proper pilot skill and judgement are exercised.
All items shown in bold are reproduced from the QRH.
Items marked with stars are part of the ‘SYSTEMS CHECK ONCE EVERY 24 HOURS – FLYING DAY’.

2.17.1 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION

2.17.1.1 PREFLIGHT

All checklists should be completed early enough so as to allow both pilots to monitor their surroundings while
taxiing to the active runway, especially the line-up checklist.
External Check ............................................................................................................................... Completed
Documentation ....................................................................................................................................... Check
Check all required aircraft documents are on-board.
Locking Devices .................................................................................................................................. Remove
Ensure the following are removed:
• Main gear safety lock pins,
• Nose landing gear lock is disengaged,
• Airstair and baggage door external locking devices,
• Forward right hand, aft left and aft right hand emergency door internal locking devices.

2.17.2 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION – POWER OFF

Safety Equipment .............................................................................................. Check Serviceable & Secure

Safety equipment includes:
• Observer’s Life Vest stowed above observer’s seat.
Make sure life jacket is secured, serviceable and not damaged,
• Co-Pilot’s Life Vest, stowed above the co-pilot’s seat.
Make sure life jacket is secured, serviceable and not damaged,
• Hydraulic Pump Handle - stowed on the bulkhead behind the co-pilot’s seat,
• Protective Breathing Equipment - stowed and seal unbroken,
• Observer’s Smoke Goggles - stowed on the bulkhead behind the co-pilot’s seat.
• Portable Fire Extinguisher - stowed on the bulkhead behind the captain’s seat.
Check pressure gauge indicates in the green range,
• Two Flashlights - stowed on the bulkhead behind the captain’s seat. Check serviceability,
• Fire Axe - securely stowed on the bulkhead behind the captain’s seat,
• Captain’s Life Vest - stowed above the captain’s seat.
Make sure life jacket is secured, serviceable and not damaged,
• Emergency Rope - stowed at left of the escape hatch above the captain’s seat.
Make sure rope is secured to the airplane.
Escape Hatch ......................................................................................................................................... Secure
Make sure FLIGHT COMPARTMENT EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH is closed, secured and
the handle is selected to CLOSED position before starting engines.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-2 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION – POWER OFF (cont’d)

Oxygen Mask / QTY ................................................................................................................................ Check

For the captain’s, co-pilot’s and observer’s (if installed) oxygen masks, check the following:
• Make sure the oxygen mask is clean and in good condition.
• Make sure hose is correctly attached and flow indicator shows green.
• The mask microphone jack must be inserted in the correct jack position on the audio jack panel.
• Check the oxygen gauge on the co-pilot’s panel. The Minimum Dispatch Pressure at 21°C (70°F) is:
2 crew 3 crew
1300 psi 1800 psi
(Option - CR 835 SO 90241) 1050 psi 1450 psi

Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... Check

Before entering the seats, make sure all circuit breakers are closed (pushed in).
Check for open circuit breakers visibly from the side.
Landing Gear Alternate Release and Extension Doors ..................................................................... Closed
Make sure the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE DOOR (above the co-pilot’s seat)
and LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION DOOR (on the floor, left of the co-pilot’s seat)
are completely closed before each flight.
L/G Inhibit Switch .................................................................................................................................. NORM
Make sure the LANDING GEAR EXTENTION INHIBIT SWITCH is set to NORMAL with the red guard closed.
If using DC External Power, proceed with For DC External Power (Sub-Chapter 2.17.2.1)
If using APU Power, proceed with For APU Power (Sub-Chapter 2.17.2.2)
If using Battery Power, proceed with For Battery Power Only (Sub-Chapter 2.17.2.3)

2.17.2.1 FOR DC EXTERNAL POWER

BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ........................................................................ ON
• The BATTERY MASTER switch connects main, auxiliary and standby batteries
to the right and left essential buses.
• The MAIN BATT switch connects the main battery to the right main feeder bus.
• The AUX BATT switch connects the auxiliary battery to the left main feeder bus.
• The STBY BATT switch connects the standby battery to the left main feeder bus.
Main Bus Tie ................................................................................................................................................ Tie
Manually connects the left and right main buses together.
All Displays .................................................................................................................................................. ON
Check voltages on Electrical page of MFD.
DC EXT Power .............................................................................................................................................. ON
With DC external power available, set DC EXT PWR switch to EXT PWR position and confirm that:
• DC EXT POWER in green font appears on the MFD Electrical Systems page.
NOTE: With External Power (EP) charge feature, the main, auxiliary and standby batteries remain
connected to the main buses.
Bus Voltage ............................................................................................................................................. Check
Check voltages on Electrical page of MFD.
• If external DC voltage is less than 27.5 V:
- MAIN BATT, AUX BATT and STBY BATT switches - OFF.
- Check MAIN BATTERY, AUX BATTERY and STBY BATTERY caution lights illuminate.
• If external DC voltage is greater than 31.5 V, external power will automatically de-energize.

Recirc Fan (MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated) ............................................................................................... ON

Continue with FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION – POWER ON - CAPTAIN, Sub-Chapter 2.17.3.1.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-3

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

2.17.2.2 FOR APU POWER

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to AFM Supplement 6.
BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ......................................................................... On
• The BATTERY MASTER switch connects main, auxiliary and standby batteries
to the right and left essential buses.
• The MAIN BATT switch connects the main battery to the right main feeder bus.
• The AUX BATT switch connects the auxiliary battery to the left main feeder bus.
• The STBY BATT switch connects the standby battery to the left main feeder bus.
MAIN BUS TIE ............................................................................................................................................... Tie
All Displays ................................................................................................................................................... On
Check voltages on Electrical page of MFD.
Caution / Advisory Lights .......................................................................................................................... Test
Hold CAUT / ADVSY LIGHTS TEST switch at TEST CAUT and make sure:
• Master CAUTION and WARNING lights flash,
• APU caution and CHECK FIRE DET warning lights illuminate and all remaining warning lights flash,
• Press master CAUTION light and check light goes out,
• Press master WARNING light and check light goes out and warning lights cease flashing,
Hold at ADVSY - Check all advisory lights illuminate.
APU PWR ...................................................................................................................................................... On
Push APU PWR switchlight on the APU CONTROL panel.
Check APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory light illuminates.
* APU FIRE Detection ............................................................................................................................... TEST
Press and hold APU FIRE TEST switch and check:
• APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory light out,
• APU caution light and CHECK FIRE DET warning light illuminate,
• APU FIRE, APU FAULT, APU BLT ARM, APU FUEL VALVE CLOSED, APU EXTG and APU FAIL advisory
lights illuminate,
• Master CAUTION and master WARNING lights flash.
Release APU FIRE TEST switch and check:
• APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory light illuminates,
• APU caution light and CHECK FIRE DET warning light go out,
• APU FIRE, APU FAULT, APU BLT ARM, APU FUEL VALVE CLOSED, APU EXTG and APU FAIL advisory
lights go out,
• Master CAUTION and master WARNING lights go out.
Position Lights ............................................................................................................................................. On
CAUTION: Ensure ground personnel and equipment are clear of the APU exhaust port.
APU START Switch ................................................................................................................................. Press
Push and release the START switchlight. Check STARTER advisory light (amber) illuminates then goes out.
Confirm STARTER amber light goes off and green RUN advisory light in APU PWR switchlight illuminates to
show APU is operating. GEN WRN light illuminates.
APU GEN ................................................................................................................................................. Press
Check GEN ON advisory light illuminates.
NOTE: If external power is selected, APU GEN WARN advisory light will remain illuminated.
APU Generator Volts / Load .................................................................................................................. Check
Read voltages on the MFD Electrical Systems page.
Confirm APU load decreasing as the batteries re-charge (maximum continuos load 1.0).

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-4 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FOR APU POWER (cont’d)

Battery Temperature ............................................................................................................................... Check

Monitor battery temperature after APU start on the MFD - Electrical Systems page.
BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................... MIN / OFF
TEMP CONTROL ............................................................................................................................. AUTO / Set
The setting of these switches may vary depending on temperature requirements:
• Set both PACK CONTROL switches to the AUTO position.
• Turn the PASSENGER CABIN TEMPERATURE knob counter-clockwise to the FA position or as required.
• Turn the FLT COMP TEMPERATURE knob as required.

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ..................................................................................... On

APU Bleed (20 s) ................................................................................................................................ As Req’d

Push and release the APU BL AIR switchlight. Make sure the BL AIR OPEN light illuminates.

NOTES: 1. Wait 20 s after APU RUN advisory light illuminates before selecting APU BL AIR switch on.
2. The APU consumes approximately 188 lb/h of fuel.
Ensure there is a minimum of 1000 lb of fuel in # 1 tank plus the quantity required for the
duration of APU operation.

Continue with FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN, Sub-Chapter 2.17.3.1.

2.17.2.3 FOR BATTERY POWER ONLY

DC GEN 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................................ On

MAIN BUS TIE .............................................................................................................................................. Tie
Manually connects right main feeder bus to the left main feeder bus.
ICE PROTECTION ...................................................................................................................................... OFF
Make sure all switches on the ICE PROTECTION panel are set to OFF.
External Lighting ....................................................................................................................................... OFF
All switches on the EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL panel are set to OFF.
IGNITION 1 and 2 ..................................................................................................................................... NORM
Set IGNITION CONTROL 1 and 2 switches to NORM position.
RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ................................................................................... OFF
BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................... MIN / OFF
• Turn the BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL to MIN.
• Set BLEED CONTROL switches to OFF.
Emergency Lights .................................................................................................................................... ARM
Set EMER LIGHTS switch to ARM and
make sure the EMER LTS DISARMED caution light goes off.
Passenger Signs .......................................................................................................................................... ON
Set passenger signs switches to FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING.
POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC
Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF
Briefing .................................................................................................................................................. Review

Continue with START APPROVED, in the following Sub-Chapter.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-5

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

2.17.2.4 START APPROVED

(Battery Power Only)

BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ........................................................................ ON

• The BATTERY MASTER switch connects main, auxiliary and standby batteries to the right and left essen-
tial busses.
• The MAIN BATT switch connects the main battery to the right main feeder bus.
• The AUX BATT switch connects the auxiliary battery to the left main feeder bus.
• The STBY BATT switch connects the standby battery to the left main feeder bus.

All Displays .................................................................................................................................................. ON

Check voltages on Electrical page of MFD.

* Fire Detection ........................................................................................................................................... Test

ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 FIRE TEST DETECTION switch
Hold alternately, for a minimum of 1 s, at ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 positions and check:
• PULL FUEL / HYD OFF handle light illuminates.
• FAULT A and FAULT B advisory lights illuminate.
• CHECK FIRE DET warning light illuminate.
• MASTER WARNING light flashes.
• ENGINE FIRE lights flash.
• Fire warning tone sounds.

Press ENGINE FIRE light and check:

• Check ENGINE FIRE lights stop flashing and fire warning tone is silenced.

Emerg Brake / Pressure ................................................................................................................. ON / Check

Make sure the EMERGENCY / PARKING BRAKE LEVER is set to PARK.
Make sure the PK BRK gauge on the MFD indicates hydraulic pressure above 500 psi (minimum dispatch).
If not, replenish pressure above 500 psi, then set the EMERGENCY / PARKING BRAKE LEVER to PARK.

NOTE: When starting engine # 1 first, a minimum park brake pressure of 1000 psi is required.

Doors / Fueling Lights ................................................................................................................................ Out

Make sure the following lights are off:
• FUSELAGE DOORS warning light
• FUELING ON caution light

When engine-start clearance has been received, proceed as follows:

Anti-Collision .............................................................................................................................................. Red

Engines ...................................................................................................................................... Clear for Start

The captain normally starts the # 2 engine first and communicates with ground crew.
The first officer looks out to make sure the propeller area is clear of personnel and equipment before starting
the engine.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-6 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 NORMAL PROCEDURES

START APPROVED (cont’d)

CAPTAIN FIRST OFFICER

ENGINE START SELECT Switch ... Pull out then Set to # 2

Observes SELECT Light illuminates.

Calls “CLEAR # 2”. Makes sure the area is clear.

Calls “# 2 CLEAR”.
ENGINE START Switch ............................................ Press

Makes sure START Light illuminates. Starts stopwatch running to time the start.

NOTE: When conducting an engine start using

external power or the APU, # 2 engine oil
pressure may momentarily indicate full scale
deflection upon selection of the ENGINE
START Switch for # 1 or # 2 engine.
# 2 engine oil pressure should immediately
return to normal values.

At 1st indication of NH:

Sets condition lever to START / FEATHER.

NOTE: Fuel flow indication on ED is not accurate until the engine is stable at idle NH.

Check that engine accelerates to above 64.2% NH and ITT does not exceed 920°C.

Check ENGINE START and ENGINE START SELECT Switches off

Observe SELECT and START Lights out

For the appropriate engine, make sure oil pressure is greater than 44 psi, ENG OIL PRESS Warning Light,
ENG FUEL PRESS and ENG HYD PUMP Caution Lights off.

Make sure DC GEN Caution Light is off.

NOTES:

1. ENGINE SELECT Light will remain illuminated for approximately 15 s after ENGINE START and
SELECT Switches off.

2. When starting on aircraft batteries, ensure MAIN, AUX and STBY battery loads are 0.4 or less prior to
starting the 2nd engine.

Repeat start procedure for other engine.

NOTE: Complete FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN,

Sub-Chapter 2.17.3.1, before proceeding to AFTER START CHECKLIST.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-7

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

2.17.3 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON

2.17.3.1 CAPTAIN
DC GEN 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................................... ON
ICE PROTECTION / WS Heat & Wipers ..................................................................................................... OFF
Set all switches on the ice protection panel to OFF position.
PITOT / STATIC Switches ........................................................................................................................... OFF
LANDING / TAXI Lights .............................................................................................................................. OFF
ELT .............................................................................................................................................................. Auto
With 3 Frequency ELT System [with MS 4-423100 Incorporated]:
ELT .......................................................................................................................................................... Armed
NOTE: Ensure ELT mode switch is fully in the ARMED position.
* Fire Detection ........................................................................................................................................... Test
ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 FIRE TEST DETECTION switch
Hold alternately, for a minimum of 1 s, at ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 positions and check:
• PULL FUEL / HYD OFF handle light illuminates.
• FAULT A and FAULT B advisory lights illuminate.
• CHECK FIRE DET warning light illuminate.
• Master WARNING light flashes.
• ENGINE FIRE lights flash.
• Fire warning tone sounds.
Press ENGINE FIRE light and check:
• Check ENGINE FIRE lights stop flashing and fire warning tone is silenced.
FUEL / HYD Valves ................................................................................................................................... Open
Make sure fuel and hydraulic valves are open and
the green FUEL VALVE OPEN and HYD VALVE OPEN advisory lights are on.
* Baggage Smoke Warning (AFT and FWD) ............................................................................................. Test
NOTE: Direct sunlight on the smoke detectors in the forward and aft baggage compartments can
affect the BAGGAGE FWD SMOKE and BAGGAGE AFT SMOKE test.
The forward baggage and aft baggage compartment doors should be closed prior to
conducting the forward baggage and aft baggage compartments smoke test.
Select Baggage AFT TEST switch to position 1 and check:
• Master warning tone sounds, master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights flash and
SMOKE / EXTG, VENT INLT, VENT OTLT and AFT BTL ARM advisory lights illuminate.
Repeat with Baggage AFT TEST switch to position 2.
Select Baggage FWD TEST switch to TEST and check:
• Master warning tone sounds, master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights flash and
SMOKE / EXTG and FWD BTL ARM advisory lights illuminate.

[with Option - CR 825 CH 03262 Incorporated]

* Cargo Compartment Smoke Warning .................................................................................................... Test
Rotate CARGO SMOKE TEST Selector through positions 1, 2, 3 and 4.
At each position observe illumination of the master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights, VENT INLT
CLOSED and VALVE OTLT CLOSED advisory lights.
NOTE: Pause for approximately 2 s at each position.
Rotate CARGO SMOKE TEST Selector to OFF. Check master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights out,
VENT INLT CLOSED and VALVE OTLT CLOSED advisory lights out.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-8 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

Panel Lighting .................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

Set the panel lighting intensity to the appropriate intensity.

IGNITION 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................... NORM

CABIN ALTITUDE Controls ......................................................................................................................... Set

Set the controls as follows:

• AUTO / MAN / DUMP switch – Set at AUTO.
• CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW knob – Rotate fully counter-clockwise to CLSD.
Forward outflow valve is closed.
• LDG ALT control knob – Rotate to set the destination airport elevation on the LDG ALT indicator.

EXTERIOR Lights .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

Emergency Lights .................................................................................................................................... ARM

Make sure the EMER LTS DISARMED caution light goes off.

Passenger Signs ................................................................................................................................ As Req’d

Set fasten belts and no smoking switches to FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING position.

Caution / Advisory Lights ......................................................................................................................... Test

Hold CAUTION / ADVISORY LIGHTS TEST switch at CAUT and make sure:
• Master CAUTION and master WARNING lights flash.
• All caution lights steady on.
• # 1 ENG OIL PRESS and # 2 ENG OIL PRESS warning lights turn on steady.
• All remaining warning lights flash.
• Push master CAUTION light and make sure it goes off.
• Push master WARNING light and make sure it goes off and warning lights stop flashing.

NOTE: FUSELAGE DOORS warning light will not flash with passenger or baggage door(s) open.

Hold CAUTION / ADVISORY LIGHTS TEST switch at ADVSY and make sure:
• All advisory lights and AP DISENG light illuminate.
• Particular attention must be given to the following advisory lights:
- Fire detection panel lights.
- De-ice and anti-ice lights.
- POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SWITCHLIGHTS on the Glareshield panel, all 4 switchlights read
PUSH OFF.
- Landing gear lights.

NOTE: ENGINE SELECT, ENGINE START, CABIN ALTITUDE FAULT and ALTERNATE PILOT
WIPER ON lights do not illuminate with the advisory light test.

Caution / Advisory Lights Dimming Switch .................................................................................... As Req'd

• Set to DIM for minimum brightness of all caution and advisory lights.
• Set to BRT for maximum brightness of all caution and advisory lights.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-9

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

TEMP CONTROLs ........................................................................................................................................ Set

The setting of these switches may vary depending on temperature requirements:

• Set both PACK CONTROL switches to the AUTO position.
• Turn the PASSENGER CABIN TEMPERATURE knob counter-clockwise to the FA position or as required.

• Turn the FLT COMP TEMPERATURE knob as required.

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ As Req’d

AC External ................................................................................................................................................. OFF

AC GEN 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................................... ON

GPWS Override ...................................................................................................................................... NORM

Make sure the GPWS FLAP OVERRIDE switchlight is off and the plastic guard is in place.

Nosewheel STEERING ............................................................................................................................... OFF

* Stall Warning 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................... Test

[with MS 4-457056, MS 4-126263 or MS 4-126307 Not Incorporated]

Set and hold STALL WARNING TEST switch at TEST 1 position and observe:
• RA increases to greater than 500 ft and
rising runway (with tape display of altitude incorporated, rising ground) disappears.
• RA decreases to 50 ft and
rising runway (with tape display of altitude incorporated, rising ground) reappears.
• Stick shaker activates
• # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL Caution Lights illuminate.
Release STALL WARNING TEST Switch and check # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL Cau-
tion Lights out and Stick Shaker off.
NOTE: Hold STALL WARN TEST Switch for a minimum of 10 s prior to release.
Repeat with STALL WARN TEST Switch at TEST 2
(except in item 4 - # 2 STALL SYST FAIL Caution Light illuminates).
NOTE: TCAS FAIL may momentarily flash on PFD’s and MFD’s during the Stall Warning test.

[with MS 4-457056, MS 4-126263 or MS 4-126307 Incorporated]:

STALL WARN TEST switch - Select TEST 1 and release. Observe:
• # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL caution lights illuminate.
• Stick shaker activates.
• # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL caution lights out and stick shaker off.

Repeat with STALL WARN TEST switch to TEST 2

(except in item - # 2 STALL SYST FAIL caution light illuminates).

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-10 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

* ADC 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................................. Test

Check ALT FAIL, IAS FAIL and IVSI FAIL flags are out on pilot’s and co-pilot’s PFD’s and
valid SAT is displayed on ED.

ADC test switch - Hold at TEST 1 and check:

• The barometric altimeter shows 14360 ft on pilot’s PFD.
• The altimeter barometric setting changes to 990 hPa (29.23 in Hg) on pilot’s PFD.
• The maximum operating airspeed (VMO) is displayed as 284 KIAS on pilot’s PFD.
• The airspeed indicator displays 285 KIAS in red on pilot’s PFD.
• The indicated SAT is - 15°C and WTG 2 FAIL appears on ED.
• IAS, IAS MISMATCH and ALT appears on PFD’s.
• PITCH TRIM and ELEVATOR FEEL and AVIONICS caution lights illuminate.
• The overspeed warning horn is activated after 5 s.

NOTE: TCAS FAIL may momentarily flash on PFD’s and MFD’s during the ADC functional test.

ADC test switch - Hold at TEST 2 and check previous items above on co-pilot’s PFD except SAT does not
change and WTG 1 FAIL advisory message appears on ED.

CB & Panel Lighting .......................................................................................................................... As Req’d

Operate circuit breaker and panel light switch to make sure the bulb operates then
set the flight instrument panel lighting intensity as required.

[with MS 4-429586 Incorporated]:

NOSE GEAR LOCK Advisory Light ........................................................................................................... Out

Smoke Goggles ...................................................................................................................................... Check

Make sure goggles are not scratched, are in good condition and properly stored.

FLIGHT / TAXI ............................................................................................................................................ TAXI

Make sure the FLIGHT / TAXI switch on the GLARESHIELD is in the TAXI position.

STICK PUSHER / ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT OFF ................................................................................... NORM

Make sure the ELEVATOR TRIM & STICK PUSHER SHUT OFF switchlights are in the out position
and the amber PUSH OFF lights are not on.

Clock ........................................................................................................................................................ Check

Make sure clock is serviceable and the correct time is set and reset the flight time to 0 before each flight.

GPWS .......................................................................................................................................................... Test

• # 1 NAV receiver - Tune to any VOR frequency
• GPWS FLAP OVERRIDE switch - Normal and guarded
• GPWS caution light - Out
• PULL UP GPWS TEST switch - Press and hold

Check that the GPWS caution light, GPWS FLAP OVERRIDE, PULL UP and BELOW G/S advisory lights illu-
minate and the “GLIDESLOPE” and “PULL UP” voice warnings are audible.

NOTE: If Test response is unsatisfactorily, wait at least 30 s before repeating Test.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-11

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

PFCS ........................................................................................................................................................ NORM

Make sure all 4 POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS Switchlights on the glareshield
are in the out position and both the amber PUSH OFF or OFF switchlights are not illuminated.

Flight Guidance Controller .................................................................................................................... Check

• Select left and right EHSI navigation data sources as required, using the corresponding NAV SOURCE
knobs.
• Select HSI SEL to side of pilot flying.

SPEED BUGS ............................................................................................................................................... Set

Set as required.

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

Set the local altimeter setting using the BARO SET knob on the INDEX CONTROL panel and
confirm the altimeter reading with the field elevation.

PFD ......................................................................................................................................................... Check

The following flight instruments should be checked for serviceability then set for departure or SID.
• EADI - Set display intensity to a comfortable level.
Make sure no red flags are in view and all displays are correct.
• EHSI (HSI) - Set display intensity to a comfortable level.
Make sure no red flags are in view and all displays are correct.

MFD ......................................................................................................................................................... Check

Confirm MFD Selector function on the Engine & System Integrated Display Control Panel
by cycling through each of ENG, NAV, SYS and PFD.

PFCS Indicator ....................................................................................................................................... Check

Make sure all spoiler needles on the MFD indicate actual spoiler position.
The rudder may indicate a deflection left or right of center if a crosswind exists.

STBY Attitude Indicator ........................................................................................................................... Erect

Make sure instrument is erect and red flag is not in view.

STBY Airspeed Indicator ....................................................................................................................... Check

Standby Altimeter ....................................................................................................................................... Set

Set the local altimeter setting and confirm the altimeter reading with the field elevation.

ED ............................................................................................................................................................ Check

ED Messages .......................................................................................................................................... Check

NOTE: If messages appear in the Engine Display advisory area, maintenance action is required
before dispatch.

Fuel Quantity .......................................................................................................................................... Check

Make sure the quantity of fuel indicated on the MFD – Fuel page, is sufficient for the flight.
Maximum fuel imbalance between contents of main fuel tanks is 272 kg (600 lb).

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-12 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

Landing Gear Sel / Lights / Horn ........................................................................................................... Check

• Make sure landing gear selector is selected down.
• Green LEFT / NOSE / RIGHT undercarriage lights are on.
• The L DOOR and R DOOR and / or N DOOR amber lights may be on if the landing gear doors are open.
• Hold the gear-warning horn test switch at TEST and make sure the horn sounds.
• Release TEST switch and horn should stop sounding.

GPWS Landing Flap .......................................................................................................................... As Req’d

STBY HYD PRESS / PTU / HYD # 3 ISOL Valve ................................................................................... NORM

Make sure all 3 switchlights are off.

Flap Indication ........................................................................................................................................ Check

Make sure the flap selection indicated on the MFD agrees with the FLAPS lever position.

AHRS ....................................................................................................................................................... Check

FMS .............................................................................................................................................. Programmed

EFIS Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... Set

• Set the dimming control knobs for nominal intensity on the PFD and MFD.
• Set desired Navaids (VOR, ADF or FMS) using the bearing selector knob.

NOTE: [with MS 4-126104 Not Incorporated]:

On the ADF expanded page, if the line select key is pressed to select TEST, the ADF may
latch in test mode after passing the ADF test.
To exit test mode, change frequency by pressing the line select key twice and the again to
return to the original frequency.

* PFD / MFD OFF / BRT Selectors ............................................................................................ OFF then BRT

Carry out an electrical power reset on each of the PFD and MFD displays.

NOTE: The removal of all aircraft electrical power will accomplish the intent of the power reset of the
PFDs, MFDs and ED

Pitch & Roll DISC ........................................................................................................................................... In

Make sure both PITCH and ROLL disconnect handles are pushed in.
TANK AUX PUMPs 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................ OFF
Make sure the TANK 1 and TANK 2 AUX PUMP switchlights are off.
This can also be confirmed on the MFD – Fuel Systems page.
FUEL TRANSFER ....................................................................................................................................... OFF
Make sure the FUEL TRANSFER switch is OFF and
make sure that both green VALVE OPEN lights are off on the MFD Fuel Systems page.

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC

Condition Levers ........................................................................................ FUEL OFF or START / FEATHER

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-13

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

* AUTOFEATHER ............................................................................................................................. Test / OFF

AUTOFEATHER Switch ........................................................................................................................... Press

Check SELECT advisory light illuminates.

[with MS 4-113558 Not Incorporated] observe the following appear on ED:

• A/F SELECT,
• A/F TEST IN PROG,
• UPTRIM appears,
• ITT and NH red radials increase,
• NTOP changes to MTOP and torque rating and torque bugs increase,
• A/F ARM appears twice,
• A/F TEST PASS,
• MTOP changes to NTOP and torque rating and torque bugs decrease.
NOTE: During the test # 1 or # 2 ALT FTHR advisory lights may illuminate momentarily.
If autofeather test is aborted, A/F TEST ABORT message will appear on ED.
If autofeather test fails, A/F TEST FAILED message will appear on ED.
If either A/F TEST ABORT or A/F TEST FAILED appears on ED, repeat the autofeather test
AUTOFEATHER Switch ....................................................................................................................... Press
Check SELECT advisory out and A/F SELECT message disappears on ED.

[with MS 4-113558 Incorporated] observe the following appear on ED:

• A/F SELECT,
• A/F TEST IN PROG,
Observe the following sequence appears twice on ED:
• UPTRIM appears,
• ITT and NH red radials increase,
• NTOP changes to MTOP and torque rating and torque bugs increase,
• A/F ARM appears,
• A/F SELECT appears,
• UPTRIM disappears,
• MTOP changes to NTOP and torque rating and torque bugs decrease,
• MTOP changes to NTOP and torque rating and torque bugs decrease,
Observe the following appear on ED:
• A/F TEST PASS.

NOTE: During the test # 1 or # 2 ALT FTHR advisory lights may illuminate momentarily.
If autofeather test is aborted, A/F TEST ABORT message will appear on ED.
If autofeather test fails, A/F TEST FAILED message will appear on ED.
If A/F TEST ABORT appears on ED, repeat the Autofeather test.

AUTOFEATHER Switch ........................................................................................................................... Press

Check SELECT advisory out and A/F SELECT message disappears on ED.

Alternate Feather 1 and 2 ....................................................................................................................... NORM

Make sure the white FTHR pushbutton indicator lights are off.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-14 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

EMERG BRAKE / Pressure ............................................................................................................ On / Check

Make sure the emergency / parking brake lever is set to PARK.
Make sure the PK BRK gauge on the MFD – Hydraulic page indicates hydraulic pressure above 500 psi
(minimum dispatch).

NOTE: When starting engine # 1 first, a minimum park brake pressure of 1000 psi is required.

Control Lock ................................................................................................................................................ ON

ARCDU ................................................................................................................................................. ON / Set

Select frequencies as req’d.

NOTE: [with MS 4-126104 Not Incorporated]:

For night flying, either one of the pilot's or co-pilot's reading light must be aimed at the ARCDU
radio selector knob to enable determination of the selector position.

NOTE: Avoid transmission on VHF radios on frequencies within 200 kHz of any other tuned
frequency.

Set selector switches to required COMM channels.

• EMERGENCY switch to NORM
• Set MIC switch to BOOM
• HOT MIC switch as required
• Push the required rotary selectors down (ON) and set volume to a comfortable level.

NOTE: If BAD CONF message on ARCDU, cycle power off, then on.

* TCAS ........................................................................................................................................................ Test

Perform the appropriate TCAS system test.

NOTE: The following procedures correspond to:

- AFM Supplement 33 (ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)
- AFM Supplement 106 (ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)

Select TA / RA on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.

NOTE: The ACAS II / TCAS II mode of operation is displayed on the PFD and ND / MFD.
Selecting TA / RA enables TA / RA mode for take-off.
TCAS is in STBY mode when the transponder is in SBY mode.
ACAS II / TCAS II will indicate FAIL on ARCDU with onside ATC set to SBY and offside ATC
failed. Select ATC ON to confirm ACAS II / TCAS II function.

Select TEST on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page and observe the following:
• TCAS TEST appears on EHSI / PFD,
• Intruder symbol test pattern is displayed on the ND / MFD,
• IVSI test indication is displayed,
• No failures are annunciated,
• “TCAS SYSTEM TEST OK” is announced.
If a fault is identified at the completion of the test, “TCAS SYSTEM TEST FAIL” is announced.
Select SBY on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-15

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

(Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

[with MS 4-903190 or MS 4-458698 Not Incorporated]:

Select ATC ON on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.
Select ATC SBY on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.
NOTE: The ACAS II / TCAS II mode of operation is displayed on the PFD and ND / MFD.
After initial power-up, momentarily selecting ATC to ON and back to SBY ensures
consistent TCAS mode indication on the PFD, MFD and ARCDU.
Subsequent selections are as desired.
Select ATC ON (using appropriate code) on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.

Select TA / RA on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.

NOTE: Selecting TA / RA enables TA / RA mode for take-off.

TCAS is in STBY mode when the transponder is in SBY mode.
ACAS II / TCAS II will indicate STBY on PFD and ND / MFD with onside ATC set to SBY and
offside ATC failed.

Select TEST on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page and observe the following:
• TCAS TEST appears on EHSI / PFD,
• “TCAS TEST” is announced,
• Intruder symbol test pattern is displayed on the ND / MFD,
• “TCAS TEST PASS” is announced.

If a fault is identified at the completion of the test:

• “TCAS TEST FAIL” or “TCAS LRU PASS, TCAS SYSTEM FAIL” is announced.

[with MS 4-903190 or MS 4-458698 Not Incorporated]:

Select SBY on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.

Confirm ATC SBY on the ARCDU TCAS / ATC Page.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-16 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

TRIMs .............................................................................................................................................. Check / Set

• Release control lock then cycle the aileron trim throughout its range then set trim needle to center position.
Re-engage control lock.
• Cycle the rudder trim throughout its range then set trim needle to center position.
• Cycle the elevator trim throughout its range then set trim needle to the required position for take-off.

TAKE-OFF ELEVATOR TRIM vs CG

CG - % MAC TAKE-OFF RANGE
FORWARD 13.8% AFT END
AFT 36% FORWARD END

NOTES: 1. When setting the elevator trim, holding the elevator trim switch for greater than 3 s will
cause the “elevator trim in motion” audio tone to sound and the ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT
OFF switch PUSH OFF advisory light to illuminate.
2. [with MS 4-126383 Not Incorporated]:
To avoid possible activation of the Take-off Configuration aural warning, with a Centre of
Gravity at or near the FWD or AFT Limit, set the ELEVATOR TRIM with the trim pointer
“one half of the pointer's width” inside the forward edge (with AFT CG) or inside the aft
edge (with FWD CG) of the TO trim band.

ESID Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... Set

* ED OFF / BRT Selectors ......................................................................................................... OFF then BRT

Carry out an electrical power reset on the ED display.

NOTE: The removal of all aircraft electrical power will accomplish the intent of the power reset of the
PFDs, MFDs and ED.

EFIS ATT / HDG Source ......................................................................................................................... NORM

EFIS ADC Source ................................................................................................................................... NORM

Radar .......................................................................................................................................................... OFF

* Flight Compartment Door Emergency Access ..................................................................................... Test

[with MS 4-309218 or MS 4-309221 Incorporated]:

Confirm Flight Compartment Door is closed and locked and check:
• BAGG DOOR, CKPT DOOR, AUTO UNLK and FAIL advisory lights are out,
• INTERNAL DOORS caution light is out.
Momentarily press FLIGHT ATTENDANT emergency access switch and check:
• INTERNAL DOORS caution light illuminates,
• AUTO UNLK advisory light illuminates.
Select INTERNAL DOORS switch to DENY and check:
• INTERNAL DOORS caution light goes out,
• AUTO UNLK advisory light goes out.
• Flight Compartment Door is closed and locked.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-17

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

2.17.3.2 FIRST OFFICER

ARCDU ................................................................................................................................................. ON / Set
Select frequencies as req’d.
NOTE: [with MS 4-126104 Not Incorporated]:
For night flying, either one of the pilot's or co-pilot's reading light must be aimed at the ARCDU
radio selector knob to enable determination of the selector position.
Set Selector switches to required COMM channels:
• EMERGENCY switch to NORM
• Set MIC switch to BOOM
• HOT MIC switch as required
• Push the required rotary selectors down (ON) and set volume to comfortable level.
EFIS Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... Set
• Set the dimming control knobs for nominal intensity on the PFD and MFD.
• Set desired Navaids (VOR, ADF or FMS) using the bearing selector knobs.
NOTE: [with MS 4-126104 Not Incorporated]:
On the ADF expanded page, if the line select key is pressed to select TEST, the ADF may
latch in test mode after passing the ADF test.
To exit test mode, change frequency by pressing the line select key twice and the again to
return to the original frequency.

FMS (if applicable) ........................................................................................................................ Programmed

AHRS ....................................................................................................................................................... Check
Clock ............................................................................................................................................................ Set
Make sure clock is serviceable, the correct time is set and the flight time is set to 0 before each flight.
STICK PUSHER / ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT OFF .................................................................................... NORM
Make sure the ELEVATOR TRIM & STICK PUSHER SHUT OFF switchlights are in the out position
and the amber PUSH OFF lights are not on.
ANTI SKID .................................................................................................................................................... ON
Turning the ANTI SKID TEST switch on will cause it to do a self test.
Make sure INBD ANTI-SKID and OUTBD ANTI-SKID caution lights go off after 6 s,
indicating the test is complete.
MFD ......................................................................................................................................................... Check
Confirm MFD Selector function on the Engine & System Integrated Display Control Panel by cycling through
each of ENG, NAV, SYS and PFD.
PFD .......................................................................................................................................................... Check
The following flight instruments should be checked for serviceability then set for departure or SID.
• EADI - Set display intensity to a comfortable level.
Make sure no red flags are in view and all displays are correct.
• EHSI (HSI) - Set display intensity to a comfortable level.
Make sure no red flags are in view and all displays are correct.
SPEED BUGS .............................................................................................................................................. Set
Set as required.
Altimeter ....................................................................................................................................................... Set
Set the local altimeter setting using the BARO SET knob on the index control panel and
confirm the altimeter reading with the field elevation. Altimeters should be within 50 ft of field elevation.
Smoke Goggles ...................................................................................................................................... Check
Make sure goggles are not scratched, are in good condition and properly stowed.
CB and Panel Lighting ...................................................................................................................... As Req’d
Operate circuit breaker panel lights switch to make sure the bulb operates then set the flight instrument panel
lighting intensity as required.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-18 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - FIRST OFFICER (cont’d)

OXYGEN PRESS ..................................................................................................................................... Check

Make sure the oxygen pressure gauge indicates in the green range.
Forward Outflow Valve Lever ......................................................................................... NORMAL / Guarded
Make sure the forward safety valve lever is set to NORMAL and guarded.

2.17.4 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION CHECKLIST

PREFLIGHT

External Check ................................................................................................................................ Completed

Documentation ....................................................................................................................................... Check
Locking Devices ................................................................................................................................. Remove

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION – POWER OFF

Safety Equipment ............................................................................................. Check Serviceable & Secure

Escape Hatch ........................................................................................................................................ Secure
Oxygen Masks / QTY .............................................................................................................................. Check
Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... Check
Alt Gear Doors / L/G Inhibit Switch ....................................................................................... Closed / NORM

For DC External Power

For APU Power

BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ........................................................................ ON
MAIN BUS TIE .............................................................................................................................................. TIE
All Displays .................................................................................................................................................. ON
Caution / Advisory Lights ......................................................................................................................... Test
APU PWR ...................................................................................................................................................... ON
APU Fire Detection .................................................................................................................................... Test
Position Lights ............................................................................................................................................. ON
APU Start .................................................................................................................................................. Press
CAUTION: Ensure ground personnel and equipment are clear of the APU exhaust port.
APU Gen ................................................................................................................................................... Press
APU Generator Volts / Load ................................................................................................................... Check
Battery Temperature ............................................................................................................................... Check
BLEED AIR 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................... OFF
RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ..................................................................................... ON
APU Bleed (20 s) ................................................................................................................................ As Req’d
(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-19

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION – POWER OFF (cont’d)

For Battery Power Only

DC GEN 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................................... ON

MAIN BUS TIE .............................................................................................................................................. TIE

ICE PROTECTION ....................................................................................................................................... OFF

External Lighting ........................................................................................................................................ OFF

IGNITION 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................... NORM

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ..................................................................................... ON

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................... MIN / OFF

EMER LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................................ ARM

Passenger Signs ......................................................................................................................................... ON

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF

Briefing .................................................................................................................................................. Review

START APPROVED

BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ........................................................................ ON

All Displays .................................................................................................................................................. ON

* Fire Detection ........................................................................................................................................... Test

EMERG BRAKE / Pressure ............................................................................................................ ON / Check

Doors / Fueling Lights ................................................................................................................................ Out

Anti-Collision .............................................................................................................................................. Red

Engines ...................................................................................................................................... Clear for Start

NOTE: Complete Flight COMPARTMENT Preparation before proceeding to AFTER START checklist.

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-20 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN

DC GEN 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................................ ON

ICE PROTECTION / WS Heat & Wipers .................................................................................................... OFF
LANDING / TAXI Lights .............................................................................................................................. OFF
ELT ............................................................................................................................................... Auto / Armed
* Fire Detection .......................................................................................................................................... Test
FUEL Valves ............................................................................................................................................. Open
* Baggage Smoke Warning (Aft and Forward) .......................................................................................... Test
* Cargo Compartment Smoke Warning [with Option - CR 825 CH 03262 Incorporated] ....................... Test
Panel Lighting .................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
IGNITION 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................... NORM
Cabin Altitude Controls .............................................................................................................................. Set
EXTERIOR Lights .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d
Emergency Lights ..................................................................................................................................... Arm
Passenger Signs ................................................................................................................................ As Req’d
Caution / Advisory Lights ......................................................................................................................... Test
TEMP CONTROLs ........................................................................................................................................ Set
BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ As Req’d
AC External ................................................................................................................................................ OFF
AC GEN 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................................ ON
GPWS Override ...................................................................................................................................... NORM
Nosewheel STEERING .............................................................................................................................. OFF
* Stall Warning 1 and 2 .............................................................................................................................. Test
* ADC 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................................. Test
CB and Panel Lighting ....................................................................................................................... As Req’d
Smoke Goggles (if applicable) ................................................................................................................ Check
FLIGHT / TAXI ............................................................................................................................................ TAXI
STICK PUSHER / ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT OFF ................................................................................... NORM
Clock ........................................................................................................................................................ Check
GPWS .......................................................................................................................................................... Test
PFCS ....................................................................................................................................................... NORM
Flight Guidance Controller .................................................................................................................... Check
SPEED BUGS ............................................................................................................................................... Set
Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-21

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - CAPTAIN (cont’d)

PFD .......................................................................................................................................................... Check

MFD ......................................................................................................................................................... Check
PFCS Indicator ....................................................................................................................................... Check
STBY Attitude Indicator ........................................................................................................................... Erect
STBY Airspeed Indicator ....................................................................................................................... Check
STBY Altimeter ............................................................................................................................................ Set
ED ............................................................................................................................................................ Check
ED Messages .......................................................................................................................................... Check
Fuel Quantity .......................................................................................................................................... Check
Landing Gear Sel / Lights / Horn .......................................................................................................... Check
GPWS Landing Flap .......................................................................................................................... As Req’d
STBY HYD PRESS / PTU / HYD # 3 ISOL VLV ...................................................................................... NORM
AHRS ....................................................................................................................................................... Check
FMS ............................................................................................................................................... Programmed
EFIS Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... Set
* PFD / MFD OFF / BRT Selector .............................................................................................. OFF then BRT
Pitch and Roll DISC ........................................................................................................................................ In
TANK AUX PUMPS 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................ OFF
Fuel Transfer ............................................................................................................................................... OFF
Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF
POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC
* Autofeather .................................................................................................................................... Test / OFF
Alternate Feather 1 and 2 ....................................................................................................................... NORM
EMERG BRAKE / Pressure ............................................................................................................ ON / Check
Control Lock ................................................................................................................................................ ON
ARCDU ................................................................................................................................................. ON / Set
* TCAS ......................................................................................................................................................... Test
TRIMs .............................................................................................................................................. Check / Set
ESID Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... Set
EFIS ATT / HDG Source ......................................................................................................................... NORM
EFIS ADC Source ................................................................................................................................... NORM
Radar ........................................................................................................................................................... OFF
* Flight Compartment Door Emergency access ...................................................................................... Test

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-22 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - FIRST OFFICER

ARCDU ................................................................................................................................................. ON / Set

EFIS Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... Set

FMS (if applicable) ........................................................................................................................ Programmed

AHRS ....................................................................................................................................................... Check

Clock ............................................................................................................................................................. Set

STICK PUSHER / ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT OFF ................................................................................... NORM

ANTI SKID ..................................................................................................................................................... ON

MFD .......................................................................................................................................................... Check

PFD .......................................................................................................................................................... Check

SPEED BUGS ............................................................................................................................................... Set

Smoke Goggles (if applicable) ................................................................................................................ Check

Altimeter ....................................................................................................................................................... Set

CB and Panel Lighting ....................................................................................................................... As Req’d

OXYGEN PRESS ..................................................................................................................................... Check

FWD OUTFLOW Valve .......................................................................................................... NORM / Guarded

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-23

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.17.5 NORMAL CHECKLIST

2.17.5.1 ORIGINATING BEFORE START

GPU / APU ..................................................................................................................................................... On

External Check ............................................................................................................................... Completed

Alt Gear Door / L/G Inhibit Switch ......................................................................................... Closed / NORM

Check that:
• MAIN LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE door is closed,
• LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION door is closed.
• LANDING GEAR EXTENTION INHIBIT switch is set to NORMAL and the red guard is closed.

Flight Compartment Preparation .................................................................................................. Completed

Briefing ............................................................................................................................................ Completed

Ensure the take-off briefing has been completed.

ORIGINATING BEFORE START

GPU / APU ..................................................................................................................................................... On

External Check ............................................................................................................................... Completed

Alt Gear Doors / L/G Inhibit Switch ....................................................................................... Closed / NORM

Flight Compartment Preparation .................................................................................................. Completed

Briefing ............................................................................................................................................ Completed

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-24 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.2 BEFORE START

Escape Hatch ........................................................................................................................................ Closed

Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... Check
BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ........................................................................ On
• Check MAIN BATTERY, AUX BATTERY and STBY BATTERY caution lights out
• Check voltages on the MFD Electrical Systems page.
Passenger Signs .......................................................................................................................................... On
Make sure the passenger signs are to the FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING positions.
Emergency Lights .................................................................................................................................... ARM
• Make sure EMER LIGHTS switch is in the ARM position.
• Make sure EMER LTS DISARMED caution light is off.
ANTI SKID ..................................................................................................................................................... ON
Set ANTI SKID switch to ON position and check:
• INBD ANTI-SKID and OUTBD ANTI-SKID caution lights are off.
FUEL TRANSFER / QTY .............................................................................................................. OFF / Check
• Make sure the FUEL TRANSFER switch is OFF.
• Make sure that both green VALVE OPEN lights are off on the MFD – Fuel Systems page.
• Make sure the quantity of fuel indicated on the MFD – Fuel page, is sufficient for the flight.
Maximum fuel imbalance between contents of main fuel tanks is 272 kg (600 lb).
EMERG BRAKE / Pressure ............................................................................................................ On / Check
• Make sure the EMERGENCY / PARKING BRAKE LEVER is set to PARK.
• Make sure the PK BRK gauge on the MFD indicates hydraulic pressure above 500 psi for starting
engine # 2 and 1000 psi if starting engine # 1 first.
If not, replenish pressure above 1500 psi, then set the EMERGENCY / PARKING BRAKE LEVER to PARK.
POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC
Make sure POWER Levers are at DISC.
Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF
Take-off Data ..................................................................................................................................... Reviewed
Review take-off data, mass.

BEFORE START
Escape Hatch ........................................................................................................................................ Closed
Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... Check
BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ........................................................................ On
Passenger Signs .......................................................................................................................................... On
EMER LIGHTS ........................................................................................................................................... ARM
ANTI SKID ..................................................................................................................................................... ON
FUEL TRANSFER / QTY .............................................................................................................. OFF / Check
EMERG BRAKE / Pressure ............................................................................................................ On / Check
POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC
Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF
Take-off Data ..................................................................................................................................... Reviewed

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-25

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

2.17.5.3 START APPROVED

Door / Fueling Lights .................................................................................................................................. Out
Make sure the following lights are off:
• FUSELAGE DOORS warning light
• FUELING ON caution light
APU Bleed ................................................................................................................................................... OFF
Check APU BL AIR OPEN advisory light goes off.
RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] .................................................................................... OFF
A/COL Lights ............................................................................................................................................. RED
Make sure the FLT DATA RECORDER caution light is off.
Engines ..................................................................................................................................... Clear For Start
The captain normally starts the # 2 engine first and communicates with ground crew.
The first officer looks out to make sure the propeller area is clear of all personnel and equipment before starting
the engine.
CAPTAIN FIRST OFFICER
ENGINE START SELECT Switch .... Pull out then Set to # 2
Observes SELECT Light illuminates. Makes sure the area is clear.
Calls “CLEAR # 2”. Calls “# 2 CLEAR”.
ENGINE START Switch button ................................ Press
Makes sure START Light illuminates. Starts stopwatch running to time the start.
NOTE: When conducting an engine start using
external power or the APU, # 2 engine oil
pressure may momentarily indicate full scale
deflection upon selection of the ENGINE
START Switch for # 1 or # 2 engine.
# 2 engine oil pressure should immediately
return to normal values.
At 1st indication of NH:
Sets condition lever to START FEATHER.
NOTE: Fuel flow indication on ED is not accurate until the engine is stable at idle NH.
Check that engine accelerates to above 64.2% NH and ITT does not exceed 920°C.
Check ENGINE START and ENGINE START SELECT Switches off.
Observe SELECT and START Lights out.
For the appropriate engine, make sure oil pressure is greater than 44 psi, ENG OIL PRESS Warning Light,
ENG FUEL PRESS and ENG HYD PUMP Caution Lights out.
If APU starting, check DC GEN Caution Light out.
NOTES: 1. ENGINE SELECT Light will remain illuminated for approximately 15 s after ENGINE START
and SELECT Switches off.
2. Check # 2 Generator and Main Battery load, both should be decreasing after engine start.
It is suggested that a MAIN BATT load of 0.4 or less should be achieved before attempting the
start of the 2nd engine.
Repeat start procedure for other engine.

START APPROVED
Doors / Fueling Lights ................................................................................................................................ Out
APU Bleed ................................................................................................................................................... OFF
RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] .................................................................................... OFF
A/COL Lights ............................................................................................................................................. RED
Engines ...................................................................................................................................... Clear for Start

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-26 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.4 AFTER START

EXT PWR / APU .......................................................................................................................................... OFF

After both engines have started and stabilized, set the DC EXT PWR switch to OFF and make sure:
• DC EXTERNAL POWER advisory light on the MFD – Electrical Systems page goes off.
• Signal ground crew to remove external power cable.
• # 1 DC GEN and # 2 DC GEN caution lights go off.
If the APU was used, shut it down as follows:
• Push APU GEN Switch.
Make sure the GEN ON advisory light goes out and the GEN WARN advisory light illuminates.
• Push APU PWR Switch. Make sure APU RUN, APU GEN WARN and APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory
lights out and FUEL VALVE CLOSED advisory light illuminates.

MAIN BUS TIE ............................................................................................................................................ OFF

BLEED Air 1 and 2 ..................................................................................................................... On / As Req’d

• Set BLEED AIR CONTROL switches to 1 and 2 positions.
• Turn the BLEED FLOW CONTROL rotary knob to the desired position.

BATTERY TEMPS .................................................................................................................................... Check

Monitor the battery temperatures after engine start on the MFD – Electrical Systems page.

Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX

Move CONDITION LEVERS to MAX position and make sure:
• Propellers unfeather and
• # 1 AC GEN, # 2 AC GEN, L TRU and R TRU caution lights go off.

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ..................................................................................... On

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL ........................................................................................................... ON

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON, PTU CNTRL ON and PTU pressure
[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated]
advisory lights illuminate.

HYD Press & QTY ................................................................................................................................... Check

Make sure the following hydraulic indicators on the MFD show:
• Standby Pressure – 2800 - 3000 psi
• Main Pressure 1 & 2 – 2900 - 3100 psi
• System Quantity (minimum):
# 1 System 40%
# 2 System 40%
# 3 System 45%

HYD # 3 ISOL VLV Switch ....................................................................................................................... Press

Check OPEN advisory and ELEVATOR PRESS caution lights illuminate and
# 3 HYD PRESS indication on # 2 MFD (2400 - 3100 psi)

ELEVATOR Travel ............................................................................................................................ Full Travel

Operate Elevator Control through full travel and
check PFCS indication on # 1 MFD for full deflection nose-up and nose-down.

NOTE: Full nose-up elevator travel is indicated by a pointer position defined by assuming the nose-up
index mark is shifted 1/2 arc width down.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-27

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

AFTER START (cont’d)

HYD # 3 ISOL VLV Switch ....................................................................................................................... Press

Check OPEN advisory and ELEVATOR PRESS caution lights out.
NOTE: It will require a small elevator input to extinguish the ELEVATOR PRESS caution light and
bring # 3 HYD PRESS indicator to zero.

SPOILERS CHECK
[with MS 4-113783 (Outboard Spoilers) and MS 4-113785 (Inboard Spoilers) Not Incorporated]:

FLIGHT / TAXI Switch ................................................................................................................ FLIGHT / TAXI

• Set the Switch to FLIGHT. Check SPOILERS ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD advisory lights illuminate and
PFCS indication on # 1 MFD shows LI, RI and LO, RO SPOILERS extended.
• Set the Switch to TAXI. Check SPOILERS ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD advisory lights out and PFCS
indication on # 1 MFD shows LI, RI and LO, RO SPOILERS retracted.

FLAPS ..................................................................................................................................................... Select

Set flap selector lever to desired take-off position and confirm correct indication on # 2 MFD.

DEICE PRESS Indicator ......................................................................................................................... Check

Confirm DEICE PRESSURE indicator shows 18 ± 3 psi on each dial.

RUDDER Travel ............................................................................................................................... Full Travel

Monitor the PFCS indicator on # 1 MFD for full and free rudder travel.
Ensure that PFCS indicator pointer travels full left and full right to index marks.
NOTE: Any observed restriction or abnormal force detected during the Rudder Control check must be
addressed by maintenance action prior to flight.

* RUDDER Actuator .................................................................................................................................... Test

[with MS 4-113655 Not Incorporated]

Push RUD 1 PUSH OFF switch to OFF and check # 1 RUD HYD caution light illuminates.
Move rudder pedals left to right and check PFCS indication on # 1 MFD for rudder travel.
Push RUD 1 PUSH OFF switch to ON and check # 1 RUD HYD caution light goes out.
Push RUD 2 PUSH OFF switch to OFF and check # 2 RUD HYD caution light illuminates.
Move rudder pedals left to right and check PFCS indication on # 1 MFD for rudder travel.
Push RUD 2 PUSH OFF switch to ON and check # 2 RUD HYD caution light goes out.
Nose Wheel STEERING ............................................................................................................................... On
Check NOSE STEERING caution light out.

CAUTION: [with MS 4-113272 or MS 4-113275 Not Incorporated]:

Nose steering is not available for approximately 8 s after selection of STEERING Switch
to STEERING.

WINDSHIELD HEAT ........................................................................................................................... As Req’d

Set windshield heat selector to OFF or NORM. Check WSHLD CTRL caution light out.
NOTE: Do Not select windshield heat to NORM when SAT is greater than 20°C.

PLT SIDE WDO / HT Switch .............................................................................................................. As Req’d

Under conditions of slush or wet snow covered taxiways:

* System Check Once Every 24 h Flying Day.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-28 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

AFTER START (cont’d)

RADAR / NAV / COM .................................................................................................................................... Set

Set WX Radar rotary selector to STBY.
• Check required "TO / FROM" and "NEXT" legs for departure are indicated on the pilot and co-pilot FMS
CDU's
• Check required VHF Comm, VHF Nav and ADF frequencies are programmed for taxi, take-off and departure

Transponder ....................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

If required to squawk an assigned transponder code during taxi:
• Set required ATC code and select ATC ON.

PFD / MFD / ED ........................................................................................................................................ Check

Check Primary Flight Display, Multi-Function Display and Engine Display for failure messages.
Check required nav source, course, distance-to-go, heading and map information is correctly displayed on pilot
and co-pilot displays for departure.

Yaw Damper ................................................................................................................................................. On

Check YD advisory pointers illuminate.

AFTER START

EXT PWR / APU .......................................................................................................................................... OFF

MAIN BUS TIE ............................................................................................................................................ OFF
BLEED AIR 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................... On / As Req’d
BATTERY TEMPS .................................................................................................................................... Check
Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX
RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ..................................................................................... On
STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL ........................................................................................................... ON
HYD PRESS & QTY ................................................................................................................................. Check
HYD # 3 ISOL VLV .................................................................................................................................... Open
Elevator Travel ................................................................................................................................. Full Travel
HYD # 3 ISOL VLV .................................................................................................................................. NORM
FLIGHT / TAXI Switch [with MS 4-113783 and MS 4-113785 Not Incorporated] ...................... FLIGHT / TAXI
FLAPS ...................................................................................................................................................... Select
DEICE PRESS ......................................................................................................................................... Check
RUDDER Travel ................................................................................................................................ Full Travel
Nose Wheel STEERING ............................................................................................................................... On
WINDSHIELD HEAT / PLT SIDE WDO / HT ....................................................................................... As Req’d
Radar / NAV / COMM .................................................................................................................................... Set
Transponder ....................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
PFD / MFD / ED ........................................................................................................................................ Check
Yaw Damper ................................................................................................................................................. On

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-29

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

2.17.5.5 * SYSTEM CHECKS ONCE EVERY 24 h (FLYING DAY)

AUTOFEATHER TEST

Condition Levers ....................................................................................... FUEL OFF or START & FEATHER

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC
AUTOFEATHER Switch ........................................................................................................................... Press
Check SELECT advisory light illuminates.
Observe the following appear on ED:
• A/F SELECT
• A/F TEST IN PROG

[with MS 4-113558 Not Incorporated]:

• UPTRIM appears,
• ITT and NH red radials increase,
• NTOP changes to MTOP and torque rating and torque bugs increase,
• A/F ARM appears twice,
• A/F TEST PASS,
• MTOP changes to NTOP and torque rating and torque bugs decrease
[with MS 4-113558 Incorporated]:
Observe the following sequence appears twice on ED:
• UPTRIM appears,
• ITT and NH red radials increase,
• NTOP changes to MTOP and torque rating and torque bugs increase,
• A/F ARM appears,
• A/F SELECT appears,
• UPTRIM disappears,
• MTOP changes to NTOP and torque rating and torque bugs decrease,
Observe the following appears on ED:
• A/F TEST PASS,
NOTE: During the test # 1 or # 2 ALT FTHR advisory lights may illuminate momentarily.
If autofeather test is aborted, A/F TEST ABORT will be appear on ED.
If autofeather test fails, A/F TEST FAILED will appear on ED.
If A/F TEST ABORT or A/F TEST FAILED [with MS 4-113558 Not Incorporated],
appear(s) on ED, repeat the AUTOFEATHER TEST.
AUTOFEATHER Switch ........................................................................................................................... Press
Check SELECT advisory light out and A/F SELECT message disappears on ED.
[END]

ENGINE FIRE DETECTION TEST

ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 FIRE TEST DETECTION Switch ................................................................... HOLD

Hold alternately, for a minimum of 1 s, at ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 position and check:
• Pull FUEL / HYD OFF handle light illuminates
• FAULT A and FAULT B advisory light illuminate
• CHECK FIRE DET warning light illuminates
• Master WARNING light flashes
• ENGINE FIRE lights flash
• Fire warning tone sounds
ENGINE FIRE Light ................................................................................................................................. Press
Check ENGINE FIRE lights stop flashing and fire warning tone is silenced.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-30 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

APU FIRE TEST

APU PWR Switch ..................................................................................................................................... Press

Check APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory light illuminates

APU FIRE TEST Switch ........................................................................................................... Press and Hold

Check:
• APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory light out
• APU caution and
• CHECK FIRE DET warning and
• APU FIRE and
• APU FAULT and
• APU BTL ARM and
• APU FUEL VALVE CLOSED and
• APU EXTG and
• APU FAIL advisory lights illuminate
• Master CAUTION and master WARNING lights flash.

APU FIRE TEST Switch ....................................................................................................................... Release

Check:
• APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory light illuminates
• APU caution and
• CHECK FIRE DETECT warning and
• APU FIRE and
• APU FAULT and
• APU BTL ARM and
• APU FUEL VALVE CLOSED and
• APU EXTG and
• APU FAIL advisory lights out
• Master CAUTION and master WARNING lights out.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-31

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

BAGGAGE AFT and BAGGAGE FWD SMOKE TEST

BAGGAGE AFT TEST Switch ....................................................................................................... Position 1/2

Note master warning tone and check master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights flash
and SMOKE / EXTG, VENT INLT, VENT OTLT and AFT BTL ARM advisory lights illuminate.

BAGGAGE FWD TEST Switch ................................................................................................................. TEST

Note master warning tone and check master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights flash
and SMOKE / EXTG and FWD BTL ARM advisory lights illuminate.

NOTE: The BAGGAGE AFT and BAGGAGE FWD smoke test should be conducted with the aft
external, forward internal and forward external baggage doors closed.
[END]

CARGO COMPARTMENT SMOKE WARNING TEST

[with Option - CR 825 CH 03262 Incorporated]

CARGO SMOKE TEST Selector ........................................................................ Rotate through 1, 2, 3 and 4

At each position observe illumination of the master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights,
VENT INLT CLOSED and VALVE OTLT CLOSED advisory lights.

NOTE: Pause for approximately 2 s at each position.

CARGO SMOKE TEST Selector ................................................................................................................ OFF

Check master WARNING and SMOKE warning lights out,
VENT INLT CLOSED and VALVE OTLT CLOSED advisory lights out.
[END]

ADC FUNCTIONAL TEST

EFIS ADC SOURCE Switch ................................................................................................................... NORM

Check ALT FAIL, IAS FAIL and IVSI FAIL flags are out on pilot’s and co-pilot’s PFD and
valid SAT is displayed on ED.

ADC Test Switch (at TEST 1) .................................................................................................................... Hold

Check indications:
• Barometric altimeter reading changes to 14360 ft on pilot’s PFD.
• Altimeter barometric setting changes to 29.23 in Hg (990 hPa) on pilot’s PFD.
• Maximum operating airspeed (VMO) is displayed as 284 KIAS on pilot’s PFD.
• The airspeed indicator displays 285 KIAS in red on pilot’s PFD.
• SAT indicated is - 15°C and WTG2 FAIL appears on ED.
• IAS, IAS MISMATCH and ALT appear on PFDs.
• PITCH TRIM, ELEVATOR FEEL and AVIONICS caution lights illuminate.
• Overspeed warning horn is activated after 5 s.

NOTE: TCAS FAIL may momentarily flash on PFDs and MFDs during the ADC functional test.

ADC Test Switch (at TEST 2) .................................................................................................................... Hold

Check for indications equal to ‘TEST 1’, except SAT does not change and
WTG1 FAIL advisory message appears on ED.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-32 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

STALL WARNING TEST [with MS 4-457056, MS 4-126263 or MS 4-126307 Not Incorporated]

STALL WARN TEST Switch (at TEST 1) .............................................................................................. Hold
• Observe RA increases to greater than 500 ft and
rising runway (with tape display of altitude incorporated, rising ground) disappears.
• RA decreases to 50 ft and
rising runway (with tape display of altitude incorporated, rising ground) reappears.
• Stick shaker activates.
• # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL caution lights illuminate.
STALL WARN TEST Switch ............................................................................................................ Release
Check # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL caution lights out and stick shaker off.
NOTE: Hold STALL WARN TEST switch for a minimum of 10 s prior to release.
STALL WARN TEST Switch (at TEST 2) .............................................................................................. Hold
Check for indications equal to ‘TEST 1’, except # 2 STALL SYST FAIL caution light illuminates.
NOTE: TCAS FAIL may momentarily flash on PFDs and MFDs during the Stall Warning test.
[END]

STALL WARNING TEST [with MS 4-457056, MS 4-126263 or MS 4-126307 Incorporated]

STALL WARN TEST Switch .................................................................................................. TEST 1, Release
• # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL caution lights illuminate.
• Stick shaker activates.
• # 1 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL caution lights out and stick shaker off.

STALL WARN TEST Switch .................................................................................................. TEST 2, Release

Check for indications equal to ‘TEST 1’, except # 2 STALL SYST FAIL caution lights illuminates.
[END]

RUDDER ACTUATOR TEST

[with MS 4-113655 Not Incorporated]

NOSEWHEEL STEERING Switch ............................................................................................................. OFF
RUD 1 PUSH OFF Switch ................................................................................................................ Push OFF
Observe illumination of # 1 RUD HYD caution light.
Rudder Pedals ............................................................................................................... Move Left and Right
Check PFCS indication on # 1 MFD for rudder travel.
RUD 1 PUSH OFF Switch .................................................................................................................. Push ON
Observe # 1 RUD HYD caution light out
RUD 2 PUSH OFF Switch ................................................................................................................ Push OFF
Observe illumination of # 2 RUD HYD caution light.
Rudder Pedals ................................................................................................................ Move Left and Right
Check PFCS indication on # 1 MFD for rudder travel.
RUD 2 PUSH OFF Switch .................................................................................................................. Push ON
Observe # 2 RUD HYD caution light out
NOSEWHEEL STEERING Switch ............................................................................................................... ON
END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-33

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT DOOR EMERGENCY ACCESS TEST

[with MS 4-309218 or MS 4-309221 Incorporated]

Flight Compartment Door ................................................................................................ Closed and Locked

Check BAGG DOOR, CKPT DOOR, AUTO UNLK and FAIL advisory lights
and INTERNAL DOORS caution light out.

FLIGHT ATTENDANT Emergency Access Switch .......................................................... Momentarily Press

Check INTERNAL DOORS caution and AUTO UNLK advisory lights illuminate.

INTERNAL DOORS Switch ..................................................................................................................... DENY

Check AUTO UNLK advisory and INTERNAL DOORS caution lights out
and flight compartment door closed and locked.
[END]

[with Option - CR 825 CH 03262 Incorporated]

Flight Compartment Door ................................................................................................ Closed and Locked
Check CKPT DOOR, AUTO UNLK and FAIL advisory lights
and COCKPIT DOOR caution light out.

FLIGHT ATTENDANT Emergency Access Switch .......................................................... Press Momentarily

Check COCKPIT DOOR caution and AUTO UNLK advisory lights illuminate.

INTERNAL DOORS Switch ..................................................................................................................... DENY

Check AUTO UNLK advisory and COCKPIT DOOR caution lights out
and flight compartment door closed and locked.
[END]

PRIMARY, MULTI-FUNCTION and ENGINE DISPLAYS POWER RESET

Pilot’s and Co-Pilot’s PFD OFF / BRT Selectors (EFIS Control Panel) .................................. OFF then BRT

Pilot’s and Co-Pilot’s MFD OFF / BRT Selectors (EFIS Control Panel) .................................. OFF then BRT

ED OFF / BRT Selector (ESID Control Panel) ........................................................................... OFF then BRT

NOTE: The removal of all aircraft electrical power will accomplish the intent of the power reset of the
PFD’s, MFD’s and ED.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-34 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

The following tests are not 24 h System Checks, however they are to be done as required if flight into icing
conditions is anticipated.
ICE PROTECTION CHECKS
AIRFRAME
DEICE PRESS Indicator .................................................................................. Check 18 ± 3 psi on each Dial
AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Switch ........................................................................................................ FAST
During one complete cycle (60 s) execute the following checks:
• Make sure the WING advisory lights illuminate and go off sequentially in pairs, commencing with the out-
board pair and ending with the inboard pair, followed by the inboard TAIL then the outboard TAIL.
NOTE: The sequence of the WING 3rd and 4th advisory lights on the left side is reversed.
The correct sequence is as follows:
ICE PROTECTION

6
TAIL 6
5 5

AIRFRAME MODE SELECT AIRFRAME

OFF OFF MANUAL
SLOW SELECT
MANUAL

FAST

1 2 4 3 WING 4 3 2 1

5 6

NOTE
Manual switch positions and
related indicator light 6
sequence correspond with
deice boot inflation sequence
shown below. Numbers do
not actually appear on panel.
5

3 6 4

5 4
3 2
1
f b
• Check the DEICE PRESS indicator needles fluctuate in phase with the indicator lights.
• Check that the left engine intake boot advisory light illuminates with the inboard tail advisory lights and the
right engine intake boot advisory light illuminates with the outboard tail advisory light in the TAIL boot
sequence.
• Check that the cycle recommences after 24 s dwell period then AIRFRAME MODE SELECT - OFF.
AIRFRAME MANUAL SELECT Switch ................................................................................................. Rotate
Observe WING, TAIL and ENGINE INTAKE advisory lights illuminate as selected.
(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-35

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

ICE PROTECTION CHECKS (cont’d)

PROPELLER

PROP Selector .......................................................................................................................................... TEST

Check PROPS advisory lights illuminate individually and go out in sequence through one cycle.
The normal operating (green arc) on the OIL temperature Indication on ED changes to 55 to 107°C.

NOTE: In the event that the PROP selector is released early from the TEST position, wait 30 s before
repeating test.

PROP Selector ............................................................................................................................................ OFF

Check the normal operating (green arc) on the Oil Temperature indicator changes to 0 to 107°C.

ENGINE INTAKE DOORS

ENGINE INTAKE DOORS Switches ....................................................................................................... Press

Check CLOSED advisory lights go out and the OPEN / HTR advisory lights illuminate.

ENGINE INTAKE Switches ....................................................................................................................... Push

Check CLOSED advisory lights turn on.

NOTE: The HTR advisory light may not turn on if SAT is > 15°C.

WINDSHIELD HEAT

WINDSHIELD HEAT Selector ................................................................................................................. NORM

Check WSHLD CTRL caution light out.

NOTE: It will require a period of 5 min in NORM to confirm correct windshield heat operation.

STALL PROTECTION SYSTEM

REF SPEEDS Switch ................................................................................................................................ INCR

Check [INCR REF SPEED] appears on ED.

REF SPEEDS Switch .................................................................................................................................. OFF

Check [INCR REF SPEED] disappears on ED.

* SYSTEM CHECK ONCE EVERY 24 h (FLYING DAY)

Autofeather ................................................................................................................................................. Test
Fire Detection ............................................................................................................................................. Test
BAGGAGE SMOKE Warning (AFT and FWD) .......................................................................................... Test
STALL WARNing 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................... Test
ADC 1 and 2 ................................................................................................................................................ Test
RUDDER Actuator ...................................................................................................................................... Test
Flight Compartment Door Emergency Access ............................................................................... As Req’d
PFD / MFD / ED Power Reset ............................................................................................................ As Req’d
ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req'd

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-36 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.6 TAXI CHECK

The following items are to be checked during the taxi phase.
However, they should be completed early enough so as to allow both pilots to monitor their surroundings while
taxiing to the active runway.
TAXI Light ........................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set
Make sure the current altimeter setting is on
the pilot’s and co-pilot’s barometric altimeters and the standby altimeter.
Compare altitude indications on pilot’s and co-pilot’s PFD.
NOTE: Altimeter altitude readout must be within 60 ft below 5000 ft and
vary linearly to 100 ft at 10000 ft cross check with standby altimeter in case of mismatch.
Flight Instruments .................................................................................................................................. Check
Check and set as required.
NOTE: [with MS 4-126211 Not Incorporated] the standby compass is unreliable with landing approach
and flare lights selected on.
TANK 1 AUX PUMP / TANK 2 AUX PUMP Switches .................................................................................. ON
Check TANK 1 AUX PUMP ON and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory lights illuminate.
AUTOFEATHER Switch .......................................................................................................................... Select
Check autofeather SELECT advisory light illuminates on PROPELLER CONTROL panel and
A/F SELECT appears on ED
CAUTION: If A/F ARM advisory fails to appear on ED when Power Levers are advanced to the
Rating detent, take-off must be rejected.
FLAPS Lever ....................................................................................................................................... Set / IND
Confirm desired take-off setting on FLAP indication on # 2 MFD.
TRIMs ......................................................................................................................................................... 3 Set
Set the 3 trim controls:
• Aileron and rudder trim indicators to 0 position
• Elevator trim indicator within the white take-off (TO) range.

TAKE-OFF ELEVATOR TRIM vs CG

CG - % MAC TAKE-OFF RANGE
FORWARD 13.8% AFT END
AFT 36% FORWARD END

NOTES: 1. When setting the elevator trim, holding the elevator trim switch for greater than 3 s will
cause the “elevator trim in motion’ audio tone to sound and the ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT
OFF switch PUSH OFF advisory light to illuminate.
2. [with MS 4-126383 Not Incorporated]: To avoid possible activation of the Take-off Configu-
ration aural warning, with a Centre of Gravity at / or near the FWD or AFT Limit, set the
ELEVATOR TRIM with the trim pointer “one half of the pointer's width” inside the forward
edge (with AFT CG) or inside the aft edge (with FWD CG) of the TO trim band.
Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX
Move CONDITION LEVERS to MAX position and set friction as required. Check NTOP appears on ED.
T/O WARN ................................................................................................................................................... Test
Select T/O WARN switch to TEST and hold.
Confirm take-off warning horn does not sound then release switch.
NOTE: The take-off warning horn will sound if any of the following conditions are not met:
- Inboard or outboard spoilers are extended,
- Elevator trim is outside of the take-off range,
- Emergency Brake lever set to Park,
- One or both Condition Levers not set to MAX,
- Flap position outside the range of 5o to 15o.
(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-37

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

TAXI CHECK (cont’d)

PITOT STATIC Heat Switches .................................................................................................................... ON

Set PITOT STATIC PORTS switches to STBY, 1 and 2 positions.

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

Make sure de-icing and anti-icing switches are set as required for take-off in the ambient conditions.
For Ice Protection Procedures refer to Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16

CAUTION / WARNING Lights ................................................................................................................. Check

Make sure all caution and warning light annunciators are off unless stated in MEL.

Flight Clearances ............................................................................................................................. Reviewed

Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... Secure

Notify the cabin crew member(s) on the PA system to secure the cabin for take-off.

TAXI CHECK

TAXI Light .......................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

Flight Instruments .................................................................................................................................. Check

TANK AUX PUMPS 1 and 2 ......................................................................................................................... ON

Autofeather ............................................................................................................................................. Select

FLAPS ................................................................................................................................................. Set / IND

TRIMs ......................................................................................................................................................... 3 Set

Condition Levers ....................................................................................................................................... MAX

T/O WARN ................................................................................................................................................... Test

PITOT STATIC Heat ..................................................................................................................................... ON

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

CAUTION / WARNING Lights ................................................................................................................. Check

Flight Clearances ............................................................................................................................. Reviewed

Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... Secure

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-38 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.7 LINE-UP

These items should be done as early as possible after being cleared to line up on to the active runway.

This allows both pilots to monitor runway surroundings before and while entering the active runway.

Flight Attendant Notification ............................................................................................................ As Req’d

Notify the cabin crew members that the clearance for take-off has been received.

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ................................................................................................................... MIN / As req’d

• Turn the BLEED FLOW CONTROL rotary knob to MIN.
• Set the BLEED switches to OFF
(if take-off with Bleed “ON”, AOM Supplement 2 and / or AFM Supplement 21, set BLEED 1 and 2 to ON).

Anti-Collision ........................................................................................................................................... White

Transponder / TCAS .................................................................................................................................... ON

Make sure the correct transponder code is inserted, then
set the transponder to ON / ALT on the ARCDU panel by pressing line select key 4R (ATC) on ARCDU for
more than 2 s.
Observe TA ONLY is annunciated on EHSI / PFD and TA ONLY AUTO is annunciated on the ND / MFD.

Flight Controls ............................................................................................................................. Check / Free

Check the operation and freedom of movement of flight controls and spoilers through full travel and
note appropriate PFCS indications on # 1 MFD.

NOTE: Full spoiler extension is indicated by a pointer position defined by assuming the full extension
index mark is shifted 1 arc width down.

FLIGHT / TAXI Switch .............................................................................................................................. Flight

Make sure the FLIGHT / TAXI switch on the GLARESHIELD is in the FLIGHT position.
Check SPOILERS ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD advisory lights turn on and the PFCS indication on # 1 MFD
shows LI, RI and LO, RO spoilers extend.

NOTE: Full spoiler extension is indicated by a pointer position defined by assuming the full extension
index mark is shifted 1 arc width down.

LANDING / TAXI Lights ...................................................................................................................... ON / OFF

The taxi light may be turned off at this time.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-39

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

LINE-UP

F/A Notification .................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ................................................................................................................... MIN / As Req’d

Anti-Collision ........................................................................................................................................... White

Transponder / TCAS .................................................................................................................................... ON

Flight Controls ............................................................................................................................. Check / Free

FLIGHT / TAXI Switch .............................................................................................................................. Flight

LANDING / TAXI Lights ..................................................................................................................... ON / OFF

NOTE: Before Entering Icing Conditions, see Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-40 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.8 AFTER TAKE-OFF

Landing Gear ................................................................................................................................................ Up

At a positive rate of climb, (indicated on the altimeter and IVSI), select the landing gear selector UP
and make sure the landing gear retracts.
Amber light in the selector handle, amber and red undercarriage advisory lights turn on then go off.
All lights should be off when the gear is up and locked.

FLAPS ............................................................................................................................................................. 0°
After commencement of 3rd segment (minimum 400 ft AGL) and
at or above Flap Retraction Initiation speed (VFRI), set flap selector lever to 0°.
Check flap indicator and make sure flaps retract to 0°.

Autofeather ................................................................................................................................................ OFF

Push the AUTOFEATHER switchlight and make sure:

• Autofeather SELECT advisory light turns off on the PROPELLER CONTROL panel,
• A/F SELECT indication on the ED turns off.

Climb Power ................................................................................................................................................. Set

CLIMB at 900 RPM:

• Set the CONDITION LEVERS to 900 RPM.

CLIMB at 850 RPM:

• Set the CONDITION LEVERS to 850 RPM and then push the MCL pushbutton on the ENGINE CONTROL
panel.

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ................................................................................................................... ON / As Req’d

• Set BLEED CONTROL switches to 1 and 2 positions.
• Turn BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL rotary selector to NORM or MAX.

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL Switches .................................................................................... NORM

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON, PTU CNTRL ON and PTU pressure
[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated] advisory lights out.

TANK AUX PUMPS 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................ OFF

Check TANK 1 AUX PUMP ON and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory lights out.

Engine Temps & Pressures .................................................................................................................... Check

Check all engine instruments on the ED are within limits (no red or yellow indication).

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

Make sure de-icing and anti-icing switches are set as required for the ambient conditions.
For Ice Protection Procedures refer to Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16

Cabin Press & Temp Controls ............................................................................................................... Check

Monitor the cabin pressurization panel to make sure the cabin is pressurizing.
Set Cabin and Flight COMPARTMENT Temperature controls as required.

Passenger Signs ................................................................................................................................ As Req’d

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-41

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

AFTER TAKE-OFF

Landing Gear ................................................................................................................................................ Up

FLAPS ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................... ON / As Req'd

Autofeather ................................................................................................................................................. OFF

Climb Power ................................................................................................................................................ Set

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL ..................................................................................................... NORM

TANK AUX PUMPS 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................ OFF

Engine Temps & Pressures ................................................................................................................... Check

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

Cabin Press & Temp Controls ............................................................................................................... Check

Passenger Signs ............................................................................................................................... As Req’d

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-42 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.9 CRUISE

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

When required, set current altimeter setting on standby altimeter, pilot’s and co-pilot’s altimeters.
Set the current altimeter setting on the Barometric Correction Indicator on the cabin altitude control panel.
Cross-check all altimeters.

NOTE: Altimeter altitude readout must be within 60 ft below 5000 ft and

vary linearly to 170 ft at 25000 ft.

Cross-check with standby altimeter in case of mismatch.

With Integrated Standby Instrument [with MS 4-432835 or MS 4-456883 Not Incorporated],

the standby altimeter readings have to be within the tolerances specified in the Table
published in Sub-Chapter 2.3 (ALTIMETER SETTING AND CHECKING).

POWER ......................................................................................................................................................... Set

NORMAL CRUISE with 850 RPM:

• Set the CONDITION LEVERS to 850 RPM.

MAX CRUISE with 900 RPM:

• Set the CONDITION LEVERS to 900 RPM and then push the MCR pushbutton on the ENGINE CONTROL
panel.

Cabin Press ............................................................................................................................................. Check

Monitor the Cabin Pressurization Panel and make sure:

• Cabin Altitude Rate of Climb has stabilized at 0.
• Cabin Altimeter indicates correct cabin altitude for ambient altitude.
• Cabin Differential pressure indicates a maximum of 5.46 ± 0.1 psi.

Lights .................................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

CRUISE

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

POWER ......................................................................................................................................................... Set

Cabin Press ............................................................................................................................................. Check

Lights .................................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-43

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

2.17.5.10 DESCENT

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

NOTE: Altimeter altitude readout must be within ± 60 ft at SL and vary linearly to ± 170 ft at 25000 ft.
Cross-check with standby altimeter in case of mismatch.

Approach / Landing Briefing ............................................................................................................... Review

Ensure the approach and landing briefing has been completed.

CABIN ALTITUDE Controls ........................................................................................................................ Set

Set the destination field elevation on the Cabin Altitude Indicator.

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

If icing conditions exist or are anticipated, make sure ice protection is selected for the ambient conditions.
Comply with Icing Procedures on Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16

DESCENT

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

Approach / Landing Briefing ............................................................................................................... Review

CABIN ALTITUDE Controls ........................................................................................................................ Set

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

NOTE: Before Entering Icing Conditions see Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-44 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.11 APPROACH

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

NOTE: Altimeter altitude readout must be within ± 60 ft at SL and vary linearly to ± 170 ft at 25000 ft.
Cross-check with standby altimeter in case of mismatch.

LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

GPWS LANDING FLAP ........................................................................................................................... Select

Set the GPWS LANDING FLAP switch to the desired landing flap configuration
for correct GPWS performance and check appropriate 10°, 15° or 35° advisory light turns on.

FUEL TRANSFER Switch .......................................................................................................................... OFF

• Make sure fuel asymmetry is within 272 kg (600 lb).
• FUEL TRANSFER switch is OFF.
• VALVE on MFD indicates CLOSED.

TANK AUX PUMP 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ ON

Make sure the TANK 1 and TANK 2 AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP switchlights are ON.

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL Switches .......................................................................................... ON

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON, PTU CNTRL ON and PTU pressure
[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated]
advisory lights illuminate.

HYD PRESS & QTY ................................................................................................................................. Check

Make sure the following hydraulic indicators on the MFD show:

• Standby Pressure – 2800 - 3000 psi
• Main Pressure 1 & 2 – 2900 - 3100 psi
• System Quantity (minimum):
# 1 System 40%
# 2 System 40%
# 3 System 45%

Passenger Signs .......................................................................................................................................... ON

Set fasten belts and no smoking signs to FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING position.

CAUTION / WARNING Lights ................................................................................................................. Check

Check the caution / warning lights panel and make sure no caution or warning lights are on.
If due to a non-normal situation, one or more caution or warning lights are on, the lights and related system
considerations for landing must be reviewed before landing.

Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... Secure

Confirm with the Cabin Crew that the cabin is secure for landing.

- If icing conditions exist or are anticipated, make sure ice protection is selected for the ambient conditions.
Comply with the Icing Procedures on Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-45

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

APPROACH

Altimeters ..................................................................................................................................................... Set

LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

GPWS LANDING FLAP .......................................................................................................................... Select

FUEL TRANSFER Switch ........................................................................................................................... OFF

TANK AUX PUMP 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................... ON

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL ........................................................................................................... ON

HYD PRESS & QTY ................................................................................................................................. Check

Passenger Signs ......................................................................................................................................... ON

CAUTION / WARNING Lights ................................................................................................................. Check

Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... Secure

NOTE: Before Entering Icing Conditions see Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-46 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.12 LANDING

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

If icing conditions exist or are anticipated, make sure ice protection is selected for the ambient conditions.
For Ice Protection Procedures refer to Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16.

LANDING GEAR ...................................................................................................................... Down / 3 Green

FLAP .................................................................................................................................................... Set / Ind

Check the flap selector lever and make sure it is set to 10°, 15° or 35° and
the flap indicator on the MFD shows 10°, 15° or 35°.

Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ As Req’d

• Turn the BLEED FLOW CONTROL rotary knob to MIN.

• Turn BLEED 1 and 2 off.
(If landing with Bleed “ON”, AOM Supplement 2 and / or AFM Supplement 21, turn BLEED 1 and 2 on).
• Check Cabin Differential maximum 1.0 psi.

NOTE: If Cabin Differential is greater than 1.0 psi refer to Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.12.

Flight Attendant Notification ............................................................................................................ As Req’d

LANDING

ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d

LANDING GEAR ...................................................................................................................... Down / 3 Green

FLAP .................................................................................................................................................... Set / Ind

Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................. MIN / As Req’d

F/A Notification .................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-47

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

2.17.5.13 AFTER LANDING

CONTROL LOCK Lever ............................................................................................................................... ON

Pull FLIGHT CONTROL LOCK lever aft until it locks.
Transponder ...................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
Set the transponder to SBY on the ARCDU
by pressing line select key 4R on ARCDU for more than 2 s, when required.
Radar .......................................................................................................................................................... SBY
FLAPS Lever .................................................................................................................................................. 0°
Check FLAP indication on # 2 MFD.
TANK 1 AUX PUMP and TANK 2 AUX PUMP Switches ........................................................................... OFF
Check TANK 1 AUX PUMP ON and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory lights out.
Yaw Damper ................................................................................................................................................ OFF
FLIGHT / TAXI Switch ................................................................................................................................ TAXI
Check spoilers ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD advisory lights out and
PFCS indication shows LI, RI and LO, RO SPOILERS retracted.
Anti-Collision ............................................................................................................................................. RED
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................ As Req’d
Normally landing and flare lights are switched off, the taxi lights on.
ICE PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................. As Req’d
If icing conditions exist or are anticipated, make sure ice protection is selected for the ambient conditions.
For Ice Protection Procedures refer to Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.16.
MAIN BUS TIE .............................................................................................................................................. TIE
APU (if applicable) .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d
BLEED 1 and BLEED 2 Switches ..................................................................................................... As Req’d

AFTER LANDING

CONTROL LOCK ......................................................................................................................................... ON

Transponder ...................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
Radar .......................................................................................................................................................... SBY
FLAPS ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°
TANK AUX PUMPS 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................ OFF
Yaw Damper ................................................................................................................................................ OFF
FLIGHT / TAXI Switch ................................................................................................................................ TAXI
Anti-Collision .............................................................................................................................................. Red
Lights ................................................................................................................................................. As Req’d
ICE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d
MAIN BUS TIE ............................................................................................................................................... Tie
APU (if applicable) .............................................................................................................................. As Req’d
BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ As Req’d

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-48 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.14 SHUT-DOWN

TAXI Light ................................................................................................................................................... OFF

EMERG BRAKE ............................................................................................................................................ ON

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL Switches .................................................................................... NORM

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON, PTU CNTRL ON and PTU pressure
[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated] advisory lights out.

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................. START & FEATHER

Allow engines to stabilize for 30 s minimum before shut-down.

Passenger Signs ........................................................................................................................................ OFF

Nosewheel Steering .................................................................................................................................. OFF

Radar .......................................................................................................................................................... OFF

Transponder ............................................................................................................................................. STBY

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................... MIN / OFF

• Turn the BLEED AIR Flow Control rotary knob to MIN.
• Set BLEED 1 and 2 switches to OFF.

APU / GPU .......................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

Emergency Lights ..................................................................................................................................... OFF

Condition Levers (30 s) ................................................................................................................... FUEL OFF

Lights .................................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches .............................................................. As Req’d
If electrical power is to be removed from the aircraft prior to the next flight,
continue with the following Last Flight shut-down procedure:

2.17.5.15 LAST FLIGHT

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ................................................................................... OFF

All Displays ................................................................................................................................................ OFF

ANTI SKID ................................................................................................................................................... OFF

Set ANTI SKID switch to OFF position and check:
• INBD ANTI SKID and OUTBD ANTI SKID caution lights are illuminated.

BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ...................................................................... OFF

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-49

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

SHUT-DOWN

TAXI Light ................................................................................................................................................... OFF

EMERG BRAKE ........................................................................................................................................... ON

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL ..................................................................................................... NORM

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC

Condition Levers ..................................................................................................................... Start & Feather

Passenger Signs ........................................................................................................................................ OFF

Nosewheel Steering ................................................................................................................................... OFF

Radar ........................................................................................................................................................... OFF

Transponder ............................................................................................................................................ STBY

BLEED AIR 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................... MIN / OFF

APU / GPU .......................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

EMER LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................................. OFF

Condition Levers (30 s) ................................................................................................................... FUEL OFF

Lights ................................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

BATTERY MASTER, MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches .............................................................. As Req’d

LAST FLIGHT

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] .................................................................................... OFF

All Displays ................................................................................................................................................. OFF

ANTI SKID ................................................................................................................................................... OFF

MAIN, AUX & STBY BATT Switches ......................................................................................................... OFF

BATTERY MASTER .................................................................................................................................... OFF

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-50 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.17.5.16 ICE PROTECTION PROCEDURES

2.17.5.16.1 TAKE-OFF IN or INTO ICING CONDITIONS

PRE TAKE-OFF CHECKS:

ENGINE INTAKE DOORS Switches ........................................................................................................ Press

Check OPN / HTR advisory lights illuminate.
WINDSHIELD HEAT Selector ................................................................................................................ NORM
DEICE PRESS Indicator .................................................................................. Check 18 ± 3 psi on each Dial
PROP Selector ............................................................................................................................................. ON
Observe the normal operating (green arc) on the OIL temperature indication on ED changes to 55°C to 107°C.

NOTE: With SAT greater than + 5°C, the PROPS advisory lights will not illuminate.

NOTE: [with MS 4-113553 Not Incorporated]:

To ensure engine air inlet ice protection, it is acceptable to set take-off power with a minimum
oil temperature of 55°C (OIL temperature indication on ED in the yellow arc).
Oil temperature must reach 65°C or greater (OIL temperature indication on ED in the green
arc) within 3 min after take-off power is set.

AFTER TAKE-OFF:

At 400 ft AGL, commencement of 3rd Segment:

Increase Airspeed to VCLIMB + 20 kt.
FLAPS Lever ...................................................................................................................................... 0° at VFRI
At flap retraction initiation speed flap 5° and 10° or flap 15°.
REF SPEEDS ............................................................................................................................................. INCR
Check [INCR REF SPEED] appears on ED.

CAUTION: If airspeed is not increased before REF SPEEDS switch is set to INCR, stall warning
may occur.

At 400 ft AGL, continuation of 2nd Segment:

CAUTION: If airspeed is not increased before REF SPEEDS switch is set to INCR, stall warning
may occur.

On initial detection of ice:

AIRFRAME Mode Selector ...................................................................................................................... FAST

At commencement of 3rd segment:

Increase Airspeed to VCLIMB + 20 kt
FLAPS Lever ...................................................................................................................................... 0° at VFRI
At flap retraction initiation speed flap 5° and 10° or flap 15° + 20 kt.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-51

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

2.17.5.16.2 FLIGHT IN ICING CONDITIONS

BEFORE ENTERING ICING CONDITIONS or WHEN ICE IS DETECTED or WHEN FLASHING “ICE
DETECTED” ADVISORY APPEARS ON ED

ENGINE INTAKE Door Switches ............................................................................................................ Press

Check OPN / HTR advisory lights illuminate.

PROP Selector ............................................................................................................................................. ON

Observe PROPs advisory lights illuminate individually and go out in sequence and
the normal operating (green arc) on the oil temperature indication on ED change to 65°C to 107°C.

NOTE: The effectiveness of the propeller de-icing system can be improved and propeller vibration
reduced by operation of the propellers at 1020 RPM.

REF SPEEDS Switch ................................................................................................................................ INCR

Check [INCR REF SPEED] appears on ED.

WINDSHIELD HEAT Selector ................................................................................................................. NORM

If ice forms on the forward edge of pilot’s side window:

PLT SIDE WDO / HT Switch ........................................................................................................................ ON

DEICE PRESS Indicator ................................................................................... Check 18 ± 3 psi on each Dial

NOTE: To ensure de-ice pressure is maintained at 15 psi or greater during descent, holding and
approach, it may be necessary to increase NL by advancing POWER levers.

CLIMB, CRUISE and DESCENT IN ICING CONDITIONS

On initial detection of ice:

Minimum Airspeed:
• Climb - Final Take-off Climb Speed + 20 kt.
• Descend - 1.23 VSR flap 0° + 25 kt.

AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ...................................................................................... FAST or SLOW

Depending on the rate of ice accumulation.
Check WING and TAIL advisory lights illuminate sequentially in pairs.

NOTE: Monitor ice accumulation between boot cycles to confirm that the selected AIRFRAME MODE
rate (FAST or SLOW) is appropriate.
When using the wing inspection lights, the inboard boot area only, visible from the flight
compartment, is sufficiently illuminated for assessing ice accumulation.

CAUTION: An accumulation of ice on the airplane may change the stall characteristics, stall speed,
or warning margin provided by the stall warning system.

Monitor WING and TAIL advisory lights for normal operation.

When ice accumulation is no longer detected and the ICE DETECTED advisory is not present on the ED:
- Continue to operate the boots for 2 complete cycles.

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

2.17-52 CHAPTER 2

[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 NORMAL PROCEDURES

FLIGHT IN ICING CONDITIONS (cont’d)

Then:
AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ....................................................................................................... OFF
When the aircraft is aerodynamically clean:

NOTE: The aircraft can only be considered aerodynamically clean when all ice is removed from the
visible leading edges and wing tips.

REF SPEEDS Switch ................................................................................................................................. OFF

Check [INCR REF SPEED] disappears on ED.
Minimum airspeed 1.23 VSR flap 0° or Approach and VREF flap 5°, 10° and 15°.

HOLDING, APPROACH and LANDING IN ICING CONDITIONS

NOTES: 1. When holding in icing conditions flap must be at 0°.

2. To maintain the minimum engine oil temperature of 65°C during descent, holding and
approach, in icing conditions, it may be necessary to increase engine power.
The increase in engine power will be limited by the allowable maximum airspeed appropri-
ate to VMO, VLO, VFE, aircraft system malfunctions, turbulence and ATC instructions.

On initial detection of ice:

• Increase Speeds and Landing Field Length as follows:

FLAP VAPP VGA VREF LFL HOLDING

0° + 25 kt + 20 kt + 25 kt - 190 kt MIN
5° + 20 kt + 20 kt + 20 kt - -
10° + 20 kt + 20 kt + 20 kt + 25% -
15° + 20 kt + 20 kt + 20 kt + 25% -
35° - - + 15 kt + 20% -

AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ..................................................................................................... FAST

Check WING and TAIL advisory lights illuminate sequentially in pairs.

HOLDING, APPROACH and LANDING AFTER FLIGHT IN ICING CONDITIONS or ICING IS NO LONGER
DETECTED and THE ICE DETECTED ADVISORY DISAPPEARES ON ED
Minimum airspeed as above (Holding, Approach and Landing in Icing Conditions).
Continue to operate the boots for 2 complete cycles.

Then:
AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ....................................................................................................... OFF

When the aircraft is aerodynamically clean:

NOTE: The aircraft can only be considered aerodynamically clean when all ice is removed from the
visible leading edges and wing tips.

REF SPEEDS Switch ................................................................................................................................. OFF

Check [INCR REF SPEED] disappears on ED.
Minimum airspeed 1.23 VSR Flap 0° or Approach and VREF Flap 5°, 10° and 15°.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 2 2.17-53

NORMAL PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

2.17.5.16.3 FLIGHT IN SEVERE ICING

Autopilot ................................................................................................................... Disconnect Immediately

CAUTION: Be prepared for a possible roll force requirement by firmly holding the control wheel
prior to disconnecting the autopilot.

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................ MAX / 1020

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................... Adjust to MCP

Minimum Speed ................................................................................................................................ 190 kt IAS

Exit severe icing conditions by changing altitude and / or course as required.

CAUTION: Avoid aggressive maneuvering.

When clear of severe icing conditions:

NOTE: It can be assumed that the airplane is no longer affected by the severe ice encounter when the
ice accumulated on the flight compartment side window is removed.
When visible, other surfaces, such as the propeller spinner and wing leading edges aft of the
de-ice boot, should also be used to confirm that the ice accumulated during the severe icing
encounter has cleared.

POWER Levers and Condition Levers ................................................................................. Adjust As Req’d

Airspeed ............................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

Autopilot ............................................................................................................................................ As Req’d

CAUTION: Prior to engaging the autopilot, ensure that in wings level steady state flight, there is no
abnormal roll control force and the required lateral trim is appropriate for the aircraft
configuration.

Refer to as appropriate Holding, Approach and Landing procedure (above).

If it cannot be determined that the aircraft is no longer affected by the severe icing encounter:

Refer to as appropriate Holding, Approach and Landing procedure (above).

CAUTION: Do Not engage Autopilot.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 3 03 LEP - Page 1

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016

03 - Effective Pages 3.1-28 07 Mar 2016

1 21 Nov 2016 3.1-29 07 Mar 2016
2 21 Nov 2016 3.1-30 07 Mar 2016
3.1-31 21 Nov 2016
03 - Contents 3.1-32 21 Nov 2016
3.1-33 21 Nov 2016
ToC 3-1 07 Mar 2016 3.1-34 21 Nov 2016
ToC 3-2 07 Mar 2016 3.1-35 21 Nov 2016
ToC 3-3 21 Nov 2016 3.1-36 21 Nov 2016
ToC 3-4 21 Nov 2016 3.1-37 07 Mar 2016
ToC 3-5 30 Jan 2015 3.1-38 07 Mar 2016
ToC 3-6 30 Jan 2015 3.1-39 07 Mar 2016
3.1-40 07 Mar 2016
Chapter 3 3.1-41 07 Mar 2016
3.0-1 30 Jan 2015 3.1-42 07 Mar 2016
3.0-2 30 Jan 2015 3.1-43 07 Mar 2016
3.1-1 30 Jan 2015 3.1-44 07 Mar 2016
3.1-2 07 Mar 2016 3.1-45 07 Mar 2016
3.1-3 07 Mar 2016 3.1-46 07 Mar 2016
3.1-4 07 Mar 2016 3.1-47 07 Mar 2016
3.1-5 07 Mar 2016 3.1-48 07 Mar 2016
3.1-6 07 Mar 2016 3.1-49 07 Mar 2016
3.1-7 07 Mar 2016 3.1-50 21 Nov 2016
3.1-8 07 Mar 2016 3.1-51 07 Mar 2016
3.1-9 07 Mar 2016 3.1-52 07 Mar 2016
3.1-10 07 Mar 2016 3.1-53 07 Mar 2016
3.1-11 07 Mar 2016 3.1-54 07 Mar 2016
3.1-12 07 Mar 2016 3.1-55 07 Mar 2016
3.1-13 21 Nov 2016 3.1-56 07 Mar 2016
3.1-14 07 Mar 2016 3.1-57 07 Mar 2016
3.1-15 07 Mar 2016 3.1-58 07 Mar 2016
3.1-16 07 Mar 2016 3.1-59 07 Mar 2016
3.1-17 07 Mar 2016 3.1-60 07 Mar 2016
3.1-18 07 Mar 2016 3.1-61 07 Mar 2016
3.1-19 07 Mar 2016 3.1-62 07 Mar 2016
3.1-20 07 Mar 2016 3.1-63 07 Mar 2016
3.1-21 21 Nov 2016 3.1-64 07 Mar 2016
3.1-22 07 Mar 2016 3.1-65 21 Nov 2016
3.1-23 07 Mar 2016 3.1-66 07 Mar 2016
3.1-24 07 Mar 2016 3.1-67 21 Nov 2016
3.1-25 07 Mar 2016 3.1-68 21 Nov 2016
3.1-26 07 Mar 2016 3.1-69 21 Nov 2016
3.1-27 07 Mar 2016 3.1-70 21 Nov 2016

AOM DASH 8-Q400 DOT

03 LEP - Page 2 CHAPTER 3

(Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

3.1-71 21 Nov 2016 3.4-7 27 May 2015

3.1-72 07 Mar 2016 3.4-8 27 May 2015
3.1-73 07 Mar 2016 3.4-9 27 May 2015
3.1-74 07 Mar 2016 3.4-10 27 May 2015
3.1-75 07 Mar 2016 3.4-11 27 May 2015
3.1-76 07 Mar 2016 3.4-12 27 May 2015
3.2-1 30 Jan 2015 3.4-13 27 May 2015
3.2-2 30 Jan 2015 3.4-14 30 Jan 2015
3.2-3 30 Jan 2015 3.4-15 30 Jan 2015
3.2-4 30 Jan 2015 3.4-16 30 Oct 2015
3.2-5 30 Jan 2015 3.4-17 30 Oct 2015
3.2-6 30 Jan 2015 3.4-18 30 Jan 2015
3.2-7 30 Jan 2015 3.4-19 30 Jan 2015
3.2-8 30 Jan 2015 3.4-20 30 Jan 2015
3.2-9 30 Jan 2015 3.4-21 30 Jan 2015
3.2-10 30 Jan 2015 3.4-22 30 Jan 2015
3.2-11 30 Jan 2015 3.4-23 30 Jan 2015
3.2-12 30 Jan 2015 3.4-24 30 Jan 2015
3.2-13 30 Jan 2015
3.2-14 30 Jan 2015
3.2-15 30 Jan 2015
3.2-16 30 Jan 2015
3.2-17 30 Jan 2015
3.2-18 30 Jan 2015
3.2-19 21 Nov 2016
3.2-20 30 Jan 2015
3.2-21 30 Jan 2015
3.2-22 30 Jan 2015
3.2-23 30 Jan 2015
3.2-24 30 Jan 2015
3.2-25 30 Jan 2015
3.3-1 30 Jan 2015
3.3-2 30 Jan 2015
3.3-3 21 Nov 2016
3.3-4 30 Jan 2015
3.3-5 30 Jan 2015
3.3-6 30 Jan 2015
3.4.1 30 Jan 2015
3.4-2 30 Jan 2015
3.4-3 30 Jan 2015
3.4-4 30 Jan 2015
3.4-5 30 Jan 2015
3.4-6 30 Jan 2015

DOT
AOM DASH 8-Q400
CHAPTER 3 ToC 3-1
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

- TABLE OF CONTENTS -

3.0 NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL and SUPPLEMENTAL PROCEDURES ..................................... 3.0-1

3.0.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 3.0-1

3.1 EXPANDED EMERGENCY and ABNORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS .................... 3.1-1

3.1.1 AIR CONDITIONING, PRESSURIZATION and PNEUMATICS ............................................ 3.1-1
3.1.1.1 RAPID DEPRESURIZATION / EMERGENCY DESCENT ..................................................... 3.1-1
3.1.1.2 UNPRESSURIZED FLIGHT (Bleeds ON) .............................................................................. 3.1-1
3.1.1.3 RAM VENTILATION (Bleeds OFF) ......................................................................................... 3.1-2
3.1.1.4 FUSELAGE DOORS (Warning Light) ..................................................................................... 3.1-2
3.1.1.5 INTERNAL BAGGAGE DOOR UNLOCKED .......................................................................... 3.1-3
3.1.1.6 FAILURE OF REMOTE LATCH OF FLIGHT COMPARTMENT DOOR ................................. 3.1-3
3.1.1.7 EMERGENCY OPENING OF FLIGHT COMPARTMENT DOOR
(Door Jammed) ...................................................................................................................... 3.1-3
3.1.1.8 AIRSTAIR DOOR, FAILURE TO OPEN ................................................................................. 3.1-4
3.1.1.9 CABIN PRESS (Warning Light) .............................................................................................. 3.1-4
3.1.1.10 FAULT (Annunciation Light) .................................................................................................... 3.1-5
3.1.1.11 LOSS OF CABIN ALTITUDE, CABIN RATE and CABIN DIFF INDICATORS
(All Indicators at Zero) ........................................................................................................... 3.1-5
3.1.1.12 CABIN DIFFERENTIAL GREATER THAN 1.0 PSI ON APPROACH ..................................... 3.1-5
3.1.1.13 CRACKED WINDSHIELD ....................................................................................................... 3.1-5
3.1.1.14 CABIN PACK HOT or FLT COMPT PACK HOT (Caution Lights) ........................................... 3.1-5
3.1.1.15 CABIN PACK HOT and FLT COMPT PACK HOT (Caution Lights) ........................................ 3.1-6
3.1.1.16 FLT COMPT PACK HOT and CABIN DUCT HOT or
CABIN PACK HOT and FLT COMPT DUCT HOT (Caution Lights)......................................... 3.1-6
3.1.1.17 CABIN DUCT HOT or FLT COMPT DUCT HOT (Caution Lights) .......................................... 3.1-6
3.1.1.18 # 1 BLEED HOT or # 2 BLEED HOT (Caution Lights) ........................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.1.19 # 1 BLEED HOT and # 2 BLEED HOT (Caution Lights) ......................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.1.20 # 1 BLEED HOT and # 2 BLEED HOT (Caution Lights) ON TAKE-OFF ................................ 3.1-7

3.1.2 APU, ENGINES and PROPELLERS ...................................................................................... 3.1-8

3.1.2.1 ABORTED ENGINE START ................................................................................................... 3.1-8
3.1.2.2 NO STARTER CUT OUT ........................................................................................................ 3.1-8
3.1.2.3 STARTER FAILURE ON THE GROUND ................................................................................ 3.1-8
3.1.2.4 CLEARING AN ENGINE ........................................................................................................ 3.1-9
3.1.2.5 APU FIRE ............................................................................................................................... 3.1-9
3.1.2.6 POST APU AUTOMATIC SHUT-DOWN ................................................................................ 3.1-9
3.1.2.7 APU START FAILURE .......................................................................................................... 3.1-10
3.1.2.8 APU STARTER FAILURE ..................................................................................................... 3.1-10
3.1.2.9 APU (Caution Light) .............................................................................................................. 3.1-10
3.1.2.10 APU GEN WARN (Advisory Light) ........................................................................................ 3.1-10
3.1.2.11 APU BLEED AIR OVERHEAT
(FLT COMPT DUCT HOT or CABIN DUCT HOT or CABIN PACK HOT or FLT COMPT PACK HOT -
Caution Lights) ...................................................................................................................... 3.1-11

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

ToC 3-2 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

3.1.2.12 ON-GROUND EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................ 3.1-11

3.1.2.13 ENGINE AIRSTART .............................................................................................................. 3.1-12
3.1.2.14 STARTER FAILURE IN FLIGHT ........................................................................................... 3.1-14
3.1.2.15 ABNORMAL OIL PRESSURE .............................................................................................. 3.1-14
3.1.2.16 ABNORMAL OIL TEMPERATURE IN FLIGHT
(OIL TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS 107°C).............................................................................. 3.1-15
3.1.2.17 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BELOW 65°C (Propeller De-Icing ON In Flight) .................. 3.1-15
3.1.2.18 CHECK FIRE DET (Warning Light) and FAULT A or FAULT B (Advisory Light)
(Fire Detector Loop Failure) ................................................................................................. 3.1-16
3.1.2.19 CHECK FIRE DET (Warning Light) and BTL LOW (Advisory Light)
(Fire Bottle Pressure Low) ................................................................................................... 3.1-16
3.1.2.20 # 1 ENG FADEC FAIL or # 2 ENG FADEC FAIL (Warning Light) ......................................... 3.1-16
3.1.2.21 # 1 ENG FADEC or # 2 ENG FADEC (Caution Light) ........................................................... 3.1-16
3.1.2.22 POWERPLANT (ED Advisory) .............................................................................................. 3.1-16
3.1.2.23 PROPELLER OVERSPEED ................................................................................................. 3.1-17
3.1.2.24 DUAL PROPELLER OVERSPEED
(Both Propellers increase above 1020 RPM and
# 1 PEC and # 2 PEC Caution Lights illuminate)................................................................... 3.1-18
3.1.2.25 # 1 PEC or # 2 PEC (Caution Light) ...................................................................................... 3.1-19
3.1.2.26 UNSCHEDULED PROPELLER FEATHERING .................................................................... 3.1-19
3.1.2.27 PROPELLER GROUND RANGE ADVISORY LIGHT CYCLING .......................................... 3.1-19
3.1.2.28 ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (In Flight) ................................................................... 3.1-20
3.1.2.29 ENGINE FAILURE ON APPROACH GO-AROUND ............................................................. 3.1-22

3.1.3 AUTOFLIGHT - FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS and NAVIGATION .............................................. 3.1-23

3.1.3.1 MISTRIM [TRIM NOSE UP or TRIM NOSE DN or
TRIM L WING DN or TRIM R WING DN] (Message on PFD)................................................ 3.1-23
3.1.3.2 AP PITCH TRIM FAIL (Message on PFD) ............................................................................ 3.1-23
3.1.3.3 AUTO TRIM FAIL (Message on PFD) ................................................................................... 3.1-23
3.1.3.4 AP DISENGAGED or AP / YD DISENGAGED
(Flashing PFD Message and Red AP DISENG Light) ........................................................ 3.1-23
3.1.3.5 YD DISENGAGED (Flashing PFD Message) ....................................................................... 3.1-24
3.1.3.6 AFCS CONTROLLER INOP (Message on PFD) .................................................................. 3.1-24
3.1.3.7 AFCS FAIL (Message on PFD) ............................................................................................. 3.1-24
3.1.3.8 L FD FAIL or R FD FAIL (Message on PFD) ......................................................................... 3.1-25
3.1.3.9 YD NOT CENTERED (Message on PFD) ............................................................................. 3.1-25
3.1.3.10 HDG FAIL (Message on affected PFD) ................................................................................. 3.1-25
3.1.3.11 ATT FAIL (Messages on PFD) .............................................................................................. 3.1-26
3.1.3.12 PITCH MISMATCH or ROLL MISMATCH (Messages on PFD) ............................................ 3.1-26
3.1.3.13 IAS FAIL and / or ALT FAIL (Messages on PFD) .................................................................. 3.1-26
3.1.3.14 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY FAILURE ................................................................................ 3.1-27
3.1.3.15 MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY FAILURE ................................................................................. 3.1-27
3.1.3.16 ENGINE DISPLAY FAILURE ................................................................................................ 3.1-27

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 ToC 3-3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

3.1.3.17 CHECK ED (Message on ED) .............................................................................................. 3.1-27

3.1.3.18 CHECK PFD 1 or CHECK PFD 2 (Message on PFD) .......................................................... 3.1-27
3.1.3.19 HOT DISPLAYS or FANS FAIL (Message on ED - In Flight) ................................................ 3.1-28
3.1.3.20 ENGINE DISPLAY ADVISORIES ......................................................................................... 3.1-28
3.1.3.21 AIR DATA SYSTEM FAILURE (Loss of both AIRSPEED and
both ALTITUDE INDICATIONS on PILOT'S and CO-PILOT'S PFD)..................................... 3.1-29
3.1.3.22 LOSS OF PILOT, CO-PILOT and STANDBY AIRSPEED and
ALTITUDE INDICATIONS .................................................................................................... 3.1-29
3.1.3.23 ALT MISMATCH (Message on PFD) .................................................................................... 3.1-30
3.1.3.24 IAS MISMATCH (Message on PFD) ..................................................................................... 3.1-30
3.1.3.25 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (Caution Light) ......................................................................... 3.1-30
3.1.3.26 GPWS (Caution Light) .......................................................................................................... 3.1-30

3.1.4 FUSELAGE FIRE, SMOKE or FUMES ................................................................................ 3.1-31

3.1.4.1 FUSELAGE FIRE, SMOKE or FUMES EMERGENCIES ..................................................... 3.1-31
3.1.4.1.1 General Procedures ............................................................................................................. 3.1-31
3.1.4.1.2 Known Source of Fire, Smoke or Fumes .............................................................................. 3.1-32
3.1.4.1.3 Unknown Source of Fire, Smoke or Fumes .......................................................................... 3.1-34
3.1.4.1.4 Smoke or Fumes Removal (Unknown Source) .................................................................... 3.1-36

3.1.5 EMERGENCY LANDING / DITCHING, FORCED LANDING, EMERGENCY EVACUATION 3.1-36

3.1.5.1 EMERGENCY LANDING (Both Engines Operating) ............................................................ 3.1-36
3.1.5.2 FORCED LANDING (Both Engines Inoperative) .................................................................. 3.1-39
3.1.5.3 DITCHING ............................................................................................................................ 3.1-41

3.1.6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................... 3.1-43

3.1.6.1 BATTERY ............................................................................................................................. 3.1-43
3.1.6.2 BUS ...................................................................................................................................... 3.1-43
3.1.6.3 LOSS OF GENERATED POWER ........................................................................................ 3.1-46

3.1.7 FLIGHT CONTROLS ............................................................................................................ 3.1-49

3.1.7.1 ROLL .................................................................................................................................... 3.1-49
3.1.7.2 PITCH ................................................................................................................................... 3.1-53
3.1.7.3 FLAPS .................................................................................................................................. 3.1-55
3.1.7.4 RUDDERS ............................................................................................................................ 3.1-57

3.1.8 FUEL SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 3.1-59

3.1.8.1 # 1 TANK FUEL LOW or # 2 TANK FUEL LOW (Caution Light) .......................................... 3.1-59
3.1.8.2 # 1 ENG FUEL PRESS or # 2 ENG FUEL PRESS (Caution Light) ...................................... 3.1-59
3.1.8.3 ABNORMAL FUEL TEMPERATURE ................................................................................... 3.1-60
3.1.8.4 ABNORMAL FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE ......................................................................... 3.1-60
3.1.8.5 FUEL TRANSFER FAILURE ................................................................................................ 3.1-60
3.1.8.6 # 1 FUEL FLTR BYPASS or # 2 FUEL FLTR BYPASS (Caution Light) ................................ 3.1-60
3.1.8.7 FUELING ON (Caution Light) ............................................................................................... 3.1-60

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

ToC 3-4 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 PROCEDURES

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

3.1.9 HYDRAULIC POWER .......................................................................................................... 3.1-61

3.1.9.1 # 1 AND # 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS FAILURE ................................................................... 3.1-61
3.1.9.2 # 1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE
(# 1 ENG HYD PUMP and # 1 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Lights) .......................................... 3.1-62
3.1.9.3 # 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE
(# 2 ENG HYD PUMP and # 2 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Lights) .......................................... 3.1-63
3.1.9.4 # 1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM QUANTITY BELOW NORMAL
(# 1 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Light) ...................................................................................... 3.1-64
3.1.9.5 # 1 ENG HYD PUMP (Caution Light) .................................................................................... 3.1-64
3.1.9.6 # 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM QUANTITY BELOW NORMAL
(# 2 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Light) ...................................................................................... 3.1-65
3.1.9.7 # 2 ENG HYD PUMP (Caution Light) .................................................................................... 3.1-65
3.1.9.8 # 1 HYD FLUID HOT or # 2 HYD FLUID HOT (Caution Light) ............................................. 3.1-66
3.1.9.9 # 1 STBY HYD PUMP HOT (Caution Light) .......................................................................... 3.1-66
3.1.9.10 # 3 HYD PUMP (Caution Light) ............................................................................................. 3.1-66
3.1.9.11 PTU FAILURE
[with MS 4-126425 or MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated] .... 3.1-66

3.1.10 ICE and RAIN PROTECTION ............................................................................................... 3.1-67

3.1.10.1 DEICE PRESS (Caution Light) ............................................................................................. 3.1-67
3.1.10.2 ENGINE INTAKE BOOT FAILURE ....................................................................................... 3.1-68
3.1.10.3 DEICE TIMER (Caution Light) .............................................................................................. 3.1-68
3.1.10.4 PROP DEICE (Caution Light) ............................................................................................... 3.1-69
3.1.10.5 WSHLD HOT (Caution Light) ................................................................................................ 3.1-69
3.1.10.6 SIDE WDO HOT (Caution Light) ........................................................................................... 3.1-69
3.1.10.7 WSHLD CTRL (Caution Light) .............................................................................................. 3.1-70
3.1.10.8 WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH FAILURE ............................................................................ 3.1-70
3.1.10.9 ICE DETECT FAIL (Caution Light) ........................................................................................ 3.1-70
3.1.10.10 ENG ADPT HEAT 1 or ENG ADPT HEAT 2 (Caution Light) ................................................. 3.1-70
3.1.10.11 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BELOW 65°C (Propeller De-Icing ON In Flight) .................. 3.1-70
3.1.10.12 PITOT HEAT 1 or PITOT HEAT 2 or PITOT HEAT STBY (Caution Light) ............................ 3.1-70
3.1.10.13 # 1 STALL SYST FAIL or # 2 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL (Caution Lights) 3.1-70
3.1.10.14 PUSHER SYST FAIL (Caution Light) .................................................................................... 3.1-71
3.1.10.15 FLIGHT IN SEVERE ICING .................................................................................................. 3.1-71

3.1.11 LANDING GEAR .................................................................................................................. 3.1-72

3.1.11.1 ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION or LDG GEAR INOP (Caution Light) ............. 3.1-72
3.1.11.2 LANDING GEAR DOOR MALFUNCTIONS .......................................................................... 3.1-73
3.1.11.3 ALL LANDING GEAR FAIL TO RETRACT ........................................................................... 3.1-74
3.1.11.4 LANDING GEAR INDICATOR MALFUNCTION ................................................................... 3.1-74
3.1.11.5 NOSEWHEEL STEERING (Caution Light) ........................................................................... 3.1-75
3.1.11.6 TOUCHED RUNWAY (Warning Light) .................................................................................. 3.1-76
3.1.11.7 INBD ANTI-SKID and / or OUTBD ANTI-SKID (Caution Light) ............................................. 3.1-76
3.1.11.8 WT ON WHEELS (Caution Light) ......................................................................................... 3.1-76
(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 ToC 3-5
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

3.2 MISCELLANEOUS ABNORMAL and EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ................................. 3.2-1

3.2.1 Ground Failures / Aborted Take-off ......................................................................................... 3.2-1

3.2.2 Evacuation .............................................................................................................................. 3.2-3

3.2.3 Blocked Exit Procedure .......................................................................................................... 3.2-3

3.2.4 Crew Incapacitation ................................................................................................................ 3.2-4

3.2.5 In-Flight Failures ..................................................................................................................... 3.2-4

3.2.6 Propeller Overspeed and Unscheduled Feathering .............................................................. 3.2-10

3.2.7 Flapless Approach and Landing ........................................................................................... 3.2-12

3.2.8 Control Jams ........................................................................................................................ 3.2-13

3.2.9 Smoke / Depressurization / Emergency Descent ................................................................. 3.2-14

3.2.10 High Angle of Attack Recovery Procedures .......................................................................... 3.2-17

3.2.11 Overweight Landing .............................................................................................................. 3.2-17

3.2.12 Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) - Honeywell MK V ....................... 3.2-18

3.2.13 Traffic Alert & Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) .............................................................. 3.2-20

3.2.14 Flight Management System (FMS) ....................................................................................... 3.2-20

3.2.15 Operation With One Inoperative Stall Warning and / or Stick Pusher System ...................... 3.2-21

3.2.16 Operation with Inoperative Nosewheel Steering System ...................................................... 3.2-22

3.2.17 Operation with Inoperative Anti-Skid Brake Control System ................................................ 3.2-23

3.2.18 Operation with Inoperative Flight Spoilers in Ground Mode ................................................. 3.2-24

3.2.19 Operation with Landing Gear Extended ............................................................................... 3.2-25

3.3 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS .................................................................................... 3.3-1

3.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 3.3-1

3.3.2 Windshear .............................................................................................................................. 3.3-1

3.3.3 Turbulence .............................................................................................................................. 3.3-4

3.3.4 Wake Turbulence .................................................................................................................... 3.3-5

3.3.5 Volcanic Ash ........................................................................................................................... 3.3-6

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

ToC 3-6 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

3.4 SPECIAL PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................... 3.4-1

3.4.1 FLIGHT TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................................... 3.4-1

3.4.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 3.4-1

3.4.1.2 General ................................................................................................................................... 3.4-1
3.4.1.3 Aileron Trim Flight Test Procedures ........................................................................................ 3.4-1

3.4.2 SUPPLEMENTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................................ 3.4-2

3.4.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 3.4-2

3.4.2.2 General ................................................................................................................................... 3.4-2
3.4.2.3 Air Conditioning, Pressurization and Pneumatics ................................................................... 3.4-2
3.4.2.4 APU, Engines and Propellers .................................................................................................. 3.4-4
3.4.2.5 Autoflight, Flight Instruments and Navigation .......................................................................... 3.4-6
3.4.2.6 Electrical .................................................................................................................................. 3.4-9
3.4.2.7 Flight Controls ....................................................................................................................... 3.4-10
3.4.2.8 Hydraulic Power .................................................................................................................... 3.4-12
3.4.2.9 Ice and Rain Protection / Stall Protection .............................................................................. 3.4-13
3.4.2.10 Landing Gear ........................................................................................................................ 3.4-14

3.4.2.11 Single Engine Taxi Operations .............................................................................................. 3.4-15

3.4.2.11.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 3.4-15
3.4.2.11.2 Operational Considerations ................................................................................................... 3.4-15
3.4.2.11.3 Engine and Propeller Ground Operating Limitations ............................................................. 3.4-16
3.4.2.11.4 Normal Procedures ............................................................................................................... 3.4-16
3.4.2.11.5 Abnormal Procedures ........................................................................................................... 3.4-17

3.4.3 SAFETY OF FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT, ABNORMAL and EMERGENCY CHECKLISTS .... 3.4-18

3.4.3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 3.4-18

3.4.3.2 Abnormal / Emergency Checklist Guidlines .......................................................................... 3.4-18
3.4.3.3 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 3.4-19
3.4.3.4 Abnormal Contaminated Runway Operations ....................................................................... 3.4-19
3.4.3.5 Landing Gear Failures ........................................................................................................... 3.4-20
Normal Extension / Retraction
Alternate Extension
Nose Gear - UP, Main Gear - DOWN and LOCKED
All Gear - UP
One Main Gear - UP, Nose Gear and Opposite Main Gear - DOWN and LOCKED

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.0-1
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.0 NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL PROCEDURES

3.0.1 Introduction

3.0.1.1 General Use of Expanded Emergency and Abnormal Procedures (Non-Normal) Checklists

The Expanded Emergency and Abnormal Procedures (Non-Normal) checklists are intended to be used in con-
junction with the QRH Abnormal Checklist and the AFM.

Each non-normal situation should be dealt with in the following sequence:

1. Memory items, enclosed in a BOX;
2. Checklist items specific to the malfunction;
3. Warnings, Cautions and Notes (lost services, etc.); and
4. Landing Precautions.
This information is specific to the malfunction and is used to supplement the normal operations of the air-
plane. The landing precautions must be reviewed as part of the approach briefing.

Following completion of the appropriate Non-Normal Checklist, the Normal Checklist will be used giving due
regard to those items modified by the abnormality for the remainder of the flight.

NOTE: For failures not addressed in the Non-Normal Checklist, refer to the AFM.

− The statement “Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport” is defined as:
Land at the nearest airport that offers sufficient landing distance available and if required, emergency
services to support the emergency or abnormality.

− The statement “Land at the nearest suitable airport” is defined as:

The airplane may continue to the destination airport or the nearest airport where maintenance services are
available.

− The statement “Maintenance action required prior to next flight” is defined as:
“Next Flight” is referring to the immediate or imminent take-off after discovery.

3.0.1.2 Crew Coordination during Emergencies

In the event of a non-normal situation, the primary objective of the flight crew is to control the airplane.

The crew will assess the problem, when vertical and lateral flight path control is established and ground contact
is no longer a threat.

Once the nature of the problem has been established, the PF will call for the appropriate memory items if appli-
cable.

The PNF actions the memory items which are confirmed by the PF.

When the memory items are complete, the PF will call for the appropriate non-normal checklist.

The PNF actions the checklist items using the “read and do” method.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.0-2 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.0.1.3 Communication Flight Compartment and Cabin Crew

The PF will normally handle all communications with the cabin crew.
For normal communication use the CALL button to contact the cabin crew.
The Senior Cabin Crew Member will come to the flight compartment or respond on the interphone.
During emergency situations, standardized communication between the Pilots and the Cabin Crew Member(s)
is essential.
The following is a list of the standard communications to be used during emergency operations.

Table 3.0-1 Pilot / Cabin Crew Communications

Action Required Signal

Notify cabin crew of an emergency PA:
“SENIOR CABIN ATTENDANT TO THE FLIGHT DECK”
Alternate: Emergency Lights ON
Evacuate airplane PA: EVACUATE LEFT (or RIGHT) SIDE”
Alternate: More than 3 Chimes.
Passengers to brace prior to an emergency land- PA: “BRACE BRACE BRACE"
ing (this call should be made approximately 1 min
prior to landing) Alternate: More than 3 Chimes.

Cabin Crew Members to resume duties after an PA: "CABIN CREW RESUME YOUR DUTIES"
emergency descent
Prevent evacuation PA: "REMAIN SEATED"

3.0.1.4 Distress Communication and Alerting ATC to Emergencies

Do Not hesitate to send “MAYDAY” calls as early as posssible to give the ground staff as much time as possi-
ble for their preparations.
A “MAYDAY” call can always be cancelled.
In your transmission give a technical status of the airplane or type of emergency, Position, FL, Heading, Endur-
ance and Intentions.
Make clear requests.

3.0.1.5 Guidance for Diversion in Case of Serious Technical Failure

Especially in case of a serious technical failure, to conduct a safe landing must always be the highest priority.

Furthermore the following has to be taken into consideration:

• Technical condition of the airplane, actual grossmass, endurance
• Weather conditions and terrain enroute and at alternate
• Aerodrome facilities
• Passenger and maintenance facilities

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-1
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.1 EXPANDED EMERGENCY and ABNORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS

3.1.1 AIR CONDITIONING, PRESSURIZATION and PNEUMATICS

3.1.1.1 RAPID DEPRESSURIZATION / EMERGENCY DESCENT

Oxygen Masks ................................................................................................................................. ON / 100%

• Remove headset.
• Remove quick donning oxygen mask from the quick release holder and put it over nose and mouth.
• Set oxygen to 100%.
• Breathe normally to start oxygen flow.
• Put headset back on.
MIC Switch ................................................................................................................................................ Mask
Set BOOM / MASK switch to MASK and check communications.
Passenger Signs ......................................................................................................................................... ON
• Set FASTEN BELTS SIGN switch to FASTEN BELTS.
• Set NO SMOKING SIGN switch to NO SMOKING.
EMERGENCY DESCENT .............................................................................................. Accomplish As Req’d
POWER Levers ............................................................................................................................ FLIGHT IDLE
Move POWER Levers to FLIGHT IDLE.
Condition Levers ....................................................................................................................................... MAX
Move Condition Levers to MAX / 1020.
Airspeed ...................................................................................................................................................... VMO
Increase airspeed to Maximum Operating Speed (VMO) Pointer.
If an immediate descent to an altitude where oxygen is not required cannot be conducted;
within 5 min of donning oxygen masks:
Oxygen Masks ........................................................................................................................................ NORM

NOTE: If structural integrity is in doubt, limit airspeed as much as possible and avoid high
maneuvering loads.
[END]

3.1.1.2 UNPRESSURIZED FLIGHT

(Bleeds ON)

AUTO / MAN / DUMP .............................................................................................................................. DUMP

Move the REAR OUTFLOW VALVE CONTROL switch to the DUMP position.
BLEED 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................. ON / MAX
• Set BLEED control switches to 1 and 2.
• Turn BLEED airflow control rotary switch fully clockwise to MAX.
Oxygen Masks ................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
If above 14000 ft, put on oxygen masks and set oxygen to 100%.
• Remove headset.
• Remove quick donning oxygen mask from the quick release holder and put it over nose and mouth.
• Set oxygen to 100%.
• Breathe normally to start oxygen flow.
• Put headset back on.
- For flight with bleed air supply selected off, use RAM VENTILATION (Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.3).
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-2 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.1.3 RAM VENTILATION (Bleeds OFF)

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ................................................................................... OFF

Set RECIRC Fan switch to OFF.
BLEED 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................. MIN / OFF
• Turn BLEED airflow control rotary switch fully counter-clockwise to the MIN position.
• Set BLEED control 1 and 2 switches to OFF.
AUTO / MAN / DUMP ................................................................................................................................. MAN
Move the REAR OUTFLOW VALVE CONTROL switch to the MAN position.
MAN DIFF ....................................................................................................................................... INCR (50 s)
Hold the MAN DIFF switch to the INCR position for 50 s.
CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW ........................................................................... Fully Clockwise (OPN)
Turn CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW rotary switch fully clockwise to OPN.
FWD OUTFLOW VALVE ........................................................................................................................... Open
Turn FWD OUTFLOW VALVE lever clockwise to OPEN.
NOTE: Ram ventilation is most effective above 150 KIAS.
[END]

3.1.1.4 FUSELAGE DOORS

(Warning Light)

ON THE GROUND
- Confirm affected door on DOORS page of MFD.
NOTE: A failed condition may also exist where NO unsafe DOOR is indicated on the DOORS page of
the MFD.
- Inspect and secure affected door.
FUSELAGE DOORS warning light remains illuminated:
- Maintenance action required prior to flight.

IN FLIGHT
FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING Switches ....................................... FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING
- Confirm affected door on DOORS page of MFD
NOTE: A failed condition may also exist where NO unsafe DOOR is indicated on the DOORS page of
the MFD.
If pressurized:
- Confirm normal pressure differential, cabin altitude and rate are indicated on the CABIN indicator.
With normal pressurization confirmed:
FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING Switches .................................................................................. As Req’d
- Land at the nearest suitable airport.
If there is a loss of pressurization or operating unpressurized and the security of the affected door cannot be
confirmed or the operating handle of the affected door is not in the closed position:
WARNING: Do Not attempt to secure affected door.
- Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.1.5 INTERNAL BAGGAGE DOOR UNLOCKED

[with Options - CR 825 SO 90485 and CR 825 CH 03262 Not Incorporated]

(Illumination of INTERNAL BAGG DOOR Caution Light or

[with MS 4-309221 or MS 4-309218 Incorporated],
INTERNAL DOORS Caution and BAGG DOOR Advisory Lights)

IN FLIGHT or ON THE GROUND

Internal Baggage Door ............................................................................................................ Check / Secure
Confirm INTERNAL BAGG DOOR caution light out, or
[with MS 4-309221 or MS 4-309218 Incorporated]
confirm INTERNAL DOORS caution and BAGG DOOR advisory lights out.
[END]

3.1.1.6 FAILURE OF REMOTE LATCH ON FLIGHT COMPARTMENT DOOR

[with MS 4-309218 or MS 4-309221 Incorporated]

(Illumination of INTERNAL DOORS Caution and INTERNAL DOORS FAIL Advisory Lights)

[with Options - CR 825 SO 90485 and CR 825 CH 03262 Incorporated]

(Illumination of COCKPIT DOOR Caution and INTERNAL DOORS FAIL Advisory Lights)

Lower Deadbolt Latch ............................................................................................................................ Rotate

to mechanically secure the door

LOCK ISOLATE Switch ........................................................................................................................... Press

Check LOCK ISOLATE switch advisory light illuminates.
[END]

3.1.1.7 EMERGENCY OPENING OF FLIGHT COMPARTMENT DOOR

(Door Jammed)
[with MS 4 - 309209 or MS 4 - 309218 or MS 4-309219 Incorporated]

• Unlock and push or step down on bottom hinge pin.

• Unlock and pull down upper hinge pin.
• Unlock and lift middle hinge pin.
• Push flight compartment door at hinge side.

NOTE: It may require a large force to open the flight compartment door.

• Rotate the flight compartment door counter-clockwise and stow against the lavatory.

NOTE: Upon forcing the flight compartment door open, it may fall straight aft and lay flat on the cabin
floor.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-4 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.1.8 AIRSTAIR DOOR, FAILURE TO OPEN

[with MS 4-126512 or MS 4-126513 or MS 4-123564 Not Incorporated]

With aircraft electrical power on:

AIRSTAIR DOOR SOV CB (Left Lower CB Panel - E1) .............................................................................. Pull
NOTE: The airstair door failure to open may be associated with a failure of IOM 1 or IOM 2.
Airstair Door ............................................................................................................................................. Open
If airstair door remains inoperative:
BATTERY MASTER Switch ....................................................................................................................... OFF
Airstair Door ............................................................................................................................................. Open
- If airstair door remains inoperative, exit via the Aft Passenger Access door.
[END]

3.1.1.9 CABIN PRESS

(Warning Light)

CAB ALT Indicator .................................................................................................................................. Check

Check CABIN ALTITUDE indicator, to confirm cabin altitude is more than 8000 ft.
BLEED 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................. ON / MAX
• Set BLEED CONTROL 1 and 2 switches to 1 and 2.
• Turn BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL rotary switch fully clockwise to MAX.
CABIN PACK and FLT COMP PACK Switches ...................................................................................... AUTO
Set CABIN and FLIGHT COMP PACK CONTROL switches to AUTO.
AUTO / MAN / DUMP ............................................................................................................................... AUTO
Move the REAR OUTFLOW VALVE CONTROL switch to the AUTO position.
CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW .......................................................... Fully Counter-Clockwise (CLSD)
Turn CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW rotary switch fully counter-clockwise to CLSD.
FWD OUTFLOW Valve Lever ................................................................................................................ NORM
Turn FWD OUTFLOW VALVE lever counter-clockwise to NORMAL.
If cabin altitude is NOT decreasing:
AUTO / MAN / DUMP ................................................................................................................................. MAN
Move the REAR OUTFLOW VALVE CONTROL switch to the MAN position.
MAN DIFF ........................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
Use Cabin Altitude differential placard to achieve appropriate cabin altitude (5.46 psid maximum).

NOTE: Maximum altitude in manual mode is 25000 ft.

If cabin altitude is not decreasing:

Descend ................................................................................................................................ to below 14000 ft
Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible (see UNPRESSURIZED FLIGHT in Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.2).
If control of cabin altitude is regained:
Prior to landing:
BLEED 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................. MIN / OFF
• Turn BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL rotary switch fully counter-clockwise to the MIN position.
• Set BLEED CONTROL 1 and 2 switches to OFF.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-5
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.1.10 FAULT (Annunciation Light)

(Alternate Mode Pressurization)

AUTO / MAN / DUMP ................................................................................................................................. MAN

MAN DIFF .................................................................................................................. INCR / DECR (As Req’d)
Use Cabin Altitude Differential placard to achieve appropriate cabin altitude.

NOTE: Maximum altitude in manual mode is 25000 ft.

Prior to landing:
BLEED 1 and 2 Switches ........................................................................................................................... OFF
[END]

3.1.1.11 LOSS OF CABIN ALTITUDE, CABIN RATE and CABIN DIFF INDICATORS
(All Indicators at Zero)

Descend ................................................................................................................................ to below 14000 ft

3.1.1.12 CABIN DIFFERENTIAL GREATER THAN 1.0 PSI ON APPROACH

CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW ............................................................................ Fully Clockwise (OPN)

NOTE: If cabin differential does not decrease, assume indication failure.

- Prior to landing, refer to procedure RAM VENTILATION in Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.3

[END]

3.1.1.13 CRACKED WINDSHIELD

Airspeed .................................................................................................................... Reduce (210 KIAS MAX)

AUTO / MAN / DUMP ................................................................................................................................. MAN
MAN DIFF .............................................................................................................. DECR (2.5 to 3.0 psid MAX)
- Descend to below 14000 ft, if practical.
- Use MAN DIFF control to maintain 2.5 - 3.0 psid or less in descent.
Prior to landing:
BLEED 1 and 2 Switches ................................................................................................................. MIN / OFF
[END]

3.1.1.14 CABIN PACK HOT or FLT COMPT PACK HOT

(Caution Lights)

CABIN PACK or FLT COMP PACK Switches ............................................................................................ OFF

Set CABIN or FLIGHT COMP PACK CONTROL Switch to OFF
(Depending on which caution light comes on).

BLEED Selector ......................................................................................................................................... MAX

Turn BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL rotary switch fully clockwise to MAX.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-6 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.1.15 CABIN PACK HOT and FLT COMPT PACK HOT

(Caution Lights)

CABIN PACK and FLT COMP PACK Switches ......................................................................................... OFF

Set CABIN and FLIGHT COMP PACK CONTROL switches to OFF.

Descend ................................................................................................................................ to below 14000 ft

Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible.
- When cabin pressure differential had decreased to 0.5 psi or below,
complete RAM VENTILATION procedure in Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.3.
[END]

3.1.1.16 FLT COMPT PACK HOT and CABIN DUCT HOT or

CABIN PACK HOT and FLT COMPT DUCT HOT
(Caution Lights)

CABIN PACK and FLT COMP PACK Switches ......................................................................................... OFF

Descend ................................................................................................................................ to below 14000 ft

Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible.

BLEED 1 and 2 Switches .................................................................................................................. MIN / OFF

NOTE: ECS pack airflow is lost and cabin will depressurize.

NOTE: ECS pack airflow is lost and cabin will depressurize.

- When cabin pressure differential had decreased to 0.5 psi or below,

complete RAM VENTILATION procedure in Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.3.

[END]

3.1.1.20 # 1 BLEED HOT and # 2 BLEED HOT ON TAKE-OFF

(Caution Lights)

(with BLEED 1 and BLEED 2 Switches in the OFF position)

[with MS 4-113636 Not Incorporated]

NOTE: Conduct the following procedure during the take-off climb.

BLEED 1 and 2 Switches ............................................................................................................................ ON

After 10 s:

BLEED 1 and 2 Switches ........................................................................................................................... OFF

Check # 1 BLEED HOT and # 2 BLEED HOT caution lights out.

BLEED 1 and 2 Switches ............................................................................................................................ ON

If # 1 BLEED HOT and # 2 BLEED HOT caution lights remain illuminated:

- Complete # 1 BLEED HOT and # 2 BLEED HOT (Caution Lights) procedure in Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.19.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-8 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2 APU, ENGINES and PROPELLERS

3.1.2.1 ABORTED ENGINE START

Condition Lever ............................................................................................................................... FUEL OFF

Move Condition Lever of affected engine to FUEL OFF.

ENGINE START SELECT Switch .............................................................................................................. OFF

Make sure SELECT and START lights on the ENGINE START switchlight go off.

- Complete CLEARING AN ENGINE procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.4):

[END]

3.1.2.2 NO STARTER CUT OUT

(ENGINE START Light remains illuminated)

ENGINE START SELECT Switch .............................................................................................................. OFF

Check START and SELECT lights out after approximately 15 s.

DC CONTROL EXT PWR Switch (if connected) ........................................................................................ OFF

If affected DC GEN caution light out:

GEN LOAD (affected side) ....................................................................................................................... Check

If DC GEN caution light remains illuminated:

DC CONTROL GEN Switch ......................................................................................................... OFF then ON

If DC GEN caution light does not extinguish:

DC CONTROL GEN Switch (affected) ....................................................................................................... OFF
- Maintenance Action required prior to flight.

[END]

3.1.2.3 STARTER FAILURE ON THE GROUND

(ENGINE SELECT Light remains illuminated)

MAIN, AUX and STBY BATT Switches ..................................................................................................... OFF

DC EXT PWR .............................................................................................................................................. OFF

AC EXT PWR .............................................................................................................................................. OFF

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF

APU PWR .................................................................................................................................................... OFF

- Carry out remaining portions of normal engine SHUT-DOWN procedure (Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.14)

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-9
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.2.4 CLEARING AN ENGINE

(To Remove Internally Trapped Fuel)
Condition Lever ............................................................................................................................... FUEL OFF
Move Condition Lever of affected engine to FUEL OFF.
POWER Lever ........................................................................................................................................... DISC
Make sure POWER Lever of affected engine is at DISC.
IGNITION (affected engine) ......................................................................................................................... OFF
Set IGNITION control switch of affected engine to OFF.
START SELECT (affected engine) .......................................................................................................... Select
• Set ENGINE START SELECT switch to 1 or 2.
• Make sure the amber SELECT light on the ENGINE START switchlight illuminates.
ENGINE START Switch ........................................................................................................................... Press
Push the ENGINE START switchlight and make sure the START illuminates.
CAUTION: Observe Starter Cranking Limits.
Starter Cranking Limits
START MAX Time ON ... Followed by Time OFF
1 70 s 2 min
2 70 s 2 min
3 70 s 30 min
After desired engine rotation complete:
START SELECT .......................................................................................................................................... OFF
• Set ENGINE START SELECT switch to OFF.
• Make sure the amber SELECT and START lights on the ENGINE START switchlight go off.
If a subsequent engine start is to be attempted:
IGNITION (affected engine) ..................................................................................................................... NORM
[END]

3.1.2.5 APU FIRE

(Illumination of CHECK FIRE DET Warning Light,
APU Caution Light and APU FIRE Advisory Light)
- Check APU automatically shuts down (APU RUN advisory light out and APU BTL LOW, APU FUEL VALVE
CLOSED and APU FAIL advisory lights illuminate).
If APU BTL ARM or APU FIRE advisory lights remain illuminated after 7 s:
APU EXTG Switch ................................................................................................................................... Press
Pull the guard down, then push the EXTG switch.
Check APU BTL ARM and APU FIRE advisory lights out.
- Proceed with POST APU AUTOMATIC SHUT-DOWN check as follows (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.6):
[END]

3.1.2.6 POST APU AUTOMATIC SHUT-DOWN

APU BL AIR Switch ...................................................................................................................................... Off
Push APU BL AIR switch and make sure the BL AIR OPEN advisory light goes off.
APU GEN Switch .......................................................................................................................................... Off
Push APU GEN switch and make sure the GEN ON light goes off.
APU PWR Switch .......................................................................................................................................... Off
• Make sure the APU caution light and APU FUEL VALVE OPEN advisory light go out.
• Make sure the APU FUEL VALVE CLOSED advisory light illuminates.
CAUTION: Do Not restart the APU following an automatic shut-down if
the FIRE Advisory Light is illuminated.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-10 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2.7 APU START FAILURE

(APU FAIL Advisory Light illuminates and APU STARTER Advisory Light extinguishes)

APU PWR Switch ........................................................................................................................... Off then On

Push APU PWR switch off then on. Check APU FAIL advisory light out.
NOTE: After an APU start attempt, APU Start will remain disabled for approximately 7 s
(Control Panel Advisory lights illuminate with FADEC BIT test)
APU START Switch .................................................................................................................................. Press
APU Starter Cranking Limits:
START MAX Time ON ... Followed by Time OFF
1 60 s 5 min
2 60 s Maintenance Action Required
NOTE: Including the time taken for the maintenance action following the second start attempt, a
minimum of 30 min off must elapse prior to the next start attempt.
[END]

3.1.2.8 APU STARTER FAILURE

(APU START Light remains illuminated)

MAIN, AUX and STBY BATT Switches ..................................................................................................... OFF

DC CONTROL (if connected) ...................................................................................................................... OFF
AC CONTROL (if connected) ...................................................................................................................... OFF
Engine Shut-Down (if applicable) ..................................................................................................... Complete
APU Shut-Down ................................................................................................................................ Complete
[END]

3.1.2.9 APU
(Caution Light)

If APU Failure (APU FAIL advisory light illuminates):

• Confirm APU Automatic Shut-down.
• Proceed with POST APU AUTOMATIC SHUT-DOWN checklist in Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.6.

If APU GEN Overheat (AUP GEN OHT advisory light illuminates):

• Confirm Automatic Shut-down.
• Proceed with POST APU AUTOMATIC SHUT-DOWN checklist in Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.6.
[END]

3.1.2.10 APU GEN WARN

(Advisory Light)
(APU Generator failure)

APU GEN ........................................................................................................................................ Off then On

• Push APU GEN switch to off.
• Push APU GEN switch again to on.
• Make sure the APU GEN ON advisory light illuminates on and the APU GEN WARN light goes out.

If APU GEN WARN (advisory lights remain on, Generator fails to come on line):
APU GEN ...................................................................................................................................................... Off
Push APU GEN switch off.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-11
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.2.11 APU BLEED AIR OVERHEAT

(FLT COMPT DUCT HOT or CABIN DUCT HOT or CABIN PACK HOT or FLT COMPT PACK HOT
Caution Lights)

APU BL AIR OPEN Switch ........................................................................................................................... Off

Check APU BL AIR OPEN advisory light out.
[END]

3.1.2.12 ON-GROUND EMERGENCIES

EMERG Brake .............................................................................................................................................. ON

Set EMERGENCY / PARKING BRAKE lever to PARK when airplane comes to a complete stop.

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................................................... DISC

Move POWER Levers 1 and 2 to FLIGHT IDLE.
Then squeeze Flight Idle Gate Triggers and move POWER Levers aft of FLIGHT IDLE gate to DISC detent.

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF

Move Condition Levers 1 and 2 to FUEL OFF.

PULL FUEL / HYD OFF Handle (affected engine) ...................................................................................... Pull

Check FUEL VALVE CLOSED and HYD VALVE CLOSED white advisory lights illuminate.

TANK AUX PUMP (1 and 2) ........................................................................................................................ OFF

Check TANK 1 and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory lights are off.

If Fire:
EXTG Switch ...................................................................................................................................... FWD BTL
Set EXTG switch of affected engine to FWD BTL and check EXTG FWD BTL arm advisory light goes off.

Wait up to 30 s, if fire persists:

EXTG Switch ......................................................................................................................................... Aft BTL
Set EXTG switch of affected engine to AFT BTL and check EXTG AFT BTL arm advisory light goes off.

If Evacuation:
EMER LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................................... ON
Pull and set the Eemergency Lights switch to the ON position.
Make sure the PORTABLE EMERGENCY LIGHT on the flight compartment ceiling turns on.

FASTEN Seat BELTS .................................................................................................................................. OFF

Evacuate ............................................................................................................................................ As Req’d

After the airplane comes to a stop and propellers have stopped turning, the captain starts the evacuation by
using the PA to shout the command “EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE” (LEFT or RIGHT SIDE).
The 1st officer leaves the flight compartment and helps with the evacuation.

AC / DC EXT PWR and APU ....................................................................................................................... OFF

If airplane is at the gate, set AC EXT PWR or DC EXT PWR switches to OFF.
Push APU PWR switchlight off.

BATTERY MASTER .................................................................................................................................... OFF

Pull out the BATTERY MASTER switch and set to OFF.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-12 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2.13 ENGINE AIRSTART

Engine Airstart Envelope

NOTE: Minimum SAT for engine relight is - 40°C.

Affected Engine:
POWER Lever ............................................................................................................................. FLIGHT IDLE
Set POWER Lever of affected engine to FLIGHT IDLE.

Condition Lever ............................................................................................................................... FUEL OFF

Move Condition Lever of affected engine to FUEL OFF.

PULL FUEL / HYD OFF Handle ........................................................................................................... Push In

Push in the PULL FUEL / HYD OFF handle and
make sure the FUEL and HYD VALVES OPEN advisory lights illuminate.

IGNITION 1 or 2 ...................................................................................................................................... NORM

Set IGNITION 1 or 2 switch to NORM.

BLEED Air .................................................................................................................................................. OFF

Set BLEED switch of affected engine to OFF.

TANK AUX PUMP 1 or 2 ............................................................................................................................... ON

Push the TANK 1 or TANK 2 AUX PUMP switchlight and
make sure the green ON advisory light illuminates.

AUTOFEATHER SELECT Switchlight ........................................................................................................ Off

ALT FTHR Switchlight ................................................................................................................................. Off

MAIN BUS TIE .............................................................................................................................................. Tie

Set MAIN BUS TIE switch to MAIN BUS TIE.

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-13
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

ENGINE AIRSTART (cont’d)

Conduct Normal Start:

Captain First Officer
ENGINE START SELECT Switch ...Pull Out then Set to 1 or 2
Observes SELECT light turns on.
ENGINE START Switch .................................................. Press Starts stopwatch running to time the start
Makes sure START light illuminates.
At first indication of NH:
Sets condition lever to START & FEATHER.
NOTE: Fuel flow indication on ED is not accurate until the engine is stable at NH.
Check that engine accelerates to above 64.2% NH and ITT does not exceed 920°C.
Check ENGINE START and ENGINE START SELECT Switches off.
Make sure SELECT and START Lights go out.
For appropriate engine, make sure oil pressure is greater than 44 psi, ENG OIL PRESS Warning
Light, ENG FUEL PRESS, ENG HYD PUMP and DC GEN Caution Lights go out.
ENGINE SELECT Light will remain illuminated for approximately 15 s after ENGINE START and
SELECT Switches off.

When engine stabilizes:

Maximum Airspeed [with MS 4-113264 Not Incorporated] ............................................................... 200 KIAS
Condition Lever ................................................................................................................................. MIN / 850
When propeller RPM stabilizes:
Condition Lever ................................................................................................................................. As Req’d
CAUTION: [with MS 4-113264 Not Incorporated]: if the condition lever is advanced before propeller
RPM is stabilized, a propeller overspeed may occur.
POWER Lever .................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
Move POWER Lever to the RATING detent position, or as req'd.
Check AC GEN Caution Light .................................................................................................................... Out
DC and AC VOLTS and LOAD ................................................................................................................ Check
Check on ELECTRICAL page of MFD.
TANK AUX PUMP 1 and 2 .......................................................................................................................... OFF
Check TANK 1 and TANK 2 AUX PUMP ON advisory lights out.
STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL ................................................................................................ As Req’d
Check STBY HYD PRESS ON, PTU CNTRL ON advisory lights out and
[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated], PTU pressure advi-
sory light out.

Following an airstart of # 1 engine:

PTU CNTRL ............................................................................................................................. ON then Normal
NOTE: Cycling the PTU CNTRL switch ensure the PTU auto logic is enabled.
PTU CNTRL ........................................................................................................................................ As Req’d
BLEED 1 and 2 ................................................................................................................................... As Req’d
• Set BLEED 1 and BLEED 2 switches to ON, or as required.
• Turn BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL rotary switch to NORM, or as required.
MAIN BUS TIE ............................................................................................................................................. OFF
Set MAIN BUS TIE switch to OFF position.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-14 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2.14 STARTER FAILURE IN FLIGHT

(ENGINE SELECT Light remains illuminated)

BATTERY Switches (MAIN, AUX, STBY) .................................................................................................. OFF

DC BUS TIE CONT Circuit Breaker (Right Lower CB Panel - G8) ............................................................ Pull
- Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.

CAUTION: Do Not connect External Power or select APU generator on shut-down.

[END]

3.1.2.15 ABNORMAL OIL PRESSURE

Low Oil Pressure

If oil pressure is between 44 and 60 psi:

POWER Lever (affected engine) ................................................................................................. FLIGHT IDLE
Move POWER Lever of affected engine to the FLIGHT IDLE position.

Condition Lever (affected engine) .................................................................................... START & FEATHER

Move Condition Lever of affected engine to START & FEATHER to reduce in-flight drag.

If propeller does not feather:

ALT FTHR Switch ..................................................................................................................................... Press
Check FTHR advisory light illuminates.

Indicated oil pressure below 44 psi or continuous illumination of # 1 ENG OIL PRESS or # 2 ENG OIL PRESS
warning light:
- Complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).

NOTE: Should the Main Oil Pressure indication fail (dashes replace the digits and the needle is
removed), provided the # 1 ENG OIL PRESS or # 2 ENG OIL PRESS warning light is not
Illuminated, there is no requirement to shut down the affected engine.
Maintenance action is required before next flight.

High Oil Pressure

Continuous oil pressure above 72 psi:

POWER ................................................................................................................................................. Reduce

NOTE: A power reduction of 20% torque should produce a decrease in oil pressure.
Power reduction will be dependant on aircraft performance, including icing and airspeed
requirements.
Minimum airspeed must be appropriate to flap configuration and flight conditions.
At pilot’s discretion, power may be reduced on the affected engine only.

• Monitor oil pressure for 2 min.

Oil pressure decreases to 72 psid or less:

- Maintain power at or below the adjusted torque setting for remainder of the flight.
- Maintenance action required prior to next flight.

Oil pressure remains above 72 psid:

- Complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-15
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.2.16 ABNORMAL OIL TEMPERATURE IN FLIGHT

(OIL TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS 107°C)

NOTE: With an Oil Temperature greater than 107°C, the affected oil temperature indication will be red.

1. POWER - Reduce Torque by 20%

NOTE: A reduction of 20% torque should produce a decrease in oil temperature.

Power reduction will be dependant on aircraft performance, including icing and airspeed
requirements.
Minimum airspeed must be appropriate to flap configuration and flight conditions.
At pilot’s discretion, power may be reduced on the affected engine only.

2. Monitor Oil Temperature.

Oil Temperature at or below 115°C:

1. POWER - Maintain at or below the reduced torque setting for remainder of the flight
2. Monitor Oil Temperature.
3. Maintenance action required prior to next flight.

Oil Temperature above 115°C:

1. POWER Lever (affected engine) - FLIGHT IDLE

2. Condition Lever (affected engine) - START & FEATHER
3. Monitor Oil Temperature.

Oil Temperature decreases immediately to or below 115°C:

4. Flight may be continued with affected engine at FLIGHT IDLE / START & FEATHER.

Oil Temperature remains above 115°C:

4. Complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).

[END]

3.1.2.17 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BELOW 65°C

(Propeller De-Icing ON In Flight)

• Monitor affected engine performance.

- Exit icing conditions as soon as possible.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-16 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2.18 CHECK FIRE DET (Warning Light) and FAULT A or FAULT B (Advisory Light)
(Fire Detector Loop Failure)

• No crew action required

NOTE: Maintenance action required prior to next flight.

[END]

3.1.2.19 CHECK FIRE DET (Warning Light) and BTL LOW (Advisory Light)
(Fire Bottle Pressure Low)

• No crew action required.

NOTE: Maintenance action required prior to next flight.

[END]

3.1.2.20 # 1 ENG FADEC FAIL or # 2 ENG FADEC FAIL

(Warning Light)

NOTE: A FADEC failure may cause the affected engine to shut down automatically.

- Complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).

[END]

3.1.2.21 # 1 ENG FADEC or # 2 ENG FADEC

(Caution Light)

Affected Engine:

POWER Lever ................................................................................................... Adjust Slowly and Smoothly

Move POWER Lever of affected engine to the req'd position.

NOTE: Symmetric torque may require asymmetric POWER Lever positions.

CAUTION: Do Not retard affected POWER Lever below DISC on landing.

[END]

3.1.2.22 POWERPLANT
(ED Advisory)

• Monitor engine performance

NOTE: Maintenance action required prior to next flight.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-17
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.2.23 PROPELLER OVERSPEED

(Propeller increases above 1020 RPM and # 1 PEC or # 2 PEC Caution Light illuminates)

Above 400 ft AGL:

NOTE: Minimum airspeed will be appropriate to flap configuration and flight conditions.

Affected Engine:
POWER Lever ............................................................................................................. Retard to FLIGHT IDLE
Move POWER Lever of the affected engine to FLIGHT IDLE position to control propeller RPM.
Condition Lever ................................................................................................................ START & FEATHER
Move Condition Lever of the affected engine to START / FEATHER.
ALT FTHR Switchlight (if req’d) .............................................................................................................. FTHR
Check FTHR advisory light goes out.

If propeller does not feather:

- Do Not shut down the engine
ALT FTHR Switchlight .................................................................................................................................. Off
Check FTHR advisory light illuminates.
Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................ MAX / 1020
POWER Lever (non-affected engine) ................................................................................................. As Req’d
As required to maintain the desired flight profile.
POWER Lever (affected engine) ......................................................................................................... Advance
Advance to match the POWER lever of the non-affected engine.
Operate together as required to maintain the desired flight profile.

NOTE: Symmetric POWER levers will give approximately symmetric power.

During overspeed governor control, an increase in power or turbulence encounter may cause
the speed of the affected propeller to temporarily exceed 1080 RPM.

- Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.

Landing Considerations:
- Do Not retard affected POWER Lever below FLIGHT IDLE on landing.
- Anticipate greater than normal braking requirements due to increased propeller thrust at FLT IDLE setting.
Landing Distance Factor:
REF SPEED INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.35 1.69
Flap 35° .................................. 1.35 1.62

If propeller feathers:
- Complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).

NOTE: If engine is not shut down immediately after feathering the propeller with the Alternate Feather
system, the propeller may unfeather.
Re-select the ALT FTHR switch to feather the propeller.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-18 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2.24 DUAL PROPELLER OVERSPEED

(Both Propellers increase above 1020 RPM and
# 1 PEC and # 2 PEC Caution Lights illuminate)

- Land at the nearest suitable airport.

NOTES: 1. During overspeed governor control, an increase in power of turbulence encounter may
cause the propeller speed to temporarily exceed 1080 RPM.

2, With POWER levers in the RATING detent, the TRQ indication will be less than the calcu-
lated rated torque presented at the top of the ED.

Landing Considerations:
- Do Not retard affected POWER Lever below FLIGHT IDLE on landing and during taxi, as propellers will
feather.
- Anticipate greater than normal braking requirements due to increased propeller thrust at FLT IDLE setting.

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... 1.35 1.69
Flap 35° ................................... 1.35 1.62

NOTE: During the landing roll, propeller RPM will decrease to approximately 500 to 550 and may
cause the AC generators to drop off-line, as indicated by the illumination of # 1 AC GEN and #
2 AC GEN caution lights.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-19
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.2.25 # 1 PEC or # 2 PEC

(Caution Light)

Landing Considerations:
- Do Not select affected POWER Lever below FLIGHT IDLE on landing.
- Anticipate greater than normal braking requirements due to increased propeller thrust at FLT IDLE setting.

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.35 1.69
Flap 35° .................................. 1.35 1.62
[END]

3.1.2.26 UNSCHEDULED PROPELLER FEATHERING

(May be indicated by High Torque)

Above 400 ft AGL:

POWER Lever (affected engine) .................................................................................................. FLIGHT IDLE

Move POWER Lever of affected engine to FLIGHT IDLE position.

- Complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).

[END]

3.1.2.27 PROPELLER GROUND RANGE ADVISORY LIGHT CYCLING

POWER Levers ................................................................................................ Advance above FLIGHT IDLE

Advance POWER Levers forward to a position that turns the GROUND RANGE light off.

CAUTION: Avoid POWER Lever positions that cause in the GROUND RANGE lights to illuminate.

Landing Considerations:
- Do Not select affected POWER Lever below FLIGHT IDLE on landing.
- Anticipate greater than normal braking requirements due to increased propeller thrust at FLT IDLE setting.

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.35 1.69
Flap 35° .................................. 1.35 1.62
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-20 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2.28 ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (In Flight)

POWER Lever (non-affected engine) ..................................................................................... Adjust As Req’d

Adjust POWER Lever of non-affected engine as required to maintain the desired flight profile.

Affected Engine:

POWER Lever ............................................................................................................................. FLIGHT IDLE

Move POWER Lever of affected engine to FLIGHT IDLE position.

Condition Lever ................................................................................................................................FUEL OFF

Move Condition Lever of affected engine to FUEL OFF position.

If propeller does not feather:

ALT FTHR ................................................................................................................................................. FTHR

Press the # 1 or # 2 ALT FTHR switchlight.
Make sure the green FTHR light illuminates.

PULL FUEL / HYD OFF Handle .................................................................................................................. Pull

Check respective FUEL VALVES CLOSED and HYD VALVES CLOSED,
EXTG FWD BTL and EXTG AFT BTL arm advisory lights illuminate.

TANK AUX PUMP ....................................................................................................................................... OFF

Make sure the respective green TANK AUX PUMP ON light is out.

If fire:

EXTG Switch .................................................................................................................................... FWD BTL

Set EXTG switch of affected engine to FWD BTL. Check EXTG FWD BTL arm advisory light out.

NOTE: If the fire is extinguished, ENGINE FIRE and PULL FUEL / HYD OFF handle lights will go out
and fire warning tone is silenced.
The engine fire warning tone can be silenced by pressing the ENGINE FIRE light.

Wait up to 30 s, if fire persists:

EXTG Switch ....................................................................................................................................... Aft BTL

Set EXTG switch of affected engine to AFT BTL. Check EXTG AFT BTL arm advisory light out.

AUTOFEATHER SELECT ............................................................................................................................. Off

Press the AUTOFEATHER SELECT switchlight.
Check A/F SELECT and ARM off, on ED and SELECT advisory light out.

CAUTION: Propeller may unfeather if AUTOFEATHER switch is selected off before condition lever
is selected to FUEL OFF.

NOTE: [with MS 4-126150 or MS 4-126172 or MS 4-121109 or MS 4-121281 Not Incorporated]:

With an engine shut down and propeller de-ice selected, the PROP DEICE caution light will
illuminate.
Confirm functioning of the propeller de-ice system of the operating engine by observing
PROPS advisory light (operating engine) illuminates and goes out repeatedly.

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-21
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (In Flight) (cont’d)

POWER Levers ................................................................................................................... Operate Together

Operate together as required to maintain the desired flight profile.

NOTES: 1. If the POWER lever of the non-affected engine was selected forward of the RATING detent,
it must be retarded to the RATING detent or below when the 2 POWER levers are operated
together.
2. If the start SELECT light illuminates, see Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.3

IGNITION (affected engine) ......................................................................................................................... OFF

Set IGNITION 1 or IGNITION 2 switch of failed engine to OFF.

BLEED Air (operating engine) ............................................................................................................ As Req’d

• Set BLEED CONTROL Switch of operating engine to BLEED 1 or 2.

• Turn BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL as required.

BLEED Air (affected engine) ....................................................................................................................... OFF

Set BLEED CONTROL Switch of affected engine to the OFF position.

STBY HYD PRESS Switch ...................................................................................................................... Press

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON advisory light illuminates and

STBY HYD PRESS (2800 - 3000 psi) indication on # 2 MFD.

TANK AUX PUMP (operating engine) ........................................................................................................... ON

Push the TANK 1 or TANK 2 AUX PUMP Switchlight and

make sure the respective green ON advisory light illuminates.

• Transfer fuel as required to maintain fuel balance.

If # 2 Engine Inoperative:

STBY HYD PRESS and PTU CNTRL Switches .......................................................................................... ON

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON, PTU CNTRL ON and PTU pressure

[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated]:

advisory lights illuminate and STBY HYD PRESS (2800 - 3000 psi) indication on # 2 MFD.

If # 1 engine inoperative:

STBY HYD PRESS Switch .......................................................................................................................... ON

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON advisory light illuminates and
STBY HYD PRESS (2800 - 3000 psi) indication on # 2 MFD.

Landing Considerations:
- With # 1 engine inoperative Do Not select PTU CNTRL to ON

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.40 1.75
Flap 35° .................................. 1.50 1.80
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-22 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.2.29 ENGINE FAILURE ON APPROACH GO-AROUND

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................ MAX / 1020

POWER Levers ........................................................................................................................ RATING Detent

Advance POWER levers to RATING detent to achieve maximum take-off power.

If landing flap selected:

FLAPS Lever ................................................................................................................................ 5°, 10° or 15°
Check FLAP indication on # 2 MFD.

Minimum Airspeed .............................................................................. Go-Around Speed Flap 5°, 10° or 15°

If REF SPEED INCR ON:

Minimum Airspeed ................................................................. Go-Around Speed Flap 5°, 10° or 15° + 20 kt

Positive rate of climb:

LANDING GEAR Lever .................................................................................................................................. UP
Check all gear, door and LANDING GEAR advisory lights out.

Affected engine:

POWER Lever ............................................................................................................................. FLIGHT IDLE

Condition Lever ............................................................................................................................... FUEL OFF

If propeller does not feather:

ALT FTHR ................................................................................................................................................. FTHR
Press the # 1 or # 2 ALT FTHR switch.
Make sure the green FTHR light illuminates.

When clear of obstacles, but not below 400 ft AGL:

Airspeed ........................................................................................ Accelerate to final Take-off Climb Speed

FLAPS Lever .................................................................................................................................................. 0°

At Flap Retraction Initiation Speed for Flap 5°, 10° or 15° ................. Check FLAP indication on # 2 MFD
Confirm maximum continuous power and continue climb.

- Complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-23
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.3 AUTOFLIGHT - FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS and NAVIGATION

3.1.3.1 MISTRIM (TRIM NOSE UP or TRIM NOSE DN or TRIM L WING DN or TRIM R WING DN)
(Message on PFD)
(Autopilot Pitch or Roll Mistrim)

Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage

CAUTION: Prior to disengaging the autopilot, firmly hold the control wheel and be prepared for a
control force in pitch or roll as appropriate.

Trim ..................................................................................................................................................... As Req’d

NOTE: Observe the Slip / Skid indication on the PFD.

If required, adjust the rudder trim to center the Slip / Skid indication prior to applying aileron trim

Autopilot ............................................................................................................................................ As Req’d

[END]

3.1.3.2 AP PITCH TRIM FAIL

(Message on PFD)
(Autopilot Pitch Trim Failure)

CAUTION: Prior to disengaging the autopilot, firmly hold the control wheel and be prepared for a
control force in pitch.

Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage

Pitch Trim ...................................................................................................................... Adjust (As Necessary)
Autopilot ................................................................................................................................. Do Not Engage

NOTE: The auto pitch trim function will also be inoperative when either the AFCS FAIL or AP PITCH
TRIM FAIL message is displayed.
[END]

3.1.3.3 AUTO TRIM FAIL

(Message on PFD)
(Auto Pitch Trim Failure)

Autopilot ................................................................................................................................. Do Not Engage

NOTE: When selecting Flap 15° to Flap 35° or Flap 35° to Flap 15°, there will be an increase in the
pitch trim adjustment.
The auto pitch trim function will also be inoperative when either the AFCS FAIL or AP PITCH
TRIM FAIL message is displayed.
[END]

3.1.3.4 AP DISENGAGED or AP / YD DISENGAGED

(Flashing PFD Message and Red AP DISENG Light)
(Autopilot has automatically disengaged)

A/P DIS Switch ............................................................................................................. Press to Cancel Alerts

Pitch, Aileron and Rudder Trim ................................................................................... Adjust (As Necessary)
Autopilot or Yaw Damper ........................................................................................................ Do Not Engage

If associated AFCS failure message goes out:

Autopilot ............................................................................................................................. Engage (As Req’d)
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-24 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.3.5 YD DISENGAGED
(Flashing PFD Message)
(Yaw Damper has automatically disengaged)

A/P DIS Switch ............................................................................................................ Press to Cancel Alerts

Rudder Trim .................................................................................................................. Adjust (As Necessary)
Autopilot or Yaw Damper ........................................................................................................ Do Not Engage

If associated AFCS failure message goes out:

Yaw Damper ....................................................................................................................... Engage (As Req’d)
[END]

3.1.3.6 AFCS CONTROLLER INOP

(Message on PFD)
(A failed FGCP or stuck button has been detected)

If Autopilot remains engaged:

NOTE: It may not be possible to disengage the autopilot or yaw damper using the FGCP AP or YD
buttons.

- Use the control wheel AP DIS button or GA button to disengage the autopilot when required.

If Flight Director modes remain active:

NOTE: It may not be possible to select or de-select certain flight director modes.
The Pitch Wheel may be inoperative.

- Use alternate Flight Director modes or fly aircraft by reference to raw data to accomplish remainder of flight.

If a Nav Source, Course or HDG knob is inoperative:

HSI SEL ...................................................................................................... Unaffected Side L or R (As Req’d)

- Use PFD source data from the selected side to accomplish the remainder of the flight.
[END]

3.1.3.7 AFCS FAIL

(Message on PFD)
(Both Flight Guidance Modules have failed)

Lost Services:
Autopilot and Yaw Damper
Flight Director
Flap Automatic Pitch Trim

Autopilot or Yaw Damper ........................................................................................................ Do Not Engage

NOTE: Note: When selecting Flap 15 to Flap 35 or Flap 35 to Flap 15, there will be an increase in the
pitch trim requirement.

If message goes out:

Autopilot or Yaw Damper .................................................................................................. Engage (As Req’d)
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-25
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.3.8 L FD FAIL or R FD FAIL

(Message on PFD)
(Left or Right Flight Guidance Module has failed)

Lost Services:
Autopilot and Yaw Damper
Dual FD Approach Mode
Flap Automatic Pitch Trim

Autopilot or Yaw Damper ........................................................................................................ Do Not Engage

NOTE: When selecting Flap 15 to Flap 35 or Flap 35 to Flap 15, there will be an increase in the pitch
trim requirement.

If message disappears:
Autopilot or Yaw Damper .............................................................................................. Engage (As Required)
[END]

3.1.3.9 YD NOT CENTERED

(Message on PFD)
(Yaw Damper has disengaged in a non-centered position)

Autopilot or Yaw Damper ........................................................................................................ Do Not Engage

If associated AFCS failure message goes out:

Wait 15 s:
Yaw Damper .......................................................................................................................................... Engage

If YD NOT CENTERED message remains:

Rudder Trim .................................................................................................................. Adjust (As Necessary)
Yaw Damper .......................................................................................................................................... Engage

If YD NOT CENTERED message remains:

Autopilot or Yaw Damper ........................................................................................................ Do Not Engage
[END]

3.1.3.10 HDG FAIL

(Message on affected PFD)
(Source of heading data to PFD has failed)

EFIS ATT / HDG SOURCE ............................................................................................ 1 or 2 (As Appropriate)

- Fly the aircraft by reference to the remaining source of heading data.

Lost Services:
Autopilot and Yaw Damper

NOTE: If a malfunction of the flux valve is the cause of the heading failure, the SLAVE advisory light,
on the AHRS controller, will also illuminate.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-26 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.3.11 ATT FAIL

(Message on PFD)
(Source of pitch and roll data to PFD has failed)

EFIS ATT / HDG SOURCE ............................................................................................ 1 or 2 (As Appropriate)

- Fly the aircraft by reference to the remaining source of attitude data.

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................. 200 KIAS (MAX)

Lost Services:
Autopilot and Yaw Damper

NOTE: ELEVATOR FEEL Caution Light will illuminate.

Elevator forces may be higher or lower than usual.
[END]

3.1.3.12 PITCH MISMATCH or ROLL MISMATCH

(Messages on PFD)
(AHRS 1 and 2 attitudes do not match)

- Determine valid attitude source by comparing pitch and roll displayed on PFD 1 and 2 against the standby
instrument.

EFIS ATT / HDG SOURCE ............................................................................................ 1 or 2 (As Appropriate)

- Fly aircraft by reference to the selected attitude source.

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................. 200 KIAS (MAX)

Lost Services:
Autopilot and Yaw Damper

NOTE: ELEVATOR FEEL Caution Light will illuminate.

Elevator forces may be higher or lower than usual.
END]

3.1.3.13 IAS FAIL and / or ALT FAIL

(Message on PFD)
(Selected air data source has failed)

EFIS ADC SOURCE ...................................................................................................... 1 or 2 (As Appropriate)

- Fly aircraft by reference to the selected air data source.

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................. 200 KIAS (MAX)

Lost Services:
Autopilot and Yaw Damper

NOTE: ELEVATOR FEEL, PITCH TRIM, SPLR OUTBD and RUD CTRL Caution Lights will illuminate.
Elevator forces, roll rate and rudder sensitivity may be higher or lower than usual.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-27
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.3.14 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY FAILURE

Affected Side:
MFD ............................................................................................................................................................. PFD
Select PFD using either the MFD 1 or MFD 2 switch on the ESID control panel.
PFD .............................................................................................................................................................. OFF
Turn the PFD BRT knob on the affected EFIS control panel counter-clockwise to the OFF position.
[END]

3.1.3.15 MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY FAILURE

Affected Side:
MFD ............................................................................................................................................................. OFF
Turn the MFD BRT knob on the affected EFIS control panel counter-clockwise to the OFF position.
MFD (operating MFD) ............................................................................................................ Select (As Req'd)
Select operating MFD to display desired information using either
the MFD 1 or MFD 2 switch on the ESID control panel.
[END]

3.1.3.16 ENGINE DISPLAY FAILURE

(No Data Displayed on ED Screen)

NOTE: ED display will automatically transfer to MFD 1 in flight.

MFD 1 or 2 (As Req'd) ................................................................................................................................ ENG
Select either MFD to display engine information (ENG) using
the MFD 1 or MFD 2 switch on the ESID control panel.
ED BRT ........................................................................................................................................................ OFF
Turn the ED BRT knob on the ESID control panel counter-clockwise to the OFF position.
[END]

3.1.3.17 CHECK ED
(Message on ED)
(Critical Data on the ED May Be Displayed Incorrectly)

MFD 1 or 2 (As Appropriate) ....................................................................................................................... ENG

• Monitor MFD display data for incorrectly displayed engine information.
[END]

3.1.3.18 CHECK PFD 1 or CHECK PFD 2

(Message on PFD)
(Critical Data on the ED May Be Displayed Incorrectly)

- Fly the aircraft by reference to the operative PFD.

MFD (affected side) ...................................................................................................................................... PFD
Select affected MFD to display PFD information
by turning either the MFD 1 or MFD 2 control switch on the ESID control panel to the PFD position.

NOTE: Monitor PFD data for incorrect information and report to maintenance.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-28 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.3.19 HOT DISPLAYS or FANS FAIL

(Message on ED)
(Two or More EIS Display Units Are Overheating)

- Land at nearest suitable airport.

If a PFD or ED should subsequently fail:

MFD 1 or 2 (As Appropriate) .......................................................................................................... PFD or ENG
[END]

3.1.3.20 ENGINE DISPLAY ADVISORIES

NOTE: Maintenance action is required prior to next flight if any of the following advisory messages
appear on the ED.

If AVIONICS Caution Light illuminated:

IFC Messages:
IOP 1 FAIL or IOP 2 FAIL or IOPS FAIL
IOM 1 FAIL or IOM 2 FAIL or IOMS FAIL
WTG 1 FAIL or WTG 2 FAIL or WTGS FAIL
WOW / IOP 1 FAIL or WOW / IOP 2 FAIL or WOW / IOPS FAIL
IOP BAD CONF
Display Messages:
DU BAD CONF
FANS FAIL
HOT DISPLAYS
ED MON FAIL
PFD 1 MON FAIL or PFD 2 MON FAIL or PFDS MON FAIL
HOT PFD 1 or HOT PFD 2
HOT MFD 1 or HOT MFD 2
HOT ED

NOTE: Avionics Caution Light illuminates on the ground only.

If AVIONICS Caution Light not illuminated:

IFC Messages:
GPWS I/F FAIL
RA1 FAIL or RA2 FAIL or RAS FAIL
Powerplant Messages:
POWERPLANT
FADEC 1 / DU or FADEC 2 / DU or FADECS / DU
Display Messages:
PFD 1 LINK FAIL or PFD 2 LINK FAIL
MFD 1 LINK FAIL or MFD 2 LINK FAIL
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-29
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.3.21 AIR DATA SYSTEM FAILURE

(Loss of both AIRSPEED and both ALTITUDE INDICATIONS on PILOT'S and CO-PILOT'S PFD)
(Simultaneous Failure of Air Data Systems 1 and 2)
ELEVATOR FEEL and PITCH TRIM and SPLR OUTBD and RUD CTRL
(Caution Lights)

- Use Standby Airspeed Indicator and Standby Altimeter to control airplane.

Maximum Airspeeds:
Flap 0° ................................................................................................................................................... 1.8 VSR
Flap 5°, 10° or 15° ................................................................................................................................. 1.6 VSR

Landing Considerations:
- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 15°.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 15° .................................. VREF + 5 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 15° .................................. 1.45 1.80
[END]

3.1.3.22 LOSS OF PILOT, CO-PILOT and STANDBY AIRSPEED and ALTITUDE INDICATIONS
(Loss of both Pitot Static probes on the right side due to a suspected Bird Strike)

Pitot Static Isolation Valve ..................................................................................................................... Press

Check ISOL advisory light illuminates and valid airspeed and altitude information is displayed on # 1 PFD.

- Land immediately at nearest suitable airport.

Landing Considerations:
- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 15°.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 15° .................................. VREF + 5 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 15° .................................. 1.45 1.80
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-30 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.3.23 ALT MISMATCH

(Message on PFD)
(Abnormal Altitude Indication)

• Compare PFD 1 and PFD 2 altitude indications with the altitude indications on the Standby Altimeter.

With Integrated Standby Instrument [with MS 4-432835 or MS 4-456883 Not Incorporated]:

Using the following standby altimeter correction table, compare the altimeter readings of PFD 1 and PFD 2.
STANDBY ALTITUDE CORRECTION - [with MS 4-432835 or MS 4-456883 Not Incorporated]:
ALT FLAP 0° 5°, 10°, 15° and 35°
(ft) IAS (kt) 150 or lower VMO VAPP or VREF VFE
SL Subtract (ft) 0 0 0 100
15000 Subtract (ft) 0 300 0 100
20000 and above Subtract (ft) 0 400 - -
NOTE: Altimeter correction varies linearly between minimum and maximum airspeeds shown.

EFIS ADC SOURCE ............................................................................................................... 1 or 2 (As Req’d)

Select the EFIS ADC SOURCE switch to 1 or 2 as required on the ESID control panel.

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................. 200 KIAS (MAX)

[END]

3.1.3.24 IAS MISMATCH

(Message on PFD)
(Abnormal Airspeed Indication)

• Compare PFD 1 and PFD 2 with Standby Airspeed Indicators and determine the valid air data source.

EFIS ADC SOURCE ............................................................................................................... 1 or 2 (As Req’d)

Select the EFIS ADC SOURCE switch to 1 or 2 as required, on the ESID control panel.

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................. 200 KIAS (MAX)

[END]

3.1.3.25 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER

(Caution Light)

Anti-Collision Light ..................................................................................................................... Red or White

If Caution Light remains on:

• Maintenance action required prior to next flight.
[END]

3.1.3.26 GPWS
(Caution Light)
(Loss of EGPWS Terrain Display and Audible Warnings)
• Establish and use alternate means to ensure required clearance from terrain is maintained.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-31
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

3.1.4 FUSELAGE FIRE, SMOKE or FUMES

3.1.4.1 FUSELAGE FIRE, SMOKE or FUMES EMERGENCIES

NOTE: In the event of fire, smoke or fumes, prepare to land the aircraft without delay while completing
fire suppression and / or smoke or fumes evacuation procedures.

If it cannot be visually verified that the fire has been completely extinguished, whether the
smoke or fumes have cleared or not, land immediately at the nearest suitable airfield or land-
ing site.

3.1.4.1.1 General Procedures

Oxygen Masks .................................................................................................................................. On / 100%

• Remove headset.
• Remove quick donning oxygen mask from the quick release holder and put it over nose and mouth.
• Set oxygen to 100%.
• Breathe normally to start oxygen flow.

Smoke Goggles (if applicable) ...................................................................................................................... On

• Remove Smoke Goggles from side console storage and put on over mask.
• Put headset back on.

MIC Switch .............................................................................................................................................. MASK

Set BOOM / MASK switch to MASK on the ARCDU AUDIO panel and check communications.

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] .................................................................................... OFF

Set the RECIRC FAN switch on the AIR CONDITIONING panel to OFF.

If emergency lights are required:

Emergency Lights ........................................................................................................................................ On
Pull and set EMER LIGHTS switch to the ON position.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-32 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.4.1.2 Known Source of Fire, Smoke or Fumes

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT

NOTE: If an electrical source of fire, smoke or fumes is positively identified, remove power to source if
possible.

• Extinguish fire with portable fire extinguishers.

• If it cannot be visibly verified that the fire has been extinguished following fire suppression, land immediately
at the nearest suitable airport.

Remove portable fire extinguisher from flight compartment bulkhead, hold upright, slide the safety latch down
with thumb, point nozzle at base of fire and squeeze trigger

CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW Selector ............................................................ Fully Clockwise (OPN)

Turn the CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW selector clockwise towards OPN to exhaust smoke forward.

NOTE: Flight compartment airflow will carry the smoke or fumes forward.

If additional assistance to remove smoke or fumes is required:

NOTE: This step will depressurize the aircraft rapidly.

FWD OUTFLOW VALVE Lever ................................................................................................................ Open

Turn the FORWARD OUTFLOW VALVE lever fully clockwise to OPEN.

- Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible.

[END]

CABIN

Emergency Lights ............................................................................................................................... If Req’d

• Evacuate passengers from affected area.

• Extinguish fire with portable fire extinguishers

Remove fire extinguisher from right forward cabin area and use in conjunction with flight compartment and
baggage compartment extinguishers if necessary.

NOTE: If a pilot is required to fight the fire, protective breathing equipment must be donned prior to
exiting the flight compartment.
• If it cannot be visibly verified that the fire has been extinguished following fire suppression, land immediately
at the nearest suitable airport.

If assistance to remove smoke or fumes from the cabin is required:

NOTE: This step will depressurize the aircraft rapidly.

AUTO / MAN / DUMP Switch .................................................................................................................. DUMP

Move the REAR OUTFLOW VALVE CONTROL switch to the DUMP position.

- Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible.

[END]

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-33
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

Known Source of Fire, Smoke or Fumes (cont’d)

BAGGAGE FWD COMPARTMENT

(Illumination of SMOKE Warning Light and BAGGAGE FWD SMOKE and EXTG Advisory Lights)

• Check for illumination of FIRE BOTTLE FWD ARM advisory light.

Illuminated SMOKE / EXTG Switch ........................................................................................................ Press

Check FIRE BOTTLE FWD LOW advisory light illuminates and FIRE BOTTLE FWD ARM advisory light out.

NOTE: The FIRE BOTTLE AFT LOW advisory light may illuminate after FIRE BOTTLE FWD LOW
advisory light illuminates.

- Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.

[END]

BAGGAGE AFT COMPARTMENT

(Illumination of SMOKE Warning Light and BAGGAGE AFT SMOKE and EXTG Advisory Lights):

• Check for illumination of VENT INLT CLOSED and VENT OTLT CLOSED and FIRE BOTTLE AFT ARM
advisory lights.

Illuminated SMOKE / EXTG Switch ........................................................................................................ Press

Check FIRE BOTTLE AFT LOW advisory light illuminates and FIRE BOTTLE AFT ARM advisory light out.

NOTE: The FIRE BOTTLE FWD LOW advisory light may illuminate after FIRE BOTTLE AFT LOW
advisory light illuminates.

- Land immediately at nearest suitable airport.

[END]

[with Options - CR 825 CH 03262 Incorporated]

CARGO COMPARTMENT
(Illumination of SMOKE Warning Light and SMOKE and EXTG Advisory Switchlights):

• Check for illumination of VENT INLT CLOSED, VALVE OTLT CLOSED, FIRE BOTTLE HRD / LRD2 ARM
and FIRE BOTTLE LRD1 ARM advisory lights.

SMOKE / EXTG Switch ............................................................................................................................ Press

• Check FIRE BOTTLE HRD / LRD2 ARM and FIRE BOTTLE LRD1 ARM advisory lights out and illumination
of FIRE BOTTLE HRD LOW advisory light.

After approximately 3 h:

• FIRE BOTTLE LRD2 LOW and FIRE BOTTLE LRD1 LOW advisory lights will illuminate.

NOTE: With the requirement to land immediately at the nearest suitable airport, the FIRE BOTTLE
LRD2 LOW and FIRE BOTTLE LRD1 LOW advisory lights will not normally be observed.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-34 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.4.1.3 Unknown Source of Fire, Smoke or Fumes

NOTE: To prepare for and manage a landing immediately at the nearest suitable airport, the
procedures given in this Sub-Chapter, may be terminated prior to completion.

Bleed Source or Air Conditioning Suspected:

BLEED 1 Switch ............................................................................................................................ OFF

Wait up to 1 min.
If improvement:
Leave BLEED 1 in the OFF position
If necessary to assist in removal of smoke or fumes:
Smoke or Fumes Removal (Sub-Chapter 3.1.4.1.4) ....................................................... Accomplish
[END]

If no improvement:
BLEED 1 ........................................................................................................................................... ON
BLEED 2 ......................................................................................................................................... OFF
Wait up to 1 min.
If improvement:
Leave BLEED 2 in the OFF position
If necessary to assist in removal of smoke or fumes:
Smoke or Fumes Removal (Sub-Chapter 3.1.4.1.4) ....................................................... Accomplish
[END]

If no improvement:
BLEED 2 .......................................................................................................................................... ON
FLT COMP PACK ........................................................................................................................... OFF
Wait up to 1 min.
If improvement:
Leave FLT COMP PACK in the OFF position
If necessary to assist in removal of smoke or fumes:
Smoke or Fumes Removal (Sub-Chapter 3.1.4.1.4) ....................................................... Accomplish
[END]

If no improvement:
FLT COMP PACK .......................................................................................................... AUTO or MAN
CABIN PACK .................................................................................................................................. OFF
Wait up to 1 min.
If improvement:
Leave CABIN PACK in the OFF position
If necessary to assist in removal of smoke or fumes:
Smoke or Fumes Removal (Sub-Chapter 3.1.4.1.4) ....................................................... Accomplish
[END]

If no improvement:
CABIN PACK ................................................................................................................. AUTO or MAN

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-35
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

Source of Fire, Smoke or Fumes Cannot Be Identified:

DC GEN 1 and 2 .......................................................................................................................................... OFF

Set DC CONTROL GEN 1 and 2 switches to OFF.
Confirm the # 1 DC GEN and # 2 DC GEN caution lights turn on.

AC GEN 1 and 2 .......................................................................................................................................... OFF

Set AC CONTROL GEN 1 and 2 switches to OFF.
Confirm the # 1 AC GEN and # 2 AC GEN caution lights turn on.

STORM / DOME Lights ......................................................................................................... STORM (If Req'd)

MAIN, AUX & STBY Batteries .................................................................................................................... OFF

Set MAIN, AUX and STBY BATT switches to OFF.
Confirm the MAIN BATTERY, AUX BATTERY and STBY BATTERY caution lights turn on.

Emergency Lights ................................................................................................................. OFF (Until Req’d)

• Pull and set FLIGHT COMPARTMENT EMERGENCY LIGHTS switch to OFF.
• If the EMERGENCY LIGHTS are necessary, pull and set FLIGHT COMPARTMENT EMERGENCY LIGHTS
switch to the ON position.

- Land immediately at nearest suitable airport.

CAUTION: Battery duration for operation of Essential Services is 60 min.

NOTE: Engine bleed air flow to ECS packs is lost. The aircraft will depressurize.

If necessary to remove smoke or fumes from the flight compartment:

NOTE: This procedure will depressurize the aircraft rapidly.

AUTO / MAN / DUMP ................................................................................................................................. MAN

Move the REAR OUTFLOW VALVE CONTROL switch to the MAN position.

MAN DIFF ........................................................................................................................................ INCR (50 s)

Hold the MAN DIFF switch to the INCR position for 50 s.

Cabin ALT FWD OUTFLOW ........................................................................................ Fully Clockwise (OPN)

Turn CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW rotary switch fully clockwise to OPN.

FWD OUTFLOW VALVE ........................................................................................................................... Open

Turn FWD OUTFLOW VALVE lever clockwise to OPEN.

NOTE: Ram ventilation is most effective above 150 KIAS.

- Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible.

- See Sub-Chapter 3.1.6.3.8, BATTERY ESSENTIAL SERVICES, for powered services.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-36 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.4.1.4 Smoke or Fumes Removal

(Unknown Source)

- If it cannot be visibly verified that the fire has been extinguished following fire suppression, land immediately
at nearest suitable airport.

NOTE: Carry out this procedure only when directed by the Unknown Source of Fire, Smoke or Fumes
checklist (Sub-Chapter 3.1.4.1.3).

RECIRC Fan [with MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated] ................................................................................... OFF

Set RECIRC Fan switch to OFF.

BLEED (unaffected) ........................................................................................................................... ON / MAX

Set unaffected BLEED control switch to 1 or 2.
Turn BLEED airflow control rotary switch fully clockwise to MAX.

NOTE: Leave affected BLEED or affected PACK switches in the OFF position.

If necessary to remove smoke or fumes from the flight compartment:

CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW ........................................................................... Fully Clockwise (OPN)

Turn the CABIN ALTITUDE FWD OUTFLOW selector clockwise towards OPN to exhaust smoke forward.

If additional assistance to remove smoke or fumes is required:

NOTE: This step will depressurize the aircraft rapidly.

FWD OUTFLOW VALVE Lever ................................................................................................................ Open

Turn the FORWARD OUTFLOW VALVE lever fully clockwise to OPEN.

- Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible.

[END]

3.1.5 EMERGENCY LANDING / DITCHING, FORCED LANDING, EMERGENCY EVACUATION

3.1.5.1 EMERGENCY LANDING (Both Engines Operating)

• Instruct cabin crew members to brief and prepare passengers for the emergency.
• Make sure all items on flight compartment and in cabin are put in a safe place.
• Complete all radio communications with the ground relative to the intended landing.
• Review the procedures to be done by the crew.
• Think about possible practice approach and overshoot.
• If possible, make sure no passengers are seated in the plane of the propellers.

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-37
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

EMERGENCY LANDING (Both Engines Operating) (cont’d)

EGPWS CB (Left Upper CB Panel – A1) ..................................................................................................... Pull

Emergency Lights ....................................................................................................................................... ON

Pull and set FLIGHT COMPARTMENT EMERGENCY LIGHTS switch to the ON position.
Make sure the PORTABLE EMERGENCY LIGHT on the flight compartment ceiling turns on (optional).

AUTO / MAN / DUMP .............................................................................................................................. DUMP

ELT ................................................................................................................................................................ ON
Activate the Emergency Locator Transmitter manually.

Shoulder Harness .................................................................................................................................... Lock

Move INERTIA REEL LOCK lever, on inboard side of seat, to the lock position.

LANDING GEAR EXTENDED:

• Proceed with normal approach.

Landing Considerations:

When airplane comes to a stop:

EMERG Brake .............................................................................................................................................. ON
Set EMERGENCY / PARKING BRAKE lever to PARK when airplane comes to a complete stop.

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF

Move Condition Levers to FUEL OFF.

PULL FUEL / HYD OFF Handles ................................................................................................................ Pull

• Pull the red PULL FUEL / HYD OFF handle of the affected engine.
• Make sure both related AFT and FWD yellow EXTINGUISHER ARM lights turn on.
• Make sure the FUEL VALVE CLOSED white light turns on.
• Make sure the FUEL VALVE OPEN green light goes off.
• Make sure the HYD VALVE CLOSED white light turns on.
• Make sure the HYD VALVE OPEN green light goes off.

BATTERY MASTER .................................................................................................................................... OFF

Pull out the BATTERY MASTER switch and set to OFF.

• Evacuate airplane
After propellers have stopped, the captain will start the evacuation by using the PA to shout the command
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE” (LEFT or RIGHT SIDE, if one side is blocked.)
The first officer will leave the flight compartment and help with the evacuation.

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-38 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

EMERGENCY LANDING (Both Engines Operating) (cont’d)

LANDING GEAR RETRACTED:

Landing Considerations:
- Plan on Flap 35° landing.
- Maintain VREF until immediately prior to flare.
- Do Not exceed 6° nose-up during flare.
- Touch down with minimum speed and minimum rate of descent without stalling.

After ground contact:

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF
Move Condition Levers to FUEL OFF.
PULL FUEL / HYD OFF Handles ................................................................................................................ Pull
Pull # 1 and # 2 PULL FUEL / HYD OFF handles.
BATTERY MASTER .................................................................................................................................... OFF
Pull out the BATTERY MASTER switch and set to OFF.
When airplane comes to a stop:
• Evacuate airplane
After propellers have stopped, the captain will start the evacuation by using the PA to shout the command
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE” (LEFT or RIGHT SIDE, if one side is blocked.)
The first officer will leave the flight compartment and help with the evacuation.

DITCHING:
• Broadcast emergency and distress signals.
• Instruct cabin crew members to review ditching procedures with passengers.
• Deploy ditching dam at airstair door and configure forward right hand exit for ditching.
• Make sure all cargo and baggage is prevented from moving.
• Put on crew life jackets.
• Move INERTIA REEL LOCK lever to lock position.
• Set FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING sign switches to FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING.
• Set AUTO / MAN / DUMP switch to DUMP.
• Set EMER LIGHTS switch to the ON position.
Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX
BLEED 1 and 2 ........................................................................................................................................... OFF
Flaps ............................................................................................................................................................. 35°
- Use VREF airspeed for flap 35°.

Landing Considerations:
- Do Not select landing gear down.
- In rolling swell surface conditions attempt to ditch along and parallel to the crests as much into wind as swell
line permits. In other water surface conditions land into wind.
- Maintain VREF until immediately prior to flare.
Commence flare to achieve zero vertical velocity immediately prior to water contact.
- Give order to “BRACE” on PA system.
- Prior to touchdown maintain a pitch attitude of 10° nose up.
- Touch down with minimum speed and rate of descent without stalling.
NOTE: A transient nose-up pitching motion may result following touchdown.
Over-correction of this tendency could result in porpoising or nosing in.
(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-39
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

EMERGENCY LANDING (Both Engines Operating) (cont’d)

After water contact:

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF
Move Condition Levers to FUEL OFF.
If any engine is not shut down by use of condition lever:
Appropriate PULL FUEL / HYD OFF Handle ............................................................................................ Pull
Pull # 1 and / or # 2 FUEL / HYD OFF handles.
BATTERY MASTER .................................................................................................................................... OFF
Pull out the BATTERY MASTER switch and set to OFF.

When airplane comes to a stop:

• Evacuate airplane
After the airplane comes to a stop and propellers have stopped turning, the captain starts the evacuation by
using the PA to shout the command “EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE” (LEFT or RIGHT SIDE).
The first officer leaves the flight compartment and helps with the evacuation.

NOTE: After the completion of the ditching run, the airplane will float with one wing in the water.
The upper portion of the right forward emergency exit and / or the airstair door shall be used
for evacuation.
The airstair door ditching dam must be in place prior to opening the door.

WARNING: Do Not open the Aft Doors or the lower portion of the right Forward Emergency Exit.

3.1.5.2 FORCED LANDING (Both Engines Inoperative)

HYD # 3 ISOL VLV .................................................................................................................................... Open

Check the HYD # 3 ISOL VLV OPEN advisory light illuminates and # 3 hydraulic pressure on # 1 MFD.
After all attempts to achieve a successful airstart have failed, proceed as follows:
Airspeed .............................................................................................................................................. 1.23 VSR

NOTES: 1. With FLAP 0°, landing gear retracted, propellers feathered and zero wind conditions,
2.5 NM can be traveled for every 1000 ft of altitude loss.
This distance will increase in a tailwind and decrease in a headwind.
2. All hydraulic (except for elevator control), pneumatic and non-essential electrical services
will be inoperative.

MAIN, AUX & STBY Batteries .................................................................................................................... OFF

Set MAIN, AUXILIARY and STANDBY BATTERY switches to OFF.
Make sure the MAIN, AUX and STBY BATTERY caution lights turn on.

NOTE: The following services will be inoperative:

HYDRAULIC PNEUMATIC ELECTRIC

Flap Airframe deicing All variable frequency AC services
Roll Spoilers Pressurization All non-essential DC services
(see Sub-Chapter 3.1.6.3.8
Rudder
for powered services)
Anti-skid braking
Normal landing gear operation
Nosewheel steering

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-40 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

FORCED LANDING (Both Engines Inoperative) (cont’d)

Passenger Signs .......................................................................................................................................... ON

• Set FASTEN BELTS SIGN switch to FASTEN BELTS.
• Set NO SMOKING SIGN switch to NO SMOKING.
Emergency Lights ....................................................................................................................................... ON
Pull and set EMER LIGHTS switch to ON position.
Make sure the PORTABLE EMERGENCY LIGHT on the flight compartment ceiling turns on (optional).
ELT ................................................................................................................................................................ ON
Push the ELT switchlight to the ON position and make sure the red indicator light in the rocker switch turns on.
Shoulder Harness ..................................................................................................................................... Lock
Move INERTIA REEL LOCK lever to lock.
- Make approach and landing into wind.
Select Appropriate Landing Considerations (see next Paragraphs):
- Landing Gear Extended
- Landing Gear Retracted
- Ditching

LANDING GEAR EXTENDED:

Landing Considerations:
If the available surface is appropriate:
- Extend landing gear using ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.1).
Allow sufficient time for alternate gear extension.
- Extending landing gear will steepen glide angle and decrease glide distance.
- Maintain 1.23 VSR until immediately prior to flare.
- Commence flare to achieve zero vertical velocity immediately prior to ground contact.
- Do Not exceed 6° nose up during flare.
- Touch down with minimum speed and rate of descent without stalling.

After touchdown:
BATTERY MASTER .................................................................................................................................... OFF
Pull out the BATTERY MASTER switch and set to OFF.
EMERG Brake .................................................................................................................. Apply Intermittently
Use the EMERGENCY / PARKING LEVER to stop the airplane.
When airplane comes to a stop:
• Evacuate airplane.
After propellers have stopped, the commander will start the evacuation by using the PA to shout the command
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE” (LEFT or RIGHT SIDE, if one side is blocked).
The first officer will leave the flight compartment and help with the evacuation.

LANDING GEAR RETRACTED:

Landing Considerations:
- Maintain 1.23 VSR until immediately prior to flare.
- Commence flare to achieve zero vertical velocity immediately prior to ground contact.
- Do Not exceed 5° nose-up during flare.
- Touch down with minimum speed and rate of descent without stalling.

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-41
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

FORCED LANDING (Both Engines Inoperative) (cont’d)

When airplane comes to a stop:

BATTERY MASTER .................................................................................................................................... OFF
Pull out the BATTERY MASTER switch and set to OFF.
• Evacuate airplane.
After propellers have stopped, the commander will start the evacuation by using the PA to shout the command
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE” (LEFT or RIGHT SIDE, if one side is blocked.)
The first officer will leave the flight compartment and help with the evacuation.

DITCHING:
Landing Considerations:
- Do Not select landing gear down.
- In rolling swell surface conditions attempt to ditch along and parallel to the crests as much into wind as swell
line permits. In other water surface conditions land into wind.
- Maintain 1.23 VSR until immediately prior to flare.
- Commence flare to achieve zero vertical velocity immediately prior to water contact.
- Maintain pitch attitude of 10° nose-up.
- Touch down with minimum speed and minimum rate of descent without stalling.
- A transient nose-up pitching motion may result following touchdown.
Over-correction of this tendency could result in porpoising or nosing in.

After water contact:

When airplane comes to a stop:

• Evacuate airplane.
After propellers have stopped, the commander will start the evacuation by using the PA to shout the command
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE” (LEFT or RIGHT SIDE, if one side is blocked.)
The first officer will leave the flight compartment and help with the evacuation.

NOTE: After the completion of ditching run, the airplane will float with one wing in the water.
The upper portion of the right forward emergency exit and / or the airstair door shall be used
for evacuation.
The airstair door ditching dam must be in place prior to opening the door.

WARNING: Do Not open the Aft Doors or the lower portion of the right Forward Emergency Exit.
[END]

3.1.5.3 DITCHING
Preparations:
• Broadcast emergency and distress signals.
• Alert cabin crew to review ditching procedures with passengers.
• Deploy ditching dam at airstair door and configure forward right hand exit for ditching.
NOTE: [with Options - CR 825 CH 03163 and CR 825 CH 03200 Not Incorporated]:
Configuring the forward right-hand emergency exit for ditching may require the aircraft to be
depressurized to reduce the force on the lower exit door handle.
• Check security of cargo and baggage and restrain if necessary.
Check Life Jackets ...................................................................................................................................... ON
Pilot and Co-Pilot Harness .............................................................................................. Secure and Locked
FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING Sign Switches .............................. FASTEN BELTS and NO SMOKING
(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-42 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

DITCHING (cont’d)

Operational Conditions:
The 2 factors which bear most directly upon a successful ditching are airplane ground speed and the water
surface condition.
Under all circumstances the airplane should be brought onto the water surface as gently as possible.
In rolling swell surface conditions, the generally recommended technique is to ditch along and parallel to the
crest of a swell, as much into wind as the swell line permits. In all other conditions land into wind.

Approach:
EGPWS CB (Left Upper CB Panel – A1) ..................................................................................................... Pull
Condition Levers ........................................................................................................................... MAX / 1020
BLEED 1 and BLEED 2 Switches .............................................................................................................. OFF
AUTO / MAN / DUMP Switch .................................................................................................................. DUMP
LANDING GEAR Lever ................................................................................................................................ UP
Check all gear, door and LANDING GEAR lever advisory lights out.
FLAP Lever ................................................................................................................................................... 35°
Check FLAP indication on # 2 MFD.
Airspeed ..................................................................................................................................... VREF Flap 35°
Rate of Descent ..................................................................................................................... 200 to 300 ft/min
EMER LIGHTS Switch ................................................................................................................................. ON
LANDING APPROACH and LANDING FLARE Light Switches........................................................ As Req’d
ELT Switch ................................................................................................................................................... ON
Order to Brace .......................................................................................................................... on PA System
Prior to Touchdown .............................................................................. Achieve Pitch Attitude 10° Nose-Up
• Touch down with minimum speed and rate of descent. Do Not STALL.

NOTE: A transient nose-up pitching motion may result following touchdown.

Over-correction of this tendency could result in porpoising or nosing in.

After Touchdown:
Condition Levers .............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF

If any engine is not shut down by use of condition lever:

Appropriate PULL FUEL / HYD OFF Handle ............................................................................................. Pull
BATTERY MASTER Switch ....................................................................................................................... OFF
PASSENGER EVACUATION .............................................................................. After Airplane Has Stopped

NOTE: After completion of the ditching run, the aircraft will float with one wing in the water.
The upper portion of the right forward emergency exit and / or the airstair door shall be used for
evacuation.
The airstair door ditching dam must be in place prior to opening the door.

WARNING: Do Not open the Aft Doors or the lower portion of the right Forward Emergency Exit.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-43
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

3.1.6.1 BATTERY
3.1.6.1.1 MAIN BATTERY or AUX BATTERY or STBY BATTERY
(Caution Light)

Battery (affected) .......................................................................................................................... OFF then ON

Set MAIN, AUX or STBY BATT switch to OFF and then to MAIN, AUX or STBY BATT position
If caution light remains on:
Battery (affected) ......................................................................................................................................... OFF
Set MAIN, AUX or STBY BATT switch to OFF.
[END]

3.1.6.1.2 MAIN BAT HOT or AUX BAT HOT or STBY BAT HOT
(Warning Light)

Electrical Page of MFD ...................................................................................................... Confirm Overheat

See if the BATTERY TEMPERATURE display on the MFD Electrical Systems page, is showing a red value.
Battery (affected) ......................................................................................................................................... OFF
Set MAIN, AUX or STBY BATT switch to OFF.
Check if MAIN, AUX or STBY BATTERY caution lights turn ON.
Continue to monitor affected battery temperature.
If battery temperature continues to rise:
- Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.
[END]

3.1.6.1.3 EMER LTS DISARMED

(Caution Light)

Emergency Lights ..................................................................................................................................... ARM

Pull and set EMERGENCY LIGHTS switch to ARM.
[END]

3.1.6.2 BUS
3.1.6.2.1 MAIN DC BUS FAULT

Left MAIN DC BUS:

(DC BUS, # 1 DC GEN, STBY BATTERY and AUX BATTERY - Caution Lights)

AUX and STBY BATT Switches ................................................................................................................. OFF

DC GEN 1 .................................................................................................................................................... OFF
Bus Fault Reset ....................................................................................................................................... Reset
Hold the BUS FAULT RESET switch at BUS FAULT RESET and release to OFF.
NOTE: If power to the failed DC bus is restored (DC BUS caution light goes off), leave the selected
switches in the OFF position.
If DC BUS Caution Light remains illuminated:
• Leave selected switches in the OFF position.
NOTE: Automatic cabin pressure control is lost.
The FAULT advisory light on the pressurization control panel will be illuminated.
(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-44 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

MAIN DC BUS FAULT (cont’d)

[with MS 4-113581 or IS 4Q2150011 Not Incorporated]:

NOTE: ECS pack airflow is lost and cabin will depressurize.

Descend ........................................................................................................................... To below 14000 ft
Descend to below 14000 ft as soon as possible.
AUTO / MAN / DUMP Switch ................................................................................................................ MAN
Move the Rear Outflow Valve Control Switch to the MAN position.
MAN DIFF ................................................................................................................................... INCR (30 s)
Hold the MAN DIFF switch to the INCR position for 30 s.
Complete RAM VENTILATION (Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.3).
- Land at the nearest suitable airport.

Right MAIN DC BUS:

(DC BUS, # 2 DC GEN and MAIN BATTERY - Caution Lights)

MAIN BATT Switch .................................................................................................................................... OFF

DC GEN 2 .................................................................................................................................................... OFF
Bus Fault Reset ....................................................................................................................................... Reset
Hold the BUS FAULT RESET switch at BUS FAULT RESET and release to OFF.
NOTE: If power to the failed DC bus is restored, leave the selected switches in the OFF position.

If Bus Fault remains:

• Leave selected switches in the OFF position.

[with MS 4-113581 or IS 4Q2150011 Not Incorporated]:

NOTE: ECS pack airflow is lost and cabin will depressurize.

- Land at the nearest suitable airport.

- Anti-Skid will be inoperative, complete procedure INBD ANTI-SKID and / or OUTBD ANTI-SKID (Caution
Light) (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.7).
[END]

Left MAIN DC BUS or Right MAIN DC BUS Failure:

(No Illumination of DC BUS - Caution Light)
NOTE: A failure of the Left Main DC Bus or Right Main DC Bus will result in the loss of some or all of
the services powered by the affected Main DC Bus.
Illumination of caution lights and presentation of messages associated with the lost systems
will occur.
DC GEN 1 (Left Main DC Bus) or DC GEN 2 (Right Main DC Bus) ......................................................... Check
Confirm a zero ( 0 ) LOAD on ELECTRICAL page of functioning MFD
AUX BATT (Left Main DC Bus) or MAIN BATT (Right Main DC Bus) ..................................................... Check
Confirm a negative ( - ) LOAD on ELECTRICAL page of functioning MFD
DC GEN Switch (affected) .......................................................................................................................... OFF
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-45
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.6.2.2 DC BUS
(Caution Light)

If no other associated lights:

Bus Fault Reset ....................................................................................................................................... Reset
Hold the BUS FAULT RESET switch at BUS FAULT RESET and release to OFF.
[END]

3.1.6.2.3 LOSS OF AC BUS POWER

Lost Services:
AC bus failure results in loss of the following left or right bus services:
L AC BUS R AC BUS
L Aux Fuel Pump R Aux Fuel Pump
L Prop Deicing R Prop Deicing
L Alpha Vane Heater R Alpha Vane Heater
L TRU R TRU
L Ice Detection Sensor R Ice Detection Sensor
Pilot’s Windshield Heat (NORM & WARM UP) Standby Hydraulic Pump
L Engine Intake Heater Co-pilot’s Windshield Heat (NORM)
L Pitot Static Heater Pilot’s Side Window Heat
Stick Pusher System R Engine Intake Heater
R Pitot Static Heater
Stick Pusher System
[END]

3.1.6.2.4 L AC BUS or R AC BUS

(Caution Light)

STICK PUSHER SHUT OFF ............................................................................................................ Press OFF

Airspeed ........................................................................................................................................... VREF (MIN)

- Maintain airspeed appropriate for icing conditions and other failures if applicable.
- Fuel transfer from the tank associated with the affected fuel aux pump is unavailable.
- Affected windshield will not be de-misted or anti-iced.
- Avoid icing conditions.
- Refer to LOSS OF AC BUS POWER (Sub-Chapter 3.1.6.2.3) for a list of lost services.

IF there are abnormal indications of airspeed or altitude on the pilot’s or co-pilot’s PFD:
EFIS ADC Source ................................................................................................................... 1 or 2 (As Req’d)

If icing conditions are encountered:

Condition Levers ....................................................................................................................................... MAX
- Affected propeller and engine intake will not be anti-iced.
- Monitor affected engine performance.
- Exit icing conditions as soon as possible.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-46 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.6.3 LOSS OF GENERATED POWER

3.1.6.3.1 # 1 DC GEN and # 2 DC GEN and either # 1 AC GEN and # 2 AC GEN or L TRU or R TRU
(Caution Lights)
(Loss of Both DC Generators and Both AC Generators or
loss of Both DC Generators and One or Both TRUs)

DC, AC GEN Switch (affected) ............................................................................... OFF then On (Individually)

If caution lights remain on:

DC, AC GEN Switch (affected) ................................................................................................................... OFF

STORM / DOME Lights ......................................................................................................... STORM (If Req'd)

MAIN, AUX & STBY Batteries ................................................................................................................... OFF

Set MAIN, AUX and STBY BATTERY switches to OFF.
Check if MAIN, AUX and STBY BATTERY caution lights turn ON.

Emergency Lights ............................................................................................................................. As Req'd

Pull and set EMER LIGHTS switch to ON position if required.

- Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.

CAUTION: Battery duration for operation of Essential Services is 60 min.

- See Sub-Chapter 3.1.6.3.8 for powered services.

NOTE: ECS pack air flow is lost and cabin will depressurize.

- When below 14000 ft, complete RAM VENTILATION, in Sub-Chapter 3.1.1.3.

- Anti-Skid will be inoperative, complete procedure INBD ANTI-SKID and / or OUTBD ANTI-SKID (Caution
Light) (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.7).
[END]

3.1.6.3.2 # 1 DC GEN or # 2 DC GEN and L TRU and R TRU

(Caution Lights)
(Loss of One DC Generator and Both TRUs)

NOTE: All secondary bus services are inoperative.

- Land at the nearest suitable airport.

[END]

3.1.6.3.3 # 1 DC GEN and # 2 DC GEN and # 1 AC GEN or # 2 AC GEN

(Caution Lights)
(Loss of Both DC Generators and One AC Generator)

DC, AC GEN Switch (affected) ............................................................................... OFF then On (Individually)

If caution lights remain on:

DC, AC GEN Switch (affected) ................................................................................................................... OFF

AC GEN (operative) ..................................................................................................................... Monitor Load

- Land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-47
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.6.3.4 # 1 DC GEN and # 2 DC GEN

(Caution Lights)
(Loss of Both DC Generators)

DC GEN Switch (affected) ..................................................................................... OFF then On (Individually)

If caution lights remain on:

DC GEN Switch (affected) .......................................................................................................................... OFF

L TRU and R TRU ....................................................................................................................... Monitor Load

Monitor the TRU load indications on the MFD - Electrical System page.
[END]

3.1.6.3.5 L TRU or R TRU or L TRU HOT or R TRU HOT

(Caution Light)
(Loss or Overheat of One TRU)

L TRU or R TRU CB (Right Upper CB Panel) (affected) ............................................................................ Pull

[END]

3.1.6.3.6 # 1 DC GEN or # 2 DC GEN or # 1 AC GEN or # 2 AC GEN

(Caution Light)
(Loss of One Generator)

GEN (affected) ............................................................................................................................... OFF then On

Set affected DC or AC GENERATOR switch to OFF, then to GEN 1 or GEN 2.
Check # 1 DC GEN or # 2 DC GEN or # 1 AC GEN or # 2 AC GEN caution light out and
affected DC or AC generator VOLTS and LOAD on ELECTRICAL page of MFD.

If caution light remains on:

GEN (affected) ............................................................................................................................................. OFF
Set affected GENERATOR switch to OFF.
[END]

3.1.6.3.7 # 1 DC GEN HOT or # 2 DC GEN HOT or # 1 AC GEN HOT or # 2 AC GEN HOT

(Caution Light)
(Overheat of One Generator)

GEN Switch (affected) ................................................................................................................................. OFF

Set affected DC CONTROL GEN or AC CONTROL GEN switch to OFF.
Check for illumination of appropriate DC GEN or AC GEN caution light.

NOTE: Continued operation of the associated engine is permissible for the remainder of the flight.
The affected GEN HOT light may remain illuminated for the remainder of the flight.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-48 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.6.3.8 AC GENERATOR FAILURE

(Illumination of # 1 AC GEN or # 2 AC GEN - Caution Light)

AC CONTROL GEN Switch (affected) ......................................................................................... OFF then On

Check # 1 AC GEN or # 2 AC GEN caution light out and affected AC generator VOLTS and
LOAD on ELECTRICAL page of MFD.
If caution light remains on:
AC CONTROL GEN Switch (affected) ....................................................................................................... OFF
[END]

3.1.6.3.8.1 FAILURE of # 1 and # 2 AC GENERATORS with PROPELLER DE-ICING SYSTEM ON

(Illumination of # 1 AC GEN and # 2 AC GEN - Caution Light)

NOTE: The PROP DEICE caution light may also be illuminated.

PROP Selector ........................................................................................................................................... OFF

Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX
Operate propellers at MAX / 1020 NP until clear of icing conditions.
AC GEN 1 and 2 Switches ...................................................................................... OFF then On (Individually)
If caution light remains on:
AC GEN Switch (affected) .......................................................................................................................... OFF
- Exit icing conditions as soon as possible.
[END]

3.1.6.3.9 BATTERY ESSENTIAL SERVICES

CAUTION: Battery duration for operation of Essential Services is 60 min.

The following services are powered with the BATTERY MASTER switch at BATTERY MASTER, STBY BATT,
AUX BATT and MAIN BATT switches OFF:
• ADC 1 • Passenger Signs
• Standby Pitot Heat • Position Lights
• Engine Fire Detection and Extinguishing • Baggage Lights
• Smoke Detectors • Storm Lights
• Aileron Trim Actuation and Indication • Flight compartment Dome Lights
• Rudder Trim Actuation and Indication • Landing Gear Control and Indication
• Elevator Trim Actuation and Indication • Engine Ignition and Start
• Flap Control and Indication • # 1 and # 2 engine oil pressure
• PFCS Indication • # 1 engine fuel temperature
• AHRS 1 and 2 • # 1 and # 2 FADECs
• VHF COMM 1 • # 1 and # 2 PECs
• VHF NAV 1 • Fuel and Hydraulic Shut-Off Valves
• Pilot and Co-Pilot Audio • # 1 and # 3 Hydraulic Quantity Indications
• PA and Cabin Interphone Audio • # 1, # 2 and # 3 Hydraulic Pressure Indications
• Clock 1 • # 3 Hydraulic System
• Standby Attitude Indicator or Integrated • # 1 MFD
Standby Instrument (if installed) • ED
• Circuit Breaker Panel Lights • ICP 1
• Emergency Lights
NOTE: The following Advisory Lights are inoperative:
RUD 1 PUSH OFF, RUD 2 PUSH OFF, PULL UP GPWS TEST, BELOW G/S, GPWS FLAP
OVERRIDE, TANK 1 AUX PUMP, TANK 2 AUX PUMP and Boot Inflation.
When operating on battery essential services only, # 1 PFD information must be selected on
the # 1 MFD.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-49
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.7 FLIGHT CONTROLS

3.1.7.1 ROLL

3.1.7.1.1 ROLL CONTROL JAM

Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage

ROLL DISC Handle ............................................................................................................... Pull and Turn 90°

Pull out the ROLL DISC disconnect T-handle and turn it 90°.

Control Wheels ........................................................................................... Both Pilots Attempt Roll Control

- Pilot with free control wheel will fly the aircraft.

CAUTION: With the ROLL DISC handle pulled, the AP must not be engaged.

If Right Control Wheel free:

- Roll control will be degraded and forces will be normal.

If continuous illumination of SPLR 1 and SPLR 2 PUSH OFF switchlights:

Illuminated Switchlights ......................................................................................................... Push Both OFF
Check ROLL SPLR INBD HYD and ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD Caution Lights illuminate and
PFCS indicator shows all spoilers retracted.

NOTE: The SPLR OUTBD caution light will illuminate below 150 kt IAS, the ROLL SPLR INBD GND
and ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND caution lights will illuminate on landing.

Landing Considerations:
- Land at airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 10° or 15°.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... VREF VREF + 20

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.40 1.75

If Left Control Wheel free:

- Roll control forces will be low and tendency to over-control should be avoided.

With flap 5°, 10° or 15° selected, if roll control is inadequate:

Airspeed .......................................................................................................................................... 165 kt MAX

Landing Considerations:
- Land at airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 15° or 35°.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-50 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.7.1.2 AILERON TRIM RUNAWAY

Airspeed ............................................................................................................................................... Reduce

Aileron Trim ................................................................................................................... Opposite to Runaway

Push AILERON TRIM switch in direction opposite to runaway.

When trim is at neutral position or if trim actuator cannot be reversed:

Ail Trim Act CB (Left Lower CB Panel - G8) ............................................................................................... Pull
[END]

3.1.7.1.3 ROLL CONTROL MALFUNCTION

(Airplane Rolls with No Control Wheel Input)

• Apply Roll Control to hold wings level.

If continuos illumination of SPLR 1 or SPLR 2 PUSH OFF switchlights in wings-level flight:

Illuminated Switchlight ................................................................................................................... Push OFF
Check ROLL SPLR INBD HYD or ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD caution and OFF advisory lights illuminate,
PUSH advisory light out and PFCS indicator on the MFD shows all spoilers retracted.

NOTE: The SPLR OUTBD caution light will illuminate below 150 kt IAS, the ROLL SPLR INBD GND
or ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND caution light will illuminate on landing.

Landing Considerations:
- Land at airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 10°, 15° or 35°.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... VREF VREF + 20
Flap 35° ................................... VREF VREF + 15

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... 1.35 1.69
Flap 35° ................................... 1.35 1.62

If SPLR 1 or SPLR 2 PUSH OFF switchlights do not illuminate continuously in wings-level flight:
Power ....................................................................................................................................................... Apply
Move POWER Levers forward as required
to compensate for increased drag due to a permanently deflected spoiler.

Airspeed .............................................................................................................................................. Increase

Increase airspeed as required to compensate for degraded roll control due to a permanently deflected spoiler.

Landing Considerations:
- Land at airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 10°, 15° or 35°.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... 1.3 VSR 1.3 VSR + 20
Flap 35° ................................... 1.3 VSR 1.3 VSR + 15

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... 1.50 1.89
Flap 35° ................................... 1.50 1.80
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-51
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.7.1.4 ROLL SPLR INBD HYD or ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD

(Caution Light)

NOTE: [with MS 4-110066 or MS 4-126385 Not Incorporated]:

illumination of the ROLL SPLR INBD HYD caution light, at an airspeed of 165 kt IAS or
greater, may be indicative of a spoiler cable failure
(see Sub-Chapter 3.1.7.1.5 next).

Landing Considerations:

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... VREF + 10 VREF + 20
Flap 35° .................................. VREF + 10 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.50 1.69
Flap 35° .................................. 1.50 1.80
[END]

3.1.7.1.5 SPOILER CABLE FAILURE - ROLL SPLR INBD HYD and ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD
(Caution Light)

NOTE: [with MS 4-110066 or MS 4-126385 Not Incorporated]:

the ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD caution light will not illuminate until the airspeed is less than
165 kt IAS.

SPLR 1 and 2 Push OFF Switchlights ............................................................................................ Push OFF

Check PFCS indicator shows all spoilers retracted.

NOTE: The SPLR OUTBD caution light will illuminate below 150 kt IAS, the ROLL SPLR INBD GND
and ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND caution lights will illuminate on landing.

Landing Considerations:
- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 10° or 15°.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... VREF VREF + 20

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.40 1.75
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-52 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.7.1.6 ROLL SPLR INBD GND or ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND

(Caution Light)

Landing Considerations:
- Affected Inboard or Outboard Roll Spoilers may not extend at touch-down.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... VREF VREF + 20
Flap 35° ................................... VREF VREF + 15

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... 1.35 1.69
Flap 35° ................................... 1.35 1.62
[END]

3.1.7.1.7 SPLR OUTBD

(Caution Light)

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................. 200 KIAS (MAX)

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-53
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.7.2 PITCH

3.1.7.2.1 PITCH CONTROL JAM

Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage
Flap and Airspeed .................................................................................................... Maintain at Time of Jam
Maintain flap setting and approximate airspeed at time pitch jam occurred.
Control Columns .................................................................................................. Attempt to Overcome Jam
Both pilots should attempt to maintain control by increased column force against the jam.
If unable to overcome jam:
• Relax control column force.
PITCH Disconnect Handle ................................................................................................... Pull and Turn 90°
Pull out the PITCH disconnect T-handle and turn it 90°.
Elevator forces will be lighter than normal and pitch control degraded.
Control Columns ...................................................................................... Both Pilots Attempt Pitch Control
- Pilot with free control column will have pitch control.
CAUTION: With the PITCH disconnect handle pulled, the AP must not be engaged.
NOTE: MAX airspeed is 170 KIAS or speed at which jam occurred, whichever is higher.
Landing Considerations:
- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 10° or 15°.
Approach and VREF Speeds:
REF SPEED INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... VREF VREF + 20
Landing Distance Factor:
REF SPEED INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.35 1.69
[END]

3.1.7.2.2 ELEVATOR FEEL and PITCH TRIM and SPLR OUTBD and RUD CTRL (Caution Lights)
Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage
Airspeed .................................................................................................................................. 200 KIAS (MAX)
[END]

3.1.7.2.3 ELEVATOR ASYMMETRY (Caution Light)

3.1.7.2.4 ELEVATOR PRESS (Caution Light)

HYD Press # 3 ......................................................................................................................................... Check
Check the # 3 system hydraulic pressure on the MFD - Hydraulic systems page.
If pressure indicated:
HYD # 3 ISOL VLV .................................................................................................................................. NORM
Make sure the green OPEN light on the HYD # 3 ISOL VLV switchlight is not on.
If caution light remains illuminated:
- Maintenance action required prior to next flight.
[END]

3.1.7.2.5 ELEVATOR FEEL (Caution Light)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-54 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.7.2.6 PITCH TRIM

(Caution Light)

Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage

ELEVATOR TRIM ................................................................................................................................ Activate
Select a small amount of NOSE UP or NOSE DN elevator trim
while maintaining the airplane in steady state and confirm change in elevator force.
NOTE: Elevator Trim pointer may indicate full NU trim position with caution light illuminated.
If Elevator Trim is operative:
Autopilot ............................................................................................................................... Engage As Req’d
If Elevator Trim is inoperative:
• Maintain airplane configuration and airspeed as long as practicable.
NOTE: If the pitch trim fails on take-off with Flap 10° or 15°, it is recommended that the landing be
conducted with the take-off flap setting.
Landing Considerations:
- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence.
Minimum Approach and VREF Speeds .............................................................................................. 1.23 VSR
NOTE: During the airspeed deceleration to VFE, the elevator force will increase.
When decelerating from VMO with flap 0°, the elevator force may be as high as 18 kg (40 lb)
until flap is extended.
[END]

3.1.7.2.7 ELEVATOR TRIM SWITCH FAILURE

(Illumination of ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT OFF Switchlight and
Audio Tone for ELEVATOR TRIM in motion)

ELEVATOR TRIM SHUT OFF ......................................................................................................... Press OFF

Observe OFF advisory light remains illuminated and PUSH advisory light out.
NOTE: ELEVATOR TRIM indicator will indicate full NU trim position.
• Maintain airplane configuration and airspeed as long as practicable.
NOTE: If pitch trim fails on take-off with Flap 10° or 15°, it is recommended that the landing be
conducted with the take-off flap-setting.
• Do Not engage autopilot.

Landing Considerations:
- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence.
Minimum Approach and VREF Speeds .............................................................................................. 1.23 VSR

NOTE: During the airspeed deceleration to VFE, the elevator force will increase.
When decelerating from VMO with flap 0°, the elevator force may be as high as 18 kg (40 lb)
until flap is extended.
[END]

3.1.7.2.8 ELEVATOR TRIM INDICATOR FAILURE

(Elevator Trim Pointer indicates off-scale ND)

ELEVATOR TRIM ....................................................................................................................... Use As Req’d

NOTE: Maintenance action required prior to next flight.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-55
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.7.3 FLAPS

3.1.7.3.1 ABNORMAL FLAP LANDING

(FLAP 0° or FLAP 5°)

GPWS Flap Override ............................................................................................................................... Press

Lift the plastic guard and push the GPWS Flap Override switchlight.
Make sure the amber light turns on.

At 1000 ft AGL:
Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage

Landing Considerations:

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 0° .................................... VREF VREF + 25
Flap 5° .................................... VREF VREF + 20

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 0° (use Flap 35° chart) .... 2.0 2.50
Flap 5° (use Flap 35° chart) .... 2.0 2.50

CAUTION: Pitch attitudes greater than 6° in the landing flare may cause the fuselage to contact the
runway.
Do Not select POWER levers below FLIGHT IDLE until IAS is below 150 kt.

NOTES: Power should be reduced gradually to achieve FLIGHT IDLE at or just prior to touchdown.
To decrease the landing descent rate and not exceed a pitch attitude of 6° when the landing
descent rate is higher than desired, power will be required in the landing flare through to touch-
down.
To decrease the landing descent rate at airport altitudes greater than 5000 ft, it may be neces-
sary to maintain power in the landing flare through to touchdown.
High landing speeds, due to this abnormal procedure, may result in Brake Kinetic Energy limits
being exceeded.
The nosewheel should be promptly brought into contact with the runway following mainwheel
contact.
[END]

3.1.7.3.2 ABNORMAL FLAP LANDING

(FLAP INDICATED POSITION between 10°, 15° or 35°)

Landing Considerations:
Calculate performance and reference airspeeds appropriate to the smaller flap angle.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-56 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.7.3.3 FLAP DRIVE

(Caution Light)

• No crew action required.

NOTE: Flap may continue to operate normally and may be used to complete the flight.
If Flap fails between gated positions, the smaller flap angle must be used when calculating
landing performance.

Landing Considerations:
- See appropriate ABNORMAL FLAP LANDING procedure above (Sub-Chapter 3.1.7.3.1 & 2).

[END]

3.1.7.3.4 FLAP POWER

(Caution Light)
(Flap System Failure)

FLAPS Lever ................................................................................................... Select to match Flap Position

Select FLAPS Lever to the flap gate appropriate to the FLAP indication on # 2 MFD.

NOTE: Ensure the FLAPS lever release trigger is fully engaged in the appropriate flap gate.

FLAPS CONT CB (Left Lower CB Panel - L7) ............................................................................................. Pull

Pull out FLAPS CONT circuit breaker, wait 2 s, then push in.
Check FLAP POWER caution light out.

NOTE: FLAPS CONT circuit breaker (L7) is limited to one reset.

FLAPS Lever ........................................................................................................................................... Select

Select FLAPS Lever to the desired flap setting.
Check for appropriate FLAP indication on # 2 MFD.

NOTE: Delay the selection of the FLAPS lever for a minimum of 20 s following reset of the FLAPS
CONT circuit breaker.
Ensure the FLAPS lever release trigger is fully engaged in the appropriate flap gate.

If the FLAP POWER caution light remains illuminated:

• No operation of flap is available and flap will remain in last selected position.

NOTE: If flap fails between gated positions, the smaller flap angle must be used when calculating
landing performance.

- See appropriate ABNORMAL FLAP LANDING procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.7.3.1 & 2).

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-57
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.7.4 RUDDERS

3.1.7.4.1 RUDDER JAM

(Restricted Rudder Pedal Movement)

Affected Rudder Pedal ....................................................................................... Apply a normal Push Force

If rudder pedal moves as required:

Affected Rudder Pedal .......................................... Reduce Push Force and Allow Rudder Pedal to Centre

WARNING: Should the rudder pedal (rudder jam) suddenly break free,
Do Not apply rudder pedal input in the opposite direction.

• Use rudder pedals as required.

If rudder pedal does not respond to normal push force (rudder remains jammed or rudder jam re-occurs):
• Use Roll Control as req’d for directional control.

MIN Airspeed ...................................................................................................................................... 1.23 VSR

Nosewheel Steering ................................................................................................................................... OFF

Land at an airport with no known or forecast icing conditions and
with minimum crosswind and turbulence using Flap 10°, 15° or 35°.

NOTE: If rudder jam occurs on take-off and conditions permit, return for landing on the take-off
runway.

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10°, 15° & 35° ................. 1.40 N/A

Power ................................................................................................... Maintain As Required to Touchdown

NOTE: Small amounts of asymmetric power may be used to maintain directional control on approach.
After landing, use asymmetric braking and power, as required, to maintain directional control.

After the airplane has come to a stop:

Nosewheel Steering .................................................................................................................................... ON
Use tiller for directional control.
[END]

3.1.7.4.2 RUD 1 PUSH OFF or RUD 2 PUSH OFF

(Switchlight ON)

Illuminated Switchlight ........................................................................................................................... Press

Push illuminated RUD 1 or RUD 2 switchlight.
Observe illumination of # 1 RUD HYD or # 2 RUD HYD caution lights turn on.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-58 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.7.4.3 # 1 RUD HYD or # 2 RUD HYD

(Caution Light)

If Not associated with an engine shut-down or hydraulic system failure or Rudder Push OFF switchlight:

CHAPTER 3 3.1-59
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.8 FUEL SYSTEM

3.1.8.1 # 1 TANK FUEL LOW or # 2 TANK FUEL LOW

(Caution Light)

Fuel Quantity .......................................................................................................................................... Check

Check the fuel quantity on the MFD - Fuel page.

Affected tank fuel content is low:

• Check for external and internal fuel leaks.

NOTE: A check of the cabin will be necessary to identify a possible internal fuel leak.

No indication of a fuel leak:

• Transfer fuel from unaffected tank.
See Fuel Transfer (Sub-Chapter 2.5.5.2).
• Monitor fuel quantity.

Fuel leak confirmed:

• Shut down engine on affected side.
See ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).

Affected tank fuel content is normal:

• Maintain level attitude as much as possible.

TANK 1 or 2 AUX PUMP Switch (affected side) .......................................................................................... ON

Check appropriate TANK AUX PUMP ON advisory light illuminates.
• Monitor fuel quantity.

When associated ENG FUEL PRESS caution light illuminates:

• Shut down engine on affected side.
See ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).
[END]

3.1.8.2 # 1 ENG FUEL PRESS or # 2 ENG FUEL PRESS

(Caution Light)

TANK 1 or 2 AUX PUMP Switch (affected side) .......................................................................................... ON

Check selected TANK AUX PUMP ON advisory light illuminates and
affected ENG FUEL PRESS caution light out.

If Caution Light remains on:

TANK 1 or 2 AUX PUMP Switch (affected side) ......................................................................................... OFF
Check appropriate TANK AUX PUMP ON advisory light out.

• Check for external leaks and for fuel odor within airplane.
If either is confirmed, complete ENGINE FAIL / FIRE / SHUT-DOWN (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.28).
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-60 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.8.3 ABNORMAL FUEL TEMPERATURE

(Fuel Temperature Indication on ED Above or Below Normal Operating Range)

TANK 1 or 2 AUX PUMP Switch (affected side) .......................................................................................... ON

- Check appropriate TANK AUX PUMP ON advisory light illuminates.
- Continue flight. Monitor affected engine performance.
- Maintenance action required prior to next flight.
[END]

3.1.8.4 ABNORMAL FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE

(Fuel Tank Temperature Colder than Allowable Minimum Fuel Temperature)

- Monitor Fuel Tank Temperature indication on MFD.

Where conditions permit:
- Maneuver to a warmer air mass
- Increase engine power

3.1.8.5 FUEL TRANSFER FAILURE

If failure of TANK AUX PUMP advisory light to illuminate:

TANK 1 or 2 AUX PUMP Switch (affected side) .......................................................................................... ON
Check selected TANK AUX PUMP ON advisory light illuminates and
appropriate TANK AUX PUMP indication appears on FUEL page of MFD.

When Transfer is complete:

TANK 1 or 2 AUX PUMP Switch (affected side) ........................................................................................ OFF
Check appropriate TANK AUX PUMP ON advisory light out and
appropriate TANK AUX PUMP indication off, on FUEL page of MFD.

If failure of One or Both TRANSFER VALVES to open:

FUEL TRANSFER ....................................................................................................................................... OFF

NOTE: Consider the effects of fuel maximum lateral asymmetry or fuel low level.
Maximum fuel imbalance is indicated by the FUEL quantity readout on ED and fuel gauge
pointers on FUEL page of MFD changing from white to amber and [BALANCE] appears
flashing on ED.
[END]

3.1.8.6 # 1 FUEL FLTR BYPASS or # 2 FUEL FLTR BYPASS

(Caution Light)

• No crew action required.

NOTE: Monitor fuel flow, ITT and NH.

If erratic, may indicate contamination has passed filter.
[END]

3.1.8.7 FUELING ON
(Caution Light)

• No crew action required.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-61
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.9 HYDRAULIC POWER

3.1.9.1 # 1 and # 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS FAILURE

(# 1 HYD PRESS and # 2 HYD PRESS indicating no pressure)

Pre-landing:
Autopilot / Yaw Damper .................................................................................................................. Disengage
Maximum Airspeed ........................................................................................................................... 200 KIAS
Use aileron, elevator and
if required for directional control, small inputs of asymmetric power, to control the aircraft.

If Flap a 0° or 5°:
GPWS .......................................................................................................................................... Flap Override
Lift the plastic guard and push the GPWS Flap Override switchlight.
Make sure the amber light illuminates.

Lost Services:
- All hydraulically powered services except elevator.

Landing Considerations:

- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence.

- Extend landing gear using ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.1)
when required.
- Align aircraft with runway using asymmetric power prior to lowering the nosewheel to the runway.
- Nosewheel steering will be inoperative.
To maintain directional control, significant asymmetric power will be required.
- Emergency braking only with limited applications available.
Use of maximum reverse power for stopping may cause directional deviation.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 0° .......................................... 1.23 VSR + 10 1.23 VSR + 25
Flap 5° .......................................... 1.23 VSR + 10 1.23 VSR + 20
Flap 10° & 15°............................... VREF + 10 VREF + 20
Flap 35° ........................................ VREF + 10 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 0° & 5° (use Flap 35° chart) .. 2.65 2.90
Flap 10° & 15°............................... 1.85 2.10
Flap 35° ........................................ 1.85 2.20

CAUTION: Pitch attitudes greater than 6° in the landing flare may cause the fuselage to contact the
runway.
Unless required for immediate directional control,
Do Not select Power Levers below Flight Idle until IAS is below 150 kt.
Excessive application of emergency braking can result in skidding and tire failure.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-62 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.9.2 # 1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE

(Loss of All Fluid from the # 1 Hydraulic System)
(# 1 ENG HYD PUMP and # 1 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Lights and
ENGINE 1 HYD valve CLOSED Advisory Light and no Quantity indicated on # 1 HYD QTY)

NOTE: # 1 HYD ISO VLV caution light may go out with very low hydraulic fluid quantity in the # 1
hydraulic system.

HYD # 3 ISOL VLV .................................................................................................................................... Open

Push the HYD # 3 ISOL VLV switchlight and confirm the OPEN advisory light illuminates and
pressure is indicated on # 3 HYD PRESS indication on # 2 MFD.

STBY HYD PRESS ................................................................................................................................ Normal

At 1000 ft AGL:
Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage

Lost Services:
- Inboard Roll Spoilers
- Flap
- Wheel brakes and Anti-Skid
- # 1 Rudder system
- # 1 Elevator system

Landing Considerations:
- Emergency braking only.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 0° ..................................... VREF + 10 VREF + 25
Flap 5°, 10° & 15°.................... VREF + 10 VREF + 20
Flap 35° ................................... VREF + 10 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 0° & 5° (use Flap 35° chart) . 2.65 2.90
Flap 10° & 15° .............................. 1.85 2.10
Flap 35° ........................................ 1.85 2.20

CAUTION: Pitch attitudes greater than 6° in the landing flare may cause the fuselage to contact the
runway.
Do Not select Power Levers below Flight Idle until IAS is below 150 kt.
Excessive application of emergency braking can result in skidding and tire failure.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-63
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.9.3 # 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE

(Loss of All Fluid from the # 2 Hydraulic System)
(# 2 ENG HYD PUMP and # 2 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Lights and
ENGINE 2 HYD valve CLOSED Advisory Light and no Quantity indicated on # 2 HYD QTY)

NOTE: # 2 HYD ISO VLV caution light may go out with very low hydraulic fluid quantity in the # 2
hydraulic system.

HYD # 3 ISOL VLV .................................................................................................................................... Open

Push the HYD # 3 ISOL VLV switchlight and confirm the OPEN advisory light illuminates and
pressure is indicated on # 3 HYD PRESS indication on # 2 MFD.

PTU CNTRL ........................................................................................................................................... Normal

Push the PTU CNTRL switchlight and make sure the green ON light goes off.

[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473) Not Incorporated] carry out the
following 2 steps:

HYD PWR XFER CB (Right Lower CB Panel - L8) ................................................................................. Pull

STBY HYD PRESS ................................................................................................................................... ON

Push the STBY HYD PRESS switchlight and confirm the green ON light illuminates.
Check STBY HYD PRESS (2800 - 3000 psi) on # 2 MFD.

NOTE: The standby hydraulic pump must remain selected on for the duration of the flight.

Lost Services:

- Outboard Roll Spoilers

- Normal Landing Gear Retraction and Extension
- Nosewheel Steering
- Emergency / Parking Brake (if PK BRK indication shows depleted pressure)
- # 2 Rudder system
- # 2 Elevator system

Landing Considerations:
- Extend landing gear using ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.1)
when required.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... VREF + 10 VREF + 20
Flap 35° .................................. VREF + 10 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.85 2.10
Flap 35° .................................. 1.85 2.20

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-64 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.9.4 # 1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM QUANTITY BELOW NORMAL

(# 1 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Light)

• Monitor quantity in # 1 Hydraulic system for further loss of fluid.

Lost Services:
- Inboard Roll Spoilers
- Wheel brakes and Anti-Skid

Landing Considerations:
- Emergency braking only.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... VREF + 10 VREF + 20
Flap 35° ................................... VREF + 10 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... 1.85 2.10
Flap 35° ................................... 1.85 2.20

CAUTION: Excessive application of emergency braking can result in skidding and tire failure.

[END]

3.1.9.5 # 1 ENG HYD PUMP

(Caution Light)
(No Pressure may be indicated in the # 1 Hydraulic System)

STBY HYD PRESS ....................................................................................................................................... ON

Push the STBY HYD PRESS switchlight and confirm the green ON light illuminates.
Check STBY HYD PRESS (2800 - 3000 psi) on # 2 MFD.

• Monitor pressure and quantity in # 1 Hydraulic system for normal indications.

NOTES: 1. Prior to the selection of the Standby Hydraulic Pump, the # 1 HYD ISO VLV caution light
may illuminate following the loss of the # 1 Engine Hydraulic Pump.
2. With # 1 hydraulic system pressure from the standby hydraulic pump only, the rate of flap
extension and retraction is decreased.
3. Hydraulic pressure will be indicated on the # 3 Hydraulic system until normal pressure is
restored in the # 1 Hydraulic system.

Landing Considerations:
- Flap extension and retraction is slower than normal.

CAUTION: With # 1 ENG HYD PUMP caution light illuminated, Do Not select PTU CNTRL to ON.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-65
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

3.1.9.6 # 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM QUANTITY BELOW NORMAL

(# 2 HYD ISO VLV - Caution Light)

[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Not Incorporated] carry out the
following 2 steps:
PTU CNTRL ....................................................................................................................................... Normal
Push the PTU CNTRL switchlight and make sure the green ON light goes off
HYD PWR XFER CB (Right Lower CB Panel - L8) ................................................................................. Pull

• Monitor quantity in # 2 Hydraulic system for further loss of fluid.

Lost Services:
- Outboard Roll Spoilers
- Normal Landing Gear retraction and extension
- Nosewheel steering
- Emergency / Parking Brake (if PK BRK indication shows depleted pressure)

Landing Considerations:
- Extend landing gear using ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.1)
when required.

Approach and VREF Speeds:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... VREF + 10 VREF + 20
Flap 35° .................................. VREF + 10 VREF + 25

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.85 2.10
Flap 35° .................................. 1.85 2.20
[END]

3.1.9.7 # 2 ENG HYD PUMP

(Caution Light)
(No Pressure may be indicated in the # 2 Hydraulic System)

PTU CNTRL .................................................................................................................................................. ON

Push the PTU CNTRL switchlight and make sure the green ON light illuminates and

[with MS 4-126425 or (MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) Incorporated]:

PTU pressure (green bars) illuminates.

• Monitor pressure and quantity in # 2 Hydraulic system for normal indications.

NOTES: 1. Prior to the selection of the PTU, the # 2 HYD ISO VLV caution light may illuminate
following the loss of the # 2 Engine Hydraulic Pump.
2. Hydraulic pressure will be indicated on the # 3 Hydraulic system until normal pressure is
restored in the # 2 Hydraulic system.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-66 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 3 3.1-67
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

3.1.10 ICE and RAIN PROTECTION

3.1.10.1 DEICE PRESS

(Caution Light)

AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ............................................................................................... MANUAL

After 10 s:
AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ........................................................................................ SLOW / FAST

If the DEICE PRESS Caution light persists:

BOOT AIR Switch ........................................................................................................................................ ISO
Move the BOOT AIR ISOLATE Switch to ISO.
DEICE PRESS Indicator ......................................................................................................................... Check
Check the pressure in the # 1 and # 2 system on the co-pilot's side console.
ICE PROTECTION Panel ................................................................................... Check Boot Advisory Lights

If the indicated pressure on each dial Is Not 18 ± 3 psi or 2 or more Deice Boot lights, on the same side, fail to
illuminate:
AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ............................................................................................... MANUAL
AIRFRAME MANUAL SELECT Selector ................................................................................ Tail and Engine
Rotate through Tail and Engine Intake positions.

CAUTION: Do Not select the WING positions during manual de-icing of the tail and engine intake.

NOTE: Only the Engine Intake Boot on the side with normal pressure will be de-iced.
For the failed side, refer to ENGINE INTAKE BOOT FAILURE below (Sub-Chapter 3.1.10.2).
Dwell period at each Tail and Engine Intake position should be approximately 6 s.
- Exit and Avoid icing conditions as soon as possible.

If the indicated pressure on each dial Is 18 ± 3 psi and only 1 of the Deice Boot advisory lights # 1 or # 2 fails to
illuminate or both # 3 de-ice advisory lights fail to illuminate or both # 4 advisory lights fail to illuminate:

NOTE: If the failed Deice Boot is associated with an Engine Intake Boot, refer to ENGINE INTAKE
BOOT FAILURE below (Sub-Chapter 3.1.10.2).
- Exit and Avoid icing conditions as soon as possible.

Holding, Approach and Landing Considerations for BOTH of the above failures:
If landing in icing conditions or the aircraft is not aerodynamically clean after leaving icing conditions:
- Land with Flaps 10° or 15°
Minimum Holding Speed (Flap 0°) ......................................................................................................... 190 kt
Speed Corrections:
VAPP VGA VREF HOLDING
Flap
(kt) (kt) (kt) (kt)
0° - - - ≥ 190
5° + 30 + 30 - -
10° + 30 + 30 + 30 -
15° + 25 + 25 + 25 -
Landing Distance Factor:
Flap 10° & 15°......................... 1.80
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-68 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.10.2 ENGINE INTAKE BOOT FAILURE

For remainder of flight (affected engine):

Engine Intake Door .................................................................................................................................. Open
Push ENGINE INTAKE BYPASS switchlight.
Make sure that the affected OPEN / HTR advisory light illuminates.
- Exit icing conditions as soon as possible.
[END]

3.1.10.3 DEICE TIMER (Caution Light)

De-ice Boots Advisory Lights ............................................................................................................. Monitor

The correct sequence is as follows:
ICE PROTECTION

6
TAIL 6
5 5

AIRFRAME MODE SELECT AIRFRAME

OFF OFF MANUAL
SLOW SELECT
MANUAL

FAST

1 2 4 3 WING 4 3 2 1

5 6

NOTE
Manual switch positions and
related indicator light 6
sequence correspond with
deice boot inflation sequence
shown below. Numbers do
not actually appear on panel.
5

3 6 4

5 4
3 2
1
fs numb
(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-69
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

DEICE TIMER (Caution Light) (cont’d)

If Sequencing is NOT correct:

AIRFRAME MODE SELECT Selector ............................................................................................... MANUAL
Turn the AIRFRAME MODE SELECT switch to the manual position.
AIRFRAME MANUAL SELECT Selector .............................................................................. Cycle (As Req'd)
De-ice manually positions 1 through 6 using the AIRFRAME MANUAL SELECT switch on the ICE AND RAIN
PROTECTION panel. Pause for approximately 6 s at each position.
- Exit icing conditions as soon as possible.
NOTE: Dwell period at each position should be approximately 6 s.
Allow for a dwell period of not less than 24 s before commencing subsequent inflation of boots.
[END]

3.1.10.4 PROP DEICE

(Caution Light)

PROP Selector ............................................................................................................................. OFF then ON

NOTE: Only one reset of the PROP selector switch is allowed.

If PROP DEICE caution light out:

• Monitor PROPS advisory light for normal operation.

If PROP DEICE caution light remains illuminated:

Condition Levers ....................................................................................................................................... MAX
Operate propellers at MAX / 1020 NP until clear of icing conditions.

- Exit icing conditions as soon as possible.

NOTES: 1. PROP selector must remain ON until clear of icing conditions.

2. [with MS 4-126150 or MS 4-126172 or MS 4-121109 or MS 4-121281 Not Incorporated]:
With an engine shut-down and propeller de-ice selected, the PROP DEICE caution light will
illuminate.
Confirm functioning of the propeller de-ice system of the operating engine by observing
PROPS advisory light (operating engine) illuminates and goes out repeatedly.
[END]

3.1.10.5 WSHLD HOT

(Caution Light)

WINDSHIELD HEAT ......................................................................................................................... WARM UP

Turn the WINDSHIELD HEAT selector to WARM UP.
- Exit and avoid icing conditions as soon as possible.
[END]

3.1.10.6 SIDE WDO HOT

(Caution Light)

Pilot Side WDO / HT ................................................................................................................................... OFF

Set PLT SIDE WDO / HT switch to the OFF position.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1.10.11 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BELOW 65°C

(Propeller De-Icing ON In Flight)

• Monitor affected engine performance.

- Exit icing conditions as soon as possible.
[END]

3.1.10.12 PITOT HEAT 1 or PITOT HEAT 2 or PITOT HEAT STBY

(Caution Light)

Pitot-Static Switch (affected) .................................................................................................... 1 or 2 or STBY

Make sure affected PITOT-STATIC switch is to 1, 2 or STBY ON.
If caution light remains on or if there are abnormal indications of airspeed or altitude on the pilot’s or co-pilot’s
PFD:
EFIS ADC SOURCE Selector ..................................................................................... Select 1 or 2 (As Req’d)
[END]

3.1.10.13 # 1 STALL SYST FAIL or # 2 STALL SYST FAIL and PUSHER SYST FAIL
(Caution Light)

Minumum Airspeed (exception GA and Enroute Climb) .................................................................... 1.23 VSR

for all flap settings OR maintain airspeed appropriate for icing conditions and other failures if applicable
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-71
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

3.1.10.14 PUSHER SYST FAIL

(Caution Light)

STICK PUSHER SHUT OFF Switch ................................................................... Press OFF (Pilot or Co-Pilot)
Observe illumination of OFF advisory light.

Minumum Airspeed (exception GA and Enroute Climb) .................................................................... 1.23 VSR

for all flap settings OR maintain airspeed appropriate for icing conditions and other failures if applicable
[END]

3.1.10.15 FLIGHT IN SEVERE ICING

Autopilot ................................................................................................................... Disconnect Immediately

CAUTION: Be prepared for a possible roll force requirement by firmly holding the control wheel
prior to disconnecting the autopilot.

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................ MAX / 1020

POWER Levers ......................................................................................................... Adjust As Req’d to MCP

Minimum Airspeed ............................................................................................................................ 190 KIAS

• Exit severe icing conditions by changing altitude and / or course as required.

CAUTION: Avoid aggressive maneuvering.

When clear of icing conditions:

NOTE: It can be assumed that the airplane is no longer affected by the severe ice encountered when
the ice accumulated on the flight compartment side window is removed.
When visible, other surfaces, such as the propeller spinner and wing leading edges aft of the
deicer boots, should also be used to confirm that the ice accumulated during the severe icing
encounter has cleared.

POWER Levers and Condition Levers ................................................................................. Adjust As Req’d

Airspeed ............................................................................................................................................. As Req’d

Autopilot ............................................................................................................................................ As Req’d

Refer to Sub-Chapter 2.16, Ice Protection Procedures, as appropriate for holding, approach and landing.

If it cannot be determined that the aircraft is no longer affected by the severe icing encounter:

Autopilot .................................................................................................................................. Do Not Engage

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-72 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.11 LANDING GEAR

NOTE: Following any landing gear retraction or extension malfunction not covered by a specific
procedure in this section, the landing gear must be extended using the Alternate Landing Gear
Extension procedure that follows.

3.1.11.1 ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION or LDG GEAR INOP (Caution Light)
(One or more Landing Gear fail to extend)

Airspeed ................................................................................................................................. 185 KIAS (MAX)

L/G Down Select Inhibit Switch .......................................................................................................... INHIBIT
Lift switch guard and
set L/G DOWN SELECT INHIBIT SW, on the co-pilot’s flight compartment ceiling, to INHIBIT.

NOTE: If LDG GEAR INOP caution light was out, it will illuminate when the L/G DOWN SELECT
INHIBIT SW is selected to INHIBIT.

Landing Gear Selector ................................................................................................................................ DN

Landing Gear Alternate Release Door .......................................................................................... Open Fully
Pull open fully the MAIN LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE door, on the flight compartment ceiling.

NOTE: Door must stay fully open after alternate landing gear extension.

Main Gear Release Handle ..................................................................................................... Pull Fully Down

Pull the MAIN LANDING GEAR RELEASE handle fully down
to release main gear door uplocks and main gear.
Check L DOOR and R DOOR amber doors open and
LEFT and RIGHT green locked down advisory lights illuminate.

NOTE: The Main Gear release handle pull force will be significantly higher than experienced during
practice alternate landing gear extensions.
The required pull force, to release the Main Gear uplocks, can be as high as 41 kg (90 lb).
It may require a repeated pull effort to achieve a Main Landing Gear down and locked indication.

Landing Gear Alternate Extension Door ...................................................................................... Open Fully

Open fully the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION door on the flight compartment floor,
aft left of the co-pilot’s seat.

NOTE: If LH and / or RH green gear locked advisory lights do not illuminate, insert the Hydraulic
Pump handle in the socket and operate pump until LH and RH green advisory lights illuminate.
Door must stay fully open after alternate landing gear extension.

Nose Gear Release Handle ......................................................................................................... Pull Fully Up

Pull the NOSE GEAR RELEASE handle fully up to release nose gear door uplocks and nose gear.
Check N DOOR amber doors open and NOSE green gear locked down advisory lights illuminate.

NOTE: The Nose Gear release handle pull force will be significantly higher than experienced during
practice alternate landing gear extensions.
The required pull force, to release the Nose Gear uplocks, can be as high as 41 kg (90 lb).
It may require a repeated pull effort to achieve a Nose Landing Gear down and locked indication.

LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE and

LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION Doors ........................................................... Leave Fully Open
L/G INHIBIT Switch ............................................................................................................... Leave at INHIBIT

CAUTION: Landing gear cannot be retracted following extension by alternate extension

procedure.

CAUTION: Nosewheel steering is inoperative following extension by alternate extension

procedure.

(cont’d on the next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-73
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION or LDG GEAR INOP (cont’d)

ANTI SKID Switch ..................................................................................................................................... TEST

Hold the ANTI SKID switch at TEST, then release to ON.
Make sure INBD ANTI-SKID and OUTBD ANTI-SKID caution lights go off after 3 s.

After Landing:
- Consider stopping on the runway.
Install main gear pins and engage nose gear lock as soon as possible after engine shut-down.
[END]

3.1.11.2 LANDING GEAR DOOR MALFUNCTIONS

3.1.11.2.1 MAIN LANDING GEAR DOOR MALFUNCTIONS with LANDING GEAR UP

(Continuous illumination of amber Main Gear DOOR open advisory light with Landing Gear up)

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................... MAX 185 KIAS

FLAPS Lever .................................................................................................................................................. 0°

If amber Main Gear DOOR open advisory light goes out:

• Continue flight at normal airspeed.

If amber Main Gear DOOR open advisory light remains illuminated:

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................... MAX 185 KIAS
- Extend landing gear using ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.1).

NOTE: Intermittent illumination of amber Main Gear DOOR open advisory light must be reported to
maintenance.
[END]

3.1.11.2.2 NOSE LANDING GEAR DOOR MALFUNCTIONS with LANDING GEAR UP

(Continuous illumination of amber Main Gear DOOR open advisory light with Landing Gear up)

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................... MAX 185 KIAS

- Extend landing gear using ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION procedure (Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.1).

If Landing Gear is selected Down:

NOTE: Intermittent illumination of amber Main Gear DOOR open advisory light must be reported to
maintenance.
[END]

3.1.11.2.3 NOSE or MAIN LANDING GEAR DOOR MALFUNCTIONS with LANDING GEAR DOWN
(Continuous illumination of amber Nose or Main Gear DOOR open advisory light with Landing Gear DN)

Airspeed .................................................................................................................................... MAX 185 KIAS

- Complete flight with landing gear down.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-74 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.11.3 ALL LANDING GEAR FAIL TO RETRACT

[with MS 4-126420 Not Incorporated]

(3 Green Gear Locked Down Advisory Lights illuminated with Landing Gear Lever selected UP)

NOTE: Landing Gear Doors may be open or closed

(Amber Doors Open Advisory Lights illuminated or out)

Landing Gear Lever ..................................................................................................................................... DN

Confirm 3 Green gear locked down Advisory Lights remain illuminated.

NOTE: If the Landing Gear Alternate Release door is open, the landing gear will not retract.

• Do Not re-select Landing Gear up.

- Land at the nearest suitable airport.
[END]

[with MS 4-126420 Incorporated]

(3 Red Gear Unsafe Advisory Lights illuminated with Landing Gear Lever selected UP)

NOTE: Landing Gear Doors may be open or closed

(Amber Doors Open Advisory Lights illuminated or out)

Landing Gear Lever ..................................................................................................................................... DN

Confirm 3 Green gear locked down Advisory Lights illuminate.

NOTE: If the Landing Gear Alternate Release door is open, the landing gear will not retract.

• Do Not re-select Landing Gear up.

- Land at the nearest suitable airport.
[END]

3.1.11.4 LANDING GEAR INDICATOR MALFUNCTION

If any of the Green gear–locked–down advisory lights fail to illuminate:

Landing Gear Alternate Extension Door ............................................................................................... Open

Open the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION door on the flight compartment floor,
to aft left of the co-pilot’s seat.

Gear-Locked-Down Indicator ............................................................................................. ON / Check / OFF

Hold LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK VERIFICATION switch in the ON position and
make sure the 3 green LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK VERIFICATION lights turn on.

Landing Gear Alternate Extension Door ............................................................................................... Close

Close the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION door.
[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.1-75
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016

3.1.11.5 NOSEWHEEL STEERING

(Caution Light)

IN FLIGHT:

Steering Tiller .................................................................................................................................... Centered

Move the Nosewheel Steering Control Handle (Tiller) to the center position.

If Caution Light remains illuminated:

Nosewheel Steering ................................................................................................................................... OFF

Set nosewheel STEERING Switch to OFF.

Landing Considerations:
- Land at an airport with minimum crosswind and turbulence.
After Touchdown:
- Use asymetric braking and power, as required, to maintain directional control.

ON THE GROUND:

- Taxi the airplane forward to centre the Nosewheel

With the airplane stopped:

Steering Tiller and Rudder Pedals ................................................................................................... Centered

Nosewheel Steering .................................................................................................................... OFF then ON

Set nosewheel STEERING Switch to OFF then ON.
- Wait 7s for Nosewheel Steering to re-engage.

If Caution Light remains on:

Nosewheel Steering ................................................................................................................................... OFF

Set nosewheel STEERING Switch to OFF.
- Use asymetric braking and power, as required, to taxi the airplane.
- Maintenance action required prior to flight.

If Caution Light remains off:

- Check Nosewheel for correct response to Steering inputs prior to flight.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.1-76 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 16] 7 MAR 2016 PROCEDURES

3.1.11.6 TOUCHED RUNWAY

(Warning Light)
(Fuselage Contact with Runway on Landing)

Due to the possibility of runway debris:

• Advise ATC and airport operations of the fuselage / runway contact.

- Aircraft must not be flown prior to inspection and maintenance approval.

[END]

3.1.11.7 INBD ANTI-SKID and / or OUTBD ANTI-SKID

(Caution Light)

ANTI SKID Switch ........................................................................................................................................ ON

Set ANTI SKID switch on co-pilot’s GLARESHIELD to ON.

Pedal Brakes ................................................................................................. Apply using Manual Technique

Landing Considerations:

- Anti-Skid wil be inoperative, use Manual Technique (below) for braking.

CAUTION: Excessive brake application can result in skidding and tire failure.

Manual Technique - for maximum deceleration, brakes should be applied intermittently with momentary
release at about 1 s intervals.

Landing Distance Factor:

REF SPEED
INCR ON
Flap 10° & 15° ......................... 1.70 2.10
Flap 35° ................................... 1.70 2.0

[END]

3.1.11.8 WT ON WHEELS
(Caution Light)

• No crew action is required.

- Complete flight with WT ON WHEELS Caution Light illuminated.

CAUTION: Landing gear may not retract with WT ON WHEELS Caution Light illuminated.

NOTE: Caution Light may extinguish after landing.

However, rectification will be required prior to next flight.

[END]

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-1
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2 MISCELLANEOUS ABNORMAL and EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

3.2.1 GROUND FAILURES / ABORTED TAKE-OFF

Ground failures are defined as any malfunction that occurs on the ground prior to V1 or after touchdown.
In the event of a ground failure, regardless of whether it happens while at the gate, taxiing or during take-off,
the primary objective of the crew is to stop the airplane, assess the problem, take the appropriate action and
evacuate if required.
A take-off shall be aborted for any Caution or Warning light prior to V1.
There are many reasons other than Caution or Warning lights for discontinuing a take-off.
It is therefore, left to the discretion of the PIC as to what additional situations demand an aborted take-off.
At V1 or above, the take-off will be continued regardless of the malfunction.
If a rejected take-off becomes necessary the call “ABORT” will be made by either pilot.
If the PF is in the right seat, the left seat pilot will normally assume control at approximately 50 kt.
The PNF (right seat) will advise ATC of the abort and the crew will then assess the situation.
If the reason for the abort is fire or smoke, the PF will set the parking brake and complete the memory items for
shutdown and evacuation.
The PNF will advise ATC of the problem, request emergency equipment, state the number of persons on board
and quantity of fuel.

Table 3.2-1 Ground Failures / Aborted Take-Off

PF (Left Seat) PNF (Right Seat)

Either pilot will call “ABORT”
SIMULTANEOUSLY:
Selects POWER levers to disc / reverse Advises ATC of the “ABORT”
Applies maximum braking
Once the airplane has stopped the crew will assess the problem
If Fire or Smoke
EMERG Brake ................................................... ON Advises ATC
POWER Levers .............................................. DIDC a) requirement for emergency equipment
Condition Levers ..................................... Fuel OFF
b) number of persons on board
Pull Fuel Off (affected engine) ........................... Pull
EXTG ................................ FWD BTL and AFT BTL c) amount of fuel
............................................................. (as required)
Confirm ATC advised
Commands on PA: “Evacuate (3x) ... Side” Leaves the flight compartment to assist in the evacu-
Emergency Lights ............................................... ON ation
External Power / APU ....................................... OFF
Battery Master .................................................. OFF
Assist in evacuation as required

NOTES: 1. All accelerate-stop performance is based upon the use of full anti-skid braking until the
airplane has stopped.
2. Reverse thrust may be used, commensurate with directional control.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-2 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

Ground Failures / Aborted Take-Off

Figure 3.2-1 Ground Failure

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.2 EVACUATION

3.2.2.1 Catastrophic Accident

If a catastrophic accident occurs which precludes any formal preparation or announcements each crew mem-
ber should immediately initiate an evacuation.
When initiating an evacuation communicate this using the following shouted command / PA:
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, EVACUATE”
(“... SIDE”, if required to restrict evacuation to that side of the airplane.)
This notifies other crew members and your passengers that you are initiating an evacuation.

3.2.2.2 Non-Catastrophic Accident

At any time the airplane comes to a stop following a planned or unplanned emergency landing that is not cata-
strophic, the Cabin Crew Member(s) will wait for engine shut down plus 15 s.
If there is no communication from the flight compartment by this point the:
• Senior Cabin Crew Member will attempt to call the flight compartment using the “EMER” call button on the
Interphone.
If there is no response, she / he will attempt to enter the flight compartment.
If all communication with the flight compartment fails, the Senior Cabin Crew Member will initiate evacua-
tion.
• Cabin Crew Member(s) will maintain control in the cabin and wait for direction from the flight compartment or the
Senior Cabin Crew Member.
If this is not possible, the Cabin Crew Member(s) will initiate evacuation.

3.2.3 Blocked Exit Procedure

If during the assessment of an exit it is determined that the exit is unsafe or unusable then the following proce-
dure should be used:
• Have 2 passengers hold people back while you assess the exit opposite (e.g. “you 2 hold people back”);
• If this exit is also unusable then redirect passengers to operable exits - elevate yourself, cross arms in an X
in front of you and shout the problem (e.g. “blocked exit, fire, go that way”).

3.2.3.1 Pilot Duties - Evacuation

(After Landing)

3.2.3.1.1 2IC Duties

(Senior Cabin Crew Member and / or Cabin Crew Member is conducting evacuation)
1) Complete flight compartment duties,
2) Exit flight compartment and
3) 2IC will exit airplane with passengers and assist from outside.

3.2.3.1.2 2IC Duties

(Senior Cabin Crew Member Incapacitated or no Cabin Crew Member on board)
In addition to items 1) and 2) above, the 2IC will assess and open exits and conduct evacuation.

3.2.3.1.3 PIC Duties

(Senior Cabin Attendant and / or Cabin Attendant and / or PNF is conducting evacuation)
1) Complete flight compartment duties,
2) Exit flight compartment, and
3) PIC will exit airplane with passengers and assist from outside.

3.2.3.1.4 PIC Duties

(Senior Cabin Crew Member Incapacitated or
no Cabin Crew Member on board or
PNF incapacitated)
In addition to items 1) to 3) above, the PIC will assess and open exits and conduct evacuation.

NOTE: Any crew member may assume the duties of any other crew member as the circumstance
require.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-4 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.2.4 CREW INCAPACITATION

3.2.4.1 Pilot Incapacitation

Incapacitation occurs in many forms ranging from sudden death to subtle, partial loss of mental or physical per-
formance.

Subtle incapacitation is the most dangerous and is the most common type encountered.

One of the keys to early and effective recognition of pilot incapacitation is the strict adherence to standard
operating procedures, call-outs and flight profiles.

Suspicion of some degree of incapacitation should be considered when a crew member does not respond to
verbal communication associated with a significant departure from a standardized procedure or profile.

Failure of that crew member to respond to a 2nd request or challenge is cause for immediate action on the part
of the challenging crew member.

Whenever the PNF advises the PF of a deviation from the intended flight profile, the PF shall take immediate
action and announce, “CORRECTING”.

If the PF does not respond immediately, the PNF shall call the deviation a 2nd time, and if there is still no
response from the PF, the PNF shall assume pilot incapacitation, assume immediate control of the airplane
and announce, “I HAVE CONTROL”.

If carrying additional crew members i.e. Cabin Crew Member(s), call for their assistance in securing the inca-
pacitated pilot away from the controls and to administer first aid as necessary.

3.2.5 IN-FLIGHT FAILURES

In-flight failures are defined as any malfunction that occurs at or above V1 and prior to touch down.

During an in-flight failure the primary responsibility of the crew is to control the airplane.

Checklists must not be called for until the airplane is under full control and in a steady state of flight.

If a failure occurs at or above V1 and prior to flap retraction (3rd segment), the crew will not action any memory
items or checklist until the flaps are retracted.

In an extreme situation (such as engine failure during a GA), the PIC may elect to action the checklist memory
items prior to reaching 3rd segment (prior to flap retraction).

In any event, no action will be taken until the airplane is under full control and in a steady state of flight.

In the event of an in-flight failure, the crew will assess the problem.

Once the nature of the problem has been established, the PF will call for the appropriate memory items if appli-
cable, e.g. “SHUTDOWN ENGINE NUMBER 2".

The PNF actions the memory items which are confirmed by the PF (Challenge and Response).

When the memory items are complete, the PF will at his discretion (but not less than 1000 ft above the airport
elevation), call for the appropriate non-normal checklist.

The PNF actions the checklist items using the Read and Do method.

Once the checklist has been completed, the crew will advise ATC of the problem and declare an emergency if
applicable.

The PIC will advise the Cabin Crew of the nature of the problem and the intentions of the flight crew.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-5
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

Table 3.2-2 Engine Failure / Fire During Take-Off After V1

PF PNF
Confirms airspeed and rotates at VR to 8° nose up. At V1 / VR calls:
After lift-off continues rotation to a minimum pitch atti- “V1 ROTATE”
tude of 10° to achieve V2 at 35 ft.
Observes positive rate of climb
Calls “POSITIVE RATE”
Commands “GEAR UP”
Selects Landing Gear Lever Up
Announces “ENGINE FAILURE (or “FIRE) -
# 1 (or # 2) ENGINE”
Cancels all Caution and Warning Lights
At minimum 400 ft (or appropriate obstacle clearance
height) *
Calls “400 FEET”
(or appropriate obstacle clearance height) *
Accelerates through VFR
Commands “FLAPS 0"
Confirms speed VFRI or above
Selects FLAPS 0
Continues acceleration to VFTO
Assesses the problem and
Verifies the affected engine
Commands “SHUTDOWN ENGINE # 1 (or # 2 )”
Completes Engine Shutdown procedure
Confirms airspeed is VCLIMB or higher
Commands Selects bleed on operating engine to ON / NORM.
“BLEED ON / MAX CONTINUOUS POWER” Confirms MCP power rating on ED
Continues climb Calls “POWER SET”

CAUTION: Nose up pitch attitudes > 8° prior to lift-off may cause the tail to contact the runway.

NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified in the ENGINE FAILURE PROCEDURE for a particular airport /
runway the following standard is recommended:
2. CLIMB TO 1000 ft AIRPORT ELEVATION WITH V2;
ACCELERATE TO VFR AND TURN (LEFT or RIGHT) TO THAT NAVAID SERVING AS
THE MAIN NAVAID FOR APP PURPOSES.
CONTINUE CLIMB WITH VFTO.

Table 3.2-3 Engine Failure / Fire in Flight Procedure

PF PNF
Announces “ENGINE FAILURE (or FIRE)
# 1 (or # 2) ENGINE”
Sets power as required to maintain steady flight Cancels all Caution and Warning Lights
Assesses problem and
Verifies the affected engine
Commands “SHUTDOWN ENGINE # 1 (or # 2)” Completes Engine Shutdown procedure

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-6 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

Table 3.2-4 Engine Shutdown Procedure

PF PNF
Commands “SHUTDOWN ENGINE # 1 (or # 2)”
Calls “POWER LEVER # 1 (or # 2)”
Responds “CONFIRMED, FLIGHT IDLE”
Selects POWER Lever to Flight Idle
Calls “CONDITION LEVER # 1 (or # 2)”
Responds “CONFIRMED, FUEL-OFF”
Selects Condition Lever to FUEL-OFF
Confirms propeller feathers
If propeller Does Not feather:
Calls “NO FEATHER”
“ALTERNATE FEATHER # 1 (or # 2)”
Selects appropriate Alternate Feather switch to
FEATHER
Calls “PULL FUEL OFF # 1 (or #2)”
Responds “CONFIRMED, PULL”
Pulls Fuel Off Handle
Calls “# 1 (or # 2) TANK AUX PUMP OFF”
Selects Tank Aux Pump to OFF
If Engine Fire
Calls “EXTINGUISHER FWD BTL”
Selects Forward Bottle
If Fire persists (wait up to 30 s)
Calls “EXTINGUISHER AFT BTL”
Selects Aft Bottle
Once the Engine is shut down and at a minimum of 1000 ft AGL:
Confirms airspeed is VCLIMB or higher
Commands Selects bleed on operating engine to ON / NORM.
“BLEED ON / MAX CONTINUOUS POWER”
Confirms MCP power rating on ED
Continues climb Calls “POWER SET”
Commands “ENGINE SHUTDOWN CHECKLIST”
Completes ENGINE SHUTDOWN CHECKLIST
Calls
“ENGINE SHUTDOWN CHECKLIST COMPLETE”

3.2.6.1 Propeller Overspeed

The checklist is considered to be a memory item; propeller RPM above 1020 should be viewed as an over-
speed.
Any prop that cannot be controlled must be treated the same as an overspeed.
The checklist procedures are essentially the same as “Engine Shutdown” except with the clear understanding
that the engine is not to be shutdown until the propeller feathers.
The Condition Lever remains in the “START & FEATHER” position until the propeller feathers.

Table 3.2-6 Propeller Overspeed Procedure

PF PNF
Announces “PROP OVERSPEED # 1 (or # 2)”
Above 400 ft AGL
Reduces airspeed toward minimum speed appropri-
ate to flap configuration and flight conditions
Retards POWER lever (affected engine) to FLIGHT
IDLE
Commands
“CONDITION LEVER # 1 (or # 2)
START FEATHER” Calls “CONDITION LEVER # 1 (or # 2)”
Responds “CONFIRMED, START FEATHER” Selects Condition Lever to START / FEATHER
Confirms propeller feathers
If Propeller Does Not Feather
Calls “NO FEATHER” /
“ALTERNATE FEATHER # 1 (or # 2)”
Selects appropriate Alternate Feather switchlight to
FTHR
If Propeller Does Not Feather
Calls “NO FEATHER” /
“ALTERNATE FEATHER # 1 (or # 2) OFF”
Selects appropriate Alternate Feather switchlight to
OFF
Commands “CONDITION LEVERS MAX”
Sets both Condition Levers to the MAX detent.
Operates POWER Levers together to maintain the
desired flight profile
Land Immediately a the Nearest Suitable Airport.
If Propeller Feathers
Commands
“CONDITION LEVER # 1 (or # 2) FUEL OFF”
Calls “CONDITION LEVER # 1 (or # 2)”
Responds “CONFIRMED, FUEL OFF”
Selects Condition Lever to FUEL OFF.
Completes ENGINE SHUTDOWN procedure
Once Propeller RPM is under control and at a minimum of 1000 ft AGL
Commands “PROP OVERSPEED CHECKLIST”
Completes PROP OVERSPEED CHECKLIST
Calls
“PROP OVERSPEED CHECKLIST COMPLETE”

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-11
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.6.2 Propeller Unscheduled Feathering

A propeller unscheduled feather should be viewed as an engine failure and actioned in the same way.

ED indications will show high values in torque and propeller RPM on the affected engine.

Table 3.2-7 Propeller Unscheduled Feathering

PF PNF
Sets power as required to maintain steady flight Announces
“UNSCHEDULED FEATHER # 1 (or # 2)”
Cancels all Caution and Warning lights
Assesses problem and verifies affected engine.
Commands “SHUTDOWN ENGINE # 1 (or # 2)”
Completes Engine shutdown Procedure

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-12 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.2.7 FLAPLESS APPROACH and LANDING

During flapless approaches, fly a normal rectangular traffic pattern, but ensure that there is enough time / dis-
tance on final approach to stabilize in the flapless configuration.

The nose of the airplane will be higher than normal and the power setting will be lower than normal.

The GPWS flap override switch should be depressed to inhibit all flap warning signals.

The key to a successful flapless landing is to establish VREF for flaps 0° as soon as possible on final approach.

Care should be exercised not to under-shoot the runway as there might be a tendency to “flattern out” the
approach angle when in the flapless configuration.

Make adjustments quickly and precisely.

This should obviate the necessity to use large attitude and power changes especially on short final.

Power should be reduced gradually to achieve FLIGHT IDLE at or just prior to touchdown.

The POWER levers should be moved from FLIGHT IDLE into discing without delay.

Reverse may be used as required to reduce stopping distance.

The “flapless landing” checklist should be completed before execution of the normal approach and landing
checklists.

CAUTION: Pitch attitude > 6° in the landing flare may cause the fuselage to contact the RWY.

CAUTION: Do Not select POWER levers below FLIGHT IDLE

until indicated airspeed is below 150 kt IAS.

NOTE: The nosewheel should be promptly brought into contact with the ground following mainwheel
contact.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-13
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.8 CONTROL JAMS

Table 3.2-8 Pitch Jam Procedures

PF PNF
Calls “PITCH JAM”
Presses Auto-pilot Disconnect Button
Both pilots will try to overpower each control to dislodge jam.
If unable to control the airplane
Calls “PITCH DISCONNECT”
Relaxes Force
Pulls Pitch Disconnect handle and rotates 90°
Both Pilots will now attempt to control airplane.
Pilot with free control will call “I HAVE CONTROL”, the other will call “YOU HAVE CONTROL”.
The PF shall retain the flap setting and appropriate airspeed at the time of the jam.
Once airplane is under control and at minimum of 1000 AGL:
Commands “PITCH JAM CHECKLIST”
Completes “PITCH JAM CHECKLIST”
Calls “PITCH JAM CHECKLIST COMPLETE”

NOTE: Limit speed to 170 kt, or speed at time of Jam, whichever is higher.

CAUTION: With the Pitch disconnect handle pulled, the autopilot must not be engaged.

Table 3.2-9 Roll Jam Procedures

PF PNF
Calls “ROLL JAM”
Presses Auto-pilot Disconnect Button (if required)
Calls “ROLL DISCONNECT”
Pulls Roll Disconnect handle and rotates 90°
Both Pilots will now attempt to control airplane.
Pilot with free control will call “I HAVE CONTROL”, the other pilot will call “YOU HAVE CONTROL”.
Once airplane is under control and at minimum of 1000 AGL:
Commands “ROLL JAM CHECKLIST”
Completes “ROLL JAM CHECKLIST”
Calls “ROLL JAM CHECKLIST COMPLETE”

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-14 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.2.9 SMOKE / DEPRESSURIZATION / EMERGENCY DESCENTS

3.2.9.1 Smoke

Smoke or fire within the airplane can quickly develop into a serious and life threatening situation.
Smoke can be carried into the fuselage via the air conditioning and pressurization system, or it can be gener-
ated within the airplane by overheated or burning electrical equipment or wiring.
It can also result from combustion within the cargo / baggage compartment, the cabin and the lavatory and gal-
ley areas.
Of immediate importance, upon detection of any smoke on the flight compartment, is PROTECTION of the
flight crew.
The appropriate smoke / fire procedures can then be carried out, the airplane descended to a safe altitude for
protection of the passengers and positioned for an immediate landing at the nearest suitable airport.

Smoke / fire procedures are addressed in the QRH under 2 basic headings:
- Known source of fire or smoke
- Unknown source of smoke

Table 3.2-10 Smoke Procedure

PF PNF
Crew Member noting abnormality calls “SMOKE”
Both Pilots:
Don oxygen masks with 100% EMER oxygen selected
Don smoke goggles (if applicable)
Select BOOM / MASK switch to MASK and establish communications
Selects RECIRC FAN to OFF
(MS 4-126236 Not Incorporated)
Emergency Lights ON
Pass Signs ON
If source of Smoke on flight compartment
Assesses flight compartment visibility and if Extinguishes fire if possible
determined to be necessary to clear smoke
Commands “FORWARD OUTFLOW OPEN” Selects Cabin Alt Fwd Outflow fully clockwise to OPN to
exhaust smoke forward
Responds “FORWARD OUTFLOW OPEN”
All sources of Smoke
Commands “SMOKE CHECKLIST”
Commences descent to land immediately at
nearest possible airport
Determines source of smoke
Completes “FUSELAGE FIRE OR SMOKE CHECKLIST”
Extinguishes fire with portable extinguisher leaving flight
compartment if required
Calls “SMOKE CHECKLIST” complete

NOTES: 1. Whether or not smoke has cleared, if it cannot be visibly verified that the fire has been
extinguished following fire suppression and / or smoke evacuation procedures, continue to
land immediately at the nearest suitable airport.
2. If a pilot is required to fight the fire, protective breathing equipment must be donned prior to
exiting the flight compartment.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-15
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.9.2 Depressurization
Other than setting the altitude of the destination airfield on the cabin controller, pressurization occurs automat-
ically and normally requires minimal crew involvement.
If the automatic features of the controller fail, cabin pressure can be controlled manually.
In the event of cabin depressurization or the inability to maintain adequate pressurization, the airplane should
be descended to below 14000 ft or the Minimum Enroute Altitude, whichever is higher.
When controlling the cabin pressure manually, do not exceed maximum cabin differential pressure stated on
the Cabin Altitude Differential placard.
A rapid decompression can result from loss of integrity of the pressure hull due to birdstrike, loss of a window,
sudden failure of a door seal, or other structural damage.
As with the case of smoke on the flight compartment, the prime consideration of the flight crew is self-protec-
tion, so the airplane can be flown safely to a lower altitude to protect the passengers.

Table 3.2-11 Depressurization Procedures

PF PNF
Crew Member noting abnormality calls “CABIN PRESSURE”
If rapid Depressurization
Both Pilots:
Don oxygen masks with 100% EMER oxygen selected
Select BOOM / MASK switch to MASK and establish communications
Selects Passenger Signs ON
Commences Emergency Descent procedure to Advises ATC of emergency descent
below 14000 ft or to MEA whichever is higher
Commands Completes
“RAPID DEPRESSURIZATION CHECKLIST” “RAPID DEPRESSURIZATION CHECKLIST”
Calls “RAPID DEPRESSURIZATION CHECKLIST
COMPLETE”
If slow Depressurization
Commands “CABIN PRESSURE CHECKLIST” Completes “CABIN PRESSURE CHECKLIST”
Calls
“CABIN PRESSURE CHECKLIST COMPLETE”
Unpressurized Flight
Descends below 14000 ft or to MEA whichever is
higher
Commands Completes
“UNPRESSURIZED FLIGHT CHECKLIST” “UNPRESSURIZED FLIGHT CHECKLIST”
Calls “UNPRESSURIZED FLIGHT CHECKLIST
COMPLETE”

3.2.9.3 Emergency Descent

An Emergency Descent, if required, is normally carried out at VMO.
If the structural integrity of the airplane is in doubt, however, limit the descent airspeed as much as possible
and avoid high maneuvering loads. Moving the condition levers to MAX increases drag in order that the
descent to lower altitude may be done in a timely fashion.

Table 3.2-12 Emergency Descent Procedure

PF PNF
POWER Levers ...... FLIGHT IDLE
Condition Levers ................. MAX
Airspeed ............................... VMO
NOTE: If structural integrity is in doubt, limit airspeed as much as possible and avoid high
maneuvering loads.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-16 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

Rapid Depressurization

Figure 3.2-4 Rapid Depressurization

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-17
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.10 HIGH ANGLE OF ATTACK RECOVERY PROCEDURES

(Recovery from stall warning and stall - stick shaker, unusual airframe buffet, uncommanded wing drop, activa-
tion of stick pusher and presentation of red low airspeed cue)

Autopilot .................................................................................................................................. Disengage, and

Pitch Attitude ........................................................................................................................................ Reduce

NOTE: Relax any control column pull force and / or move the control column forward sufficient to
achieve a reduction in pitch attitude.
This action can result in a loss of altitude.

WARNING: With the aircraft in close proximity to the ground, the degree of pitch attitude
reduction will be limited.

If the aircraft is not in a wings level attitude prior to or during stall warning or stall:

Lateral Control ...................................................................................................................... Roll Wings Level

Power .................................................................................................................................................. Increase

Advance Condition levers to MAX / 1020 and POWER levers to RATING detent (NTOP).

Airspeed .............................................................................................................................................. Increase

Increase airspeed to not less than the minimum reference airspeed appropriate to flap configuration
and any additional airspeed factors, if applicable.

CAUTION: Do Not change the flap and landing gear configuration until the minimum reference
airspeed appropriate for the new configuration is achieved.

When aircraft recovers from stall and / or stall warning (minimum reference airspeed is achieved):
• Return to the desired flight profile and assigned altitude.

3.2.11 OVERWEIGHT LANDING

If an immediate landing is required following take-offs at a mass / weight in excess of maximum landing mass /
weight, the following considerations apply:

1) Approach and landing speeds will be higher for a given flap setting as well as brake energy and landing
distance increased and MAT / WAT limit decreased.
Approach and landing flap selection may be determined by landing MAT / WAT considerations well as
available landing distance or brake energy.

2) Establish VREF as soon as possible on final approach.

Avoid the necessity to use large attitude and power changes especially on short final.

3) Note that airplane sink rate will be higher than normal on approach.

4) Adjust flare to reduce sink rate to normal values prior to touchdown.

Power may be required in the landing flare through to touchdown to decrease the landing descent rate.

5) After touchdown, the POWER levers should be moved from FLIGHT IDLE into discing without delay and
the nosewheel lowered to the runway.
Reverse may be used as required to reduce stopping distance.

NOTE: Landing speeds, MAT / WAT limits, Landing Climb data, Landing Distance and Brake Energy
may be determined using the AOM tables for over-weight landing conditions.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-18 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.2.12 ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM (EGPWS) - Honeywell MK V

(Option - CR 831 CH 00064 or CR 831 SO 90180)

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to Supplement 64 of the AFM.

In response to a EGPWS aural caution

(i.e. “SINK RATE”, “TERRAIN TERRAIN”, “DON’T SINK”, “TOO LOW - FLAPS”, “TOO LOW - GEAR”,
“CAUTION TERRAIN”, “CAUTION OBSTACLE”, “BANK ANGLE” or “GLIDESLOPE”)
the crew shall immediately assess the airplane flight path or configuration with respect to the proximity of the
ground and the PF shall take appropriate action to rectify the situation.

In response to a EGPWS aural warning

(i.e. “TOO LOW - TERRAIN”, “TERRAIN PULL UP”, “OBSTACLE PULL UP” or urgent “PULL UP”)
the PF shall immediately establish the maximum performance climb consistent with airplane configuration.
• Apply NTOP (detent) power
• Rotate to known GA attitude
• Do not change configuration until clear of terrain.

If aircraft continues to close on terrain, increase thrust and pitch attitude:

• Firewall power
• Increase pitch target sufficient to obtain positive separation from terrain, but do not allow airspeed to
decrease below V2 / VGA
• Maintain the pitch attitude that achieves V2 / VGA airspeed

If stick shaker activates and / or airspeed tape turns red (alternate symbology):
• Reduce pitch attitude sufficient to silence shaker
• Achieve an airspeed above the low speed cue.
• If close to ground, maintain pitch attitude to silence shaker
• When terrain contact no longer a factor, allow aircraft to accelerate back to V2 / VGA.

Continue to climb until clear of terrain, then:

• Reduce power and pitch attitude appropriate to the phase of flight.
• Reconfigure aircraft as necessary.

3.2.12.1 ABNORMAL APPROACH and LANDING

1) For planned abnormal approaches:

BELOW G/S Switchlight .......................................................................................................................... Press
- Inhibits glideslope warning when airplane altitude is below 1000 ft AGL.
- Confirm G/S advisory light is illuminated.
- Glideslope warning is automatically reset on a climb through 2000 ft AGL or descent through 30 ft AGL.

2) When landing with flap other than selected by the GPWS LDG FLAP selector:
GPWS FLAP OVERRIDE Switchlight ..................................................................................................... Press
- Inhibits “TOO LOW - FLAPS” announcement. Other modes not affected.
- Confirm GPWS FLAP OVERRIDE advisory light on lower half of switch is illuminated.

3) When position accuracy inadequate or when operating at airports not in terrain database:
TERRAIN INHIBIT Switchlight ................................................................................................................ Press
- Inhibits all TAD and TCF aural annunciations and visual indications on MFD
- Check MFD for TERRAIN INHIBIT message.
- Confirm INHIBIT advisory light on upper half of switch is illuminated.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-19
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

Table 3.2-13 Terrain Recovery Procedure

PF PNF
Commands “TERRAIN RECOVERY” • Sets Condition Levers to MAX
Simultaneously: • Confirms NTOP power on ED
• Selects GA • Calls “POWER SET”
• Advances Power Levers to detent • Monitors radar altimeter and calls
• Smoothly rotates aircraft to go-around attitude “TERRAIN CLOSING”
if separation from the ground is still decreasing
If Aircraft Still Closing On Terrain
• Advances Power Levers to maximum available
power (firewall)
• Increases pitch attitude sufficient to obtain posi-
tive separation from terrain
• Do Not allow airspeed to decrease below V2 / VGA
If Stick Shaker Occurs and / or Airspeed Tape Turns Red
• Immediately reduces pitch attitude to silence
shaker
• Achieves an airspeed above the low speed cue
• Adjusts pitch to return to V2 / VGA
Aircraft Climbing Away From Terrain
• Continues climb as required to safe altitude • Monitors radar altitude and baro altitude to deter-
mine when airplane is safely clear of obstacles or
terrain
• Calls “<Obstacle Clearance Alt ASI> FEET”
Once Clear of Terrain
• Reduces power and pitch attitude appropriate to • Calls “CLEAR OF TERRAIN”
the phase of flight • Advises ATC of any deviation to clearance
• Reconfigures aircraft as necessary

Do Not change gear or flap configuration until aircraft is clear of terrain.

Optimum aircraft performance (best angle of climb) occurs near 1.13 VS for the aircraft configuration, therefore,
Do Not allow the airspeed to decrease below this speed (Nominally V2 / VGA for the flap configuration).
Unlike a jet aircraft, it is not permissible to continue to increase pitch attitude until stick shaker occurs.
This is because at high power settings the propeller slipstream creates additional lift on the airframe. As a
result, the aircraft could reach a dangerously low indicated airspeed before the shaker activates.
At these very low airspeeds, the aircraft is operating on the extreme “back side” of the Lift / Drag curve with a
significant deterioration of climb capability.
Additionally, the flight controls may not retain sufficient authority to maintain control of the aircraft in turbulence
or following an engine flameout.
Jet aircraft can be flown to shaker because it provides an artificial barrier to reaching very low IAS.
Propeller aircraft normally “create” such a barrier using procedural means instead.
Restricting the aircraft to a minimum airspeed of V2 / VGA during the recovery is a natural choice as these
speeds are readily available to crew members and match optimal climb speed.
The Low Speed Cue on the Q400 aircraft has been designed to overcome the Limitations associated with the
stick shaker at high power settings and function as a visual airspeed barrier.
The cue will always display an appropriate minimum airspeed for control of the aircraft regardless of weight,
flap or power setting.
As a result, terrain recoveries can be flown using the low speed cue as an aid to preventing an unacceptable
low airspeed condition.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-20 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.2.13 TRAFFIC ALERT & COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS)

In reference to a TCAS Traffic Advisory (TA), both pilots should locate the traffic on the MFD (yellow filled dia-
mond) then the PNF should look outside for the traffic.
The PF will continue to monitor the MFD for any changes in traffic flight path or new traffic and direct the PNF
where to look for the traffic.
Should the PNF become visual with the traffic, the PNF should inform the PF and continue to monitor this traffic
as well as look for others.
The PF should continue to monitor the MFD for any changes in traffic flight path or new traffic.
The PNF should also request / advise ATC of any flight path changes requested by the PF in order to avoid the
traffic.
In the event the TA changes to a Resolution Advisory (RA), the PF should take whatever Resolution Advisory
climb or descent is directed by the TCAS.
Disconnect the autopilot and immediately adjust the flight profile.
The PNF should continue to look for the traffic and ensure the PF has met the RA directed by TCAS.
The PNF shall also advise ATC of any change in assigned altitude using the standard terminology:
“TCAS CLIMB (or DESCENT)”.
Once clear of the conflict and the RA is cancelled, the PF shall return the airplane to the original assigned alti-
tude as promptly as possible.
The PNF will then report the completion of the maneuver to ATC using the terminology:
“TCAS CLIMB (or DESCENT) COMPLETED, (assigned clearance) RESUMED”.

NOTE: The following procedures correspond to:

- AFM Supplement 33 (ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL)
- AFM Supplement 106 (ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS)

[Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL]

NOTE: GPWS alert takes priority over an ACAS RA.

[Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS]

NOTE: GPWS alert takes priority over an TCAS TA / RA.

CAUTION: If stall warning (stickshaker) occurs during an RA maneuver, take immediate stall
recovery action.

CAUTION: If a threat aircraft track or altitude information is lost during an RA, the RA will
terminate without a “CLEAR OF CONFLICT” announcement.

3.2.13.1 Mode S Transponder Failure

[Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - HONEYWELL]

(TCAS FAIL Displayed on PFD)
ATC / TCAS Page on ARCDU ........................................................................ ATC 1 or ATC 2 as appropriate
If TCAS FAIL message remains displayed on PFD:
ATC / TCAS Page on ARCDU ........................................................................................................ Select SBY

[Option: ACAS II / TCAS II - ACSS]

(TCAS STBY Displayed on PFD and ATC FAIL Displayed for Selected ATC on ARCDU)
TCAS / ATC Page on ARCDU ........................................................................ ATC 1 or ATC 2 as appropriate

3.2.14 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS)

For specific FMS operational information, please refer to the respective AFM Supplement and the FMS Opera-
tor’s Manual.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-21
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.15 OPERATION WITH ONE INOPERATIVE STALL WARNING and / or STICK PUSHER SYSTEM

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to Supplement 11 of the AFM.

3.2.15.1 General

The general information in Chapter 0 is applicable with the addition of the following:

This procedure is applicable only when used in conjunction with a Minimum Equipment List approved by the
appropriate authority.

3.2.15.2 Limitations

The Limitations in Chapter 1 are applicable with the addition of the following:

1. One stall warning system must be operative.

2. The inoperative stall warning system and / or stick pusher system must be disabled using an approved
MEL maintenance procedure.

NOTE: Operation of the stick pusher system is dependent upon operation of both stall warning
systems.
In the event of an inoperative stall warning system, the stick pusher system must also be
disabled.

3. The maximum aft center of gravity limit is 20% of MAC (Mean Aerodynamic Chord)

4. With the exception of V2, Enroute Climb and Go Around speeds:

Minimum airspeed is 1.23 VSR for all flap settings or the appropriate airspeed for icing conditions and other
failures if applicable.

3.2.15.3 Abnormal Procedures

The abnormal procedures in this Chapter are applicable with the addition of the following:

# 1 STALL WARNING or # 2 STALL WARNING SYSTEM FAILURE

(Illumination of # 1 STALL SYST FAIL or # 2 STALL SYST FAIL Caution Light):

Autopilot .......................................................................................................................................... Disengage

- Icing conditions should be avoided
- Maintain a minimum airspeed of 1.23 VSR for all flap settings or the appropriate airspeed for icing conditions
and other failures if applicable

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-22 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.2.16 OPERATION WITH INOPERATIVE NOSEWHEEL STEERING SYSTEM

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to Supplement 8 of the AFM.

3.2.16.1 General

The general information in Chapter 0 is applicable with the addition of the following:
This Supplement is applicable only when used in conjunction with a Minimum Equipment List approved by the
appropriate authority.

3.2.16.2 Limitations

The Limitations in Chapter 1 and the Supplement Compatibility Table in Sub-Section 1.5 of the AFM are appli-
cable with the addition of the following:
1. Take-off or landing in crosswinds exceeding 25 kt is prohibited.
2. Take-off or landing on a contaminated runway is prohibited.

3.2.16.3 Normal Procedures

The normal procedures in Chapter 2 are applicable with the addition of the following:

STEERING Switch ...................................................................................................................................... OFF

Check NOSE STEERING caution light out.

- Taxi the airplane using differential braking and power.

- Maneuver the airplane at a reduced taxi speed.
- Avoid tight turns.

CAUTION: Tight turns may cause the nosewheel to castor to a greater than desired steering angle,
making it difficult to return to the centre position.

NOTE: During the initial take-off roll, aggressive asymmetric braking may be required to maintain the
desired aircraft heading.
This action is more likely to be required in crosswind conditions.

3.2.16.4 Abnormal Procedures

The abnormal procedures in this Chapter are applicable with the exception of the Sub-Chapter 3.1.11.5 NOSE-
WHEEL STEERING failure.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-23
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.17 OPERATION WITH INOPERATIVE ANTI-SKID BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

NOTE: This Chapter corresponds to Supplement 7 of the AFM.

3.2.17.1 General
The general information in Chapter 0 is applicable with the addition of the following:
This Supplement is applicable only when used in conjunction with a Minimum Equipment List approved by the
appropriate authority.

3.2.17.2 Limitations
The Limitations in Chapter 1 and the Supplement Compatibility Table in Sub-Section 1.5 of the AFM are appli-
cable with the addition of the following:
• Take-off on wet runways is not permitted.

3.2.17.3 Normal Procedures

The normal procedures in Chapter 2 are applicable with the addition of the following:
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PREPARATION - POWER ON - FIRST OFFICER
ANTI-SKID Switch ...................................................................................................................................... OFF
NORMAL LANDING
Pedal Brakes .................................................................................... Apply Brakes using Manual Technique
NOTE: For maximum deceleration with no anti-skid control, brake should be applied intermittently,
with the duration of each application approximately 1 s with intervals of reduced braking as
brief as possible.
CAUTION: Excessive application of pedal brakes can result in skidding and tire failure.

3.2.17.4 Abnormal Procedures

The abnormal procedures in Chapter 3 are applicable with the addition of the following:
BRAKE ANTI-SKID FAILURE (Illumination of INBD ANTI-SKID or OUTBD ANTI-SKID Caution Light)
This procedure is not applicable.

3.2.17.4.1 Engine Failure or Fire during Take-off before V1

Both POWER Levers ................................................................................................................................ DISC

Simultaneously:
BRAKING ............................................................................... Apply Pedal Brakes using Manual Technique

NOTE: For maximum deceleration with no anti-skid control, brakes should be applied intermittently,
with the duration of each application approximately 1 s, with intervals of reduced braking as
brief as possible.

CAUTION: Excessive application of pedal brakes can result in skidding and tire failure.

NOTE: Reverse thrust may be used, commensurate with directional control.

ENGINE FIRE
Carry out ON GROUND EMERGENCIES procedure after airplane has stopped (Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.12).

3.2.17.5 Performance Data

NOTE: The performance data in Chapter 4.12 (AOM Supplement 11) and compatible AFM
Supplement 7 are applicable.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.2-24 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.2.18 OPERATION WITH INOPERATIVE FLIGHT SPOILERS IN GROUND MODE

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to Supplement 17 of the AFM.

3.2.18.1 General

3.2.18.2 Limitations

The Limitations in Chapter 1 and the Supplement Compatibility Table in Sub-Section 1.5 of the AFM are appli-
cable with the addition of the following:
1. Take-off on a wet runway is prohibited.

3.2.18.3 Normal Procedures

The normal procedures in Chapter 2 are applicable with the addition of the following:
SPOILERS ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD advisory lights will not illuminate.
With the SPOILERS FLIGHT TAXI switch at FLIGHT, the INBD ROLL SPLR GND and OUTBD ROLL SPLR
GND caution lights will be illuminated.

3.2.18.4 Abnormal Procedures

The abnormal procedures in Chapter 3 are applicable with the addition of the following:
SPOILERS ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD advisory lights will not illuminate.
With the SPOILERS FLIGHT TAXI switch at FLIGHT, the INBD ROLL SPLR GND and OUTBD ROLL SPLR
GND caution lights will be illuminated.

3.2.18.5 Performance Data

The performance data in Chapter 4 and compatible Supplements are applicable with the addition of the follow-
ing:

NOTE: Compatible Supplement performance penalties are cumulative.

NOTE: Where applicable, the performance factor of this Supplement must be applied to the
calculated performance data of a compatible Supplement.

ACCELEARATE-STOP DISTANCE REQUIRED

The accelerate stop distance required flap 5° is increased by 3%, flap 10° is increased by 4% and flap 15° is
increased by 5%.

LANDING FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED

The landing field length required flap 10° is increased by 8%, flap 15° is increased by 15% and flap 35° is
increased by 20%.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.2-25
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.2.19 OPERATION WITH LANDING GEAR EXTENDED

NOTE: This procedure corresponds to Supplement 94 of the AFM.

3.2.19.1 General

The general information in Chapter 0 is applicable with the addition of the following:
In conjunction with a Minimum Equipment List, approved by local airworthiness authorities and subject to com-
pliance with the limitations outlined in Sub-Chapter 1.10.3 and the operating procedures that follow, the air-
plane may be operated with the landing gear extended.
The performance penalties outlined in Sub-Chapter 4.8.2 will apply, likewise the Flight Planning Data of Sub-
Chapter 4.8.2.1.

NOTE: The data as in Sub-Chapter 4.8.2 and 4.8.2.1 may also be used as a reference for those
situations, when the landing gear will fail to retract after take-off and when a landing at the
departure airport will not be possible.
In this case an in-flight calculation of Flight Time and Trip Fuel to the next suitable aerodrome
will be required.

3.2.19.2 Emergency Procedures

The emergency procedures in Chapter 3 are applicable with the addition of the following:

3.2.19.2.1 Engine Failure / Fire After V1

Positive rate of climb:
LANDING GEAR Lever ..................................................................................................................... Leave DN

3.2.19.2.2 Engine Failure on Approach-Go-Around

Positive rate of climb:
LANDING GEAR Lever ..................................................................................................................... Leave DN

3.2.19.3 Normal Procedures

The Normal Procedures in Chapter 2 are applicable with the addition of the following:

3.2.19.3.1 Before Entering the Airplane

- Check landing gear pins are installed, secured and the flags removed.
- Check nose gear lock is engaged.
- Check landing gear doors closed.

3.2.19.3.2 After Take-Off

LANDING GEAR Lever ..................................................................................................................... Leave DN
Check 3 green gear locked down advisory lights are illuminated,
all amber doors open,
red gear unlocked and
selector lever advisory lights out.

3.2.19.3.3 Go-Around From Final Approach

Positive rate of climb:
LANDING GEAR Lever ..................................................................................................................... Leave DN

AOM DASH 8-Q400

THIS PAGE

I NT E N T ION A L L Y

LEFT

BLANK
CHAPTER 3 3.3-1
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.3 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS

3.3.1 General
Airplane operations in adverse weather such as windshear, icing, severe turbulence, contaminated runways
and crosswinds add variables to the normal operations.
When applicable, follow the supplemental procedures in this section.

3.3.2 WINDSHEAR

3.3.2.1 Background
Windshear is defined as a sudden change in air mass direction and speed lasting for a measurable period of
time (as opposed to simple turbulence).
Knowledge of how windshear affects aircraft performance is essential to the application of the proper vertical
flight path control techniques during an inadvertent windshear encounter.
While many windshear encounters have been related to weather fronts, strong surface winds, mountain
waves, etc, the worst encounters have involved wet microburst / downburst phenomena associated with thun-
derstorms.
A microburst or downburst is a shaft of high velocity air moving down from the core of a convective cloud to the
ground where it spreads out in a gust front in all directions.
The wind component is mostly horizontal at altitudes below 500 ft.
Horizontal windshear may improve or degrade vertical flight path performance.
Performance improving windshear will first be indicated in the flight compartment by an increasing airspeed.
Performance improving windshear may be a precursor of a shear that will decrease airspeed and degrade ver-
tical flight path performance.
Accordingly, when windshear is suspected, avoid large power reductions and excessive trim changes in
response to sudden airspeed increases as these may be followed quickly by sudden decreases.
All events will not be in the classic mould of symmetrical outflows as described above. In fact, they can vary to
the extent that the first recognizable encounter might be the decreasing performance tailwind shear.
Crew actions are divided into 3 areas: Avoidance, Precautions and Recovery.

3.3.2.2 Windshear Avoidance

Carefully assess all available information such as pilot reports of windshear or turbulence, low level windshear
alerts and weather reports, including thunderstorm and virga activity.
Avoid areas of known severe windshear.
If severe windshear is indicated, delay take-off or do not continue an approach until conditions improve.
All crews should broadcast any instances of airspeed fluctuation when shear is encountered.
One aircraft, upon entering the outflow area of a downburst, may encounter airspeed fluctuations, but no signif-
icant control problems.
Another aircraft on the same flight path a few minutes later, may experience airspeed changes many times
greater than the previous aircraft, accompanied by marked performance degradation and handling difficulties.

3.3.2.3 Windshear Precautions - Take-off

Do Not use a reduced power take-off; use normal take-off power if there are any reports of windshear in the
area.
Use the longest suitable runway, provided it is clear of areas of known windshear.
Be alert for airspeed fluctuations during take-off and initial climb.
Airspeed fluctuations may be the first indication of windshear.
Rotate at the normal pitch rate to the normal take-off pitch attitude.
Minimize reductions from this initial attitude until terrain and obstacle clearance is assured.
Crews should develop an awareness of the normal values of airspeed, attitude, vertical speed and accelera-
tion.
Vertical flight path instruments such as vertical speed indicators and altimeters should be closely monitored.
The PNF (Pilot Not Flying) should call out any deviations from normal.
If the PF (Pilot Flying) feels that vertical flight path control is marginal at any time the PF will call “WINDS-
HEAR” and carry out the in-flight recovery maneuver outlined below.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.3-2 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.3.2.4 Windshear Precautions - Approach

Utilize all available means in the flight compartment that might indicate the presence of windshear such as
visual indications, pilot reports, radar and flight instruments.
Select the minimum approach / landing flap position consistent with field length and WAT (Weight Altitude Tem-
perature).
Limit and add an appropriate wind correction to VAPP (correction applied in the same manner as gust correc-
tion).
Avoid large power reductions or trim changes in response to sudden airspeed increases as these may be fol-
lowed by airspeed decreases.
Closely monitor the vertical flight path instruments, specifically vertical speed, altimeters and glideslope indica-
tors - increasing the normal cross check between these instruments and the flight director commands.
In this regard, crew coordination is most important, especially at night or in marginal weather conditions.
The PNF should be ready to promptly call out any deviation from normal.
If the PF feels that vertical flight path control is marginal at any time the PF will call “WINDSHEAR” and carry
out the in-flight recovery maneuver outlined below.

3.3.2.5 Windshear In-Flight Recovery - Maneuver

The flight crew must make the determination of marginal flight path control using all the information available in
the flight compartment and react promptly.
This determination is subjective and based on the pilots' judgment of the situation.

As a guideline, marginal flight path control may be indicated by uncontrolled changes from normal steady state
flight conditions in excess of:
• 10 kt indicated airspeed
• 500 ft/min vertical speed
• 5° pitch attitude
• 1 dot displacement from the glideslope

The following action is recommended when preventative action is not successful, or whenever flight path con-
trol becomes marginal below 500 ft above the ground on take-off or landing:
• Initial response - Apply NTOP (detent) power / Rotate to known GA (Go Around) attitude
Provides a fixed pitch target in turbulence
• Do Not change configuration unless flight path under control.

Aircraft still descending:

• Increase thrust and pitch attitude
- Firewall power
- Increase pitch target sufficient to stop descent, but Do Not allow airspeed to decrease below V2 / VGA
- Maintain the pitch attitude that achieves V2 / VGA airspeed
• Stick shaker activates and / or airspeed tape turns red:
Should the stick shaker activate and / or airspeed tape turn red in turbulence (Alternate Symbology air-
craft), immediately reduce the pitch attitude sufficient to silence the shaker and achieve an airspeed above
the low speed cue.
In the event this should occur close to the ground, maintain the pitch attitude which silences the shaker,
until terrain contact is no longer a factor, then allow the aircraft to accelerate back to V2 / VGA.
• Continue climb until clear of terrain.

Clear of terrain:
• Reduce power and pitch attitude appropriate to the phase of flight.
• Reconfigure aircraft as necessary.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.3-3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 18] 21 NOV 2016

3.3.2.6 Windshear In-Flight Recovery Procedure

PF PNF
Commands “WINDSHEAR”
Simultaneously select GA, advance Power Levers to
detent and smoothly rotate aircraft to GA attitude Sets Condition Levers to MAX
Confirms NTOP power on ED
Calls “POWER SET”
Monitor radar altimeter and IVSI,
Calls “<radar altitude> FEET CLIMBING” or
“<radar altitude> FEET DESCENDING”
Aircraft Still Descending
Advance Power Levers to maximum available power
(firewall)
Increase pitch attitude sufficient to stop descent.
Do not allow airspeed to decrease below V2 / VGA
If Stick Shaker Occurs and / or Airspeed Tape Turns Red
Immediately reduce pitch attitude to silence shaker
and achieve an airspeed above the low speed cue
then adjust pitch to return to V2 / VGA
Aircraft Climbing Away From Terrain
Continue climb as required to safe altitude
Monitors radar altitude and baro altitude to deter-
mine when airplane is safely clear of obstacles or
terrain
Calls “<obstacle clearance alt ASL> FEET”
Once Clear of Terrain
Reduce power and pitch attitude appropriate to the
phase of flight
Reconfigure aircraft as necessary Calls “CLEAR OF TERRAIN”
Advise ATC of any deviation to clearance

Do Not change gear or flap configuration if the vertical flight path is not under control.
Optimum aircraft performance (best angle of climb) occurs near 1.13 VS for the aircraft configuration, therefore,
Do Not allow the airspeed to decrease below this speed (Nominally V2 / VGA for the flap configuration).
Unlike a jet aircraft, it is not permissible to continue to increase pitch attitude until stick shaker occurs.
This is because at high power settings the propeller slipstream creates additional lift on the airframe. As a
result, the aircraft could reach a dangerously low indicated airspeed before the shaker activates.
At these very low airspeeds, the aircraft is operating on the extreme “back side” of the Lift / Drag curve with a
significant deterioration of climb capability.
Additionally, the flight controls may not retain sufficient authority to maintain control of the aircraft in turbulence
or following an engine flameout.
Jet aircraft can be flown to shaker because it provides an artificial barrier to reaching very low IAS.
Propeller aircraft normally “create” such a barrier using procedural means instead.
Restricting the aircraft to a minimum airspeed of V2 / VGA during the recovery is a natural choice as these
speeds are readily available to crew members and match optimal climb speed.
The Low Speed Cue on the Q400 aircraft has been designed to overcome the limitations associated with the
stick shaker at high power settings and function as a visual airspeed barrier.
The cue will always display an appropriate minimum airspeed for control of the aircraft regardless of weight,
flap or power setting.
As a result, windshear recoveries can be flown using the low speed cue as an aid to preventing an unaccept-
able low airspeed condition.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.3-4 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.3.3 TURBULENCE
Turbulence can be encountered at any flight level at any time of day or night.
The table below shows the FAA definition of the different levels of turbulence.

Table 3.3-1 Turbulence Definitions and Reports

INTENSITY AIRPLANE REACTION REACTION INSIDE AC
Turbulence that momentarily causes slight, erratic Occupants may feel a slight strain
changes in altitude and / or attitude. against seat belts or shoulder straps.
Report as Light Turbulence;* Unsecured objects may be displaced
Light or slightly.
Turbulence that causes slight, rapid and somewhat Food service may be conducted and
rhythmic bumpiness without appreciable changes in little or no difficulty is encountered in
altitude or attitude. Report as Light Chop. walking.
Turbulence that is similar to Light Turbulence but of Occupants feel definite strains
greater intensity. against seat belts or shoulder straps.
Changes in altitude and / or attitude occur but the Unsecured objects are dislodged.
airplane remains in positive control at all times. Food service and walking are difficult
It usually causes variations in indicated airspeed.
Moderate Report as Moderate Turbulence *
or
Turbulence that is similar to Light Chop but of
greater intensity. It causes rapid bumps or jolts with-
out appreciable changes in altitude or attitude.
Report as Moderate Chop.
Turbulence that causes large, abrupt changes in Occupants are forced violently
altitude and / or attitude. against seat belts or shoulder straps.
Severe It usually causes large variations in indicated air- Unsecured objects are tossed about.
speed. Airplane may be momentarily out of control. Food service and walking are impos-
Report as Severe Turbulence sible.
Turbulence in which the airplane is violently tossed
about and is practically impossible to control.
Extreme
It may cause structural damage.
Report as Extreme Turbulence.
Occasional - Less than 1/3 of the time.
Intermittent - 1/3 to 2/3
Continuous - More than 2/3
* High level turbulence (normally above 15000 ft ASL) not associated with cumulus form clouds should be
reported as Clear Air Turbulence (CAT) preceded by the appropriate intensity or light or moderate chop.

3.3.3.1 Avoidance
As with all weather hazards, the best action is to stay away from turbulence.
Areas of severe or extreme turbulence may be reported by SIGMETS, ATC or pilot reports.
Areas of severe and extreme turbulence are known to exist:
• Near Frontal Activity
• Near the Jetstream
• On the leeward side of mountains
• In Areas of Convective Activity
Convective activity will produce turbulence within the convective formation, underneath the formation (some-
times in the form of a microburst), or above it.
Weather radar can be used to stay away from areas of heavy convective build up.
Areas of strong build up should be avoided by at least 20 NM and topped by at least 2000 ft.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.3-5
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.3.3.2 Severe Turbulence Encounter

If severe turbulence is encountered:

• Disengage the autopilot.
• Maintain control of the airplane by primary reference to attitude (ADI).
• Allow airspeed and altitude to fluctuate as required.
• Avoid sudden or large power and control inputs.
• Reduce IAS to Rough Air Speed
• Avoid use of large bank angles due to increased wing loading
Report any severe or extreme turbulence to so that other pilots know of the hazard.

3.3.4 WAKE TURBULENCE

Wake turbulence is caused by wing tip vortices.

When an airfoil creates lift, it causes wing tip vortices.
The higher pressure below the wing will try to equalize with the lower pressure on top.
The air will do this by moving around the wing tip from the bottom to the top in a swirling movement, causing
vortices.
The vortices are strongest when the airplane is heavy, slow and clean (flaps and slats retracted).

3.3.4.1 Induced Roll Control Factors

The usual hazard associated with induced rolling moments is exceeding the roll-control capability of the air-
plane.
The governing factor in the ability for the airplane to counter control the roll tendency is the wingspan and con-
trol responsiveness of the airplane.
The shorter the wingspan of the airplane relative to the generating airplane, the more difficult it will be to coun-
teract the rolling tendencies.

3.3.4.2 Induced Pitch Control Factors

When an airplane crosses the wake of another airplane, it will experience pitching motions and vertical loads
quite similar to a gust encounter.
Crosstrack penetration, whether it is a clockwise vortex penetration or counter-clockwise vortex penetration,
typically lasts a very short time.
This minimizes the effects of the vortex.
Pilots normally do not lose control of the airplane, but structural loads and loss of altitude can create hazards.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.3-6 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.3.4.3 Vortex Behavior

Because vortices are a by-product of lift, they are made from the time the airplane leaves the ground until it
touches down again.
Before take-off or touchdown, pilots should note the rotation or touchdown point of the preceding airplane.
Vortices from larger airplanes sink at a rate of several hundreds ft/min, slowing their descent and diminishing in
strength with time and distance behind the generating airplane.
Atmospheric turbulence hastens breakup.
Pilots should fly at or above the preceding airplane’s path, changing course as necessary to stay away from
the area behind and below the airplane.
A vertical separation of 1000 ft may be considered safe.
When vortices of larger airplanes sink close to the ground (within 100 to 200 ft), they move laterally over the
ground at a speed of about 5 kt.
A crosswind will slow the lateral movement of the upwind vortex and increase the movement of the downwind
vortex.
A light wind with a cross runway component of 1 to 5 kt could keep the upwind vortex in the touchdown zone
for a period of time and increase the drift of the downwind vortices toward another runway.
A tailwind condition can move the vortices of the preceding airplane forward into the touchdown zone.
The light quartering tailwind is the most concern.
Pilots should be alert to large airplanes upwind from their approach and take-off flight paths.

3.3.4.4 Considerations
• Be aware of wake turbulence when holding near a runway.
• Before crossing a runway, wait a few minutes after a large airplane has taken off or landed.
• When taking off behind a larger airplane plan to rotate before the larger airplane’s rotation point.
• Climb above and upwind of the larger airplane’s climb path until clear of its wake.
• Do Not fly below and behind a large airplane’s flight path.
• If landing after a departing airplane, touchdown before its rotation point.
• If landing after a large airplane, stay above the other airplane’s path and land after its touchdown point.
• When landing after a large airplane on a parallel runway closer than 2500 ft, beware of possible drifting of
the vortex to your runway.

NOTE: ATC will provide separation for airplane, but it is still the pilot’s responsibility to avoid wake
turbulence.

3.3.5 VOLCANIC ASH

Flight in volcanic ash can cause damage to airplane surfaces and engines.
Engine failures are a common result of flight in volcanic ash.
Airplane heat, hydraulic and electrical systems can also be contaminated.
Volcanic ash is heavy, and large quantities of contamination can have an unwanted effect on airplane mass
and balance.
Aviation radar is not good at finding volcanic ash clouds.
Ash from volcanic eruptions can quickly reach 60000 ft and be blown more than 2400 NM.
Pilots must not enter visible volcanic ash clouds.
There is an increased risk of entering volcanic ash at night or in instrument conditions.
If a given area has any reported risk of volcanic ash, it must not be entered until it is found to be safe.
St. Elmo’s fire will usually occur if flying in volcanic ash at night.
Pilots must leave the area quickly if they fly into volcanic ash.
Report any volcanic ash or eruption seen to ATC.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-1
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.4 SPECIAL PROCEDURES

3.4.1 FLIGHT TEST PROCEDURES

3.4.1.1 Introduction

Procedures presented under this Sub-Chapter may only be used for NON-COMMERCIAL FLIGHT OPERA-
TIONS.
These procedures are not covered by approved supplements to the Airplane Flight Manual.
Depending upon local requirements, an individual flight permit may be needed from the competent authority.

3.4.1.2 General

Flight test procedures are special operating checks not routinely performed every flight and are accomplished
when certain airplane systems are to be tested for proper operation in flight.
The following recommended procedures must be adhered to, in order to ensure the safe conduct of the func-
tional test to be performed.

3.4.1.3 Aileron Trim Flight Test Procedure

NOTE: Paper measuring tape must be applied to control wheel as per AMM TASK 27-13-11- 830-803
to measure control wheel angle.
The paper measuring tape is an 82% reduction and consequently the increments are not true
inches.

Aircraft ................................................................................................................................ Straight and Level

Airspeed ................................................................................................................................................... 200 kt
AP / YD .............................................................................................................................................. Push OFF
SPLR 1 and SPLR 2 .......................................................................................................................... Push OFF
ROLL SPLR INBD HYD, ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD and SPLR OUTBD caution lights illuminate.
Confirm inboard and outboard spoilers indicate fully retracted on PFCS display.
Rudder ........................................................................................................................................................ Trim
Trim ball centred with feet off the rudders.
Aileron ........................................................................................................................................................ Trim
Trim wings level with hands off the control wheel.
Record aileron trim and wheel position in the Table below:

Item 200 KIAS 260 KIAS Limits

Flight #
Aileron Trim ± 0.5 divisions
Wheel Position 8 ± 1/32 in

NOTE: The paper tape utilizes the 2 in section between 7 and 9 in.
8 in are used as a centre line reference only.

CAUTION: If aileron trim is greater than 0.75 division airspeed must be limited to 200 KIAS for
remainder of flight.
If aileron trim is between 0.5 and 0.75 divisions, airspeed must be limited to the
airspeed at which 1 1/2 divisions of trim is required to maintain wings level.

Airspeed .............................................................................................................................................. Increase

Increase airspeed to 260 kt in level flight.
Confirm no unusual airframe vibrations.
Record aileron trim and wheel position once again.
SPLR 1 and SPLR 2 ............................................................................................................................ Push ON
ROLL SPLR INBD HYD, ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD and SPLR OUTBD caution lights go out.
YD ................................................................................................................................................................. ON

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-2 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.2 SUPPLEMENTAL PROCEDURES

3.4.2.1 Introduction

Procedures presented under this Sub-Chapter are not covered by the approved Airplane Flight Manual.
Local regulatory approval may be required.

3.4.2.2 General

Where corrective action to the affected system, has not been implemented through a modification and / or Ser-
vice Bulletin, the following procedures provide the means to reset specific nuisance caution lights, advisory
messages or system faults.

The following general procedures MUST be adhered to in order to ensure the continued safe operation of the
aircraft:
1. These procedures may only be used during ground operations;
2. Any procedure detailing the reset (pull out and push in) of circuit breakers may only be used one time for
each nuisance indication; and
3. If these procedures are not sufficient to clear the nuisance indication, then the MEL must be used if appli-
cable or the problem must be rectified prior to aircraft dispatch.

3.4.2.3 Air Conditioning, Pressurization and Pneumatics

Erroneous CABIN Temperature Indication

(Flight compartment indication of cabin temperature reads up to 9ºC higher than FA’s panel reading)

- No maintenance action required.

Operation of the ECS system is unaffected.

Erroneous Single “BLEED HOT” Caution Light

(The respective “BLEED HOT” Caution light goes out after landing)

Under certain flight conditions, the bleed control system will open the High Pressure port (P3) for short periods,
causing the respective “BLEED HOT” Caution light to illuminate.

The following procedure may be used to determine if this is a momentary event:

If the respective “BLEED HOT” Caution light goes out after landing:
Bleed Air (affected engine) ........................................................................................................................... ON
Power Lever (affected engine) ............................................................................................................ Increase
Increase to above FLT IDLE until bleed stage switching occurs.
Bleed stage switching can be observed by monitoring the appropriate de-ice pressure gauge, on the co-pilot’s
side panel, for the pressure needle to move slightly.

If the respective “BLEED HOT” Caution light illuminates:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

If the respective “BLEED HOT” Caution light does not illuminate:

- Monitor the Bleed system on subsequent flights.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

Poor ECS Temperature Control

(Recommended procedure to improve temperature control throughout the aircraft)

RECIRC Fan ................................................................................................................................................. ON

CABIN / FLT COMP PACKS ...................................................................................................................... Auto
Temp Controls ................................................................................................................................ 12 O’Clock
Bleed Selector ........................................................................................................................... NORM or MAX
Flight Compartment Gasper Vents (4 places) .............................................................................. Fully Open
Flight Compartment / Side Window De-Mist Flow Control Levers ............................................ Fully Open
- Wait at least 5 min for compartment temperatures to stabilize

If a temperature adjustment is required:

Temp Control ..................................................................................................... Adjust by a Small Increment
- Wait at least 5 min for compartment temperatures to re-stabilize before making a further adjustment

Hot Cabin During Boarding

(Recommended procedure to minimize overheating the cabin during boarding in cold weather)

RECIRC Fan ................................................................................................................................................. ON

CABIN / FLT COMP PACKS ...................................................................................................................... Auto
Temp Controls ................................................................................................................................ 12 O’Clock
Bleed Selector ........................................................................................................................... NORM or MAX
Flight Compartment Gasper Vents (4 places) .............................................................................. Fully Open
Flight Compartment / Side Window De-Mist Flow Control Levers ............................................ Fully Open
Flight Compartment Door ..................................................................................................................... Closed
- To avoid overheating the cabin, maintain temperature controls at 12 o’clock.
Compartment temperatures will stabilize after passenger doors are closed.

Cold Soaked Aircraft

(Recommended procedure to heat aircraft cabin after the aircraft has been cold-soaked overnight)

RECIRC Fan ................................................................................................................................................. ON

CABIN / FLT COMP PACKS ...................................................................................................................... Auto
Temp Controls ................................................................................................................................ 12 O’Clock
APU Bleed .................................................................................................................................................... ON
Flight Compartment Gasper Vents (4 places) .............................................................................. Fully Open
Flight Compartment / Side Window De-Mist Flow Control Levers ............................................ Fully Open
Flight Compartment Door ..................................................................................................................... Closed
- Maintain temperature control at 12 o’clock until compartment temperatures have stabilized.
- To avoid duct temperature overshoots and triggering a DUCT HOT caution light, Do Not select Packs to
MAN.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-4 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.2.4 APU, Engines and Propellers

Overspeed Governor Test

- Position aircraft into wind.

Power Levers ................................................................................................................................... Flight Idle

Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX

Prop O’Speed Governor Test ...................................................................................................... Hold at Test

- Wait for OSG TEST IN PROG message on ED

Power Levers ......................................................... Slowly advance until OSG TEST PASS appears on ED

NOTE: Test must be completed within 60 s of OSG TEST IN PROG appearing on ED.

Power Levers ................................................................................................................................... Flight Idle

Prop O’Speed Governor Test ............................................................................................................. Release

If POWERPLANT and OSG TEST ABORT or OSG TEST FAIL messages appear on the ED:
- Repeat overspeed governor test to achieve pass.

NOTE: If the overspeed governor test fails, the # 1 PEC or # 2 PEC caution light will come on in
addition to the OSG TEST FAIL message.

If POWERPLANT and OSG TEST FAIL messages appear again on the ED:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-5
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

Continuous Illumination of Engine SELECT Light

(Fault Isolation)

NOTE: Pilots may perform this fault isolation procedure, on the ground only, to reset the Engine
SELECT Light, under the guidance of maintenance and in accordance with their approved
maintenance program.

- With both engines running, ensure the electrical system is in normal configuration.

NOTE: If SELECT Light illuminates after the start of the first engine, continue with the start sequence
of the second engine and then accomplish the procedure below.

DC External Power ..................................................................................................................................... OFF

AC External Power ..................................................................................................................................... OFF

- Check # 1 and # 2 DC GEN Caution lights are not illuminated.

Bus Fault Reset Switch .......................................................................................................................... Reset

Engine SELECT Light remains illuminated:

Shutdown Procedure (below) ................................................................................................ Accomplish

- END -
Engine SELECT Light goes out:
# 1 DC Gen Switch ................................................................................................................ OFF then ON

Engine SELECT Light illuminates:

Shutdown Procedure (below) ......................................................................................... Accomplish

- END -
Engine SELECT Light does not illuminate:
# 2 DC Gen Switch ......................................................................................................... OFF then ON

Engine SELECT Light illuminates:

Shutdown Procedure (below) ................................................................................... Accomplish

- END -

Engine SELECT Light does not illuminate: Aircraft is serviceable.

------------- END -------------

SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE (If Engine SELECT Light remains Illuminated)

Main, AUX and STBY Batteries ................................................................................................................. OFF

Condition Levers ............................................................................................................................. FUEL OFF

APU Power .................................................................................................................................................. OFF

- Carry out the remaining portions of Normal Shutdown procedure.

NOTE: Maintenance action required prior to next flight.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-6 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.2.5 Autoflight, Flight Instruments and Navigation

“DU BAD CONF”

(Message on ED)
(Message appears after displays powering on)

PFD 1 and 2, MFD 1 and 2, and ED ...................................................................... OFF then ON (one at a time)

NOTE: Wait 30 s for self-test to complete on each individual display before selecting the next display ON

If message remains on:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

Erroneous SAT Indications

(SAT differs from reported OAT by more than ± 2°C)

Monitor SAT indication during taxi with # 1 engine operating and propeller selected out of feather.

If erroneous indications remain:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

“ALT”
(Red annunciation on ARCDU ATC display area)
(Annunciation appeared on ARCDU main page ATC area during climb or descent.)

NOTE: A red “FAIL” annunciation is also displayed in the ALT and TCAS display areas
on the TCAS / ATC expanded page.

If annunciation remained on after aircraft levelled off:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

“FANS FAIL”
(Message on ED)
(Message appears after starting an engine in an aircraft with a cold flight compartment)

Monitor message as flight compartment warms.

If message remains on after flight compartment temperature rises:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

NOTE: FANS FAIL message will clear when flight compartment temperature sensors warm above 5°C.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-7
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015

Weather Radar Display Frozen

(Weather radar data on MFD did not appear to update or respond to control panel inputs)

- Position aircraft so as to ensure that no ground personnel, equipment, aircraft, vehicles or buildings are in
the radar scan area within 300 ft (100 m).

WARNING: Exposure to microwave radiation may cause serious bodily injury to personnel or
ignite combustible materials.

WX Radar ............................................................................................................... OFF, Wait 20 s, then STBY

WX Radar .................................................................................................................................................... TST

- Confirm yellow WX TEST and STAB OFF mode messages are annunciated and weather radar test pattern
is displayed on the MFD.

WX Radar ..................................................................................................................................................... ON

- Confirm WX ON mode is annunciated.

NOTE: A blue pattern may be displayed on the MFD, if the required 60 s warm up period has not
elapsed before the system will transmit.

TILT .......................................................................................................................................................... Adjust

- Adjust tilt to obtain targets (weather or ground) for display on the MFD.
Confirm tilt angle display changes in response to inputs.

WX Radar ................................................................................................................................................. STBY

If display data did not update or respond:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

Ghost or Mirror Images on Integrated Standby Instrument

(The ISI displays ghost or mirror images following initial application of power to the aircraft
after the aircraft has been cold-soaked)

- Wait a minimum of 5 min for the ISI to warm up.

ISI CB (Left Lower CB Panel - H1) ........................................................................................................... Reset

NOTE: Wait until ISI alignment sequence is complete.

If ghost or mirror images remain on the ISI:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-8 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015 PROCEDURES

“WX FAIL”
(Message on MFD)
(Message appeared during operation of WX radar)

- Position aircraft so as to ensure that no ground personnel, equipment, aircraft, vehicles or buildings are in
the radar scan area within 300 ft (100 m).

WARNING: Exposure to microwave radiation may cause serious bodily injury to personnel or
ignite combustible materials.

WX Radar ................................................................................................................ OFF, Wait 20 s, then STBY

WX Radar ..................................................................................................................................................... TST
- Confirm yellow WX TEST and STAB OFF mode messages are annunciated and
weather radar test pattern is displayed on the MFD.
WX Radar ...................................................................................................................................................... ON
- Confirm WX ON mode is annunciated.

NOTE: A blue pattern may be displayed on the MFD, if the required 60 s warm up period has not
elapsed before the system will transmit.

TILT ......................................................................................................................................................... Adjust

- Adjust tilt to obtain targets (weather or ground) for display on the MFD.
Confirm tilt angle display changes in response to inputs.
WX Radar .................................................................................................................................................. STBY
If display data did not update or respond:
- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

Central Diagnostic System

(Procedure to retrieve faults logged by the Central Diagnostic System)

NOTE: Pilots can interrogate the CDS and reset certain faults under the guidance of maintenance, in
accordance with their approved maintenance program.

- Open the aircraft Maintenance Panel located above the wardrobe compartment.
System Rotary Selector ............................................................................................................................ OFF
CDS GND MAINT Switch .............................................................................................................................. Up
- Confirm the CDS GND MAINT light illuminates.
- Use either ARCDU to access the CDS.
ARCDU ......................................................................................................................................... Press MAINT
- The CDS main menu is shown as follows:
AVIONICS
OTHER SYSTEMS
AVIONIC DATA
ARCDU ............................................... Press corresponding line, Select key to access desired Sub-Menu
- Repeat as required to get to the desired system faults page.
After obtaining fault data:
ARCDU .................................................................................... Press PREV to return to the CDS Main Menu
ARCDU .................................................................................................................................... Press DIM / RTN
- The ARCDU display returns to the normal Radio Tuning Page 1 / 2.
CDS GND MAINT Switch ......................................................................................................................... Down
- Confirm the CDS GND MAINT light goes out.
- Close aircraft Maintenance Panel.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-9
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015

Inoperative PA Chime
(During 1st flight of the day)

PA AMP CB (Left Upper CB Panel - B8) .................................................................................................. Reset

- Ensure PA system is operational prior to boarding.

3.4.2.6 Electrical

Tripped Circuit Breaker

(Circuit breaker(s) tripped after initial power-up of aircraft on ground)

NOTE: This procedure MUST not be used if there is a recent history of reported defects with the
system or related systems that are associated with the tripped circuit breaker(s) or if there is
other evidence of anomalies with these systems.

• Pull out tripped circuit breaker to ensure it is fully disengaged.

• Push in circuit breaker until it re-engages.

If the circuit breaker trips again:

• Do Not attempt any further resets.

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

“DC BUS”
(Caution Light)
(Associated with attempted APU start from batteries)

APU PWR .................................................................................................................................................... OFF

Bus Fault Reset ....................................................................................................................................... Reset

If DC Bus Caution Light goes out:

- Further APU start attempts may only be performed using an external DC power source.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-10 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.2.7 Flight Controls

“ROLL SPLR INBD GND” and “ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND”

(Caution Lights)
(Associated with reversal of the Flight / Taxi switch from Flight to Taxi back to Flight)

- Clear active runway and park aircraft.

Flight / Taxi ................................................................................................................................................. Taxi
FCS ECU 1 and 2 CBs
(Left Lower CB Panel - M3 and Right Lower CB Panel - L6) ........................................ Reset Simultaneously

NOTE: Wait 90 s until self-test sequence is complete before moving flight controls.

Flight Controls ................................................................................................................... Check / Full Travel

If Caution Lights remain on:
- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

Erroneous Take-off Warning Horn

(Associated with elevator trim indication near the extreme ends of the take-off range)

Elevator Trim ............................................................... Reset to ensure indication is fully within T/O range
Flap .................................................................................................................................... 5, 10 or 15 Set / Ind
Condition Levers ...................................................................................................................................... MAX
Flight / Taxi ................................................................................................................................................. Taxi
- Confirm all spoilers fully retracted.
Emerg Brake .............................................................................................................................................. OFF
T/O Warning ............................................................................................................................................... Test
If Take-off Warning Horn sounds:
- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.
Emerg Brake ................................................................................................................................................ ON

“FLAP POWER”
(Caution Light)
(Associated with movement of Flap Lever without # 1 hydraulic system pressure)

Flap Lever ..................................................................................................... Select to match Flap Indication

FLAPS CONT CB (Left Lower CB Panel - L7) .......................................................................................... Reset

NOTE: Wait 10 s for self-test to complete.

With MS 4-113547 Incorporated:

NOTE: In flight, wait 20 s for self-test to complete.

On the ground, wait 30 s for the self-test to complete.

If Caution Light remains on:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-11
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015

“RUD HYD 1” or “RUD HYD 2”

(Caution Lights)
(Caution light remains illuminated after completion of engine start)

FCS ECU 1 and 2 CBs

(Left Lower CB Panel - M3 and Right Lower CB Panel - L6) ......................................... Reset Simultaneously

NOTE: Wait 90 s until self-test sequence is complete before moving flight controls.

Flight Controls ................................................................................................................... Check / Full Travel

If Caution Light remains on:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-12 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.2.8 Hydraulic Power

AVOIDANCE OF HYDRAULIC FLUID TRANSFER

(Recommended method to apply and release Park Brake
to avoid transfer of hydraulic fluid from System 1 to System 2)

System 1 and 2 Pressure ............................................................................................................ 2900 psi MIN

Pedal Brakes ........................................................................................................................................... Apply

Park / Emerg Brake ............................................................................................................... Apply or Release

Pedal Brakes ........................................................................................................................................ Release

With MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 901473) Incorporated:

PTU “FAIL”
(Advisory Light)
(Associated with automatic or manual selection of PTU without # 1 hydraulic system pressure)

HYD PWR XFR CB (Right Lower CB Panel - L8) ..................................................................................... Reset

- Wait 5 s.

If Advisory Light remains on:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-13
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 14] 27 MAY 2015

3.4.2.9 Ice and Rain Protection / Stall Protection

“PROP DEICE”
(Caution Light)
(Associated with selection of PROP DEICE after unfeathering propellers)

Prop Selector ............................................................................................................................... OFF then ON

If Caution Light remains on:

PROP DEICE CONT CBs

(Left Lower CB Panel - L6 and Right Lower CB Panel - E5) ......................................... Reset Simultaneously

If Caution Light remains on:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight

“PUSHER SYST FAIL”

(Caution Lights)
(Associated with incomplete stall test)

- Repeat stall test to achieve pass.

If Caution Light remains on:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

With MS 4-457056 or MS 4-126263 or MS 4-125307 (V 710 Stall Protection Module) Incorporated:

“PUSHER SYST FAIL”

(Caution Light)
(Caution light illuminates 30 s after landing)

SPM 1 and SPM 2 CBs (Left Upper CB Panel - F2 and F5) ......................................... Reset Simultaneously

If Caution Light remains on:

- Maintenance action is required prior to next flight.

If Caution Light goes out:

- The flight may depart but check for illumination of the caution light after the next landing.

- Should the light re-appear, maintenance action is required prior to subsequent flight.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-14 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.2.10 Landing Gear

Brake Wear
(Braking Technique for Carbon Brakes)

The mechanisms affecting brake wear are very different for steel and carbon brake assemblies.

The number of brake applications has the biggest impact on carbon brake wear.

• Taxi:
Flight crew should avoid riding the brakes during taxi operations.
Taxi speed should be regulated primarily through the use of power (DISC).
At slow speeds, if the brakes are required, they should be used smoothly and positively applied towards
maximum pressure to enable a complete stop.

• Landing Ground Roll:

Deceleration techniques on landing will vary depending on the length of the runway and the type of avail-
able exits.
If the runway is short, it is recommended that Flight Crews apply the brakes immediately after touchdown,
coupled with aerodynamic braking through the use of DISC.
Strong, positive brake application is most effective and ensures the brakes reach their optimum operating
temperature when bringing the aircraft to an acceptable taxi speed or a complete stop.
Using the brakes for short duration and / or light application will cause premature wear.
If the runway is long, without a high speed turnoff, the aircraft will have to be at a very slow taxi speed in
order to make the 90° turn off the runway.
If the brakes are required, they should be applied ahead of the planned turn off at a distance sufficient to
achieve the desired taxi speed with the use of strong, positive brake application.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-15
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.4.2.11 Single Engine Taxi Operations

3.4.2.11.1 General

At the option of the operator, single engine taxi operations may be performed in accordance with the opera-
tional considerations and procedures contained in this section.
Operators may incorporate the information contained herein, into their flight operations documentation, as nec-
essary.

This supplemental procedure does not constitute operational approval to conduct single engine taxi opera-
tions.

3.4.2.11.2 Operational Considerations

Single engine taxi operations may be considered for use on hard surfaced taxiways and ramps with the # 2
engine operating and the # 1 engine either shutdown or running in Start & Feather.

Aircraft ground handling characteristics during single engine taxi require greater anticipation of turn direction,
turn radius, wind and varying taxiway slopes to avoid large power changes.

Turns into the operating engine may require forward momentum prior to commencing the turn.

Application of power above flight idle may be required and should be performed with regard for the effect of
propeller slipstream on surrounding objects and personnel.

Contamination of taxiway or ramp surfaces will reduce the effectiveness of nose steering and single engine taxi
should be avoided where there is any possibility of nose tire skidding.

At any time deemed necessary by the Captain, single engine taxi operations should be discontinued and the #
1 engine started to continue taxi to the runway or parking.

Single engine taxi before take-off is commenced with # 2 engine start carried out in the parking position or
during push back.

# 1 engine start is delayed until an appropriate point during taxi allowing sufficient time remaining for Pre-Take-
off Checks to be performed and engine to reach stable internal temperatures before take-off.
Although there is no formal limitation defining time between engine start and application of take-off power, pro-
vided engine oil temperature is above 0°C, Pratt and Whitney Canada (PWC) recommend a warm-up period of
at least 5 min.
This protects the mission profile assumptions used to establish engine component life limits and inspection
intervals.

Single engine taxi after landing is carried out by shutting down the # 1 engine after the aircraft is clear of the
runway and preferably after the After Landing checks have been completed.

During single engine taxi operations, in the event of a loss of # 1 hydraulic system pressure, normal braking will
be lost.
In the event of the failure of the # 2 engine, both normal braking and nose steering will be lost.
In both instances, it will be necessary to use the Emergency Brake to bring the aircraft to a stop.

Single engine taxi operations are not compatible with:

1. # 1 engine operating and # 2 engine either shutdown or running in Start & Feather;
2. The following system failures:
a. Nose wheel Steering System inoperative
b. Any Hydraulic System failure
c. Use of Alternate Landing Gear Extension
d. # 2 DC Generator inoperative
e. # 2 AC Generator inoperative

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-16 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 15] 30 OCT 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.2.11.3 Engine and Propeller Ground Operating Limitations

The limitations in Chapter 1 are applicable.

3.4.2.11.4 Normal Procedures

The normal procedures in Chapter 2 are applicable with the addition of the following:

3.4.2.11.4.1 Engine Start Procedure

After the completion of # 2 Engine Start, carry out AFTER START procedure (Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.4) with the
the following substitutions:

EXT PWR / APU .......................................................................................................................................... OFF

After # 2 Engine has started and stabilized, set the DC EXT PWR switch to OFF and make sure:
• DC EXTERNAL POWER advisory light on the MFD – Electrical Systems page goes off.
• Signal ground crew to remove external power cable.
• # 2 DC GEN caution lights goes off.

Main Bus Tie ................................................................................................................................................ ON

Bleed Air 2 ................................................................................................................................. ON / As Req’d

• Set BLEED 2 AIR CONTROL switch to 2 position.
• Turn the BLEED FLOW CONTROL rotary knob to the desired position.

Condition Lever 2 .......................................................................................................................... MAX / 1020

Move # 2 CONDITION LEVER to MAX / 1020 position and make sure:
• Propeller unfeathers and
• # 2 AC GEN, L TRU and R TRU caution lights go off.

STBY HYD PRESS ....................................................................................................................................... ON

Check STBY HYD PRESS ON advisory light illuminates.

NOTE: Do Not select PTU on until after the completion of Flap selection and Rudder Control check.

Continue with the remaining items of Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.4, AFTER START.

After flap selection and completion of Rudder Control check:

PTU CNTRL .................................................................................................................................................. ON
Check PTU CNTRL ON and PTU pressure
(with MS 4-126354 and (MS 4-901472 or MS 4-901473)) PTU CNTRL ON advisory light illuminates.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-17
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 15] 30 OCT 2015

3.4.2.11.4.2 # 1 Engine Start Procedure

Carry out the start procedure for # 1 engine (Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.3, START APPROVED - boxed items) prior to
conducting Taxi checks.
After # 1 Engine has started and stabilized, make sure:
• # 1 DC GEN caution light goes out.
MAIN BUS TIE Switch ................................................................................................................................ OFF
Bleed Air 1 ................................................................................................................................. ON / As Req’d
MAIN, AUX and STBY BATT Temperature Indications ........................................................................ Check
Check on ELECTRICAL page of MFD
Condition Lever 1 ........................................................................................................................... MAX / 1020
Move # 1 CONDITION LEVER to MAX / 1020 position and make sure:
• Propeller unfeathers and
• # 1 AC GEN caution light goes out.
NOTE: Operators may choose to commence the Taxi checks prior to starting the #1 engine, however,
Do Not select Autofeather ON or test the Take-off Warning system until after the Condition
Lever 1 is positioned to MAX/1020 following engine start.

3.4.2.11.4.3 After Landing

After completion of AFTER LANDING checks (Sub-Chapter 2.17.5.13) add the following items:
When ready to shut down the # 1 engine:
POWER Lever 1 ........................................................................................................................................ DISC
Condition Lever 1 ............................................................................................................. START & FEATHER

Allow engine to stabilize for 30 s minimum before shutdown.

BLEED 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... OFF
Condition Lever 1 ............................................................................................................................ FUEL OFF

NOTE: Operators may choose to conduct the AFTER LANDING checks after selecting the Condition
Lever 1 – START & FEATHER

3.4.2.11.5 Abnormal Procedures

The abnormal procedures in Chapter 3 are applicable with the addition of the following:

3.4.2.11.5.1 # 2 Engine Failure or No Hydraulic Pressure Indicated in # 1 Hydraulic System

During Single Engine Taxi
Both POWER Levers ................................................................................................................................ DISC
Braking ............................................................................. Attempt Normal Braking until aircraft is stopped

If aircraft cannot be stopped using normal brake application:

EMERG BRAKE Lever ................................................................... Apply Smoothly until aircraft is stopped
NOTES: 1. With # 2 Engine failed, normal wheel brakes and nosewheel steering are inoperative.
2. Emergency brake application is proportional to lever travel with no differential braking.
3. The approximate number of EMERG / PARK BRAKE applications is 6.
CAUTION: Excessive application of emergency braking can result in skidding and tire failure.

After aircraft is stopped:

EMERG BRAKE Lever ............................................................................................................................. PARK
Carry out ENGINE SHUTDOWN procedure. See Sub-Chapter 3.1.2.27.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-18 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.3 SAFETY OF FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT, ABNORMAL and EMERGENCY CHECKLISTS

3.4.3.1 Introduction

The intent of this Safety of Flight Supplement is to recommend pilot techniques associated with accomplishing
selected Abnormal and Emergency Checklists (AECs) and provide guidance for situations beyond the scope of
AECs.

Aircrews are expected to accomplish AECs listed in the QRH.

These checklists ensure maximum safety until appropriate actions are completed and a safe landing is accom-
plished.

Techniques discussed in this Safety of Flight Supplement minimize workload, improve crew coordination,
enhance safety and provide a basis for standardization.

3.4.3.2 Abnormal / Emergency Checklist Guidelines

When a non-normal situation occurs, the following guidelines apply:

• Non-Normal Recognition
- The crew member recognizing the malfunction calls it out clearly and precisely.

• Maintain Airplane Control

- It is mandatory that the Pilot Flying (PF) flies the airplane while the Pilot Monitoring (PM) accomplishes
the AEC.
Maximum use of the Flight Director / Autopilot is recommended to reduce crew workload.

• Analyze the Situation

- AECs should be accomplished only after the malfunctioning system has been positively identified.

NOTE: Pilots should don oxygen masks and establish communications anytime oxygen deprivation or
air contamination is suspected, even though an associated warning has not occurred.

• Take the Proper Action

- Although many in-flight non-normal situations may require immediate corrective action, difficulties can
be compounded by the rate the PF issues commands and the speed of execution of the PM.
- Commands must be clear and concise, allowing time for acknowledgement of each command prior to
issuing further commands.
- The PF must exercise positive control by allowing time for acknowledgment and execution.
- The other crew members must be certain their reports to the PF are clear and concise, neither exagger-
ating nor understating the nature of the non-normal situation.
This eliminates confusion and ensures efficient, effective and expeditious handling of the non-normal
situation.

• Evaluate the Need to Land

- If the AEC directs the crew to land immediately at the nearest suitable airport or if the situation is so
identified in the QRH, diversion to the nearest airport where a safe landing can be accomplished is
required.
If the AEC does not direct landing immediately at the nearest suitable airport, the pilot must determine if
continued flight to destination may compromise safety.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-19
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

3.4.3.3 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting can be defined as taking steps beyond the published checklist in an effort to improve or cor-
rect a non-normal condition.

Examples of this are as follows:

- Attempting to reset a system or cycling a circuit breaker when not prescribed by the AEC.

- Using maintenance-level information to dictate crew actions.

- Use of switches and controls intended only for maintenance.

NOTE: With the availability of today’s communication channels, there seems to be a tendency that
flight crews request help from maintenance during abnormal situations.
Clearly, maintenance crew typically Do Not have the operational background or the situational
awareness of the flight crew’s non-normal environment.
Maintenance crews will use a different methodology to handle problems that may not be
appropriate for an in-flight non-normal situation.

Troubleshooting is rarely helpful and has caused further loss of system function or failure and in some cases,
accidents and incidents.

The crew should consider additional actions beyond the checklist only when completion of the published
checklist steps clearly result in an unacceptable situation.

In the case of airplane controllability problems, when a safe landing is considered unlikely, airplane-handling
evaluations with gear and / or flaps extended may be appropriate.

Also, attempting to free jammed flight controls should only be attempted, if the airplane cannot be safely
landed with the existing condition and then, according to the AEC to the extent possible.

Crew distraction, caused by preoccupation with troubleshooting, has been a key factor in fuel starvation and
CFIT accidents.

Completion of the AEC, as published, is strongly recommended.

3.4.3.4 Abnormal Contaminated Runway Operations

There have been incidents involving Dash 8 aircraft operating from a contaminated runway, where the nose
landing gear became frozen in the retracted position.

Attempts to lower the nose landing gear using the normal and the alternate systems were unsuccessful.

The aircraft sustained minor damage when landed with the nose landing gear retracted.

The operating guidance provided in the AFM Supplement 37

(SUPPLEMENTARY PERFORMANCE INFORMATION FOR OPERATION ON CONTAMINATED RUNWAYS)
limits the maximum Water Equivalent Depth (WED) to 15 mm (0.59 in) and the maximum contaminant depth to
6 cm (2.4 in).

AFM Figure 6-37-1 provides a mean to convert the Contaminant Depth to WED for take-off.

The maximum allowable depth of slush is approximately 15 mm (0.59 in).

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-20 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

3.4.3.5 Landing Gear Failures

Structural failure of the landing gear is not covered under Type Certification, therefore, no specific AFM proce-
dure covering this malfunction is provided or required.
When it is known that a landing must be performed which could be identified as an emergency landing due to
the presence of factors which introduce a hazard to the airplane and its occupants, AFM Paragraph 3.16,
Emergency Landing, outlines the main points to be addressed as applicable.
The intent of the following is to provide a list of options that may assist the flight crew in their decision making
process.
The information presented will not always be appropriate for the conditions being experienced by the flight
crew.
Ultimately, the flight crew will have to make the final decisions given the information presented to them in the
particular emergency situation.

Normal Extension / Retraction

If the landing gear fails to extend or retract, assuming that the Normal Extension / Retraction procedures have
been actioned correctly, the following list contains known conditions that have presented the flight crew with an
abnormal landing gear configuration:
- A burnt out landing gear advisory light bulb can give a false indication that the gear is not down.
If “3 green” gear down and locked advisory lights are not observed, ensure that the light bulbs in the gear
indicator panel have been checked utilizing the Advisory / Test switch.
- Failing to use the Alternate Indication system for a landing gear down and locked confirmation.
- The Alternate Release and Extension doors not in the fully closed position prior to a normal landing gear
selection.
- The Landing Gear Inhibit switch is not in the Normal position.
Once it is determined that the normal system has failed to extend / retract the landing gear and the aircraft was
appropriately configured giving due regard to the above mentioned possible errors, the AFM directs the use of
the Alternate Extension system.

Alternate Extension

Unless covered by a specific procedure in the AFM, following a landing gear retraction or extension malfunc-
tion, the landing gear must be extended using the Alternate Landing Gear Extension procedure (see NOTE in
AFM Paragraph 4.21.1).
Cycling the landing gear as an intermediate step to achieve an all gear down and locked indication is not
approved or recommended.
As the root cause of the landing gear anomaly is unlikely to be known, cycling the landing gear may create a
more difficult landing gear configuration for the flight crew to manage.
The Alternate Extension procedure was created to provide a backup means of extending the landing gear
based on a standard set of common mode failures required for certification.
Multiple system failures, compounding failures, structural failures and / or the introduction of foreign objects are
not part of, nor required for showing certification compliance.
When using the Alternate Extension procedure, flight crews must ensure:
- The Alternate Extension and Release doors are fully open and remain fully open.
- The main and nose landing gear release handles are pulled with sufficient force (may exceed 41 kg / 90 lb)
to release the doors and uplocks (pull forces in the air will likely be greater than those experienced on the
ground or in a simulator).
Continue pulling with whatever force is necessary to achieve release of all landing gear uplocks.

NOTE: A tower “flyby” technique may be useful for confirmation of landing gear position, but is not
suitable for confirmation of landing gear down and locked condition.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-21
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

BEYOND THE NORMAL AND ALTERNATE:

There have been events where unique landing gear failures prevented the extension of the landing gear using
the normal and alternate extension systems.
These circumstances are beyond certification standards and existing AFM procedures are unlikely to provide
adequate direction for rectification of the abnormal landing gear condition.
The following flight crew procedures are offered for consideration.

NOTE: The final decision with respect to the use of procedures outside those given in the AFM remain
with the Pilot In Command (PIC).

FLIGHT CREW PROCEDURAL CONSIDERATIONS:

When it is known that a landing must be performed which could be identified as an emergency landing due to
the presence of factors which introduce a hazard to the airplane and its occupants, AFM Paragraph 3.16 out-
lines the main points to be addressed as applicable.

With different potential landing gear failure scenarios, the following considerations may also be appli-
cable:

Nose Gear - UP
Main Gear - DOWN and LOCKED

If the Alternate Gear Extension procedure has been completed and it cannot be verified that the nose landing
gear is down and locked by the normal and alternate systems, the flight crew must make a decision to perform
a landing with the nose landing gear not locked or reset the Alternate Extension system and cycle the landing
gear in an attempt to achieve all gears down and locked.
It is possible to safely land the Dash 8 Q400 airplane with the nose landing gear retracted.
The geometry of the airplane is such that the propellers will not come in contact with the ground with the main
landing gear extended and the nose landing gear retracted.

In addition to the direction given in the AFM Paragraph 3.16, Emergency Landing, the following items are
offered for consideration:

• Reduce landing weight through fuel burn

• Attempt to achieve an aft CG by re-seating passengers

• Select a runway with minimal crosswind

• Land with Flap 35º

• Fly the appropriate VREF for the landing weight

• Touchdown offset from the runway centreline if the runway is equipped with a centreline lighting system

• On touchdown, hold the nose up off the runway as long as possible.

Prior to losing elevator effectivity, gently lower the nose onto the runway

• If the nose landing gear is not extended or it collapses, maintain directional control with rudder until it is no
longer effective, at which point asymmetric braking may be used as required

• If the nosewheel is on the ground and the nose landing gear appears to be locked, apply brakes and / or
reverse thrust.
If the nose landing gear is not extended or it collapses, apply brakes only.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-22 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

Opting to cycle the landing gear in an effort to extend the nose gear from this abnormal situation would require
a reset of Alternate Extension procedure.

This may be accomplished by utilizing the following procedure:

1. Ensure # 2 hydraulic system pressure and quantity are normal and the following landing gear advisory
lights are illuminated:
- selector lever amber,
- gear green locked down (main gear only),
- red gear unlocked (nose gear) and
- all amber doors open.

2. NOSE L/G RELEASE Handle – Return to stowed position.

3. LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION Door – Close fully.

4. MAIN L/G RELEASE Handle – Return to the stowed position.

5. LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE Door – Close fully.

6. LANDING GEAR Lever – DN.

7. L/G DOWN SELECT INHIBIT SW – Normal and Guarded.

Check amber doors open advisory lights out (main gear only) and LDG GEAR INOP caution light out.

NOTE: It may take up to 17 s for the doors to close.

8. LANDING GEAR Lever – UP.

Check all gears, doors and LANDING GEAR lever advisory lights out.

If the Flight Crew decides to cycle the landing gear in an effort to achieve all gears down:

9. LANDING GEAR Lever – DN.

Check:
- 3 green gear locked down advisory lights illuminate,
- all amber doors open,
- red gear unlocked and
- selector lever amber advisory lights out.

10. Items 8 and 9 may be repeated in an effort to achieve 3 gear down and locked.

CAUTION: Should the LDG GEAR INOP caution light illuminate, or

loss of # 2 hydraulic system pressure or quantity, or
any abnormality in landing gear system indication other than those associated with
the nose landing gear be experienced,
see AFM Paragraph 4.21.1 (ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION).

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 3 3.4-23
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
PROCEDURES [Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015

All Gear - UP

It is possible to safely land the Dash 8 Q400 airplane with all landing gears retracted.
The geometry of the airplane is such that the propellers should not come in contact with the ground with all
landing gears retracted, if it is possible to maintain the wings level throughout the landing.

In addition to the direction given in the AFM Paragraph 3.16, Emergency Landing and Paragraph 3.15.1, Item
6, Note 1, the following items are offered for consideration:

• Reduce landing weight through fuel burn

• Passengers must be moved from the seats in the plane of the propellers and re-seated elsewhere in the
cabin

• Select a runway with minimal crosswind

• Land with Flap 35º

• Fly the appropriate VREF for the landing weight

• Touchdown offset from the runway centreline if the runway is equipped with a centreline lighting system

• Maintain a nose-up pitch attitude not exceeding 5º prior to runway contact

• On touchdown, maintain wings level using lateral control and directional control with rudder

• Unless there is propeller / ground contact during the landing, requiring an immediate engine shutdown,
feather and secure engines once the aircraft has come to a stop.

One Main Gear - UP

Nose Gear and Opposite Main Gear - DOWN and LOCKED

If the Alternate Gear Extension procedure has been completed and it cannot be verified that both main landing
gears are down and locked by the normal and alternate systems, the flight crew may consider resetting the
alternate extension system and attempt to cycle the landing gear in order to achieve all gears down and locked
or to perform a landing with one main gear unsafe.
Opting to cycle the landing gear in an effort to extend the main gear from this abnormal situation would require
a reset of Alternate Extension procedure.

This may be accomplished by utilizing the following procedure:

1. Visually confirm that the affected gear has not extended and that the associated doors have opened.

2. Ensure # 2 hydraulic system pressure and quantity are normal and the following landing gear advisory
lights are illuminated:
- selector lever amber,
- gear green locked down (nose and unaffected main gear),
- red gear unlocked (affected main gear) and
- all amber doors open.

3. NOSE L/G RELEASE handle – Return to stowed position.

4. LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION door – Close fully.

5. MAIN L/G RELEASE handle – Return to the stowed position.

6. LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE door – Close fully.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

3.4-24 CHAPTER 3
NON-NORMAL, SPECIAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL
[Rev. 13] 30 JAN 2015 PROCEDURES

7. LANDING GEAR lever – DN.

8. L/G DOWN SELECT INHIBIT SW – Normal and guarded.

Check amber doors open advisory lights out (nose and unaffected main gear) and LDG GEAR INOP cau-
tion light out.

9. LANDING GEAR lever – UP.

Check all gears, doors and LANDING GEAR lever advisory lights out.

If the Flight Crew opt to land in this gear up configuration, see “All Gears - UP” paragraph above.

If the Flight Crew decides to cycle the landing gear in an effort to achieve all gears down:

10. LANDING GEAR lever – DN.

Check:
- 3 green gear locked down advisory lights illuminate,
- all amber doors open,
- red gear unlocked and
- selector lever amber advisory lights out.

11. Items 9 and 10 may be repeated in an effort to achieve 3 gear down and locked.

CAUTION: Should the LDG GEAR INOP caution light illuminate, or

loss of # 2 hydraulic system pressure or quantity, or
any abnormality in landing gear system indication other than those associated with
the affected main landing gear be experienced,
see AFM Paragraph 4.21.1 (ALTERNATE LANDING GEAR EXTENSION).

The flight crew must assume and prepare for the affected main landing gear to collapse on landing.

In addition to the direction given in the AFM Paragraph 3.16, Emergency Landing, the following items are
offered for consideration:

• Reduce landing weight through fuel burn

• Passengers must be moved from the seats in the plane of the propellers and re-seated elsewhere in the
cabin.
Priority is to be given to the passengers seated on the side with the indicated unsafe main landing gear

• Crosswind (if any) would be advantageous from the side with the unaffected main landing gear

• Land with Flap 35º

• Fly the appropriate VREF for the landing weight

• Giving consideration to the specific approach to be flown: flight conditions and possible missed approach,
prior to commencing the final approach, feather and secure the engine on the side with the indicated
unsafe main landing gear.

• On touchdown, maintain maximum wing down lateral control on the side with the unaffected main landing
gear

• If the unsafe main landing gear collapses, in an effort to reduce the airplane turning moment in the direc-
tion of the failed main landing gear, apply maximum braking and reverse thrust on the side with the unaf-
fected main landing gear.

• Feather and secure the operative engine

• Be prepared to action an engine fire.

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 4 04 LEP - Page 1

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016

4.1-31 31 May 2011

04 - Effective Pages 4.1-32 31 May 2011
1 21 Nov 2016 4.1-33 31 May 2011
2 21 Nov 2016 4.1-34 31 May 2011
3 21 Nov 2016 4.1-35 31 May 2011
4 21 Nov 2016 4.1-36 31 May 2011
4.1-37 31 May 2011
04 - Contents 4.1-38 31 May 2011
ToC 4-1 13 Apr 2012 4.1-39 31 May 2011
ToC 4-2 30 Oct 2015 4.1-40 31 May 2011
4.1-41 31 May 2011
Chapter 4 4.1-42 31 May 2011
4.0-1 31 May 2011 4.1-43 31 May 2011
4.1-1 31 May 2011 4.1-44 31 May 2011
4.1-2 31 May 2011 4.1-45 31 May 2011
4.1-3 31 May 2011 4.1-46 31 May 2011
4.1-4 31 May 2011 4.1-47 31 May 2011
4.1-5 31 May 2011 4.1-48 31 May 2011
4.1-6 13 Apr 2012 4.1-49 31 May 2011
4.1-7 13 Apr 2012 4.1-50 31 May 2011
4.1-8 13 Apr 2012 4.1-51 31 May 2011
4.1-9 13 Apr 2012 4.1-52 31 May 2011
4.1-10 13 Apr 2012 4.1-53 31 May 2011
4.1-11 13 Apr 2012 4.1-54 31 May 2011
4.1-12 13 Apr 2012 4.1-55 31 May 2011
4.1-13 13 Apr 2012 4.1-56 31 May 2011
4.1-14 13 Apr 2012 4.1-57 31 May 2011
4.1-15 13 Apr 2012 4.1-58 31 May 2011
4.1-16 13 Apr 2012 4.1-59 31 May 2011
4.1-17 13 Apr 2012 4.1-60 31 May 2011
4.1-18 31 May 2011 4.1-61 31 May 2011
4.1-19 31 May 2011 4.1-62 31 May 2011
4.1-20 31 May 2011 4.1-63 31 May 2011
4.1.21 31 May 2011 4.1-64 31 May 2011
4.1-22 31 May 2011 4.1-65 31 May 2011
4.1.23 31 May 2011 4.1-66 31 May 2011
4.1-24 31 May 2011 4.1-67 31 May 2011
4.1-25 31 May 2011 4.1-68 31 May 2011
4.1-26 31 May 2011 4.1-69 31 May 2011
4.1-27 31 May 2011 4.1-70 31 May 2011
4.1-28 31 May 2011 4.1-71 31 May 2011
4.1-29 31 May 2011 4.1-72 31 May 2011
4.1-30 31 May 2011 4.1-73 31 May 2011

(METRIC)
AOM DASH 8-Q400
04 LEP - Page 2 CHAPTER 4

(Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

4.1-74 31 May 2011 4.1-117 31 May 2011

4.1-75 31 May 2011 4.1-118 31 May 2011
4.1-76 31 May 2011 4.1-119 31 May 2011
4.1-77 31 May 2011 4.1-120 31 May 2011
4.1-78 31 May 2011 4.1-121 31 May 2011
4.1-79 31 May 2011 4.1-122 31 May 2011
4.1-80 31 May 2011 4.1-123 31 May 2011
4.1-81 31 May 2011 4.1-124 31 May 2011
4.1-82 31 May 2011 4.1-125 31 May 2011
4.1-83 31 May 2011 4.1-126 31 May 2011
4.1-84 31 May 2011 4.1-127 31 May 2011
4.1-85 31 May 2011 4.1-128 31 May 2011
4.1-86 31 May 2011 4.1-129 31 May 2011
4.1-87 31 May 2011 4.1-130 31 May 2011
4.1-88 31 May 2011 4.1-131 31 May 2011
4.1-89 31 May 2011 4.1-132 31 May 2011
4.1-90 31 May 2011 4.1-133 31 May 2011
4.1-91 31 May 2011 4.1-134 31 May 2011
4.1-92 31 May 2011 4.1-135 31 May 2011
4.1-93 31 May 2011 4.1-136 31 May 2011
4.1-94 31 May 2011 4.1-137 31 May 2011
4.1-95 31 May 2011 4.1-138 31 May 2011
4.1-96 31 May 2011 4.1-139 31 May 2011
4.1-97 31 May 2011 4.1-140 31 May 2011
4.1-98 31 May 2011 4.1-141 31 May 2011
4.1-99 31 May 2011 4.1-142 31 May 2011
4.1-100 31 May 2011 4.1-143 31 May 2011
4.1-101 31 May 2011 4.1-144 31 May 2011
4.1-102 31 May 2011 4.1-145 31 May 2011
4.1-103 31 May 2011 4.1-146 31 May 2011
4.1-104 31 May 2011 4.1-147 31 May 2011
4.1-105 31 May 2011 4.1-148 31 May 2011
4.1-106 31 May 2011 4.1-149 31 May 2011
4.1-107 31 May 2011 4.1-150 31 May 2011
4.1-108 31 May 2011 4.1-151 07 Mar 2013
4.1-109 31 May 2011 4.1-152 07 Mar 2013
4.1-110 31 May 2011 4.1-153 07 Mar 2013
4.1-111 31 May 2011 4.1-154 31 May 2011
4.1-112 31 May 2011 4.1-155 31 May 2011
4.1-113 31 May 2011 4.1-156 31 May 2011
4.1-114 31 May 2011 4.1-157 31 May 2011
4.1-115 31 May 2011 4.1-158 31 May 2011
4.1-116 31 May 2011 4.1-159 31 May 2011

(METRIC)
AOM DASH 8-Q400
CHAPTER 4 04 LEP - Page 3

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016

4.1-160 31 May 2011 4.1-203 13 Sep 2013

4.1-161 31 May 2011 4.1-204 13 Sep 2013
4.1-162 31 May 2011 4.2-1 13 Sep 2013
4.1-163 31 May 2011 4.2-2 13 Sep 2013
4.1-164 31 May 2011 4.2-3 31 May 2011
4.1-165 31 May 2011 4.2-4 31 May 2011
4.1-166 31 May 2011 4.2-5 31 May 2011
4.1-167 31 May 2011 4.2-6 31 May 2011
4.1-168 31 May 2011 4.2-7 31 May 2011
4.1-169 31 May 2011 4.2-8 31 May 2011
4.1-170 31 May 2011 4.2-9 13 Sep 2013
4.1-171 31 May 2011 4.2-10 31 May 2011
4.1-172 31 May 2011 4.3-1 31 May 2011
4.1-173 31 May 2011 4.3-2 31 May 2011
4.1-174 31 May 2011 4.3-3 31 May 2011
4.1-175 31 May 2011 4.3-4 31 May 2011
4.1-176 31 May 2011 4.3-5 31 May 2011
4.1-177 31 May 2011 4.3-6 31 May 2011
4.1-178 31 May 2011 4.3-7 31 May 2011
4.1-179 31 May 2011 4.3-8 31 May 2011
4.1-180 31 May 2011 4.3-9 31 May 2011
4.1-181 31 May 2011 4.3-10 31 May 2011
4.1-182 31 May 2011 4.3-11 31 May 2011
4.1-183 31 May 2011 4.3-12 31 May 2011
4.1-184 31 May 2011 4.3-13 31 May 2011
4.1-185 31 May 2011 4.3-14 31 May 2011
4.1-186 31 May 2011 4.3-15 31 May 2011
4.1-187 31 May 2011 4.3-16 31 May 2011
4.1-188 31 May 2011 4.3-17 31 May 2011
4.1-189 31 May 2011 4.4-1 31 May 2011
4.1-190 31 May 2011 4.4-2 31 May 2011
4.1-191 31 May 2011 4.4-3 31 May 2011
4.1-192 31 May 2011 4.4-4 31 May 2011
4.1-193 31 May 2011 4.4-5 31 May 2011
4.1-194 31 May 2011 4.4-6 31 May 2011
4.1-195 31 May 2011 4.4-7 31 May 2011
4.1-196 31 May 2011 4.4-8 31 May 2011
4.1-197 31 May 2011 4.4-9 31 May 2011
4.1-198 31 May 2011 4.4-10 31 May 2011
4.1-199 31 May 2011 4.4-11 31 May 2011
4.1-200 13 Sep 2013 4.4-12 31 May 2011
4.1-201 13 Sep 2013 4.4-13 31 May 2011
4.1-202 13 Sep 2013 4.4-14 31 May 2011

(METRIC)
AOM DASH 8-Q400
04 LEP - Page 4 CHAPTER 4

(Rev 18) 21 NOV 2016 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

4.4-15 31 May 2011 4.6-7 31 May 2011

4.4-16 31 May 2011 4.6-8 31 May 2011
4.4-17 31 May 2011 4.6-9 31 May 2011
4.4-18 31 May 2011 4.6-10 31 May 2011
4.4-19 07 Mar 2013 4.6-11 31 May 2011
4.4-20 13 Sep 2013 4.6-12 31 May 2011
4.4-21 13 Sep 2013 4.6-13 31 May 2011
4.4-22 07 Mar 2013 4.6-14 31 May 2011
4.5-1 31 May 2011 4.6-15 31 May 2011
4.5-2 31 May 2011 4.6-16 31 May 2011
4.5-3 31 May 2011 4.6-17 31 May 2011
4.5-4 31 May 2011 4.6-18 31 May 2011
4.5-5 31 May 2011 4.6-19 31 May 2011
4.5-6 31 May 2011 4.6-20 07 Mar 2016
4.5-7 31 May 2011 4.7-1 21 Nov 2016
4.5-8 31 May 2011 4.7-2 21 Nov 2016
4.5-9 31 May 2011 4.8-1 21 Nov 2011
4.5-10 31 May 2011 4.8-2 21 Nov 2011
4.5-11 31 May 2011 4.8-3 21 Nov 2011
4.5-12 31 May 2011 4.8-4 21 Nov 2011
4.5-13 31 May 2011 4.9-1 31 May 2011
4.5-14 31 May 2011 4.9-2 31 May 2011
4.5-15 31 May 2011 4.9-3 31 May 2011
4.5-16 31 May 2011 4.9-4 31 May 2011
4.5-17 31 May 2011 4.9-5 31 May 2011
4.5-18 31 May 2011 4.9-6 31 May 2011
4.5-19 31 May 2011 4.10-1 30 Oct 2015
4.5-20 31 May 2011 4.10-2 31 May 2011
4.5-21 31 May 2011 4.10-3 31 May 2011
4.5-22 31 May 2011 4.10-4 30 Oct 2015
4.5-23 31 May 2011 4.10-5 30 Oct 2015
4.5-24 31 May 2011 4.10-6 30 Oct 2015
4.5-25 13 Apr 2012 4.10-7 30 Oct 2015
4.5-26 13 Apr 2012 4.10-8 30 Oct 2015
4.5-27 13 Apr 2012 4.10-9 30 Oct 2015
4.5-28 13 Apr 2012 4.10-10 30 Oct 2015
4.5-29 13 Apr 2012 4.10-11 30 Oct 2015
4.6-1 31 May 2011 4.11-1 31 May 2011
4.6-2 31 May 2011 4.12-1 31 May 2011
4.6-3 31 May 2011
4.6-4 31 May 2011
4.6-5 31 May 2011
4.6-6 31 May 2011

(METRIC)
AOM DASH 8-Q400
CHAPTER 4 ToC 4-1

PERFORMANCE [Rev. 4] 13 APR 2012

- TABLE OF CONTENTS -

4.0 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 4.0-1

4.1 TAKE-OFF and CLIMB PERFORMANCE DATA .................................................................. 4.1-1

4.1.1 Mass, Altitude and Temperature Limits (MAT) ........................................................................ 4.1-1
4.1.2 Allowed Mass for Take-off on Dry Runway ............................................................................. 4.1-5
4.1.3 Allowed Mass for Take-off on Wet Runway ........................................................................ 4.1-151
4.1.4 Allowed Mass for Take-off on Contaminated Runway ........................................................ 4.1-152
4.1.5 Net Flight Path Data ........................................................................................................... 4.1-177
4.1.6 Bank Angles during Climb / Gradient Losses ..................................................................... 4.1-200
4.1.7 Radius of Turn for a 15° Banked Turn ................................................................................ 4.1-200

4.2 EN-ROUTE PERFORMANCE ................................................................................................ 4.2-1

4.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4.2-1
4.2.2 Single Engine Service Ceiling ................................................................................................ 4.2-1
4.2.3 Driftdown Procedures ............................................................................................................. 4.2-2
4.2.4 Examples of Driftdown Profiles ............................................................................................... 4.2-9

4.3 APPROACH and LANDING CLIMB LIMITS ......................................................................... 4.3-1

4.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4.3-1
4.3.2 Mass Limits for CAT I / Non Precision Approaches ................................................................ 4.3-1
4.3.3 Mass Limits for CAT II Operation ............................................................................................ 4.3-5
4.3.4 Missed Approach Climb Gradients (Gross Gradients) Available ............................................ 4.3-8

4.4 LANDING ............................................................................................................................... 4.4-1

4.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4.4-1
4.4.2 Dispatch Requirements .......................................................................................................... 4.4-1
4.4.3 Requirements for Actual Landing .......................................................................................... 4.4-11
4.4.4 Unfactored Landing Distance in Abnormal Configurations ................................................... 4.4-22

4.5 SPEEDS ................................................................................................................................. 4.5-1

4.5.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4.5-1
4.5.2 Take-off Speeds ...................................................................................................................... 4.5-1
4.5.3 Flap Retraction Initiation Speed (VFR) and Final Take-Off Speed (VFTO) ............................. 4.5-21
4.5.4 Approach Speeds ................................................................................................................. 4.5-22
4.5.5 Landing Speeds (VREF) - KIAS - ........................................................................................... 4.5-23
4.5.6 Stalling Speeds - KCAS - ...................................................................................................... 4.5-23
4.5.7 1,23 VSR - Speeds - KIAS - ................................................................................................... 4.5-24
4.5.8 Speed Booklet ...................................................................................................................... 4.5-24
4.5.9 Position Error Correction To Altimeter (Integrated Standby Instrument) ............................... 4.5-25

4.6 BRAKE ENERGY LIMITS ...................................................................................................... 4.6-1

4.6.1 Brake Energy in Accelerate-Stop ............................................................................................ 4.6-1
4.6.2 Brake Energy in Landing ...................................................................................................... 4.6-10
4.6.3 Minimum Turn-Around Time ................................................................................................. 4.6-20

(cont’d on next page)

AOM DASH 8-Q400 METRIC

ToC 4-2 CHAPTER 4

[Rev. 15] 30 OCT 2015 PERFORMANCE

- TABLE OF CONTENTS - (cont’d)

4.7 EFFECT OF DE-ICING and ANTI-ICING FLUIDS ................................................................. 4.7-1

4.7.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4.7-1
4.7.2 Approved SAE Low Speed Type III Fluids .............................................................................. 4.7-1
4.7.3 Approved SAE Type I, SAE Type II and SAE Type IV Fluids .................................................. 4.7-1
4.7.4 Approved SAE Type I Fluids ................................................................................................... 4.7-2
4.7.5 Icing Precautions and Procedures .......................................................................................... 4.7-2

4.8 OPERATION WITH LANDING GEAR EXTENDED ............................................................... 4.8-1

4.8.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4.8-1
4.8.2 Performance Data ................................................................................................................... 4.8-1

4.9 ALL ENGINE CLIMB GRADIENTS ........................................................................................ 4.9-1

4.9.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4.9-1

4.10 TORQUE SETTING DATA .................................................................................................... 4.10-1

4.10.1 Torque Setting Tables ............................................................................................................ 4.10-1

4.11 FLIGHTS CONDUCTED UNDER THE PROVISION OF THE CDL ..................................... 4.11-1
4.11.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 4.11-1
4.11.2 CDL Items Influencing the AC Performance ......................................................................... 4.11-1

4.12 SUPPLEMENTAL PERFORMANCE DATA ......................................................................... 4.12-1

4.12.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 4.12-1

METRIC AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 4 4.1-1

PERFORMANCE [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

4.1 TAKE-OFF AND CLIMB PERFORMANCE DATA

The presentation of performance data in the AOM is made in a tabular form - compared to the graphical pre-
sentation in the Airplane Flight Manual.
The company will provide take-off mass limit tables for performance-critical airports / runways. Therefore not all
details of the AFM are presented in the AOM. The tables presented in the AOM should allow a quick determi-
nation of the allowed mass for the take-off and the accelerate - stop distance available in case no detailed take-
off mass limit is available for the runway concerned.
For reasons of simplification a V1 = VR is assumed!
Using V1 = VR there may be situations where the allowed mass for take-off is limited by the TODA or the
ASDA. Therefore the lower mass shall be depicted from either the table for:
• Maximum mass for take-off - versus ASDA -
or
• Maximum mass for take-off - versus TODA -
Under Sub-Chapter 4.1.5 the available Reference Gradients Available are given, followed by a table showing
the required reference gradient for a given obstacle height and obstacle distance (from end of TODA).

4.1.1 Mass, Altitude and Temperature Limits (MAT))

The mass limits as presented in the following tables do assure a minimum gross gradient of climb of 2.4% for
the relevant pressure altitude/OAT combination.

AOM DASH 8-Q400 METRIC

4.1-2 CHAPTER 4

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 PERFORMANCE

Table 1 - MAT Limits (kg) 5° FLAPS

OAT Altitude (ft)

(°C) 10000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0
50 - - - - - - - - - - ( 30869 )
48 - - - - - - - - - ( 30194 ) ( 31539 )
46 - - - - - - - - ( 29505 ) ( 30839 ) ( 32209 )
44 - - - - - - - 28824 ( 30114 ) ( 31483 ) ( 32749 )
42 - - - - - - 28153 ( 29412 ) ( 30722 ) ( 32030 ) ( 33159 )
40 - - - - - 27502 28725 ( 29999 ) ( 31284 ) ( 32483 ) ( 33570 )
38 - - - - 26868 28058 ( 29297 ) ( 30580 ) ( 31802 ) ( 32935 ) ( 33980 )
36 - - - 26247 27405 28614 ( 29860 ) ( 31153 ) ( 32320 ) ( 33388 ) ( 34311 )
34 - - 25663 26769 27942 29157 ( 30416 ) ( 31726 ) ( 32839 ) ( 33843 ) ( 34401 )
32 - 25060 26160 27291 28462 ( 29689 ) ( 30971 ) ( 32299 ) ( 33360 ) ( 34023 ) ( 34493 )
30 24458 25537 26656 27791 28967 ( 30221 ) ( 31526 ) ( 32875 ) ( 33653 ) ( 34115 ) ( 34585 )
28 24918 26014 27133 28274 ( 29472 ) ( 30752 ) ( 32085 ) ( 33242 ) ( 33745 ) ( 34209 ) ( 34677 )
26 25377 26473 27595 28757 ( 29977 ) ( 31288 ) ( 32506 ) ( 33364 ) ( 33837 ) ( 34303 ) ( 34769 )
24 25818 26918 28058 29240 ( 30485 ) ( 31712 ) ( 32826 ) ( 33460 ) ( 33930 ) ( 34396 ) ( 34864 )
22 26247 27363 28520 ( 29726 ) ( 30912 ) ( 32060 ) ( 33095 ) ( 33557 ) ( 34022 ) ( 34491 ) ( 34962 )
20 26676 27808 28985 ( 30176 ) ( 31290 ) ( 32412 ) ( 33192 ) ( 33653 ) ( 34118 ) ( 34587 ) ( 35058 )
18 27105 28256 ( 29409 ) ( 30615 ) ( 31672 ) ( 32763 ) ( 33288 ) ( 33750 ) ( 34216 ) ( 34683 ) ( 35153 )
16 27536 28660 ( 29822 ) ( 31057 ) ( 32053 ) ( 32923 ) ( 33384 ) ( 33846 ) ( 34312 ) ( 34776 ) ( 35251 )
14 27918 29048 ( 30237 ) ( 31499 ) ( 32433 ) ( 33020 ) ( 33481 ) ( 33942 ) ( 34407 ) ( 34872 ) ( 35351 )
12 28283 ( 29439 ) ( 30653 ) ( 31939 ) ( 32655 ) ( 33116 ) ( 33577 ) ( 34036 ) ( 34504 ) ( 34971 ) ( 35452 )
10 28650 ( 29829 ) ( 31066 ) ( 32210 ) ( 32752 ) ( 33211 ) ( 33670 ) ( 34132 ) ( 34603 ) ( 35072 ) ( 35554 )
8 29016 ( 30218 ) ( 31392 ) ( 32352 ) ( 32847 ) ( 33305 ) ( 33767 ) ( 34232 ) ( 34704 ) ( 35173 ) ( 35656 )
6 ( 29381 ) ( 30570 ) ( 31654 ) ( 32472 ) ( 32940 ) ( 33401 ) ( 33865 ) ( 34333 ) ( 34805 ) ( 35275 ) ( 35757 )
4 ( 29733 ) ( 30897 ) ( 31913 ) ( 32570 ) ( 33036 ) ( 33500 ) ( 33966 ) ( 34436 ) ( 34906 ) ( 35376 ) ( 35861 )
2 ( 30076 ) ( 31217 ) ( 32167 ) ( 32671 ) ( 33135 ) ( 33600 ) ( 34067 ) ( 34538 ) ( 35007 ) ( 35480 ) ( 35968 )
0 ( 30413 ) ( 31533 ) ( 32311 ) ( 32772 ) ( 33235 ) ( 33701 ) ( 34168 ) ( 34640 ) ( 35111 ) ( 35588 ) ( 36074 )
-2 ( 30745 ) ( 31859 ) ( 32411 ) ( 32872 ) ( 33336 ) ( 33801 ) ( 34269 ) ( 34744 ) ( 35218 ) ( 35696 ) ( 36180 )
-4 ( 31087 ) ( 32039 ) ( 32512 ) ( 32973 ) ( 33437 ) ( 33902 ) ( 34372 ) ( 34849 ) ( 35325 ) ( 35803 ) ( 36287 )
-6 ( 31362 ) ( 32136 ) ( 32613 ) ( 33073 ) ( 33537 ) ( 34005 ) ( 34478 ) ( 34954 ) ( 35432 ) ( 35911 ) -
-8 ( 31593 ) ( 32242 ) ( 32714 ) ( 33174 ) ( 33640 ) ( 34111 ) ( 34584 ) ( 35059 ) ( 35539 ) - -
-10 ( 31824 ) ( 32348 ) ( 32814 ) ( 33278 ) ( 33746 ) ( 34217 ) ( 34690 ) ( 35164 ) - - -
-12 ( 31993 ) ( 32453 ) ( 32918 ) ( 33384 ) ( 33852 ) ( 34323 ) ( 34796 ) - - - -
-14 ( 32098 ) ( 32559 ) ( 33024 ) ( 33490 ) ( 33958 ) ( 34429 ) - - - - -
-16 ( 32203 ) ( 32664 ) ( 33130 ) ( 33596 ) ( 34065 ) - - - - - -
-18 ( 32307 ) ( 32770 ) ( 33236 ) ( 33702 ) - - - - - - -
-20 ( 32412 ) ( 32875 ) ( 33342 ) - - - - - - - -
-22 ( 32517 ) ( 32981 ) - - - - - - - - -
-24 ( 32622 ) - - - - - - - - - -
-26 - - - - - - - - - - -

NOTE: Masses given in brackets are in excess of the maximum permitted structural mass and are for
interpolation purposes only.

Correction for Ice Protection Systems “ON”:

Subtract 1540 kg from the above masses when above 7500 ft ASL.

METRIC AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 4 4.1-3

PERFORMANCE [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

Table 2 - MAT Limits (kg) 10° FLAPS

OAT ALTITUDE (FT)

(°C) 10000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0
50 - - - - - - - - - - ( 29438 )
48 - - - - - - - - - 28790 ( 30061 )
46 - - - - - - - - 28136 ( 29384 ) ( 30683 )
44 - - - - - - - 27489 28704 ( 29978 ) ( 31206 )
42 - - - - - - 26833 28038 ( 29273 ) ( 30501 ) ( 31628 )
40 - - - - - 26213 27375 28588 ( 29812 ) ( 30957 ) ( 32050 )
38 - - - - 25610 26740 27918 29130 ( 30323 ) ( 31413 ) ( 32472 )
36 - - - 25023 26113 27267 28445 ( 29665 ) ( 30833 ) ( 31869 ) ( 32810 )
34 - - 24447 25510 26616 27775 28960 ( 30201 ) ( 31344 ) ( 32327 ) ( 32897 )
32 - 23861 24919 25997 27103 28266 ( 29474 ) ( 30736 ) ( 31857 ) ( 32509 ) ( 32985 )
30 23284 24316 25391 26465 27577 28758 ( 29988 ) ( 31275 ) ( 32148 ) ( 32604 ) ( 33074 )
28 23716 24770 25841 26920 28052 29249 ( 30506 ) ( 31691 ) ( 32243 ) ( 32700 ) ( 33163 )
26 24149 25206 26276 27374 28526 ( 29744 ) ( 30933 ) ( 31848 ) ( 32338 ) ( 32795 ) ( 33252 )
24 24566 25628 26711 27829 29004 ( 30160 ) ( 31299 ) ( 31946 ) ( 32434 ) ( 32890 ) ( 33342 )
22 24973 26050 27146 28286 ( 29417 ) ( 30527 ) ( 31602 ) ( 32045 ) ( 32529 ) ( 32984 ) ( 33435 )
20 25379 26472 27584 28703 ( 29797 ) ( 30897 ) ( 31696 ) ( 32143 ) ( 32622 ) ( 33076 ) ( 33527 )
18 25785 26897 27980 29108 ( 30179 ) ( 31267 ) ( 31789 ) ( 32241 ) ( 32714 ) ( 33168 ) ( 33617 )
16 26194 27273 28362 ( 29516 ) ( 30562 ) ( 31430 ) ( 31883 ) ( 32340 ) ( 32805 ) ( 33257 ) ( 33709 )
14 26553 27631 28746 ( 29923 ) ( 30942 ) ( 31524 ) ( 31976 ) ( 32438 ) ( 32895 ) ( 33349 ) ( 33804 )
12 26892 27991 29130 ( 30329 ) ( 31164 ) ( 31618 ) ( 32069 ) ( 32534 ) ( 32987 ) ( 33444 ) ( 33901 )
10 27233 28351 ( 29513 ) ( 30623 ) ( 31258 ) ( 31711 ) ( 32160 ) ( 32632 ) ( 33081 ) ( 33542 ) ( 33999 )
8 27574 28709 ( 29838 ) ( 30832 ) ( 31352 ) ( 31802 ) ( 32253 ) ( 32729 ) ( 33179 ) ( 33640 ) ( 34096 )
6 27913 29051 ( 30121 ) ( 30982 ) ( 31444 ) ( 31896 ) ( 32351 ) ( 32825 ) ( 33276 ) ( 33737 ) ( 34193 )
4 28238 ( 29382 ) ( 30400 ) ( 31079 ) ( 31538 ) ( 31992 ) ( 32453 ) ( 32922 ) ( 33374 ) ( 33835 ) ( 34293 )
2 28554 ( 29707 ) ( 30675 ) ( 31178 ) ( 31634 ) ( 32089 ) ( 32555 ) ( 33018 ) ( 33471 ) ( 33935 ) ( 34395 )
0 28864 ( 30027 ) ( 30823 ) ( 31276 ) ( 31732 ) ( 32187 ) ( 32657 ) ( 33115 ) ( 33571 ) ( 34037 ) ( 34497 )
-2 29169 ( 30357 ) ( 30921 ) ( 31375 ) ( 31830 ) ( 32285 ) ( 32759 ) ( 33214 ) ( 33675 ) ( 34139 ) ( 34600 )
-4 ( 29484 ) ( 30550 ) ( 31020 ) ( 31474 ) ( 31928 ) ( 32383 ) ( 32861 ) ( 33316 ) ( 33778 ) ( 34241 ) ( 34702 )
-6 ( 29770 ) ( 30651 ) ( 31118 ) ( 31572 ) ( 32026 ) ( 32485 ) ( 32962 ) ( 33418 ) ( 33881 ) ( 34344 ) -
-8 ( 30039 ) ( 30754 ) ( 31217 ) ( 31671 ) ( 32129 ) ( 32592 ) ( 33063 ) ( 33520 ) ( 33985 ) - -
-10 ( 30308 ) ( 30858 ) ( 31316 ) ( 31772 ) ( 32238 ) ( 32699 ) ( 33165 ) ( 33622 ) - - -
-12 ( 30496 ) ( 30961 ) ( 31417 ) ( 31875 ) ( 32346 ) ( 32805 ) ( 33266 ) - - - -
-14 ( 30600 ) ( 31064 ) ( 31521 ) ( 31979 ) ( 32454 ) ( 32912 ) - - - - -
-16 ( 30704 ) ( 31167 ) ( 31625 ) ( 32082 ) ( 32563 ) - - - - - -
-18 ( 30809 ) ( 31270 ) ( 31728 ) ( 32185 ) - - - - - - -
-20 ( 30913 ) ( 31373 ) ( 31832 ) - - - - - - - -
-22 ( 31018 ) ( 31476 ) - - - - - - - - -
-24 ( 31122 ) - - - - - - - - - -
-26 - - - - - - - - - - -

NOTE: Masses given in brackets are in excess of the maximum permitted structural mass and are for inter-
polation purposes only!

Correction for Ice Protection Systems “ON”:

Subtract 225 kg from the above masses when above 7500 ft ASL (for a continued 2nd segment above 400 ft
AGL the penalty increases to 590 kg).

AOM DASH 8-Q400 METRIC

4.1-4 CHAPTER 4

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 PERFORMANCE

Table 3 - MAT Limits (kg) 15° FLAPS

OAT Altitude (ft)

(°C) 10000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0
50 - - - - - - - - - - 27883
48 - - - - - - - - - 27267 28465
46 - - - - - - - - 26621 27822 29048
44 - - - - - - - 26002 27163 28376 ( 29543 )
42 - - - - - - 25398 26529 27705 28875 ( 29951 )
40 - - - - - 24810 25902 27056 28223 ( 29319 ) ( 30359 )
38 - - - - 24237 25299 26406 27570 28717 ( 29763 ) ( 30767 )
36 - - - 23676 24711 25788 26900 28072 29211 ( 30208 ) ( 31094 )
34 - - 23122 24136 25185 26263 27385 28574 ( 29705 ) ( 30654 ) ( 31180 )
32 - 22586 23570 24596 25643 26727 27870 29075 ( 30202 ) ( 30828 ) ( 31266 )
30 22043 23006 24019 25035 26088 27192 28355 ( 29580 ) ( 30480 ) ( 30914 ) ( 31353 )
28 22445 23426 24442 25458 26533 27656 28843 ( 30032 ) ( 30567 ) ( 31002 ) ( 31441 )
26 22847 23829 24845 25880 26978 28124 ( 29264 ) ( 30210 ) ( 30654 ) ( 31090 ) ( 31528 )
24 23235 24221 25249 26303 27426 28526 ( 29642 ) ( 30300 ) ( 30741 ) ( 31177 ) ( 31616 )
22 23612 24613 25653 26728 27821 28892 ( 29955 ) ( 30391 ) ( 30828 ) ( 31266 ) ( 31707 )
20 23990 25005 26059 27116 28190 ( 29260 ) ( 30045 ) ( 30481 ) ( 30916 ) ( 31356 ) ( 31797 )
18 24367 25399 26426 27491 28561 ( 29628 ) ( 30135 ) ( 30571 ) ( 31007 ) ( 31445 ) ( 31884 )
16 24747 25747 26779 27868 28933 ( 29788 ) ( 30226 ) ( 30662 ) ( 31096 ) ( 31533 ) ( 31975 )
14 25076 26076 27134 28246 ( 29303 ) ( 29879 ) ( 30317 ) ( 30751 ) ( 31184 ) ( 31623 ) ( 32067 )
12 25384 26407 27489 28622 ( 29519 ) ( 29970 ) ( 30406 ) ( 30839 ) ( 31275 ) ( 31715 ) ( 32161 )
10 25694 26739 27843 28922 ( 29614 ) ( 30059 ) ( 30494 ) ( 30929 ) ( 31367 ) ( 31808 ) ( 32255 )
8 26004 27068 28154 29166 ( 29707 ) ( 30148 ) ( 30585 ) ( 31022 ) ( 31460 ) ( 31902 ) ( 32349 )
6 26312 27379 28434 ( 29334 ) ( 29798 ) ( 30238 ) ( 30677 ) ( 31116 ) ( 31553 ) ( 31996 ) ( 32443 )
4 26607 27679 28709 ( 29430 ) ( 29892 ) ( 30330 ) ( 30771 ) ( 31211 ) ( 31647 ) ( 32089 ) ( 32541 )
2 26893 27973 28980 ( 29529 ) ( 29986 ) ( 30425 ) ( 30866 ) ( 31306 ) ( 31740 ) ( 32187 ) ( 32643 )
0 27174 28263 29131 ( 29627 ) ( 30080 ) ( 30519 ) ( 30960 ) ( 31401 ) ( 31837 ) ( 32291 ) ( 32745 )
-2 27451 28561 29235 ( 29726 ) ( 30174 ) ( 30614 ) ( 31054 ) ( 31497 ) ( 31936 ) ( 32394 ) ( 32847 )
-4 27736 28804 ( 29338 ) ( 29824 ) ( 30268 ) ( 30708 ) ( 31150 ) ( 31594 ) ( 32035 ) ( 32497 ) ( 32949 )
-6 28015 28938 ( 29443 ) ( 29923 ) ( 30362 ) ( 30804 ) ( 31248 ) ( 31691 ) ( 32134 ) ( 32600 ) -
-8 28292 29047 ( 29546 ) ( 30021 ) ( 30460 ) ( 30903 ) ( 31345 ) ( 31789 ) ( 32234 ) - -
-10 28570 29156 ( 29650 ) ( 30120 ) ( 30560 ) ( 31001 ) ( 31443 ) ( 31886 ) - - -
-12 28765 ( 29265 ) ( 29754 ) ( 30219 ) ( 30660 ) ( 31100 ) ( 31540 ) - - - -
-14 28875 ( 29373 ) ( 29859 ) ( 30319 ) ( 30760 ) ( 31198 ) - - - - -
-16 28985 ( 29482 ) ( 29963 ) ( 30418 ) ( 30860 ) - - - - - -
-18 29095 ( 29590 ) ( 30068 ) ( 30517 ) - - - - - - -
-20 29205 ( 29699 ) ( 30173 ) - - - - - - - -
-22 ( 29315 ) ( 29808 ) - - - - - - - - -
-24 ( 29425 ) - - - - - - - - - -
-26 - - - - - - - - - - -

NOTE: Masses given in brackets are in excess of the maximum permitted structural mass and are for
interpolation purposes only!

Correction for Ice Protection Systems “ON”:

Subtract 160 kg from the above masses when above 5500 ft ASL (for a continued 2nd segment above 400 ft
AGL the penalty increases to 790 kg).

METRIC AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 4 4.1-5

PERFORMANCE [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

4.1.2 Allowed Mass for Take-Off / Dry Runway

The tables under this Sub-Chapter do allow the determination of the maximum mass for take-off for a given
ASDA and TODA.
To simplify the evaluation a V1 / VR - ratio of 1 has been used.
Using a V1 = VR means that in some instances it will not be the TODA, but the ASDA which limits the maximum
mass for take-off.
In case of very long stopways or clearways (approximately 150 m) a take-off may even be limited by the take-
off run.
In those very rare instances the TOR graphs have to be crosschecked in the AFM, as TOR data is not included
in the AOM.
In case there are no clearways and stopways available (TORA = TODA = ASDA) the limiting masses still need
to be crosschecked for the ASDA and the TODA maximum mass limit.
The lowest mass as obtained from the ASDA or TODA maximum mass limit has to be used as the take-off limit.
No correction will be required for Ice Protection Systems “ON”.
The corresponding take-off speeds will be found under Sub-Chapter 4.5.

Remember: For this kind of presentation V1 is equal to VR.

The maximum mass limits for ASDA and TODA are based on a level (no slope) runway and zero wind condi-
tion.
Therefore the ASDA and the TODA must first be corrected for the wind and slope (Sub-Chapter 4.1.2.1).
Only then the tables for the ASDA and TODA mass limits must be used by entering the table with the wind /
slope corrected ASDA and TORA.
Sub-Chapter 4.1.2.2 gives the maximum allowed mass for the (corrected) ASDA and the (corrected) TODA.

2075 1880 1735 1588 1410 1229 2129 1962 1793 1590 1385 2476 2276 2075 1834 1592 2701 2477 2253 1986 1720 2955 2702 2452 2155 1861
2100 1906 1757 1606 1425 1241 2159 1987 1814 1607 1398 2513 2306 2100 1854 1609 2742 2511 2281 2008 1738 3002 2741 2483 2179 1881
2125 1933 1779 1624 1439 1253 2189 2013 1835 1624 1412 2549 2337 2125 1874 1625 2783 2545 2308 2030 1756 3048 2779 2514 2204 1900
2150 1959 1801 1643 1454 1265 2220 2038 1856 1641 1426 2586 2367 2150 1894 1641 2824 2579 2336 2052 1774 - 2818 2545 2228 1920
2175 1985 1823 1661 1469 1277 2251 2064 1877 1658 1439 2623 2398 2175 1914 1656 2866 2613 2364 2074 1790 - 2856 2576 2253 1938
2200 2013 1845 1679 1484 1288 2282 2089 1898 1674 1452 2661 2428 2200 1934 1672 2908 2647 2392 2096 1807 - 2894 2607 2277 1957
2225 2040 1868 1698 1498 1300 2313 2115 1919 1691 1465 2699 2459 2225 1954 1687 2951 2682 2420 2119 1824 - 2934 2639 2302 1975
2250 2067 1890 1716 1513 1311 2344 2140 1940 1708 1478 2736 2490 2250 1973 1702 2994 2716 2448 2140 1841 - 2973 2670 2326 1994
2275 2094 1912 1734 1527 1323 2376 2166 1961 1724 1491 2775 2521 2275 1993 1718 3037 2751 2476 2162 1858 - 3013 2701 2350 2013
2300 2122 1935 1752 1542 1334 2408 2192 1982 1741 1504 2814 2552 2300 2012 1733 - 2786 2503 2183 1875 - 3052 2733 2374 2031
2325 2150 1957 1770 1556 1346 2440 2218 2003 1757 1517 2853 2583 2325 2032 1748 - 2821 2531 2205 1891 - - 2764 2398 2050
2350 2178 1980 1789 1570 1357 2473 2244 2024 1774 1530 2892 2615 2350 2051 1763 - 2856 2559 2227 1908 - - 2796 2422 2068
2375 2206 2002 1807 1585 1368 2505 2270 2045 1790 1543 2932 2646 2375 2071 1779 - 2892 2587 2248 1925 - - 2827 2446 2087
2400 2235 2025 1825 1599 1380 2539 2296 2065 1806 1556 2973 2678 2400 2090 1794 - 2928 2615 2270 1942 - - 2859 2471 2106
2425 2263 2048 1843 1613 1391 2572 2322 2086 1823 1569 3013 2710 2425 2110 1809 - 2964 2643 2291 1958 - - 2890 2495 2124
CHAPTER 4

2450 2292 2070 1861 1627 1401 2605 2348 2107 1839 1581 3054 2741 2450 2129 1823 - 2999 2671 2313 1974 - - 2922 2519 2141
PERFORMANCE

2475 2321 2093 1879 1641 1412 2639 2375 2128 1855 1593 - 2773 2475 2148 1837 - 3036 2699 2334 1990 - - 2954 2542 2159
2500 2351 2116 1897 1655 1423 2674 2401 2149 1871 1605 - 2806 2500 2167 1852 - - 2727 2355 2005 - - 2986 2566 2176
2525 2381 2139 1915 1669 1433 2708 2428 2169 1886 1617 - 2838 2525 2186 1866 - - 2755 2376 2021 - - 3017 2590 2194
2550 2410 2162 1933 1683 1444 2743 2455 2190 1902 1629 - 2870 2550 2205 1880 - - 2784 2397 2037 - - 3049 2613 2211
2575 2441 2185 1951 1697 1454 2778 2481 2211 1918 1641 - 2903 2575 2224 1894 - - 2812 2418 2053 - - - 2637 2229
2600 2472 2208 1969 1711 1465 2815 2508 2232 1934 1653 - 2935 2600 2243 1909 - - 2840 2440 2069 - - - 2661 2246
2625 2503 2232 1987 1724 1476 2851 2535 2252 1950 1665 - 2968 2625 2262 1923 - - 2868 2461 2084 - - - 2685 2264
2650 2535 2255 2005 1738 1486 2888 2562 2273 1966 1677 - 3002 2650 2281 1937 - - 2896 2482 2100 - - - 2708 2281
2675 2566 2278 2023 1752 1497 2924 2589 2294 1981 1689 - 3035 2675 2299 1952 - - 2924 2503 2116 - - - 2732 2299
2700 - 2302 2041 1765 1507 - 2616 2314 1997 1701 - - 2700 2318 1966 - - 2953 2523 2131 - - - 2755 2316
2725 - 2325 2059 1779 1517 - 2644 2335 2012 1712 - - 2725 2336 1979 - - 2981 2544 2146 - - - 2778 2333
2750 - 2349 2076 1792 1527 - 2671 2355 2028 1724 - - 2750 2355 1992 - - 3009 2565 2161 - - - 2801 2349
2775 - 2373 2094 1805 1537 - 2699 2376 2043 1735 - - 2775 2373 2005 - - 3037 2585 2176 - - - 2825 2366
2800 - 2396 2112 1819 1546 - 2726 2397 2058 1746 - - 2800 2392 2019 - - - 2606 2190 - - - 2848 2382
2825 - 2420 2130 1832 1556 - 2754 2417 2074 1757 - - 2825 2410 2032 - - - 2627 2205 - - - 2871 2398
2850 - 2444 2148 1845 1566 - 2782 2438 2089 1768 - - 2850 2428 2045 - - - 2647 2220 - - - 2895 2415
2875 - 2469 2165 1859 1576 - 2811 2458 2104 1780 - - 2875 2447 2059 - - - 2668 2235 - - - 2918 2431
2900 - 2493 2183 1872 1585 - 2839 2479 2119 1791 - - 2900 2465 2072 - - - 2688 2249 - - - 2941 2448

METRIC
4.1-17

[Rev. 4] 13 APR 2012

4.1-18 CHAPTER 4

[Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011 PERFORMANCE

4.1.2.2 Maximum Mass for ASDA and TODA

The tables shall be entered with the corrected ASDA and TODA (Sub-Chapter 4.1.2.1).
Find the limiting mass for the corresponding pressure altitude and temperature.

Remember: The lowest mass - either for ASDA or for TODA - shall be used for determination of the
allowed mass for take-off!
The so obtained mass limit may be further restricted by obstacles (see Sub-Chapter 4.1.5).

Table 6 - Maximum Mass for ASDA (kg) 15° FLAPS (cont’d)

ASDA PA (ft) 9000
(m) OAT (°C) -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
2200 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2225 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2250 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2275 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2300 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2325 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2350 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2375 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2400 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2425 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2450 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2475 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2500 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2525 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2550 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2575 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2600 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2625 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2650 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2675 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2700 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2725 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2750 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2775 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2800 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2825 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2850 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2875 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2900 Max Max MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
NOTE: Masses given in brackets are in excess of the maximum permitted structural mass and are given for interpolation purposes.
Max = Mass in excess of the maximum permitted structural mass
Min = Mass is less than the minimum take-off mass
MAT = Mass, Altitude and Temperature limit

METRIC AOM DASH 8-Q400

CHAPTER 4 4.1-127

PERFORMANCE [Rev. X] 31 MAY 2011

Table 6 - Maximum Mass for ASDA (kg) 15° FLAPS

ASDA PA (ft) 10000
(m) OAT (°C) -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
1000 < Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1025 < Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1050 < Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1075 18221 Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1100 19601 18181 Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1125 20517 19471 18102 Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1150 21245 20395 19308 Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1175 21972 21066 20264 19084 Min Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1200 22261 21736 20884 20105 18540 Min Min Min Min Min Min Min
1225 22533 22157 21503 20675 19572 18077 Min Min Min Min Min Min
1250 22804 22416 22049 21244 20301 19026 Min Min Min Min Min Min
1275 23076 22676 22296 21814 20815 19975 18574 Min Min Min Min Min
1300 23347 22935 22544 22158 21329 20453 19449 Min Min Min Min Min
1325 23619 23194 22791 22394 21844 20919 20157 18667 Min Min Min Min
1350 23890 23453 23039 22629 22154 21385 20581 19460 18042 Min Min Min
1375 24134 23713 23286 22865 22375 21851 21004 20121 18766 Min Min Min
1400 24360 23972 23534 23100 22597 22141 21428 20498 19489 Min Min Min
1425 24586 24192 23782 23336 22818 22350 21852 20876 20099 18518 Min Min
1450 24811 24408 24024 23571 23039 22558 22127 21254 20438 19163 Min Min
1475 25037 24624 24231 23807 23261 22766 22323 21632 20777 19809 18345 Min
1500 25263 24840 24437 24035 23482 22974 22520 22004 21116 20208 18924 Min
1525 25488 25056 24644 24232 23703 23182 22716 22186 21455 20505 19504 Min
1550 25714 25271 24850 24429 23925 23391 22912 22368 21794 20802 20037 18386
1575 25939 25487 25056 24625 24122 23599 23108 22550 22066 21099 20299 18893
1600 26144 25703 25263 24822 24308 23807 23304 22732 22236 21395 20561 19399
1625 26341 25919 25469 25019 24493 24013 23500 22914 22405 21692 20822 19906
1650 26538 26117 25676 25216 24679 24188 23696 23096 22574 21989 21084 20182
1675 26735 26304 25882 25413 24864 24362 23892 23278 22744 22149 21346 20406
1700 26932 26491 26077 25610 25050 24537 24074 23460 22913 22303 21607 20630
1725 27129 26679 26255 25806 25235 24712 24239 23642 23083 22458 21869 20854
1750 27326 26866 26433 26003 25421 24887 24404 23824 23252 22613 22071 21078
1775 27523 27053 26611 26171 25606 25062 24569 24005 23421 22768 22212 21302
1800 27720 27240 26789 26340 25791 25236 24734 24159 23591 22922 22354 21526
1825 27917 27428 26967 26508 25977 25411 24899 24312 23760 23077 22496 21750
1850 28114 27615 27145 26677 26138 25586 25064 24466 23930 23232 22638 21975
1875 28311 27802 27323 26846 26296 25761 25229 24620 24084 23387 22780 MAT
1900 28508 27989 27501 27014 26453 25936 25394 24773 24227 23541 MAT MAT
1925 28702 28177 27679 27183 26611 26093 25559 24927 24370 23696 MAT MAT
1950 28868 28364 27857 27352 26769 26241 25724 25080 24513 23851 MAT MAT
1975 29046 28551 28035 27520 26926 26388 25889 25234 24657 MAT MAT MAT
2000 29229 28728 28213 27689 27084 26535 26045 25387 MAT MAT MAT MAT
2025 (29401) 28874 28391 27857 27242 26683 26184 25541 MAT MAT MAT MAT
2050 (29571) 29040 28569 28026 27399 26830 MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT MAT
2075 Max MAT 28731 28195 275

Aom R18 DHC-8 Q400

Uploaded by

Aom R18 DHC-8 Q400

Uploaded by

B

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

No TRs have been issued or incorporated in Revision 18.

PSM 1-84-1 - DOT - METRIC

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

PSM 1-84-1 - DOT - METRIC

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

Copyright ©2000 - 2015 by Bombardier Inc.

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or copied

The Bombardier logo and de Havilland are registered

Manual Change Request

Address: City: State/Province:

Postal Code / Zip: Country: *Telephone:

Mobile/Cell Phone: Fax Number: *E−Mail:

I would like to receive notification of actions on this request.

*Publication Name/Revision: *Media Type: *Chapter/Section/Subject/Task (or) Page Block/Page Number:

*Description of Change Request:

Reason for change:

Reference data provided: Yes No Description:

NOTE: Electronic submissions of MCRs are available on www.iflybombardier.com

           

       

  !"#   !"#  

 $ %&  $ %&  

  '!   '!  

(  )   )  

$ * '+,  * '+,  

- $ !"#  $ !"#  

* *   *   

.  &)   &)  

/ . 0& ( . 0& ( 

  ) (  ) ( 

 ( '+, ( ( '+, ( 

  &) (  &) ( 

  '! $  '! $ 

( *  $ *  $ 

$  "1 $  "1 $ 

- *  - *  - 

*  '+! -  '+! - 

.  !"# -  !"# - 

           

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

     !" "

AEROPLANE OPERATING MANUAL

ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL

AOM DASH 8-Q400

TABLES and DRAWINGS

Tables and drawings are identified by their titles and numbers.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (LEP)

Revisions will be distributed whenever necessary.

RECORD OF REVISIONS (RoR)

TEMPORARY REVISIONS (TR)

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS (RoTR)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

AOM DASH 8-Q400

APD ........................................................................................................ Advanced Pneumatic Detectors (Fire)

AOM DASH 8-Q400

CG ............................................................................................................................................ Centre of Gravity

AOM DASH 8-Q400

EDP ................................................................................................................................... Engine Driven Pump

AOM DASH 8-Q400

FLT ............................................................................................................................................................. Flight

AOM DASH 8-Q400

HPSOV ................................................................................................................. High Pressure Shut-Off Valve

AOM DASH 8-Q400

AOM DASH 8-Q400

MB .............................................................................................................................................. Marker Beacon

AOM DASH 8-Q400

AOM DASH 8-Q400

PSC .............................................................................................................................. Proximity Sensor Circuit

AOM DASH 8-Q400

SC/A ............................................................................................................................... Senior Cabin Attendant

AOM DASH 8-Q400

TRANS .............................................................................................................................................. Transmitter

AOM DASH 8-Q400

VSTOP ......................................................................................... Highest Decision Speed (Contaminated RWY)

Publication Name/Revision: Media Type: *Chapter/Section/Subject/Task (or) Page Block/Page Number:

!"# !"#

$ %& $ %&

'! '!

( ) )

$ * '+, * '+,

- $ !"# $ !"#

* * *

. &) &)

/ . 0& ( . 0& (

) ( ) (

( '+, ( ( '+, (

&) ( &) (

'! $ '! $

( * $ * $

$ "1 $ "1 $

- * - * -

* '+! - '+! -

. !"# - !"# -

!" "